gefran ADV200 Series Functions Description And Parameters List
Реклама
Реклама
Field oriented vector AC Drive for asyncronous motors
ADV200
....
Functions description and parameters list
Information about this manual
This manual explains the functions and the description of the parameters.
The informations about mechanical installation, electrical connection and fast start-up can be found on the
ADV200 Quick start guide.
The whole set of manuals (included the expansions and field bus manuals) can be found on the CD provided with the dirve.
Software version
This manual is updated according the software version V 7.X.0.
Variation of the number replacing “X” have no influence on the functionality of thedevice.
The identification number of the software version is indicated on the identification plate of the drive or can be checked with the Firmware ver.rel
- PAR 490 parameter, menu 2.5.
General information
Note !
In industry, the terms “Inverter”, “Regulator” and “Drive” are sometimes interchanged. In this document, the term “Drive” will be used.
Before using the product, read the safety instruction section carefully (ADV200 - Quick Start-up guide).
Keep the manual in a safe place and available to engineering and installation personnel during the product functioning period.
Gefran S.p.A has the right to modify products, data and dimensions without notice. The data can only be used for the product description and they can not be understood as legally stated properties.
Thank you for choosing this Gefran product.
We will be glad to receive any possible information which could help us improvingthis manual. The e-mail address is the following: [email protected].
All rights reserved
2
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Table of Contents
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
3
Symbols used in the manual
Warning
Caution
Important
Indicates a procedure, condition, or statement that, if not strictly observed, could result in personal injury or death.
Indique le mode d’utilisation, la procédure et la condition d’exploitation. Si ces consignes ne sont passtrictement respectées, il y a des risques de blessures corporelles ou de mort.
Indicates a procedure, condition, or statement that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to or destruction of equipment.
Indique et le mode d’utilisation, la procédure et la condition d’exploitation. Si ces consignes ne sont pas strictement respectées, il y a des risques de détérioration ou de destruction des appareils.
Indicates that the presence of electrostatic discharge could damage the appliance. When handling the boards, always wear a grounded bracelet.
Indique que la présence de décharges électrostatiques est susceptible d’endommager l’appareil. Toujours porter un bracelet de mise à la terre lors de la manipulation des cartes.
Indicates a procedure, condition, or statement that should be strictly followed in order to optimize these applications.
Indique le mode d’utilisation, la procédure et la condition d’exploitation. Ces consignes doivent êtrerigoureusement respectées pour optimiser ces applications.
4
Note ! Indicates an essential or important procedure, condition, or statement.
Indique un mode d’utilisation, de procédure et de condition d’exploitation essentiels ou importants
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
A – Programming
A.1 Menu display modes
The programming menu can be displayed in two modes, which can be selected using the Access mode parameter (04 - DRIVE CONFIG menu):
• Easy (default) only the main parameters are displayed.
• Expert all the parameters are displayed
A.2 Programming of “function block” analog and digital input signals
The signals, variables and parameters of each single “function block” of the drive are interconnected in order to achieve the configurations and controls inside the control system.
These can be managed and modified using the keypad, PC configurator or fieldbus programming.
The programming mode is based on the following logic:
Src cfg mon
(source; i.e.: Ramp ref 1 src , PAR: 610)
This term defines the source of the function block input, i.e. the signal to be processed in the function block.
The different configurations are defined in the relative selection lists .
(configuration; i.e.: Mpot init cfg , PAR: 880)
This term refers to the parameter setting and its effect on the function block.
For example: Ramp times, internal reference adjustment, etc...
(display; i.e.: Ramp ref 1 mon , PAR: 620)
This term refers to the variable output from the function block, which is the result of the calculations performed on the actual block .
Function block
Cfg
Parameter
Input selected
src
Variable
Monitor
Parameter Parameter
A.3 Variable interconnections mode
The source (src) allows the desired control signal to be assigned to the function block input.
This operation is performed by using specific selection lists.
Possible control signal sources:
1 – Physical terminal
The analog and digital signals come from the terminal strip of the regulation card and/or from those of the expansion cards.
2 – Drive internal variables
Internal drive control system variables, from “function block” calculations, sent via keypad, PC configurator or fieldbus.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
5
Practical example
The following examples illustrate the philosophies and methods with which more or less complex operations are performed in the single “function blocks”, the results of which represent the output of the block.
• Example: Changing the Speed Reference source
The main drive reference (in the default configuration) Ramp ref 1 mon (PAR: 620) is generated by the output of the function block “ Ramp setpoint Block ”.
Its default source is the Analog input 1 mon signal (PAR: 1500), from the output of the function block “ Analog input 1 Block ”, which in this case refers to analog input 1 of the signal terminal strip.
To change the reference source from the analog input to a digital reference inside the drive, the input signal must be changed to “ Ramp setpoint Block ”.
Enter the Ramp ref 1 src parameter (PAR: 610) and set a new reference, selecting it from among those listed in the L_MLTREF selection list, for example Dig ramp ref 1 (PAR: 600).
• Example: Inverting the analog reference signal
To invert the “ Analog input 1 Block ” output signal, the value of the An inp 1 sign src parameter (PAR: 1526), which has a default setting of Null (no operation), must be changed by selecting the source of the command signal from among those listed in the L_DIGSEL 2 selection list, for example Digital input X mon , One (function always enabled), etc.
Terminal input
* -1
Analog input 1 Block
Null
* +1
An inp 1 alt value
An inp 1 sign src
Null An inp 1 alt sel src
Analog input 1 mon
6
Ramp ref 1 src
Ramp Setpoint Block
+1
-1
Ramp ref 1 mon
Null Ramp ref invert src
The diagrams above illustrate the internal processing philosophy of the single “function blocks” and the result of these changes on the other interconnected “function blocks”.
Note !
This section contains a brief description of the functions of the other parameters in the function blocks not included for the changes in the example
The An inp 1 alt sel src parameter (PAR: 1528) can be used to select an alternative reference for the Analog input 1 mon (PAR: 1500) output.
The An inp 1 alt value parameter (PAR: 1524) determines the alternative reference value for the Analog input
1 mon (PAR: 1500) output.
The Ramp ref invert src parameter (PAR: 616) can be used to select the source for the command to reverse the “ Ramp setpoint ” function block output.
The output signal from the “ Ramp setpoint ” block is displayed in the Ramp ref 1 mon parameter (PAR: 620).
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
A.4 Multiple destination
Several functions can be assigned together to each input: to display which and how many functions have been assigned to each input, check the relative “ dest ” parameter to see whether there is a number shown in square brackets to the right of the number of the selected parameter (as shown in the figure below).
T+ TEN LOC ILim n:0 AL
12.09
PA R : 1 1 5 6
Digital input 3 dest
>> Multi ramp sel 0 src
Value: 722 [1]
If there is a number, press the key to display the next source applied to the selected input.
T+ TEN LOC ILim n:0 AL
12.09
PA R : 1 1 5 6
Digital input 3 dest
>> Multi ramp sel 0 src
Value: 840 [2]
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
7
B – Parameters and functions description (Expert list)
Legend
Menu PAR Description
1 - MONITOR
1.1 250 Output current
1.2 252 Output voltage
UM
Type FB BIT Def Min Max Acc Mod
A FLOAT 16/32
V FLOAT 16/32
( Level 1 menu )
0.0
0.0
22.1 - FUNCTIONS/SPEED RATIO
22.1.1 3000 Dig speed ratio
22.1.2 3002 Speed ratio src perc INT16 16/32
( Level 2 menu )
100
LINK 16/32 3000
L_VREF ( Selection List ) [*]
0.0
0.0
CALCI
0
0.0
0.0
R
R
FVS
FVS
CALCI ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
Indexing of the menu and parameter
Parameter identifier
Parameter description
UM: unit of measure
Type of parameter
BIT Boolean, from modbus seen as 16 bits
ENUM Selection list, from modbus seen as 16 bits
FLOAT Real, from modbus seen as 32 bits
FBM2SIPA 16-bit unsigned integer. Only PAR of existing
parameters accepted.
FBS2MIPA 16-bit unsigned integer. Only PAR of existing
parameters accepted.
INT16 Integer with sign 16 bits, from modbus seen as 16 bits
INT32 Integer with sign 32 bits, from modbus seen as 32 bits
ILINK Selection list, from modbus seen as 16 bits
LINK Selection list, from modbus seen as 16 bits
UINT16 Integer without sign 16 bits, from modbus seen as
16 bits
UINT32 Integer without sign 32 bits, from modbus seen as
32 bits
SINT Integer 8 bits
Format of data exchanged on Fieldbus (16BIT, 32BIT)
Default value
Minimum value
Maximum value
CALCF Value calculated as a number with floating point
CALCI Value calculated as a whole number
SIZE Value depending on the size of the drive
Accessibility :
E Expert
R Read
S Size (set value depending on the size of the device)
W Write
Z parameters that can be modified ONLY with the drive disabled
Available in regulation mode:
V = V/f Control
S = Vect Flux OL
F = Vect Flux CL
[*]
Selection lists:
The “... src” format parameters are linked to a selection list.
The source of the signal that will control the parameter can be selected from the list indicated.
The lists are indicated in paragraph C of this manual.
8
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Note !
The drive is factory-set to control Asynchronous motors. To switch to Synchronous mode, send the Load synch control command (In menu 4 DRIVE CONFIG, first set PAR 554 Access mode = Expert, then again in menu 4 - DRIVE CONFIG, run parameter
6100 Load synch control ). The drive is re-started (in this mode, reference should be made to the “ADV 200 – Field-oriented vector inverter for synchronous motors – Description of functions and list of parameters” guide on the CD supplied with the inverter or downloadable from the www.gefran.com website).
To return to Asynchronous motor control mode, send the operate in the new mode.
Load asynch control command (PAR 6100). The drive is re-started to
1 – MONITOR
The monitor menu displays the measured values of the sizes and of the drive operating parameters.
Menu
1.1
Menu
1.2
Menu
1.3
Menu
1.4
Menu
1.5
Menu
1.6
PAR Description
250 Output current
UM
A
The drive output current is displayed.
Type FB BIT
FLOAT 16/32
PAR Description
252 Output voltage
UM
V
Type FB BIT
FLOAT 16/32
The drive line voltage output is displayed.
PAR Description
254 Output frequency
UM Type FB BIT
Hz FLOAT 16/32
The drive output frequency is displayed.
Def
0.0
Def
0.0
Def
0
Min
0.0
Min
0.0
Min
0
Max
0.0
Max
0.0
Max
0
Acc
R
Acc
R
Acc
R
Mod
FVS
Mod
FVS
Mod
FVS
PAR Description
256 Output power
Displays the drive output power.
UM Type FB BIT kW FLOAT 16/32
Def
0.0
Min
0.0
Max
0.0
Acc
R
PAR Description
628 Ramp setpoint
UM Type FB BIT
FF INT16 16/32
Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
Acc
R
The ramp reference is displayed. This is the speed value the drive must reach at the end of the ramp.
Mod
FVS
Mod
FVS
PAR Description
664 Speed setpoint
UM Type FB BIT
FF INT16 16/32
Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
Acc
R
The speed reference is displayed. This is the value measured at the output of the speed reference circuit.
Mod
FVS
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
9
Menu
1.7
Menu
1.8
PAR Description
260 Motor speed
UM Type FB BIT
FF INT16 16/32
Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
Acc
R
Mod
FVS
The actual output speed of the motor is displayed (in Flux vector CL = speed measured by the encoder, in Flux vector OL / V/f control = speed estimated by the drive).
PAR Description
270 DC link voltage
UM
V
Type FB BIT
FLOAT 16/32
Def
0.0
Min
0.0
The direct voltage of the intermediate circuit capacitors is displayed (DC-Bus).
Max
0.0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
Menu
1.9
PAR Description
272 Heatsink temperature
UM Type FB BIT degC INT16 16
Def
0
The temperature measured on the drive heatsink is displayed.
Min
0
Max
0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
Menu PAR Description UM Type FB BIT Def Min Max Acc Mod
1.10 290 Motor temperature degC FLOAT 16BIT 0.0 0.0 0.0 ER FVS
Displays motor temperature in °C based on type of sensor selected to manage the alarm.
Equals 0 when direct conversion from count/ohm to °C is not possible, for example with PTC sensors.
Menu PAR Description
1.11 1610 An inp 1X temp mon
UM Type FB BIT degC FLOAT 16BIT
Def
0.0
Min
0.0
Max
0.0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
1.12 1660 An inp 2X temp mon degC FLOAT 16BIT 0.0 0.0 0.0 ER FVS
Displays temperature in °C with PT100/PT1000/NI1000 from input 1 (PAR 1610) or input 2 (PAR 1660) of EXP-
IO-SENS-100-ADV or EXP-IO-SENS-1000-ADV card, regardless of how the motor overtemperature alarm is managed.
Menu PAR Description
1.13 280 Torque current ref
UM Type FB BIT
A FLOAT 16/32
Def
0.0
Min
0.0
Max
0.0
Acc Mod
ER F_S
The current reference used for torque control is displayed (in the Flux vector OL and Flux vector CL modes).
Menu PAR Description
1.14 282 Magnet current ref
UM Type FB BIT
A FLOAT 16/32
Def
0.0
Min
0.0
Max
0.0
The magnetizing current reference is displayed (in the Flux vector OL and Flux vector CL modes).
Acc Mod
ER F_S
Menu PAR Description
1.15 284 Torque current
UM Type FB BIT
A FLOAT 16/32
The actual torque current value is displayed.
Menu PAR Description
1.16 286 Magnet current
UM Type FB BIT
A FLOAT 16/32
The actual magnetizing current value is displayed.
Def
0.0
Def
0.0
Menu PAR Description
1.17 3212 Motor overload accum
UM Type FB BIT perc UINT16 16/32
Def
0
The motor overload level is displayed (100% = alarm threshold).
Min
0.0
Min
0.0
Min
0
Max
0.0
Max
0.0
Max
100
Acc Mod
ER FVS
Acc
ER FVS
Acc
Mod
Mod
ER FVS
Menu PAR Description
1.18 368 Drive overload accum
UM Type FB BIT perc UINT16 16/32
Def
0
Min
0
Max
100
Acc Mod
ER FVS
The drive overload level is displayed. An instantaneous overload of 180% of the drive rated current is allowed for 3 s. The thermal image I²t adjusts the drive output current thresholds. During normal operation, the instantaneous output current value can reach 180% of the drive rated current. After 0,5 s at 180%, the output current threshold is reduced to 160%. When the overload level par. 368 Drive overload accum reaches 100%, the output current threshold is reduced to 100% of the rated current, and stays at that value until the I²t integrator cycle is complete. At this point the 180% instantaneous overload is re-enabled.
10
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu PAR Description
1.09 3260 Bres overload accum
UM Type FB BIT perc UINT16 16/32
Def
0
The braking resistor overload limit is displayed (100% = alarm threshold).
Min
0
Max
100
Acc Mod
ER FVS
Menu PAR Description
1.20 1066 Enable state mon
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc
R
Mod
FVS
The drive Enable command status is displayed. Voltage must be present on terminal 7. The FR Forwardstart command is needed to start the inverter.
0 Disabled drive disabled
1 Enabled drive enabled
Menu PAR Description
1.21 1068 Start state mon
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Menu
The drive Start command status is displayed.
PAR Description UM Type FB BIT
1.22 1070 FastStop state mon BIT 16
The drive FastStop command status is displayed.
Def
0
Def
0
Min
0
Min
0
Max
1
Max
1
Acc
R
Acc
R
Mod
FVS
Mod
FVS
Menu PAR Descripttion
1.23 1100 Digital input mon
UM Type FB BIT
UINT16 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
Acc
R
The status of the digital inputs on the drive is displayed. It can also be read via a serial line or fieldbus. The data are contained in a word, where each bit is 1 if voltage is supplied to the corresponding input terminal.
Mod
FVS
1 Input enabled.
0 Input disabled.
000000000011
I.e. : Active DI 2 Active DI 1
Menu PAR Description
1.24 1300 Digital output mon
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
Acc
R
Mod
FVS
The status of the digital outputs on the drive is displayed. It can also be read via a serial line or fieldbus. The data are contained in a word, where each bit is 1 if voltage is supplied to the corresponding input terminal.
1 Output enabled.
0 Output disabled.
000000000011
I.e. : Active DO 2 Active DO 1
Menu PAR Description
1.25 1200 Digital input X mon
UM Type FB BIT
UINT16 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
Acc
R
Mod
FVS
The status of the digital inputs of the expansion card is displayed. It can also be read via a serial line or fieldbus. The data are contained in a word, where each bit is 1 if voltage is supplied to the corresponding input terminal. This parameter displays the state of the 16 external inputs. The 14 less significant bits are displayed from the keypad.
1 Input enabled.
0 Input disabled.
000000000011
I.e. : Active DI 2
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Active DI 1
11
Menu PAR Description
1.26 1400 Digital output X mon
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
Acc
R
Mod
FVS
The status of the digital outputs of the expansion card is displayed. It can also be read via a serial line or fieldbus. The data are contained in a word, where each bit is 1 if voltage is supplied to the corresponding input terminal.
1 Output enabled.
0 Output disabled.
000000000011
Menu PAR Description
1.27 5400 Dig inp 0Ext mon
I.e. : Active DO 2
UM Type FB BIT
UINT16 32
Active DO 1
Def
0
This parameter displays the state of external inputs from 0 to 31.
Menu PAR Description
1.28 5402 Dig inp 1Ext mon
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
This parameter displays the state of external inputs from 32 to 63.
Min
0
Min
0
Menu PAR Description
1.29 5450 Digital out 0Ext mon
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
This parameter is used to read the state of external outputs from 0 to 31.
Min
0
Menu PAR Description
1.30 5452 Digital out 1Ext mon
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
This parameter is used to read the state of external outputs from 32 to 63.
Min
0
Max
4294967295 ER FVS
Max Mod
4294967295 ER FVS
Max
0
Max
0
Acc
Acc
Acc
R
Acc
R
Mod
Mod
FVS
Mod
FVS
12
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
2 – DRIVE INFO
This menu displays the information for identifying and configuring the drive.
Menu
2.1
Menu
2.2
PAR Description
480 Control type
UM Type
ENUM
The type of motor control mode is displayed.
1 Synchronous
2 Asynchronous
FB BIT
PAR Description
482 Drive size
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT
The drive size identification code is displayed.
21
21
22
22
19
19
20
20
17
17
18
18
15
15
16
16
23
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
1
Size code
1
2
3
4
9
10
11
12
5
6
7
8
12
13
13
14
14
55.0/75.0 kW
55.0/75.0 kW
75.0/90.0 kW
75.0/90.0 kW
90.0/110.0 kW
90.0/110.0 kW
110.0/132.0 kW
110.0/132.0 kW
132.0/160.0 kW
132.0/160.0 kW
160.0/200.0 kW
160.0/200.0 kW
200.0/250.0 kW
200.0/250.0 kW
250.0/315.0 kW
250.0/315.0 kW
Size text
0.75/1.5 kW
1.5/2.2 kW
2.2/3.0 kW
3.0/4.0 kW
4.0/5.5 kW
5.5/7.5 kW
7.5/11.0 kW
11.0/15.0 kW
15.0/18.5 kW
18.5/22.0 kW
22.0/30.0 kW
30.0/37.0 kW
30.0/37.0 kW
37.0/45.0 kW
37.0/45.0 kW
45.0/55.0 kW
45.0/55.0 kW
315.0/355.0 kW
315.0/355.0 kW
355.0/400.0 kW
400.0/500.0 kW
500.0/630.0 kW
630.0/710.0 kW
710.0/800.0 kW
0.9/1.0 MW
1.0/1.2 MW
75.0/90.0 kW
Def Min
Asynchronous 0
Def
No Power
Min
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
Family code
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Max
0
Acc
R
Mod
Max
0
Acc
R
Mod
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
Family text
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
380V..480V
690V
13
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
5
6
7
8
2
3
4
21
22
23
24
25
17
18
19
20
26
27
28
29
90.0/110.0 kW
110.0/132.0 kW
132.0/160.0 kW
160.0 kW
200.0 kW
250.0 kW
315.0 kW
355.0 kW
400.0 kW
500.0 kW
630.0 kW
710.0 kW
800.0 kW
1000.0 kW
1200.0 kW
160.0/200.0 kW
200.0/250.0 kW
250.0/315.0 kW
315.0/355.0 kW
355.0/400.0 kW
400.0/500.0 kW
500.0/630.0 kW
630.0/710.0 kW
710.0/800.0 kW
0.9/1.0 MW
1.0/1.2 MW
1.35/1.5 MW
1.65/1.8 MW
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Menu
2.3
Menu
2.4
Menu
2.5
Menu
2.6
14
PAR Description
484 Drive family
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
No Power
Min
0
Max
0
Acc Mod
RS FVS
The available mains voltage is displayed (e.g. 400V). The undervoltage alarm refers to this voltage value.
The condition No power occurs when the regulation board has just left from production and has never been configured for any power. The configuration adjustment for a given power is achieved by linking it to a power board and running a Save parameters .
0 No Power
1 380V…480V
2 500V…575V
3 690V
4 230V
PAR Description
486 Drive region
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
EU
Min
0
Max
1
Acc
R
The geographical area (Europe or USA) is displayed. The factory settings for the power supply voltage and frequency used by the drive are defined accordingly.
Mod
FVS
0 EU (400V / 50Hz)
1 USA (460 / 60 Hz)
PAR Description
488 Drive cont current
UM Type
A FLOAT
FB BIT Def
CALCF
Min
0.0
Max
0.0
Acc Mod
RZS FVS
The current that the drive can deliver continuously according to size, supply voltage and programmed switching frequency is displayed.
PAR Description
490 Firmware ver.rel
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
Acc
R
Mod
FVS
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
690V
690V
690V
690V
690V
690V
690V
690V
690V
690V
690V
690V
690V
690V
690V
690V
690V
690V
690V
690V
690V
690V
690V
690V
690V
690V
690V
690V
Menu
2.7
Menu
2.8
Menu
2.9
The version and release number of the firmware used in the drive are displayed. On the keypad they are displayed in the format version.release. When the parameter is read via serial line or fieldbus the version is returned in the high byte and the release in the low byte.
PAR Description
496 Firmware type
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT
The type of firmware installed in the drive is displayed.
Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
Acc
R
Mod
FVS
PAR Description
504 Application ver.rel
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
The version and release number of the application used in the drive are displayed. On the keypad these are displayed in version.release format. When the parameter is read via serial line or fieldbus the version is returned in the high byte and the release in the low byte.
PAR Description
506 Application type
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
The type of application currently used by the drive is displayed.
Min
0
Max
0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
Acc Mod
ER FVS
Menu PAR Description
2.10 510 Time drive power on
UM Type h.min UINT32
FB BIT Def
0
The total time for which the drive has been powered is displayed.
Menu PAR Description
2.12 514 Number power up
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
The number of times the drive has been powered on is displayed.
Min
0.0
Max
0.0
Menu PAR Description
2.11 512 Time drive enable
UM Type h.min UINT32
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0.0
Max
0.0
The time for which the enable hardware contact on the drive has been connected is displayed.
Min
0
Max
0
Menu PAR Description
2.13 516 Time fan on
UM Type h.min UINT32
FB BIT
The total operating time of the drive fan is displayed.
Def
0
Min
0
Menu PAR Description
2.14 526 Power file ver.rel
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
The version number and release number of the drive power card are displayed.
Menu PAR Description
2.15 530 Slot 1 card type
2.16 532 Slot 2 card type
UM Type
ENUM
ENUM
FB BIT Def
None
None
Min
0
0
2.17 534 Slot 3 card type ENUM None 0
The type of expansion card installed in the relative slot of the drive is displayed.
0 None
1 I/O 0
769 I/O 1
1793 I/O 2
2305 I/O 3
3329 I/O 4
1544 Enc 1
1800 Enc 2
(EXP-DE-I1R1F2-ADV)
(EXP-SE-I1R1F2-ADV)
Max
0
Max
0
Max
0
0
0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
Acc
ER FVS
Acc Mod
ER FVS
Acc
ER FVS
Acc
R
R
R
Mod
Mod
Mod
FVS
FVS
FVS
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
15
520 Enc 3
776 Enc 4
1032 Enc 5
2056 Enc 7
(EXP-SESC-I1R1F2-ADV)
(EXP-EN/SSI-I1R1F2-ADV)
(EXP-HIP-I1R1F2-ADV)
(EXP-HIP-I1R1F2-ADV)
4 Can/Dnet (EXP-DE-I1R1F2-ADV)
4 Can/Dnet
260 Profibus
516 RTE
576 FastLink
320 I/O Ext
832 I/O FastLink
255 Unknown
2312 Enc 8
1288 Enc 6
5633 I/O 6
6401 I/O 7
7681 I/O 8
(EXP-ASC-I1-ADV)
(EXP-RES-I1R1-ADV)
(EXP-IO-SENS-1000-ADV)
(EXP-IO-D5R8-ADV)
(EXP-IO-SENS-100-ADV)
Menu PAR Description
2.18 546 Fw enc sl2 ver.rel
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
Acc
R
Mod
FVS
The version and release number of the firmware installed on the encoder (mounted in slot 2) used in the drive are displayed. When the parameter is read via serial line or fieldbus the version is returned in the high byte and the release in the low byte.
Menu PAR Description
2.19 548 Fw enc sl2 type
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
The version of firmware on the encoder card mounted in slot 2 is displayed.
Max
0
Acc
R
Mod
FVS
Menu PAR Description
2.20 5300 Fw enc sl1-3 ver.rel
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
Acc
R
Mod
FVS
The version and release number of the firmware on the encoder card (mounted in slot 1 or 3) used in the drive are displayed. When the parameter is read via serial line or fieldbus the version is returned in the high byte and the release in the low byte.
Menu PAR Description
2.21 5302 Fw enc sl1-3 type
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
The version of firmware on the encoder card mounted in slot 1 or 3 is displayed.
Max
0
Acc
R
Mod
FVS
Menu PAR Descrizione
2.22 5724 Fw FastLink ver.rel
UM Tipo
UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
The version and release number of the FastLink card firmware installed in the driveare displayed.
When the parameter is read via serial line or fieldbus the version is returned in the high byte and the release in the low byte.
Menu PAR Descrizione
2.23 5726 Fw FastLink type
UM Tipo
UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
The type of FastLink card firmware installed in the drive is displayed.
Min
0
Max
0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
16
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
3 – STARTUP WIZARD
The startup wizard menu suggests a procedure for commissioning the drive quickly with a reduced number of settings.
Advanced customization requires the use of the single parameters relating to the specific performance levels. See the procedure described in the chapter 7.1 Startup wizard on ADV200 QS manual.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
17
4 – DRIVE CONFIG
Menu
4.1
PAR Description
550 Save parameters
UM Type
BIT
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Any changes to parameter values immediately affect drive operations, but are not automatically saved in the permanent memory.
The “Save Parameters” command is used to save current parameter values in the permanent memory.
Any changes that are not saved will be lost when the drive is switched off.
To save parameters follow the procedure described in STEP 6 of the Startup wizard .
Menu
4.2
PAR Description
552 Regulation mode
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
V/f control
The ADV200 is capable of operating with different control modes:
Min
0
Max
3
Acc Mod
RWZ FVS
0 V/f control
1 Flux vector OL
2 Flux vector CL
3 Autotune
The open loop V/f (V/f control) mode is the simplest type of asynchronous motor control, as the only parameters required are the rated voltage, current and frequency of the motor.
The open loop V/f control mode is factory-set and does not require any speed feedback. The natural variation in speed generated by machine load induction (slippage) can be compensated using Slip comp and Slip comp filter .
In V/f mode a single drive can be used to control several asynchronous motors, even of different sizes, connected in parallel, provided the sum of the currents of the single motors is less than the drive rated current.
If using several motors connected in parallel, be sure to provide adequate thermal protection for each single motor.
Closed loop control is also possible in the V/f mode. It requires a speed reading by a digital encoder on the motor shaft; to enable encoder feedback, you must set parameter 2444 Slip comp mode =1 . The optional EXP-
ENC card is necessary in order to acquire the encoder signals. The speed feedback supplied by the encoder is used to compensate motor slippage in the different load conditions, to achieve accurate control and greater precision of the actual motor speed.
With the sensorless vector control (Flux vector OL) mode, fine precision can be achieved at low motor rpm.
The drive has a algorithm that uses a self-tuning procedure to obtain all the electric measurements of the motor. This allows the speed and position of the motor shaft to be estimated, enabling operation similar to that of a drive with feedback, both in terms of the response in torque to load variations, and of the regularity of rotation even at low rmp.
In the field oriented vector mode (Flux vector CL) an encoder is required for closed loop feedback. With this mode it is possible to achieve extremely high dynamic responses thanks to the regulation bandwidth, maximum torque even with the rotor blocked, speed and torque control. Numerous regulation parameters can be used to adjust the drive to each specific application, for instance adaptive gains, system inertia compensation, etc..
Autotune mode enables self-tuning of motor parameters when the STARTUP WIZARD is not used. This command can only be executed after enabling the drive by opening the hardware contact between terminals 7 and
S3. Then set the Regulation mode parameter to Autotune . Next, if the drive is not already in Local mode, press the Local key (the LOC ) LED will light up) and re-close the hardware enabling contact (terminals 7 and
S3). Self-tuning can now be enabled (see parameters 2022 or 2224). When self-tuning is complete, open the hardware contact between terminals 7 and S3 and restore any parameters that have been changed.
This procedure must be used for both self-tuning with the engine standing still and with the motor turning with
Flux vector CL mode. Motor parameter self-tuning is possible with Flux vector OL mode.
18
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu
4.3
Menu
4.4
PAR Description
554 Access mode
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Easy
With this parameter you can restrict access to advanced configuration.
0 Easy
1 Expert
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
RW FVS
The Easy mode gives access to a list of parameters that can be used for rapid drive commissioning. This type of configuration is suitable for the majority of applications.
Setting the parameter to Expert gives access to all the parameters in the firmware. This mode allows an extremely high level of customization to be achieved in order to exploit the potential of the ADV200 to the full.
PAR Description
558 Application select
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT
Selection of which IEC 61131-3-compliant application.
Def
None
Min
0
Max
2
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
0 None
1 Application 1
2 Application 2
The drive is supplied already incorporating a number of applications developed in the IEC 61331-3 environment. To use these, set the desired application, run save parameter, switch the drive off and then on again.
NOTE! The Load Default command (par. 580) does not modify this parameter
Menu
4.5
Menu
4.6
PAR Description
560 Mains voltage
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
400 V
Min
SIZE
Max
SIZE
Acc Mod
ERWZS FVS
Setting of the available mains voltage value in Volts. Detection of the undervoltage alarm refers to this value.
0 None
1 230 V
2 380 V
3 400 V
4 415 V
5 440 V
6 460 V
7 480 V
8 500 V
9 575 V
10 690 V
PAR Description
586 DC supply
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
None
Min
0
Max
3
Acc Mod
ERWZS FVS
Selection of the voltage applied to the DC link if the drive is powered by an AC/DC power supply unit, whether standard or regenerative (e.g. AFE200). If a value of other than “ None ” is selected, all parameters that depend on Mains voltage (PAR 560) are calculated on the basis of the voltage shown in the table below, while the value of PAR 560 Mains voltage is set automatically.
If “None” is selected, these parameters are calculated according to the value of parameter 560 Mains voltage .
2
3
0
1
DC power supply
None
540 V (380-480V)
650 V (380-480V)
750 V (380-480V)
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Drive family 380V..480V
Mains voltage
Use P560
400 V
460 V
460 V
Drive family 690V
Mains voltage
Use P560
N/A
N/A
N/A
19
10
11
12
13
DC power supply
675 V (690V)
810 V (690V)
935 V (690V)
1120 V (690V)
Drive family 380V..480V
Mains voltage
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Drive family 690V
Mains voltage
500 V (if compatible with the size, otherwise N/A)
575 V (if compatible with the size, otherwise N/A)
690 V
690 V
Menu
4.7
PAR Description
450 Undervoltage
UM
V
Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
CALCF
Min
CALCF
Max
CALCF
Acc Mod
ERWZS FVS
Setting of the drive minimum operating voltage. The maximum and minimum default values are calculated automatically by the drive according to the value set in parameter 560 Mains voltage , as shown in the table below.
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
8
9
10
Table of undervoltage limits
Mains voltage
None
230 V
380 V
400 V
415 V
440 V
460 V
480 V
500 V
575 V
690 V
Def
(Vdc)
225
372
392
407
431
451
470
490
563
676
Min
(Vdc)
200
330
330
360
382
400
417
434
500
600
Max
(Vdc)
282
466
490
509
539
564
588
613
705
846
Menu
4.8
Menu
4.9
PAR Description
562 Switching frequency
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
SIZE
Min
SIZE
Max
SIZE
Acc Mod
ERWS FVS
Setting of the switching frequency value in kHz. The maximum value that can be set depends on the size of the drive.
0 1 kHz
1 2 kHz
2 4 kHz
3 6 kHz
4 8 kHz
5 10 kHz
6 12 kHz
7 16 kHz
PAR Description
564 Ambient temperature
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
40 degC
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Setting of the ambient temperature value. This parameter is used to set the output current derating factor (1% for every °C above 40°C).
0 40 degC The inverter is capable of delivering direct current continuously with ambient temperatures of up to 40°C.
1 50 degC The inverter is capable of delivering direct current continuously with ambient temperatures of up to 50°C.
If the value is set to 1 the drive output current will be 10% less than the rated current at 40°C.
Menu PAR Description
4.10 566 Drive overload mode
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def Min
Heavy duty 1
Setting of the overload that can be supplied by the drive, depending on the application.
Max
2
1 Heavy duty
2 Light duty
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Set Heavy duty when a large overload is requested:
• (asynchronous motor control) the drive can supply 180% of the rated current for 0,5 seconds and 150%
20
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
for 1 minute every 5 minutes.
• (synchronous motor control) the drive can supply 200% of the rated current for 3 seconds and 160% for 1 minute every 5 minutes,
Select Light duty to enable the drive to deliver a current of 110% of the rated current for 1 minute every 5 minutes.
Menu PAR Description
4.11 568 Switching freq mode
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Costant
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERWZS FVS
Setting of the switching frequency operating mode.
The factory switching frequency setting is 4 kHz for motors between 2.2 kW and 37 kW (the factory switching frequency setting for smaller drives is 8kHz); this value may result in increased noise. Setting a higher switching frequency will increase drive losses and thus increase the heatsink temperature, but it will also reduce noise. To combine the advantages of both settings, with the ADV drive the heatsink temperature can be controlled by reducing the switching frequency if it increases.
0 Costant
1 Variable
If set to Constant , the switching frequency is fixed and set with the Switching freq mode parameter according to the size of the drive. If the selected switching frequency is higher than the default value, the drive output current is derated.
If set to Variable , the switching frequency is set to 8 kHz (for sizes between 2.2 kW and 37 kW / lower values are defined for more powerful drives) and the drive heat sink temperature and output frequency values are also controlled. If the heat sink temperature exceeds a given threshold (which depends on the size of the drive) or the output frequency falls to less than 5 Hz, the switching frequency is automatically reduced to 4 kHz (again considering sizes of between 2.2 kW and 37 kW), to avoid any derating of the output current value. (When the output frequency exceeds 7 Hz the switching frequency is brought back to 8 kHz). The switching frequency is reduced in a single step.
With this setting the switching frequency value selected in the Switching frequency parameter is ineffective .
Menu PAR Description
4.12 570 Password
UM Type
UINT32
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
99999
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
You can enter a password to protect the parameters from unauthorized tampering: the password can consist of a combination of a maximum of any 5 figures that can be selected by the user. All parameters are locked, except this one and Save parameters .
After entering the password, press the E key once to enter it into the memory and again to enable it (= Enabled is displayed to indicate that the password is enabled).
So that the password remains valid even after switching the unit off and then switching it back on, save it using the Save parameters command.
When the password is enabled any attempts to modify a parameter are blocked and the Password enabled message is displayed.
To disable the password, enter the Password parameter ( 572 ) in the DRIVE CONFIG menu .
Check that the password is enabled ( Enabled ), press E and enter the combination of figures that make up the password.
Press E again. A message is displayed telling you the password is no longer enabled ( Disabled ).
To make sure the password continues to be disabled even after switching the unit off and then switching it back on, save this configuration using the Save parameters command.
When an incorrect password is entered, the Password wrong message is displayed
Menu PAR Description
4.13 572 Application key
UM
UINT32
Type FB BIT
0
Def
0
Min Max
4294967295 ERW
Acc
FVS
Mod
This parameter can be used to enter the key for enabling the PLC application.
You may need to enter a key to definitively enable some PLC applications. Please contact Gefran for details about which PLC applications require the key.
If executing an application that envisages a key verification and the key is incorrect, enabling is forced for 200
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
21
Menu PAR Description
4.14 574 Startup display
UM Type
INT16
FB BIT Def
-1
Min
-1
Max
20000
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
This is used to set the parameter that will be displayed automatically at drive power-on. Entering the value -1
(default), the function is disabled and the main menu is displayed at power-on.
Menu hours (time drive enabled).
In this phase a message is displayed informing you that the period of forced enabling time is about to expire.
At the first power-on after the 200 hours an alarm is generated and the application does not start.
Please contact Gefran for the numerical value of the key.
PAR Description
4.15 576 Display backlight
UM Type
BIT
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Enabling of the backlight on the drive display.
If set to 0 the display backlight will go off when the drive has been on for three minutes.
If set to 1 the backlight will stay on for as long as the drive is powered.
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Menu PAR Description
4.16 578 Language select
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT
Setting of the drive programming language.
0 English
1 Italian
2 French
3 German
4 Spanish
5 Polish
6 Romanian
7 Russian
8 Turkish
9 Portuguese
Def
English
Note !
The Load Default command (par. 580) does not modify this parameter.
Min
0
Max
9
Acc Mod
RWZ FVS
Menu PAR Description
4.17 580 Load default
UM Type
BIT
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Transfers the standard factory settings to the drive memory (“Def” column in the parameters table).
Acc Mod
RWZ FVS
Menu PAR Description
4.18 590 Save par to keypad
UM Type
BIT
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Transfers the parameters currently stored in the drive and saves them in the keypad memory (See ADV200
Quick Start manual, chapter 6.8).
Menu PAR Description
4.19 592 Load par from keypad
UM Type
BIT
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
RWZ FVS
Transfers the parameters from the keypad memory to the drive (See ADV200 Quick Start manual, chapter 6.9).
Menu PAR Description
4.20 594 Keypad memory select
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
1
Min
1
Max
5
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of the area of the keypad memory to which to transfer and save the parameters stored in the drive.
22
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu PAR Description
4.21 6100 Load synch control
UM Type
BIT
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERW F_S
This command is sent to switch to Synchronous motor control mode. A message prompting you to confirm the command is displayed on the keypad, as the drive must be re-started to enable the new mode.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
23
5 – REFERENCES
ADV drives are provided with a speed regulation circuit, which can be adapted to suit the various applications. In the standard version, the regulator has PI behaviour and the regulator parameters are the same for the entire field of regulation.
Different sources can be used for the speed and torque references, depending on how the 554 Control mode select parameter is set.
Menu
5.1
Menu
5.2
PAR Description
600 Dig ramp ref 1
UM Type FB BIT
FF INT16 16/32
Def
0
Min
CALCI
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Setting of the digital ramp reference. The speed that the drive must reach after completing the acceleration phase is set with the ramp reference. Variations in the ramp reference are made with the selected ramp times.
The size of the ramp reference determines the motor speed value. The sign determines the direction of rotation. The Ramp ref parameter also refers to a minimum speed, if set. When the “ Motor potentiometer ” or
“ Multispeed ” functions are selected the relative references are used. This reference can only be used in the
Remote mode.
The overall ramp reference is the result of the sum of the values with the Ramp ref 1 and Ramp ref 2 sign.
Example 1: Ramp ref 1 = + 500 rpm
Ramp ref
Ramp ref 2
= 500 rpm + 300 rpm = 800 rpm
= + 300 rpm
Example 2: Ramp ref 1 = + 400 rpm
Ramp ref
Ramp ref 2
= 400 rpm – 600 rpm = - 200 rpm
= - 600 rpm
PAR Description
602 Dig ramp ref 2
UM Type FB BIT
FF INT16 16/32
Def
0
Min
CALCI
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the digital ramp reference. The speed that the drive must reach after completing the acceleration phase is set with the ramp reference. Variations in the ramp reference are made with the selected ramp times.
The size of the ramp reference determines the motor speed value. The sign determines the direction of rotation. The Ramp ref parameter also refers to a minimum speed, if set. When the “ Motor potentiometer ” or
“ Multispeed ” functions are selected the relative references are used.
In Remote mode the overall ramp reference is the result of the sum of the values with the Ramp ref 1 and
Ramp ref 2 sign.
Example 1: Ramp ref 1 = + 500 rpm
Ramp ref
Ramp ref 2
= 500 rpm + 300 rpm = 800 rpm
= + 300 rpm
24
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu
5.3
Menu
5.4
5.5
5.6
Example 2: Ramp ref 1 = + 400 rpm
Ramp ref
Ramp ref 2
= 400 rpm – 600 rpm = - 200 rpm
= - 600 rpm
In Local mode the overall ramp reference is the result of the sum of the values with the Ramp ref 3 and Ramp ref 2 sign.
Example 1: Ramp ref 3 = + 500 rpm
Ramp ref
Ramp ref 2
= 500 rpm + 300 rpm = 800 rpm
= + 300 rpm
Example 2: Ramp ref 3 = + 400 rpm
Ramp ref
Ramp ref 2
= 400 rpm – 600 rpm = - 200 rpm
= - 600 rpm
PAR Description
604 Dig ramp ref 3
UM Type FB BIT
FF INT16 16/32
Def
0
Min
CALCI
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the digital ramp reference. The speed that the drive must reach after completing the acceleration phase is set with the ramp reference. Variations in the ramp reference are made with the selected ramp times.
The size of the ramp reference determines the motor speed value. The sign determines the direction of rotation. The Ramp ref parameter also refers to a minimum speed, if set. When the “ Motor potentiometer ” or
“ Multispeed ” functions are selected the relative references are used. This reference can only be used in the
Local mode.
The overall ramp reference is the result of the sum of the values with the Ramp ref 3 and Ramp ref 2 sign.
Example 1: Ramp ref 3 = + 500 rpm
Ramp ref
Ramp ref 2
= 500 rpm + 300 rpm = 800 rpm
= + 300 rpm
Example 2: Ramp ref 3 = + 400 rpm
Ramp ref
Ramp ref 2
= 400 rpm – 600 rpm = - 200 rpm
= - 600 rpm
PAR Description
610 Ramp ref 1 src
612 Ramp ref 2 src
614 Ramp ref 3 src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16/32
LINK 16/32
LINK 16/32
Def
1500
602
894
Min
0
0
0
Max
16384
16384
16384
Acc Mod
RW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the reference signals on the input of the ramp function block, that defines the main drive speed. The ramp reference values can be selected from among those listed in the “ L_MLTREF ” selection list.
When assigning the reference via terminals, signals with ±10V, 0 ...10V, 0... 20 mA and 4 ... 20 mA can be used.
Menu
5.7
PAR Description
616 Ramp ref invert src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
1050
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal that inverts the ramp reference output from the “Ramp ref” block. The signal that can be used for this function can be selected from among those listed in the “ L_DIGSEL2 ” selection list.
Menu
5.8
PAR Description
620 Ramp ref 1 mon
5.9 622 Ramp ref 2 mon
5.10 624 Ramp ref 3 mon
UM Type
FF INT16
FF INT16
FF INT16
FB BIT Def
0
0
0
Min
0
0
0
Max
0
0
0
The value of the relative ramp reference on the output of the relative function block is displayed.
Acc
R
Mod
FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
Menu PAR Description
5.11 634 Ramp ref top lim
UM Type
FF INT32
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
It defines the maximum value of the output of the ramp reference block, regardless of the signal that is present.
The ramp reference follows the reference signal from the value set in parameter PAR 636 Ramp ref bottom lim up to the value set with this parameter, after which the motor speed remains constant. The limit is valid for both directions of rotation.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
25
Menu PAR Description
5.12 636 Ramp ref bottom lim
UM Type
FF INT32
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
It defines the minimum value of the output of the ramp reference block, regardless of the signal that is present.
The ramp block output remains at the value set with this parameter until the analog signal exceeds this threshold: the ramp output value then starts to follow the reference up to the value set in parameter PAR 634 Ramp ref top lim . The limit is valid for both directions of rotation.
Ramp output
100 %
Par 636
- 100 %
- 10V
Par 634
0
Par 634
100 %
10V
Analog input
Par 636
- 100 %
Menu PAR Description
5.13 630 Reference skip set
UM Type rpm INT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Setting of the prohibited speed threshold at which the drive cannot operate.
Menu PAR Description
5.14 632 Reference skip band
Reference out
UM
Setting of the prohibited bandwidth.
Type rpm INT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
26
Par. 630
Par. 632 Par. 632
Par. 630
Reference in
Example:
A) Increase in the reference by values of less than Par. 630
Par. 630 = 300 rpm (prohibited speed threshold)
Par. 632 = 10 rpm (thus prohibited band: 290rpm.310rpm)
Set speed reference = 295 rpmHz
Output speed = 290 rpm
Set speed reference = 305 rpm
Output speed = 290 rpm
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
B) Decrease in the reference by values above Par. 630
Par.630
= 300 rpm (prohibited speed threshold)
Par.632
= 10 rpm (thus tolerance band: 290 rpm…310 rpm)
Set speed reference = 305 rpm
Output frequency = 310 rpm
Set speed reference = 295 rpm
Output frequency = 310 rpm
The user can thus set any reference value, but if the set value is within the prohibited range, the drive automatically maintains the speed outside the limits defined by the tolerance band.
During ramp phases the prohibited speed is passed freely and there are no points of discontinuity in the generation of the output frequency.
The speed reference supplies the desired speed to the drive, which directly follows the reference pattern. This only happens when the available torque is sufficient. In this case the drive functions at its current limit, until reaching the set speed. The speed reference value determines the motor speed value. The sign determines the direction of rotation.
Menu PAR Description
5.15 640 Dig speed ref 1
5.16 642 Dig speed ref 2
UM
FF
Type FB BIT
FF INT16 16/32
INT16 16/32
Def
0
0
Min
CALCI
CALCI
Max
CALCI
CALCI
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
Setting of the digital speed references. The overall speed reference is the result of the sum of the values with the respective signs, of Dig speed ref 1 and Dig speed ref 2 . The digital speed references are linked to the ramp circuit output.
The overall speed reference is the result of the sum of the values, with sign, of Speed ref 1 and Speed ref 2 .
Example 1: Speed ref 1 = + 500 rpm Speed ref 2 = + 300 rpm
Speed ref = 500 rpm + 300 rpm = 800 rpm
Example 2: Speed ref 1 = + 400 rpm
Speed ref
Speed ref 2
= 400 rpm – 600 rpm = - 200 rpm
= - 600 rpm
Menu PAR Description
5.17 650 Speed ref 1 src
5.18 652 Speed ref 2 src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16/32
LINK 16/32
Def
640
642
Min
0
0
Max
16384
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
27
Selection of the origin (source) of the drive speed reference signals. The values that can be used as speed references can be selected from those listed in the “ L_MLTREF ” selection list.
When assigning the reference via terminals, signals with ±10V, 0 ...10V, 0... 20 mA and 4 ... 20 mA can be used.
Menu PAR Description
5.19 654 Speed ref invert src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
6000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal that inverts the speed reference output from the regulator. The terminal that can be used for this function can be selected from among those listed in the “ L_DIGSEL2 ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
5.20 660 Speed ref 1 mon
5.21 662 Speed ref 2 mon
UM
FF
Type
FF INT16
INT16
FB BIT
The value of the relative speed reference is displayed.
Def
0
0
Min
0
0
Max
0
0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
ER FVS
Menu PAR Description
5.22 670 Speed ref top lim
UM Type
FF INT32
FB BIT Def
CALCI
Min
0
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Setting of the upper speed reference limit. If the speed reference exceeds the limits, the motor speed remains at the set limit value in any case. Speed limits cannot be more than 200% of the value set in the Full scale speed parameter (REFENCES menu par. 680).
Menu PAR Description
5.23 672 Speed ref bottom lim
UM Type
FF INT32
FB BIT Def
CALCI
Min
CALCI
Max
0
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Setting of the lower speed reference limit. If the speed reference exceeds the limits, the motor speed remains at the set limit value in any case. Speed limits cannot be more than 200% of the value set in the Full scale speed parameter (REFERENCES menu par. 680).
Menu PAR Description
5.24 666 Speed ref filter
UM Type FB BIT ms UINT16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1000
Filter to the speed reference value. If IPA 666 Speed ref filter is set to 0, filter is disabled.
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Menu PAR Description
5.25 680 Full scale speed
UM Type rpm INT16
FB BIT Def
CALCI
Min
50
Max
32000
Acc Mod
RWZ FVS
Setting of the reference value for all speed percentage data (References, Speed adaptives ...) corresponding to 100 % of the actual speed. This parameter can only be changed with the inverter blocked (Enable drive =
Disabled). The recommended setting for the value of this parameter is the motor rated speed. If altered, the self-tuning procedure should be repeated.
Full scale speed does not define the maximum possible speed. In any case, the maximum speed percentage value is ± 200 % of the Full scale speed value.
Menu PAR Description
5.26 222 Theta ref src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16/32
Def
220
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW F_S
Selection of the origin (source) of the flux reference. Value can be selected from among those listed in the
“L_MLTREF” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
5.27 224 Flux ref mon
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16/32
Def
224
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW F_S
Selection of the origin (source) of electrical agle of the motor. Value can be selected from among those listed in the “L_MLTREF” selection list.
28
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
6 – RAMPS
The ramp (reference integrator) determines the acceleration and deceleration times of the drive. Times can be set independently.
The ramp times of Fast stop command are set on Acceleration time 3 and Deceleration time 3 . The command can be enabled from the terminal strip..
The ramp can be linear or S-shaped, as preferred.
The references can be set in different ways:
- with the Ramp ref 1 and / or Ramp ref 2 references
- with the Multi speed function
- with the Motor potentiometer function
- with the Jog function
The ramp generator can be used in the “stand alone” mode. When disabled ( Ramp type = Off ), the “Enable drive,
Start/Stop and Fast stop” commands do not affect the ramp generator. In this condition the ramp generator can be used separately.
Menu
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
PAR Description
700 Acceleration time 0
702 Deceleration time 0
704 Acceleration time 1
706 Deceleration time 1
708 Acceleration time 2 s s s s
UM s
Type
FLOAT
FB BIT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
Def
10.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
Min
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
Max
1000.00
1000.00
1000.00
1000.00
1000.00
Acc Mod
RW FVS
RW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
710 Deceleration time 2
712 Acceleration time 3
714 Deceleration time 3 s s s
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
10.00
10.00
10.00
0.01
0.01
0.01
1000.00
1000.00
1000.00
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
The acceleration and deceleration ramp times are used to avoid sudden changes in the drive output frequency, which could cause mechanical shocks, excessive current on the motor and excessive DC-bus voltage values.
The acceleration times ( 6.1, 6.3, 6.5, 6.7
) are expressed as the time necessary to bring the frequency from
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
29
Menu
6.9 zero to the maximum value set in the Full scale speed (5.22) . On the other hand, the deceleration times ( 6.2,
6.4, 6.6, 6.8 ) are expressed as the time necessary to bring the frequency from the maximum value set in the
Full scale speed (5.22) parameter to zero. Each of the 4 available ramp selections can be selected using one or two digital inputs programmed as Multi ramp sel .
PAR Description
720 Ramp type
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Linear
Min
0
Max
3
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
This parameter defines the ramp shape (linear/S-shape). It can only be modified with the drive disabled.
0 Linear
1 S-Shape
2 Bypass
3 Off f
6.13
6.13
6.14
6.14
6.1
6.2
T
ACC TIME DEC TIME
0 = Linear 1 = S-Shape
When linear ramps are set ( Linear ) the motor speed varies in a way that is directly in proportion to the frequency.
When S-shape ramps are set ( S-Shape ) it is possible to avoid sudden mechanical variations in the system at the beginning and end of the acceleration and deceleration phase.
The ramp time, meaning the time necessary to accelerate from zero to the maximum frequency value set, is given by the sum of the linear ramp time and that of the associated Jerks (see par. 6.13 – 6.20).
The Bypass excludes the ramp circuit and the reference is brought directly to the speed regulator input.
With Off the ramp reference is set to zero.
t
Menu PAR Description
6.10 722 Multi ramp sel 0 src
UM Type
LINK
FB BIT Def
6000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
6.11 724 Multi ramp sel 1 src LINK 6000 0 16384 ERWZ FVS
1 or 2 digital inputs can be used to select one of the 4 available sets of ramps.
The origin (source) of the command to enable the ramp selection function can be selected from the “ L_DIG-
SEL2 ” selection list.
The following table describes the ramp selection procedure:
Enabled ramp time Multi ramp sel 0
Acceleration time 0
Deceleration time 0
Acceleration time 1
Deceleration time 1
Acceleration time 2
Deceleration time 2
Acceleration time 3
Deceleration time 3
0
1
0
1
Multi ramp sel 1
0
0
1
1
30
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu PAR Description
6.12 726 Multi ramp sel mon
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
The set of acceleration/deceleration ramps selected using the digital inputs is displayed.
Max
3
Acc Mod
ER FVS
Menu PAR Description
6.13 730 Accel jerk time 0
6.14 732 Decel jerk time 0
6.15 734 Accel jerk time 1
6.16 736 Decel jerk time 1
6.17 738 Accel jerk time 2 s s s s
UM s
Type
FLOAT
FB BIT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
Def
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Min
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.02
Max
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
6.18 740 Decel jerk time 2
6.19 742 Accel jerk time 3
6.20 744 Decel jerk time 3 s s s
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.02
0.02
0.02
10.0
10.0
10.0
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
Jerks are variations of acceleration in time. They are used when there is a need to dampen the beginning and end of the ramp. The Jerk value is added, regardless of the variation in speed, to the linear ramp time.
f
6.13
6.13
6.14
6.14
t
ACC TIME DEC TIME
Menu PAR Description
6.21 750 Ramp in zero src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
6000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal that blocks the ramp input and moves the reference to zero. If the ramp input is enabled, the Ramp ref parameter corresponds to the set reference. If the ramp input is blocked, the drive slows down with the set deceleration time until reaching zero speed. The terminal to be associated with this function can be selected from the “ L_DIGSEL2 ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
6.22 752 Ramp out zero src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
6000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal that brings the ramp to 0 ( Ramp ref 1/Ramp ref 2 = 0 ). When the ramp output is set to zero using Ramp out zero , the drive brakes with the maximum available torque; in this case the ramp is disabled. The terminal to be associated with this function can be selected from the “ L_DIG-
SEL2 ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
6.23 754 Ramp freeze src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
3480
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal that temporarily freezes the ramp output value, regardless of any changes in the input reference. The terminal to be associated with this function can be selected from the “ L_
DIGSEL2 ” selection list.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
31
Ramp freeze
Ramp Output
(Motor speed)
32
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
7 – MULTI REFERENCE
With the “Multispeed” function ( Multi references ) it is possible to recall up to sixteen internally saved speed references to be recalled using a digital signal or via digital inputs on the terminal strip.
Menu
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
PAR Description
800 Multi reference 0
802 Multi reference 1
804 Multi reference 2
806 Multi reference 3
808 Multi reference 4
810 Multi reference 5
UM
FF
FF
FF
Type
FF INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
FB BIT
FF INT16 16/32
FF INT16 16/32
Def
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
Max
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
Acc Mod
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
33
7.7 812 Multi reference 6
7.8
7.9
814 Multi reference 7
816 Multi reference 8
7.10 818 Multi reference 9
7.11 820 Multi reference 10
FF INT16
FF INT16
FF INT16
FF INT16
FF INT16
0
0
0
0
0
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
7.12 822 Multi reference 11
7.13 824 Multi reference 12
7.14 826 Multi reference 13
FF INT16
FF INT16
FF INT16
0
0
0
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
7.15 828 Multi reference 14
7.16 830 Multi reference 15
FF
FF
INT16
INT16
0
0
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
It is possible to select up to 16 operating frequencies, which can be set in these parameters.
The frequencies are selected using the binary code of the digital inputs programmed using the Multi ref sel 0 src , Multi ref sel 1 src , Multi ref sel 2 src and Multi ref sel 3 src parameters.
References can be set via the keypad, serial line, digital inputs and BUS.
A sign can be given to the references, so that when they are defined so too is the desired direction of rotation.
RW FVS
RW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
Menu PAR Description
7.17 832 Multi ref 0 src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16/32
Def
800
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
RW FVS
7.18 834 Multi ref 1 src LINK 16/32 802 0 16384 RW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the drive speed reference signals. The speed reference values can be selected from those listed in the “ L_MLTREF ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
7.19 840 Multi ref sel 0 src
7.20 842 Multi ref sel 1 src
7.21 844 Multi ref sel 2 src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
LINK 16
LINK 16
Def
6000
6000
6000
Min
0
0
0
Max
16384
16384
16384
Acc Mod
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
7.22 846 Multi ref sel 3 src LINK 16 6000 0 16384 ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signals used to select one of the preset speeds. These parameters can only be used together in combinations. The terminals that can be used for this function can be selected from among those listed in the “ L_DIGSEL2 ” selection list.
The following table describes the selection of the Multispeed function:
34
Active speed ref
Multi reference 0
Multi reference 1
Multi reference 2
Multi reference 3
Multi reference 4
Multi reference 5
Multi reference 6
Multi reference 7
Multi reference 8
Multi reference 9
Multi reference 10
Multi reference 11
Multi reference 12
Multi reference 13
Multi ref sel 0 src
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
Multi ref sel 1 src
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
Multi ref sel 2 src
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
Multi ref sel 3 src
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Active speed ref
Multi reference 14
Multi reference 15
Multi ref sel 0 src
0
1
Multi ref sel 1 src
1
1
Multi ref sel 2 src
1
1
The following figure describes the selection of a control for 8 Multispeeds.
Speed
Multi ref sel 3 src
1
1
Multi ref sel 0 src
Multi ref sel1 src
Multi ref sel 2 src
Start
Selected by:
Multi ref 0 src (par. 832 )
Multi ref 1 src (par. 834 )
Multi ref 0
Multi ref 1
Multi ref 2
Multi ref 3
Multi ref 4
Multi ref 5
Multi ref 6
Multi ref 7 t
Menu PAR Description
7.23 850 Multi ref sel mon
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
15
Acc
R
Mod
FVS
The multispeed that has been selected using the digital commands or by the digital inputs selected in the terminal strip.
Menu PAR Description
7.24 852 Multi ref out mon
UM Type FB BIT
FF INT16 16/32
Def
0
Min
0
The selected speed reference on the Multispeed block output is displayed.
Max
0
Acc
R
Mod
FVS
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
35
8 – MOTORPOTENTIOMETER
The Motor potentiometer function allows the speed reference of the drive to be changed by pressing buttons with which the UP and DOWN commands are associated.
The UP and DOWN commands can be sent from the keypad, by digital inputs, the serial line or fieldbus.
To send the UP and DOWN commands from the keypad, enter the MPot setpoint parameter modify mode and press the UP and DOWN keys.
The UP and DOWN commands increase or decrease the speed of the motor for as long as they are present. The simultaneous presence of both commands will not produce any change (see time chart).
The speed changes according to the set ramp times and within the set lower and upper limits.
The value of the Motor potentiometer function output at drive power-on can be configured.
The preset command can be used to force a preset value for the input and output of the Motor potentiometer function.
The invert command can be used to force an inversion of the reference sign of the Motor potentiometer function.
In the default condition, the speed reference produced by the Motor potentiometer function is connected in input to the
Ramp function. For direct control of the motor speed, the Acceleration time and Deceleration time parameters in the
RAMP menu should be set = 0.
Note !
The Motor potentiometer function produces a speed reference. Therefore a RUN command must always be sent to start motor rotation.
Mpot output mon
Mpot top lim
Mpot bottom lim
Up
Down
36
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu
8.1
PAR Description
870 Mpot setpoint
UM Type FB BIT rpm INT16 16/32
Def
0
Min
CALCI
The speed reference value of the Motor potentiometer function is displayed.
Enter this parameter to send the UP and DOWN commands from the keypad.
Max
CALCI
Acc
R
Mod
FVS
Menu
8.2
8.3
Menu
8.4
Menu
8.5
Menu
8.6
Menu
8.7
PAR Description
872 Mpot acceleration
874 Mpot deceleration
UM s s
Type
FLOAT
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
5.0
5.0
Min
0.01
0.01
Max
1000.00
1000.00
Acc Mod
RW FVS
RW FVS
Setting of the acceleration/deceleration ramp times (in seconds) used with the Motor potentiometer function.
PAR Description
876 Mpot top lim
UM Type rpm INT16
FB BIT Def
CALCI
Min
CALCI
Setting of the top limit for the speed reference output from the motor potentiometer.
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
PAR Description
878 Mpot bottom limit
UM Type rpm INT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
CALCI
Setting of the bottom limit for the speed reference output from the motor potentiometer.
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
PAR Description
880 Mpot init cfg
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Zero
Min
0
Max
3
Use this parameter to configure the output value of the Motor potentiometer at drive start-up.
0 Last power off
1 Zero
2 Lower Limit
3 Upper Limit
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
When set to Last power off , the motor potentiometer output starts from the last frequency that was set before the drive was switched off.
When set to Zero the motor potentiometer output starts from a value of 0.
When set to Lower limit the output of the motor potentiometer starts from the value of the lower limit set in the
Mpot bottom limit parameter.
When set to Upper limit the output of the motor potentiometer starts from the value of the upper limit set in the
Mpot top limit parameter.
PAR Description
882 Mpot preset cfg
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
None
Min
0
Max
11
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
This parameter can be used to configure the preset of the Motor potentiometer function, i.e. to configure the value at which the Motor potentiometer input and output are set when the Preset command is enabled.
The Preset command has priority over the Up command and the Down command.
Mpot mode (PAR 892) = [1] Ramp&Follow has priority over the Preset command, i.e. actions programmed with Mpot preset cfg (PAR 882) are not executed.
The Up and Down commands are enabled again when the Preset command is disabled.
0 None
1 Input = 0
2 Input = low lim
3 Input & ref = 0
4 Input & ref = low lim
5 Output = 0
6 Output = low lim
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
37
Menu
8.8
7 Output & ref = 0
8 Output & ref = low lim
9 Input = upp lim
10 Input & ref = upp lim
11 Freeze input
When set to None , no setting is executed.
Input = 0 sets input = 0 i.e. a temporary reference setting is performed and the previous reference value is maintained. The output of the Motor potentiometer function varies with the set ramp times. The previous reference value is restored when the preset command is removed.
Input = low lim sets Inp = low lim i.e. a temporary reference setting is performed and the previous reference value is maintained. The output of the Motor potentiometer function varies with the set ramp times. The previous reference value is restored when the preset command is removed.
Input & ref = 0 sets Inp = 0 and Ref = 0 i.e. a definitive reference setting is performed. The output of the Motor potentiometer function varies with the set ramp times.
Input & ref = low lim sets Inp = low lim and Ref = low lim i.e. a definitive reference setting is performed. The output of the Motor potentiometer function varies with the set ramp times.
Output = 0 sets Out = 0 i.e. a temporary output setting for the Motor potentiometer function is performed. The previous reference value is maintained. If the preset command is enabled, the output of the Motor potentiometer function continues to be = 0, if the preset command is not enabled the output of the Motor potentiometer function varies with the set ramp times.
Output = low lim sets Out = low lim i.e. a temporary setting for the output of the Motor potentiometer function is performed. Il precedente valore di riferimento viene mantenuto .The previous reference value is maintained.
If the preset command is enabled, the output of the Motor potentiometer function continues to be = low lim, if the preset command is not enabled the output of the Motor potentiometer function varies with the set ramp times.
Output & ref = 0 sets Out = 0 i.e. a definitive setting for the output of the Motor potentiometer function is performed.
Output & ref = low lim sets Out = low lim i.e. a definitive setting for the output of the Motor potentiometer function is performed.
Input = upp lim sets Inp = upp lim i.e. a temporary setting for the reference is performed and the previous reference value is maintained. The output of the Motor potentiometer function varies with the set ramp times. The previous reference value is restored when the preset command is removed.
Input & ref = upp lim sets Inp = upp lim and Ref = upp lim i.e. a definitive reference setting is performed. The output of the Motor potentiometer function varies with the set ramp times.
When Freeze input is set, the Up and Down commands are temporarily disabled.
PAR Description
884 Mpot up src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
6000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal that increases the speed reference of the motor potentiometer with the set ramp. The terminal to be associated with this function can be selected from the “ L_DIGSEL2 ” selection list.
Menu
8.9
PAR Description
886 Mpot down src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
6000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal that decreases the speed reference of the motor potentiometer with the set ramp. The terminal to be associated with this function can be selected from the “ L_DIGSEL2 ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
8.10 888 Mpot invert src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
6000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal that inverts the speed reference of the motor potentiometer. The
38
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
terminal to be associated with this function can be selected from the “ L_DIGSEL2 ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
8.11 890 Mpot preset src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
6000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal to preset the motor potentiometer function. The signal to be associated with this function can be selected from the “ L_DIGSEL2 ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
8.12 892 Mpot mode
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def Min
Fine&Last val 0
Max
3
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the configuration of two possible options of the Motor potentiometer function. There are two operating modes for each of the two options.
0 Ramp&Last val
1 Ramp&Follow
2 Fine&Last val
3 Fine&Follow
Option 1: Behaviour of the Motor potentiometer function with the Stop or FastStop command present with the
Control mode = Ramp parameter.
The two operating modes are: Last val or Follow .
With the Control mode not equal to Ramp setting, this option is not completely applicable and it always behaves in Last val mode.
In Last val mode with the Stop or FastStop command present, the speed reference of the Motor potentiometer function is not altered.
The motor speed moves to 0 according to the selected control mode ( Control mode = Ramp or Control mode
= Speed ). When the Run command is sent, the motor speed moves to the speed reference set by the motor potentiometer function according to the selected control mode.
Mpot output mon Mode:Last val
Up
Down
Start
In Follow mode with the Stop or FastStop command present, the Down command is simulated, i.e. the output of the Motor potentiometer function moves to 0 with the set ramp time.
If the Run command is sent when the 0 speed has been reached, it is maintained until the Up command is sent. If the Run command is sent before the motor reaches the 0 speed, the speed at that moment is taken as the new reference.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
39
Mpot output mon Mode:Follow
Up
Down
Start
Option 2: Ramp behaviour
The two operating modes are: Ramp or Fine
In Ramp mode, each time the Up or Down commands are enabled, the output of the Motor potentiometer function increases or decreases with the set ramp. When the Up or Down command is removed, the last value that was reached is maintained.
Mpot output mon Mode:Ramp
40
Up
Down
In Fine mode, each time the Up or Down commands are enabled, the output of the Motor potentiometer function increases or decreases by 1 rpm.
If the command persists for less than 1 second, no other changes are made on the output.
If the command persists for more than 1 second, the output increases or decreases with the set ramp. The variation with the set ramp is performed gradually (1 second). When the Up or Down command is removed the last value that was reached is maintained.
Mpot output mon Mode:Fine
1rpm
1rpm
Up
Down
Mpot mode
0
1
2
3
Ramp behaviour
Ramp
Ramp
Fine
Fine
1s 1s
Behaviour of the Motor potentiometer function with the Stop or FastStop command present with the
Control mode = Ramp parameter.
Last val
Follow
Last val
Follow
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu PAR Description
8.13 894 Mpot output mon
UM Type FB BIT rpm INT16 16/32
Def
0
The value of the output of the motor potentiometer function is displayed.
Min
0
Two examples of application of the motor potentiometer function are shown below.
Manual speed control with command sent from control desk.
Max
0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
M
Command console
Speed
ADV
UP DOWN
Mpot up
Mpot down
The Up and Down keys are used to adjust the speed of a motor.
For fine-tuning of the speed reference value the recommended settings are Mpot Mode = Fine&Follow or
Fine&Last Val . Each time they are pressed for 1 second, the speed increases by 1 rpm. For an immediate effect on motor speed, the Acceleration time and Deceleration time parameters should be set to short times.
Automatic speed control for rudimentary dancer control.
24V
Top
M
Center
Bottom
ADV
1
24V
M
ADV
2
10V
Mpot down
Mpot up
Ramp ref
0V
The limit switches at the ends of dancer travel ranges are connected to the Up and Down commands in the motor potentiometer function. If the dancer presses the bottom limit switch, this means motor 2 is running slowly and the Up command must be sent. If the dancer presses the top limit switch, this means motor 2 is running quickly and the Down command must be sent.
Connect the line reference to Ramp ref 1 src on both drives, connect the motor potentiometer function output to Speed ref 1 src on drive 2.
To change the motor speed immediately, the recommended settings are Mpot Mode = Ramp&Follow or
Rampa&Last Val .
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
41
9 – JOG FUNCTION
Menu
9.1
Menu
9.2
9.3
PAR Description
910 Jog setpoint
UM Type rpm INT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
CALCI
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
RW FVS
The reference for Jog mode operation. This reference can also be set via an analog input. The Jog reference is enabled when the signal used for the Jog + or Jog – command is enabled, the Run command is not present and the drive output frequency is zero.
PAR Description
912 Jog acceleration
914 Jog deceleration
UM s s
Type
FLOAT
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
5.0
5.0
Min
0.01
0.01
Max
1000.00
1000.00
Setting of the acceleration/deceleration ramp time (in seconds) used during Jog operation.
Acc Mod
RW FVS
RW FVS
Menu
9.4
PAR Description
916 Jog cmd + src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
6000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the Jog + function enabling signal. When this command is enabled it generates a Jog Mode reference with a sign matching the value entered for the Jog setpoint value parameter. The signal to be associated with this function can be selected from the “ L_DIGSEL2 ” selection list.
Note !
The Run command has priority over the Jog + command.
Menu
9.5
PAR Description
918 Jog cmd - src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
6000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the Jog function enabling signal. When this command is enabled the Jog
Mode reference sign is inverted with respect to the value entered in the Jog setpoint value parameter. The signal to be associated with this function can be selected from the “ L_DIGSEL2 ” selection list.
Note !
The Run command has priority over the Jog - command.
Menu
9.6
PAR Description
920 Jog output mon
UM Type FB BIT rpm INT16 16/32
Def
0
The speed reference used by the Jog command is displayed.
Min
0
Max
0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
42
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
10 – MONITOR FUNCTION
Menu PAR Description
10.1 930 Reference 0 thr
UM Type rpm INT16
FB BIT Def
30
Min
0
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Setting of the threshold for recognition of the speed = 0 reference. The value is valid for both directions of rotation.
Menu PAR Description
10.2 932 Reference 0 delay
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
400
Min
0
Max
10000
Setting of the delay in milliseconds after which the reference = 0 reached signal is enabled.
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Menu PAR Description
10.3 940 Speed 0 thr
UM Type rpm INT16
FB BIT Def
30
Min
0
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Setting of the threshold for recognizing speed value = 0. The value is valid for both directions of rotation.
Menu PAR Description
10.4 942 Speed 0 delay
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
400
Min
0
Max
10000
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Setting of the delay in milliseconds after which the speed = 0 reached signal is enabled.
When the motor reaches a speed that is below the zero speed threshold, it stops and the n=0 LED lights up.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
43
Menu PAR Description
10.5 950 Speed threshold 1
UM Type rpm INT32
FB BIT Def
0
Min
CALCI
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Setting of speed threshold 1 (upper). When the threshold is exceeded the Speed threshold signal is disabled, with a delay that can be set in Speed threshold dly .
Menu PAR Description
10.6 952 Speed threshold 2
UM Type rpm INT32
FB BIT Def
0
Min
CALCI
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Setting of speed threshold 2 (lower). When the threshold is exceeded the Speed threshold signal is disabled, with a delay that can be set in Speed threshold dly .
Menu PAR Description
10.7 954 Speed threshold dly
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
50000
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Setting of the delay after which the transition from 0 c 1 is activated. The transition from 0 c 1 occurs when the speed is within the set limits.
The Speed threshold signal transition from 1 c 0 is always immediate .
If the motor speed is between Speed threshold 1 and Speed threshold 2 , the Speed threshold signal is active. If Speed threshold 1 < Speed threshold 2 the Speed threshold signal is not significant.
Menu PAR Description
10.8 960 Set speed ref src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16/32
Def
628
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal used as speed reference and on which the speed reached control is performed (for control with ramp, use Ramp setpoint , for control without ramp, use Speed setpoint ). The signal that can be used as the speed reference can be selected from among those listed in the “ L_CMP ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
10.9 962 Set speed error
UM Type rpm INT16
FB BIT Def
100
Min
0
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Setting of the bandwidth of the tolerance within which, even if the speed is not equal to the reference, the two values are considered to coincide and the Set speed signal is enabled.
Menu PAR Description
10.10 964 Set speed delay
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
50000
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Setting of a delay in ms before the signal ( Set speed programmed on a digital output), if the speed is within a tolerance band defined by the Set speed error parameter, after which the transition from 0 c 1 is enabled.
The transition of the Set Speed signal from 0 c 1 is always immediate.
44
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu PAR Description
10.11 968 Dig set speed ref
UM Type FB BIT rpm UINT16 16/32BIT
Def
0
Min
CALCI
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Setting of the threshold used as the speed reference: this parameter is used to set a fixed threshold regardless of the speed reference.
Menu PAR Description
10.12 970 Speed threshold 3
UM Type rpm INT32
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the speed 3 threshold. When this threshold + the tolerance band set in parameter 972 Speed thr hysteresis are exceeded, parameter 976 Speed thr 3 mon is enabled. The signal is disabled when the motor speed falls below the threshold - the tolerance band. If the threshold value is lower than the value set in 972
Speed thr hysteresis , the result produced is always 0. The value set in this parameter is active in both directions of rotation.
Menu PAR Description
10.13 972 Speed thr hysteresis
UM Type rpm UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Setting of the tolerance band around Speed threshold 3 . The tolerance band is the same for both directions of rotation of the motor.
Menu PAR Description
10.14 980 Current threshold
UM Type perc UINT16
FB BIT Def
100
Min
0
Max
200
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Setting of the current threshold. A value of 100% corresponds to the value of the drive heavy duty continuous current, displayed in parameter 488 Drive cont current , when parameter 566 Drive overload mode is set to Heavy duty , and no derating of the drive continuous current has been activated due to any modification of
Mains voltage, Switching frequency and Ambient temperature.
The drive heavy duty continuous current value to be used is the factory setting read in PAR 488 Drive cont current .
When this threshold + the tolerance band set in parameter 982 C urrent thr hyster are exceeded, parameter 986
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
45
Current thr mon is enabled. The signal is disabled when the motor speed falls below the threshold - the tolerance band. If the threshold value is lower than the value set in 982 Current thr hyster , the result produced is always 0. The value set in this parameter is active in both directions of rotation.
Menu PAR Description
10.15 982 Current thr hyster
UM Type perc UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
100
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Setting of the tolerance band around the current threshold. A value of 100% corresponds to the value of the drive heavy duty continuous current, displayed in parameter 488 Drive cont current , when parameter 566
Drive overload mode is set to Heavy duty, and no derating of the drive continuous current has been activated due to any modification of Mains voltage, Switching frequency and Ambient temperature.
The drive heavy duty continuous current value to be used is the factory setting read in PAR 488 Drive cont current .
The tolerance band is the same for both directions of rotation of the motor.
46
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
11 – COMMANDS
It is possible to work in Local or Remote mode.
Local
Standard I/O
Terminal
Expansion I/O
ADV200
Keypad
Ramp ref 3
Remote
Terminal
Standard I/O
Expansion I/O
Digital
Modbus
Field bus
Profile (DS402-Profidrive)
Ramp ref 1
When switching between Remote and Local modes the origin of the Enable and Start commands is switched and in the Ramp Ref block, switching occurs between Ramp ref 1 and Ramp ref 3.
In Remote mode the “ Commands remote sel ” parameter is used to configure the source of the Enable and Start commands which can be Terminal (standard digital input, expansion digital input) or Digital (Modbus, Fieldbus, Profile
DS402, Profile profidrive).
In Local mode the “ Commands local sel ” parameter is used to configure the source of the Enable and Start commands, which can be Terminal (standard digital input, expansion digital input) or Keypad (Start key, Stop key).
In Remote c Digital mode the Digital Enable src and Digital Start src parameters must be used to configure the source.
Normally the sources are the Pad parameters. Modbus or Fieldbus must therefore write the desired value on the Pad parameters. Alternatively, the value of 6000 can be written directly on the Digital Enable src and Digital Start src
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
47
parameters for a source of Null (0) or the value of 6002 for a source of One (1).
Another alternative is to configure the Digital Enable src and Digital Start src sources on the BitX decomp mon parameters, so that the Modbus or Fieldbus can then write the desired value on the Dig word decomp parameter.
Local n Remote switching is performed with the variable value configured as Loc/Remote src , i.e. it can be a standard digital input, expansion digital input, Modbus, Fieldbus, Dig Local/Remote .
In the default condition, the associated variable is Dig Local/Remote , which is written by the LOC key from the keypad: switching is thus performed by pressing the LOC key.
For safety reasons, Local n Remote switching is only performed with Terminal Enable = 0 .
Example 1
With the machine in automatic operating mode, the drive works in Remote -> Digital -> Fieldbus mode.
With the machine in manual operating mode, the drive works in Local -> Terminal -> Standard digital input mode.
If switching from automatic to manual machine operation, the drive must switch between Remote and Local mode. The switch command must be sent via standard digital input or fieldbus.
Example 2
With the machine controlled from console A, the drive operates in Local -> Terminal -> Standard digital input mode.
With the machine controlled from console B, the drive operates in Remote ->Digital -> Expansion digital input mode.
When switching the control console, the drive must switch between Remote and Local mode. The switch command must be sent via Standard digital input or Expansion digital input.
This configuration is allowed because the Terminal variables are available in the digital command selection lists.
Menu PAR Description
11.1 1000 Commands remote sel
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def Min
Terminals 0
Max
1
Acc Mod
RWZ FVS
This parameter defines the source of the command signals when the drive is used in the Remote mode.
The Enable command can only be set via hardware, connecting a positive voltage (+24VDC) to terminal 7.
0 Terminals
1 Digital
When the parameter is set to Terminals the source of the Enable cmd mon command is the Enable terminal
(7) and the origin of the Start cmd mon command is configured using the Terminal Start src parameter.
When the parameter is set to Digital the origin of the Enable cmd mon command is configured using the Digital Enable src parameter and the origin of the Start cmd mon command is configured using the Digital Start src parameter.
If Digital is set to generate the Enable cmd mon command, as well as the variable associated with Digital Enable src , the enable hardware command must also be sent to the Enable terminal.
Menu PAR Description
11.2 1002 Commands local sel
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Keypad
Min
0
Max
2
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
This parameter defines the source of the command signals when the drive is used in the Local mode.
0 Terminals
2 Keypad
When the parameter is set to Terminals the source of the Enable cmd mon command is the Enable terminal
(7) and the origin of the Start cmd mon command is configured using the Terminal Start src parameter.
48
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
When the parameter is set to Keypad the origin of the Enable cmd mon and Start cmd mon commands is the Start key. When Keypad is set to generate the Enable cmd mon command, as well as the Start key the enable hardware command must also be sent to the Enable terminal (7).
Menu PAR Description
11.3 1004 Enable/disable mode
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def Min
Stop/FS&Spd=0 0
Max
3
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
This parameter is used to define the generation of Enable cmd mon , i.e. to configure the type of control used for enabling and disabling the drive.
0 Off
1 Stop/FS&Spd = 0
2 Stop&Spd = 0
3 FS&Spd = 0
If set to 0 Off :
In Terminal mode the drive is enabled and disabled via the Enable terminal.
In Digital mode the drive is enabled and disabled when the signal on the Enable terminal and the Digital Enable command are present simultaneously.
In Keypad mode the drive is enabled if the hardware is enabled on the Enable terminal and the Start key is pressed.
In Keypad mode it is disabled if the hardware is not enabled on the Enable terminal or if the Stop key is pressed twice.
If 1 Stop/FS&Spd = 0 is set:
In Terminal mode the drive is enabled when the hardware is enabled on the Enable terminal, on the terminal programmed as Terminal Start and the FastStop terminal must not be enabled.
In Terminal mode the drive is instantly disabled if there is no signal on the Enable terminal, or when speed=0 is reached if the Start command is disabled or the terminal programmed as FastStop is enabled.
In Digital mode the drive is enabled when the hardware is enabled on the Enable terminal, the Digital Enable ,
In Digital mode the drive is instantly disabled if there is no signal on the Enable terminal, or when speed=0 is reached if the Digital Start command is disabled or the terminal programmed as FastStop is enabled.
In Keypad mode the drive is enabled if the hardware is enabled on the Enable terminal and the Start key is pressed, with the command disabled on the FastStop terminal.
In Keypad mode the drive is disabled instantly if the signal is not present on the Enable terminal or the Stop key is pressed twice.
If 2 Stop&Spd = 0 is set:
In Terminal mode the drive is enabled if the hardware is enabled on the Enable terminal and the signal is enabled on the terminal programmed as Terminal Start .
In Terminal mode the drive is instantly disabled if there is no signal on the Enable terminal, or if, upon reaching the speed=0, the Terminal Start command is disabled.
In Digital mode the drive is enabled when the hardware is enabled on the Enable terminal and the Digital Enable and DigitalStart signals are present.
In Digital mode the drive is instantly disabled if the signal is not present on the Enable terminal, or the Digital
Enable command is not present, or upon reaching the speed=0 if the Digital Start command is set to 0.
In Keypad mode the drive is enabled when the hardware is enabled on the Enable terminal and the Start key is pressed.
In Keypad mode the drive is instantly disabled if the signal is not present on the Enable terminal or the Stop key is pressed twice, or when the speed=0 is reached if the Stop key is pressed.
If 3 FS&Spd = 0 is set:
In Terminal mode the drive is enabled when the hardware is enabled on the Enable terminal and the FastStop
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
49
terminal is not enabled.
In Terminal mode the drive is instantly disabled if there is no signal on the Enable terminal, or when the speed=0 is reached if the terminal programmed as FastStop is enabled.
In Digital mode the drive is enabled if the hardware is enabled on the Enable terminal and the Digital Enable signal is present, with the command on the FastStop terminal disabled.
In Digital mode the drive is instantly disabled if there is no signal on the Enable terminal, or no Digital Enable command, or when the speed=0 is reached if the Digital Start command is set to 0.
In Keypad mode the drive is enabled if the hardware is enabled on the Enable terminal and the Start key is pressed, with the FastStop command disabled.
In Keypad mode the drive is instantly disabled if there is no signal on the Enable terminal or the Stop key is pressed twice, or if, when the speed=0 is reached, the terminal programmed as FastStop is enabled.
Menu PAR Description
11.4 1006 Speed 0 disable dly
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
1000
Min
0
Max
10000
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of a delay in milliseconds between reaching the zero speed and disabling the drive when Enable/Disable mode is set to a value other than Off .
Menu PAR Description
11.5 1008 Stop key mode
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Inactive
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the stop key functioning on the keypad. In Local with command from Keypad , this configuration is ineffective.
Active in remote control mode (PAR 1012=1) both by using “Terminals” command or “Digital” commands and, in local control mode (PAR 1012=0) by using “Terminals” command
0 Inactive
1 EmgStop&Alarm
If the command is set to Inactive , pressing the Stop key on the keypad is ineffective.
If the command is set to EmgStop&Alarm , when the Stop key is pressed the motor stops in FastStop mode and the Emg stop alarm is generated. When the motor reaches the speed=0, the drive is automatically disabled and waits for the Fault reset command. The Fault reset command must be sent twice to reset the drive.
Menu PAR Description
11.6 1010 Commands safe start
UM Type
BIT
FB BIT Def
1
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
This parameter is used to define whether the safe start command is disabled or enabled at drive power-on.
0 Off
1 On
If set to Off , the safe start command is disabled. If the drive is powered-on with the hardware enabled on the
Enable terminal, the motor could start rotating.
When set to On , the safe start command is enabled. If the drive is powered-on with the hardware enabled on the Enable terminal, the motor will not rotate. To set the drive to accept subsequent commands, open the hardware enabling contact on the Enable terminal and then close it again.
Menu PAR Description
11.7 1012 Dig local/remote
UM Type FB BIT
ENUM 16
Setting Local or Remote operating mode.
Def
Remote
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
0 Local
1 Remote
Writing this parameter is only effective if it is associated with Local/Remote src and if performed without the hardware enabled on the Enable terminal. Press LOC to modify the value of this parameter 0<->1.
50
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
To disable the LOC key, set Local/Remote src to a value other than Dig local/remote .
Menu PAR Description
11.8 1014 Local/remote src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
1012
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal that switches between Remote and Local . Switching can only be performed if the hardware is not enabled on the Enable terminal.
The signal to be associated with this function can be selected from the “ L_DIGSEL3 ” selection list.
0 Local
1 Remote
In Remote mode the “ Commands remote sel ” parameter is used to configure the source of the Enable and
Start commands, which can be Terminal (standard digital input, expansion digital input) or Digital (Modbus,
Fieldbus, Profile DS402, Profile profidrive).
In Local mode the “ Commands local sel ” parameter is used to configure the source of the Enable and Start commands, which can be Terminal (standard digital input, expansion digital input) or Keypad (Start key, Stop key).
Menu PAR Description
11.9 1016 Terminal Start src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
1048
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the Terminal Start signal. Switching can only be performed if the hardware is not enabled on the Enable terminal.
The signal to be associated with this function can be selected from the “ L_DIGSEL3 ” selection list.
In the default condition, the origin of the Terminal Start signal is the Start output of the ForwardReverseControl
(FRC) block.
Menu PAR Description
11.10 1018 Digital Enable src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
6000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal that defines the enabling of the drive when the commands are sent via serial line or fieldbus. The command to be associated with this function can be selected from the “ L_DIG-
SEL2 ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
11.11 1020 Digital Start src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
6000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the Digital Start signal. The signal to be associated with this function can be selected from the “ L_DIGSEL2 ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
11.12 1022 FastStop src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
6000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) for the fast stop signal (FastStop). The terminal to be associated with this function can be selected from the “ L_DIGSEL2 ” selection list. During the execution of the FastStop command the ramps used are Acceleration time 3 and Deceleration time 3 .
The FastStop mode (PAR 1036) parameter can be used to define the specific operating modes for automatic motor restart.
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc
R
Mod
FVS
Menu PAR Description
11.13 1024 Enable cmd mon
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
The status of the enable command is displayed.
Menu PAR Description
11.14 1026 Start cmd mon
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc
R
Mod
FVS
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
51
The status of the Start command is displayed.
Menu PAR Description
11.15 1028 FastStop cmd mon
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
This parameter is used to display the value of the FastStop command state.
0 FastStop not active
1 FastStop active
Max
1
Acc
R
Mod
FVS
If the “FastStop mode” parameter is set to 0 = “Not Latched”, the value of the FastStop command monitor changes to 1 when the FastStop input is activated and remains high (1) until the Enable or FastStop inputs are deactivated (0 state).
If the “FastStop mode” parameter is set to 1 = “Latched”, the value of the FastStop command monitor changes to 1 when the FastStop input is activated and remains high (1) until the Enable, Start, FastStop inputs are deactivated (0 state).
Menu PAR Description
11.16 1040 FR mode
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Normal
Min
0
Setting of the operating mode of the Forward Reverse Control (FRC) block.
Max
2
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
0 Normal
1 Two wire
2 Three wire
Two wire control
Three wire control
The default use of the FRC block is shown below.
The Start command is linked to the Start terminal and the Reverse command is linked to Ramp ref invert.
The function diagrams of the 3 modes are shown below.
52
When 0 - Normal control is set the motor only starts rotating when the FR Forward command is sent. If the FR
Reverse command is present the motor rotates in the reverse direction,
The FR start mon output repeats the status of the FR Forward command, while the FR reverse mon output repeats the status of the FR Reverse command.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
When set to 1 - Two wire control, the motor only rotates if the FR Forward command or FR Reverse command is present. The simultaneous presence of the FR Forward and FR Reverse commands causes the motor to stop.
The FR start mon output is enabled if the FR Forward and FR Reverse commands are not present simultaneously.
The FR reverse mon output repeats the status of the FR Reverse command.
For 2 - Three wire control the FR *stop command must be present on a digital input programmed via the FR
*stop src parameter (not present in the default condition). When set to Three wire control, the motor starts upon receiving an impulse of not less than 50 msec on the FR Forward terminal. Once the motor has started the command is no longer necessary on the FR Forward terminal. To reverse the direction of rotation enable the FR Reverse command: the motor will be brought to the zero speed with the set ramp and will restart in the opposite direction of rotation. The motor rotates in the Reverse direction for as long as the FR Reverse signal is enabled. If the FR Reverse signal is disabled the motor rotates in the Forward direction. To stop the motor open the FR *stop contact.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
53
Menu PAR Description
11.17 1042 FR forward src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
1112
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) for the FR forwardstart signal. With this command the motor starts to rotate
(with the Enable command enabled). The terminal to be associated with this function can be selected from the
“ L_DIGSEL2 ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
11.18 1044 FR reverse src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
1114
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) for the FR reverse signal. With this command the motor reverses the direction of rotation (with the Enable command enabled). The terminal to be associated with this function can be selected from the “ L_DIGSEL2 ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
11.19 1046 FR *stop src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
6000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) for the FR stop signal. The terminal to be associated with this function can be selected from the “ L_DIGSEL2 ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
11.20 1048 FR start mon
0 Stop
1 Start
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
The status of the Start output of the Forward Reverse Control (FRC) block is displayed.
Acc Mod
ER FVS
Acc Mod
ER FVS
Menu PAR Description
11.21 1050 FR reverse mon
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
The status of the Reverse output of the Forward Reverse Control (FRC) block is displayed.
0 No Reverse
1 Reverse
Menu PAR Description
11.22 1052 FR cdm mon
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
The status of the commands of the Forward Reverse Control (FRC) block are displayed.
Acc Mod
ER FVS
FR *stop src
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
FR reverse src
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
FR forward src
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
FR cdm mon
5
6
3
4
7
0
1
2
Menu PAR Description
11.23 1032 Drv Interlock src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
6002
Min
0
Max
16384
This parameter is used to select the origin (source) of the Drv Interlock signal.
The signal to be associated with this function can be selected from the “L_DIGSEL2” selection list.
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
0 Drive interlock active (Drive disabled)
1 Drive interlock not active (Drive can be enabled)
54
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
If the Drive Interlock command is active, the drive cannot be enabled (Drive Enable command).
If the Drive Interlock command is not active, the drive can be enabled by applying the Drive enable command.
In default conditions the “ Drv Interlock src ” signal is connected to “One”. In this configuration the Drive interlock function is not active and the drive can only be enabled with the “Enable” command.
Enable Enable cmd mon
Start
Drv interlock
S
Q
R
_Q
Drv interlock mon
The Drv Interlock signal, with the “ EXP-SFTy-ADV ” safety card, is used to disable the drive under certain conditions and to prevent any dangerous situations from arising.
The drive reads the state of the Safety card via the Drv Interlock src input
The EXP-SFTy-ADV card can be connected to the drive as shown in the figure below.
ADV200
K
Enable
7 C 2 R 14 R 11
Enable Stat mon
DIx
EXP-SFTy-ADV
1 2 3 4 5
Safety
Enable
Safety
Enable
Feedback
K1
Contatto NO
+ 24 V
0V
+ 24 V
0V
Rele K 1
+24 V
0V
If the “Drv Interlock” command is active (low state = 0) the drive is disabled immediately. To enable the drive again, set the “Drv Interlock” command to the high state (1) (Drive interlock not active) and the “Enable” and
“Start” commands to the 0 state (Disabled and Stop) and then to the high state (1).
The “Drv Interlock” command must be sent before the “Enable” command.
The EXP-SFTy-ADV card supplies the Safety Enable Feedback digital output as shown in the following table.
Safety Enable
Open
+24V
Safety Enable Feedback
0V
+24V
Description
Safety function active
The drive does not supply current
Safety function not active
The drive can supply current
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
55
A relay (K1) can be used to repeat the safety card feedback signal. A normally open (NO) contact of the relay can be connected to a drive input set to “ Drv Interlock src ”.
If the Safety card is active (the drive does not supply current) the Safety Enable Feedback digital output is set to low (0), the relay is not excited and the NO contact is open.
When the “Drv interlock” signal receives a low command (0) (Drive interlock active) the drive is disabled.
The “ Drv Interlock src ” can be used to know the instantaneous state of the Safety Enable Feedback function.
The “ Drv interlock mon ” parameter can be used to know the state of the Safety Enable Feedback function taking into account the interlocking logic with the drive Enable command.
0 Drive interlock active (the Safety card is active)
1 Drive interlock not active (the Safety card is not active)
In “ Drv interlock mon ” the Drive interlock state remains active until the Safety card is deactivated and the “Enable” and “Start” commands are set to low (0).
The drive remains disabled until the “Drv Interlock” commandis set to the high state (1) (Drive interlock not active) and the “Enable” and “Start” commands to the low state (0) (Disabled and Stop) and then to the high state
(1).
If the Safety card is not active (the drive can supply current) the Safety Enable Feedback digital output is set to high (1), the relay is excited and the NO contact is closed.
The “Drv interlock” signal receives a high (1) signal ( Drive interlock not active), the drive can be enabled by applying the drive enable command.
Menu PAR Descrizione
11.24 1034 Drv interlock mon
UM Tipo FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ER FVS
In “ Drv interlock mon ” the Drive interlock state remains active until the Safety card is deactivated and the “Enable” and “Start” commands are set to low (0).
Menu PAR Descrizione
11.25 1036 FastStop mode
UM Tipo
ENUM
FB BIT Def Min
Not Latched 0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
This parameter is used to select the operating mode of the FastStop command.
0 Not Latched
1 Latched
If set to 0 (Not Latched), the FastStop command is not stored. Therefore, if the FastStop command is removed the drive automatically restarts.
If set to 1 (Latched) the FastStop command is stored. If the FastStop command is removed, the drive will not restart automatically. It can only restart after removing the FastStop command and sending a new Enable and
Start command.
56
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
12 – DIGITAL INPUTS
Note : The numbering and description of the following parameters may change if an MDPLc application is active.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
57
Menu PAR Description
12.1 1132 Dig inp 1 inversion
12.2 1134 Dig inp 2 inversion
12.3 1136 Dig inp 3 inversion
12.4 1138 Dig inp 4 inversion
12.5 1140 Dig inp 5 inversion
UM Type
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
FB BIT Def
0
0
0
0
0
Min
0
0
0
0
0
Max
1
1
1
1
1
Acc Mod
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
Reversal of the logic status of the function associated with the digital input (e.g. from enabled with +24V signal to enabled with low signal).
Menu PAR Description
12.6 1150 Digital input E dest
12.7 1152 Digital input 1 dest
12.8 1154 Digital input 2 dest
12.9 1156 Digital input 3 dest
12.10 1158 Digital input 4 dest
12.11 1160 Digital input 5 dest
UM Type
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
FB BIT Def
0
0
0
0
0
0
The function to which the associated digital input refers is displayed.
Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
Max
0
0
0
0
0
0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
Menu PAR Description
12.12 1240 Dig inp 1X inversion
12.13 1242 Dig inp 2X inversion
12.14 1244 Dig inp 3X inversion
12.15 1246 Dig inp 4X inversion
12.16 1248 Dig inp 5X inversion
12.17 1250 Dig inp 6X inversion
12.18 1252 Dig inp 7X inversion
12.19 1254 Dig inp 8X inversion
12.20 5540 Dig inp 9X inversion
12.21 5542 Dig inp 10X inversion
12.22 5544 Dig inp 11X inversion
12.23 5546 Dig inp 12X inversion
12.24 5548 Dig inp 13X inversion
12.25 5550 Dig inp 14X inversion
UM
12.26 5552 Dig inp 15X inversion
12.27 5554 Dig inp 16X inversion
BIT
BIT
0
0
0
0
These parameters invert the state of the corresponding digital input of the expansion.
1
1
Menu PAR Description
12.28 1270 Dig input 1X dest
12.29 1272 Dig input 2X dest
12.30 1274 Dig input 3X dest
12.31 1276 Dig input 4X dest
12.32 1278 Dig input 5X dest
12.33 1280 Dig input 6X dest
12.34 1282 Dig input 7X dest
12.35 1284 Dig input 8X dest
12.36 5570 Dig input 9X dest
12.37 5572 Dig input 10X dest
UM
Type
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
FB BIT
Type
ILINK
FB BIT
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
Def
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Def
0
0
Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Max
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Max
1
1
Acc Mod
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
Acc Mod
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
58
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
12.38 5574 Dig input 11X dest
12.39 5576 Dig input 12X dest
12.40 5578 Dig input 13X dest
12.41 5580 Dig input 14X dest
12.42 5582 Dig input 15X dest
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
12.43 5584 Dig input 16X dest ILINK 0 0 0 ER FVS
These parameters show which “src” parameter is using the corresponding digital input of the expansion card.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
59
13 – DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Note : The numbering and description of the following parameters may change if an MDPLc application is active.
60
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu PAR Description
13.1 1310 Digital output 1 src
13.2 1312 Digital output 2 src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
LINK 16
Def
1062
1064
Min
0
0
Max
16384
16384
Acc Mod
RW FVS
RW FVS
13.3 1314 Digital output 3 src
13.4 1316 Digital output 4 src
LINK 16
LINK 16
946
936
0
0
16384
16384
RW FVS
RW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal to be assigned to the relative digital output. The functions that can be associated with the digital outputs are listed in the “ L_DIGSEL1 ” selection list.
Menu
13.6
PAR Description
13.5 1330 Dig out 1 inversion
1332 Dig out 2 inversion
13.7 1334 Dig out 3 inversion
13.8 1336 Dig out 4 inversion
UM Type
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
FB BIT Def
0
0
0
0
Min
0
0
0
0
Reversal of the logic status of the function associated with the digital output.
1
1
Max
1
1
Acc Mod
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
Menu PAR Description
13.9 1410 Dig output 1X src
13.10 1412 Dig output 2X src
13.11 1414 Dig output 3X src
13.12 1416 Dig output 4X src
13.13 1418 Dig output 5X src
13.14 1420 Dig output 6X src
13.15 1422 Dig output 7X src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
LINK 16
LINK 16
LINK 16
LINK 16
LINK 16
LINK 16
Def
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Max
16384
16384
16384
16384
16384
16384
16384
Acc Mod
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
13.16 1424 Dig output 8X src
13.17 1424 Dig output 9X src
LINK 16
LINK 16
6000
6000
0
0
16384
16384
RW FVS
RW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal to be assigned to the relative digital output of the expansion card.
The functions that can be associated with the digital outputs are listed in the “ L_DIGSEL1 ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
13.18 1430 Dig out 1X inversion
13.19 1432 Dig out 2X inversion
13.20 1434 Dig out 3X inversion
13.21 1436 Dig out 4X inversion
13.22 1438 Dig out 5X inversion
13.23 1440 Dig out 6X inversion
UM Type
BIT
FB BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
0
0
0
0
Def
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
0
0
1
1
1
1
Max
1
1
13.24 1442 Dig out 7X inversion
13.25 1444 Dig out 8X inversion
13.26 1444 Dig out 9X inversion
BIT
BIT
BIT
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Reversal of the logic status of the function associated with the digital output of the expansion card.
Acc Mod
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
61
14 – ANALOG INPUTS
Menu PAR Description
14.1 1500 Analog input 1 mon
14.17 1550 Analog input 2 mon
UM Type FB BIT cnt INT16 16/32 cnt INT16 16/32
Def
0
0
Min
0
0
Max
0
0
The value of the voltage on the output of the function block of the relative analog input is displayed.
Acc
R
R
Mod
FVS
FVS
Menu PAR Description
14.2 1502 Analog inp 1 type
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def Min
-10V..+10V 0
Max
2
Acc Mod
RW FVS
14.18 1552 Analog inp 2 type ENUM -10V..+10V 0 2 RW FVS
Selection of the type of input (voltage or current). Depending on the input signal, move the switches on the regulation card. The factory parameter is inputs set for differential voltage signals (± 10V).
0 -10V…+10V
1 0,20mA … 10V
2 4..20mA
Select option 0 in order to connect a maximum voltage of ±12.5V (typically ±10V/5mA) to the analog input concerned. If the signal is used as a reference, reverse the direction of rotation by inverting the voltage polarity.
Select option 1 to connect a max voltage of 12.5V (typically 10V/5mA) or a signal in current from 0 ... 20 mA to the analog input concerned. The signal must be positive.
Select option 2 to connect a current signal of 4...20 mA to the analog input concerned. The signal must be positive.
Menu PAR Description
14.3 1504 Analog inp 1 scale
UM Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
1.0
14.19 1554 Analog inp 2 scale FLOAT 1.0
Setting of a multiplier factor to apply to the relative analog input.
Min
-10.0
-10.0
Max
10.0
10.0
Acc Mod
RW FVS
RW FVS
62
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Speed
100%
50%
2
1
1 Analog inp x scale = 1,0
2 Analog inp x scale = 2,0
0
5V
10V
Example:
The speed reference of a drive is assigned with a max external voltage of 5V. With this value the drive must reach the maximum speed allowed (set using Full scale speed ).
As the Analog inp x scale parameter a scale factor of 2 is entered (10V : 5V)
Menu PAR Description
14.4 1506 An inp 1 offset tune
14.20 1556 An inp 2 offset tune
UM Type
BIT
BIT
FB BIT Def
0
0
Min
0
0
Max
1
1
Acc Mod
RW FVS
RW FVS
Self-tuning command for the relative analog input offset. Automatic fine tuning of the input. To perform selftuning, set the input signal to its minimum value and execute the command. The conditions containing an offset can be compensated. When this command is sent, An inp x offset tune is automatically selected so that the available input signal corresponds to the zero value of the variable. Offset tuning can also be performed with the drive enabled.
Automatic tuning can only be performed if the following condition is present:
- Input voltage less than 1V or input current less than 2 mA
Note !
The value that is obtained automatically can be changed manually if necessary, using Analog inp x offset.
If the voltage setting on the analog input is higher than 1V, the Value too low alarm is generated.
Menu PAR Description
14.5 1508 An inp 1 gain tune
14.21 1558 An inp 2 gain tune
UM Type
BIT
BIT
FB BIT Def
0
0
Min
0
0
Max
1
1
Acc Mod
RW FVS
RW FVS
Self-tuning command for the relative analog input gain. Automatic fine tuning of the input. When this command is sent, Analog inp 1 gain x is automatically selected so that the available input signal corresponds to the maximum value of the variable. Offset tuning can also be performed with the drive enabled.
Two conditions are necessary in order to perform automatic tuning:
- Input voltage greater than 1V or input current greater than 2 mA
- Positive polarity. The value that is found is automatically accepted for the other direction of rotation.
Note !
If necessary, the value obtained automatically can be changed manually via Analog inp x gain .
To perform self-tuning, set the input signal to its maximum value and execute the command. A multiplier factor is calculated to apply to the input signal value (not considering the Analog inp scale parameter) to reach the full scale value.
If the voltage setting on the analog input is less than 1V, the Value too low alarm is generated.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
63
Menu PAR Description
14.6 1510 Analog inp 1 filter
14.22 1560 Analog inp 2 filter
UM ms FLOAT ms
Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
10.0
10.0
Min
1.0
1.0
Max
1000.0
1000.0
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
Filter on the measurement of the corresponding analog input. This parameter can be used to control the response of the analog input and reduce any possible noise and interference.
Menu PAR Description
14.7 1512 Analog inp 1 top
14.23 1562 Analog inp 2 top
UM cnt INT16 cnt
Type
INT16
FB BIT Def
16384
16384
Min
-32768
-32768
Max
+32767
+ 32767
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
Setting of the upper speed reference limit as a function of the voltage (or current) of the relative analog reference.
Menu PAR Description
14.8 1514 Analog inp 1 bottom
14.24 1564 Analog inp 2 bottom
UM cnt INT16 cnt
Type
INT16
FB BIT Def
-16384
-16384
Min
-32768
-32768
Max
+ 32767
+ 32767
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
Setting of the lower speed reference limit as a function of the voltage (or current) of the relative analog reference.
Menu PAR Description
14.9 1516 Analog inp 1 offset
UM Type cnt INT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
-32768
Max
+ 32767
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
14.25 1566 Analog inp 2 offset cnt INT16 0 -32768 + 32767 ERW FVS
Setting of a value to compensate the condition in which the analog signal contains an offset, or when the variable assigned to the input already has a value even though no signal is connected.
100%
Analog inp x offset
{
0 10V
Menu PAR Description
14.10 1518 Analog inp 1 gain
14.26 1568 Analog inp 2 gain
UM Type
FLOAT
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
1.0
1.0
Min
-10.0
-10.0
Max
10.0
10.0
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
This parameter contains the value of the multiplier factor to apply to the analog reference calculated using the
Analog inp gain tune function.
Example:
An external analog reference only reaches a maximum of 9.8V instead of 10V. 1.020 (10V : 9.8V) is entered as the Analog inp x gain parameter.
The same result can be achieved using the An inp x gain tune function. This parameter can be selected from the keypad menu. The maximum analog value available (in this case 9.8V) must be present on the terminal, with positive polarity. Press the Enter key on the keypad to start analog reference self-tuning.
64
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu PAR Description
14.11 1520 Analog inp 1 thr
14.27 1570 Analog inp 2 thr
UM Type
INT16
INT16
FB BIT Def
0
0
Min
-16384
-16384
Max
+ 16383
+ 16383
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
Setting of the analog input threshold for the speed not exceeded signal, which allows enabling of the digital outputs Analog inp1 (par. 1530) and Analog inp2 (par.1580).
x = 1, 2
Analog inp x thr
Analog inp x <thr x = 1, 2
Analog inp x thr
Analog inp x <thr
Menu PAR Description
14.12 1522 An inp 1 deadband
14.28 1572 An inp 2 deadband
UM Type perc FLOAT perc FLOAT
FB BIT Def
0
0
Min
0
0
Max
100.0
100.0
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
Deadband referring to the analog input signal. When the value on the input terminal is below the threshold defined by the parameter, the output signal of the analog input block is forced to zero. Outside the deadband, the block output varies linearly from zero to 100%.
AnInp Drive
100%
-10V
-100%
Par.1522=50%
Par.1522=50%
10V
100%
AnInp Terminal
-100%
Menu PAR Description
14.13 1524 An inp 1 alt value
14.29 1574 An inp 2 alt value
UM cnt
Type FB BIT cnt INT16 16/32
INT16 16/32
Def
0
0
Min
-16384
-16384
Max
16384
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
Setting of a fixed alternative value for the relative analog input, which can be selected via a command enabled by a digital input programmed with the An inp alt sel src parameter.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
65
Menu PAR Description
14.14 1526 An inp 1 sign src
14.30 1576 An inp 2 sign src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
LINK 16
Def
6000
6000
Min
0
0
Max
16384
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal to be assigned to the relative digital input for selecting the direction of rotation of the motor. The functions that can be associated with the digital outputs are listed in the “ L_DIG-
SEL2 ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
14.15 1528 An inp 1 alt sel src
14.31 1578 An inp 2 alt sel src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
LINK 16
Def
6000
6000
Min
0
0
Max
16384
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal to be assigned to the relative digital input for selecting the alternative analog reference. The functions that can be associated with the digital outputs are listed in the “ L_DIG-
SEL2 ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
14.16 1532 Analog inp 1 dest
UM Type
ILINK
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
14.32 1582 Analog inp 2 dest ILINK 0 0 0 ER FVS
The function for which the relative analog input has been programmed and on which it acts is displayed.
Menu PAR Description
14.33 1600 Analog input 1X mon
14.44 1650 Analog input 2X mon
UM Type FB BIT cnt INT16 16/32 cnt INT16 16/32
Def
0
0
Min
-16384
-16384
Max
16384
16384
The value of the voltage output of the function block of the relative analog input is displayed.
Acc
R
R
Mod
FVS
FVS
Menu PAR Description
14.34 1602 Analog inp 1X type
14.45 1652 Analog inp 2X type
UM Type
ENUM
ENUM
FB BIT Def
-10V..+10V 0
-10V..+10V
Min
0
Max
6
6
Acc Mod
RW FVS
RW FVS
Selection of the type of expansion card input (voltage or current input). Depending on the input signal, move the switches on the expansion card. Standard inputs are coded for voltage signals.
66
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
0 -10V…+10V
1 0..10V
2 4..20mA
3 0..20mA
4 PT1000
5 NI1000
6 PT100
Select option 0 in order to connect a maximum voltage of ±12.5V (typically ±10V/5mA) to the analog input concerned. If the signal is used as a reference, reverse the direction of rotation of the drive by inverting the voltage polarity.
Select option 1 to connect a max voltage of 12.5V (typically 10V/5mA).
Select option 2 to connect a current signal of 4...20 mA to the analog input concerned. The signal must be positive.
Select option 3 to connect a current signal of 0...20 mA to the analog input concerned. The signal must be positive.
Select option 4 to connect a signal from a PT1000 probe to the analog input concerned.
Select option 5 to connect a signal from an NI1000 probe to the analog input concerned.
Select option 6 to connect a signal from a PT1000 probe to the analog input concerned.
Menu PAR Description
14.35 1604 Analog inp 1X scale
14.46 1654 Analog inp 2X scale
UM
Setting of a multiplier factor to apply to the relative analog input of the expansion card.
Speed
100%
Type
FLOAT
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
1.0
1.0
Min
-20.0
-20.0
Max
20.0
20.0
Acc Mod
RW FVS
RW FVS
2
1 Analog inp xX scale = 1,0
2 Analog inp xX scale = 2,0
50%
1
0
5V 10V
Example:
The speed reference of a drive is assigned with a max external voltage of 5V. With this value the drive must reach the maximum speed allowed (set using Full scale speed ).
As the Analog inp X scale parameter the scale factor of 2 is entered (10V : 5V)
Menu PAR Description
14.36 1606 An inp 1Xoffset tune
14.47 1656 An inp 2Xoffset tune
UM Type
BIT
BIT
FB BIT Def
0
0
Min
0
0
Max
1
1
Acc Mod
RWZ FVS
RWZ FVS
Self-tuning command for the offset of the relative analog input of the expansion card. Automatic fine tuning of the input. To perform self-tuning, set the input signal to its minimum value and execute the command. The conditions containing an offset can be compensated. When this command is sent, An inp xX offset tune is automatically selected so that the available input signal corresponds to the zero value of the variable.
Automatic tuning can only be performed if the following condition is present:
- Input voltage less than 1V or input current less than 2 mA
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
67
Note !
The value that is obtained automatically can be changed manually, if necessary, using An inp offset xX .
If the voltage setting on the analog input is higher than 1V, the Value too low alarm is generated.
Menu PAR Description
14.37 1608 An inp 1X gain tune
UM Type
BIT
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
RWZ FVS
14.48 1658 An inp 2X gain tune BIT 0 0 1 RWZ FVS
Self-tuning command for the relative analog input gain. Automatic fine tuning of the input. When this command is sent, Analog inp 1 gain x is automatically selected so that the available input signal corresponds to the maximum value of the variable.
Two conditions are necessary in order to perform automatic tuning:
- Input voltage greater than 1V or input current greater than 2 mA
- Positive polarity. The value that is found is automatically accepted for the other direction of rotation.
Note !
If necessary, the value obtained automatically can be changed manually via Analog inp Xx gain .
To perform self-tuning, set the input signal to its maximum value and execute the command. A multiplier factor is calculated to apply to the input signal value (not considering the Analog inp scale parameter) to reach the full scale value.
If the voltage setting on the analog input is less than 1V, the Value too low alarm is generated.
Menu PAR Description
14.38 1612 Analog inp 1X top
14.49 1662 Analog inp 2X top
UM cnt INT16 cnt
Type
INT16
FB BIT Def
16384
16384
Min
-32768
-32768
Max
+ 32767
+ 32767
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
Setting of the upper speed reference limit as a function of the voltage (or current) of the relative analog reference of the expansion card.
Menu PAR Description
14.39 1614 Analog inp 1X bottom
UM Type cnt INT16
FB BIT Def
-16384
Min
-32768
Max
+ 32767
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
14.50 1664 Analog inp 2X bottom cnt INT16 -16384 -32768 + 32767 ERW FVS
Setting of the lower speed reference limit as a function of the voltage (or current) of the relative analog reference of the expansion card.
Menu PAR Description
14.40 1616 Analog inp 1X offset
14.51 1666 Analog inp 2X offset
UM cnt
Type cnt INT16
INT16
FB BIT Def
0
0
Min
-32768
-32768
Max
+ 32767
+ 32767
Setting of an offset value to algebrically add to the relative analog input of the expansion card.
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
100%
Menu PAR Description
14.41 1618 Analog inp 1X gain
14.52 1668 Analog inp 2X gain
68
Analog inp xX offset
{
0
UM Type
FLOAT
FB BIT
FLOAT
Def
1.0
1.0
10V
Min
-20.0
-20.0
Max
20.0
20.0
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
This parameter contains the value of the multiplier factor to apply to the analog reference of the expansion card calculated using the Analog inp gain tune function.
Example:
An external analog reference only reaches a maximum of 9.8V instead of 10V. 1.020 (10V : 9.8V) is entered as the Analog inp x gain parameter.
The same result can be achieved using the Analog inp x gain tune function. This parameter can be selected from the keypad menu. The maximum analog value available (in this case 9.8V) must be present on the terminal, with positive polarity. Press the Enter key on the keypad to start analog reference self-tuning.
Menu PAR Description
14.42 1626 An inp 1X sign src
14.53 1676 An inp 2X sign src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
LINK 16
Def
6000
6000
Min
0
0
Max
16384
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal to be assigned to the relative digital input of the expansion card for selecting the direction of rotation of the motor. The functions that can be associated with the digital outputs are listed in the “ L_DIGSEL2 ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
14.43 1632 Analog inp 1X dest
14.54 1682 Analog inp 2X dest
UM Type
ILINK
ILINK
FB BIT Def
0
0
Min
0
0
Max
0
0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
ER FVS
The function for which the relative analog input of the expansion card has been programmed and on which it acts is displayed.
Menu PAR Description
14.55 5410 Analog inp 0Ext mon
14.56 5412 Analog inp 1Ext mon
14.57 5414 Analog inp 2Ext mon
14.58 5416 Analog inp 3Ext mon
14.59 5418 Analog inp 4Ext mon
14.60 5420 Analog inp 5Ext mon
UM Type FB BIT
INT16 16
INT16 16
INT16 16
INT16 16
INT16 16
INT16 16
Def
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
Max
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
Acc Mod
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
14.61 5422 Analog inp 6Ext mon
14.62 5424 Analog inp 7Ext mon
INT16 16
INT16 16
0
0
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
ER
ER
FVS
FVS
These parameters show the value of the analog input.
Analog input modules can have a resolution of 12 to 16 bits and scaling may vary from manufacturer to manufacturer.
E.g.:
12-bit module
Signal connected
Module configuration
-10V..+10V
0V..+10V
4..20mA
Variant 1
-2048..+2047
0..+4095
0..+32767
Variant 2
-32768..+32767
0..+2047
+6553..+32767
Variant 3
-16384..+16383
0..+32767
+3276..+16383
Variant 4
0..+65535
16-bit module
Signal connected
Module configuration
-10V..+10V
0V..+10V
4..20mA
Variant 1
-32768..+32767
0..+65535
Variant 2
0..+32767
Variant 3
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
69
70
There is no single Unit suitable for all models of analog input module. Check the scaling provided by the model being used and use the system variables accordingly.
Analog input 0 and analog input 1 can also be managed by the drive parameters. To ensure correction operation, the scaling provided by the external module must be compatible with the scaling requested by the drive.
The drive needs I/O modules that supply datum scaled as follows
Analog inp X type
-10V..+10V
0V..+10V
4..20mA
Range
-32768..+32767
0..+65535
+13107..+65535
When the An inp X gain tune (PAR 1508, PAR1558) command is sent with analog input set to the maximum value, the gain needed to adjust the full scale value is calculated.
For modules with scaling other than that requested by the drive, the An inp X gain tune command attempts to adjust the scaling. For that reason the maximum value is increased for An inp X gain tune parameters.
The tables below show the output of the analog input block according to the signal connected and the configuration of the Analog inp X type parameter (PAR 1502, PAR1552).
Signal connected: -10V..+10V
An input type
-10V..+10V
0V..+10V
4.0.20 mA
-10V
Bottom
Less than 0V saturation at
Bottom
Less than 2V saturation at
Bottom
0V
Obtained from straight line
Bottom
Bottom
+10V
Top
Top
Top
Signal connected: 0V..+10V
An input type
-10V..+10V
0V..+10V
4..20 mA
0V
Obtained from straight line
Bottom
Less than 2V saturation at
Bottom
+10V
Top
Top
Top
Signal connected: 4..20 mA
An input type
-10V..+10V
0V..+10V
4..20 mA
4mA
Less than 4 mA saturation at
Bottom
Bottom
20mA
Top
Top
Top
The Analog inputs voltage or current inputs must be configured on the external module using a dedicated switch or tool. For analog input 0 and analog input 1 the An input type parameter must be set according to the type of external device.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
15 – ANALOG OUTPUTS
On the AVD regulation card there are two programmable analog outputs.
Analog output 1 supplies a two-pole +/-10VDC voltage signal, while analog output 2 can be programmed to obtain a
0-20mA or 4-20mA output signal in current or a signal in two-pole +/-10VDC voltage, depending on the parameter assigned.
PAR
2386
2388
3070
3104
252
254
270
3006
1500
1550
1600
1650
368
3212
3260
2232
2234
3446
4024 … 4174
3700 … 3730
894
920
250
280
282
284
286
2360
2362
626
628
760
664
260
262
2150
852
870
Table: value of the signal of the analog outputs according to the measurement used
Description
Ramp ref out mon
Ramp setpoint
Ramp out mon
Speed setpoint
Motor speed
Motor speed nofilter
Encoder 1 speed
Multi ref out mon
Mpot setpoint
Mpot output mon
Jog output mon
Output current
Torque current ref
Magnet current ref
Torque current
Magnet current
Torque lim Pos Inuse
Torque lim Neg Inuse
Torque ref
Torque ref nofilter
Droop out mon
Inertia comp mon
Output voltage
Output frequency
DC link voltage
Speed ratio out mon
Analog input 1 mon
Analog input 2 mon
Analog input 1X mon
Analog input 2X mon
Drive overload accum
Motor overload accum
Bres overload accum
Spd reg P gain Inuse
Spd reg I gain Inuse
Powerloss nextratio
Fieldbus M->SX mon
Pad X
Full scale output
10V = Full scale speed (Par 680)
10V = 200% CT drive rated current (this value can be found in the manual and is defined @400Vac, default switching frequency and 40°C)
10V = 200% Nominal motor torque
10V = 200% Mains voltage (Par 560)
10V = 1000Hz
10V = 7000V
10V = 100%
10V = 10V Analog input
5V = 100% Accumulator
10V = 400%
10V = 50%
10V = 16384 * 2^16
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
71
Menu PAR Description
15.1 1800 Analog out 1 src
15.2 1802 Analog out 2 src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16/32
LINK 16/32
Def
6000
6000
Min
0
0
Max
16384
16384
Acc Mod
RW FVS
RW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signals that can be placed as variables on the analog outputs. The functions that can be assigned to the analog outputs are listed in the “ L_ANOUT ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
15.3 1808 Analog out 1 scale
15.4 1810 Analog out 2 scale
UM Type
FLOAT
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
1.0
1.0
Min
-10.0
-10.0
Max
10.0
10.0
Acc Mod
RW FVS
RW FVS
Parameter for setting a multiplier factor of the signal of the relative analog output. It can be used to amplify or reduce the input value of the relative analog output block.
+10V
2
1 Par. 1808 (1810) = 1
2
Par. 1808 (1810) = 0,5
3
Par. 1808 (1810) = -1
0V
1
Internal V
3
-10V
Vout = 10 x
( where:
Stp Var x par. 1808 (1810)
FS Var
)
Vout output voltage on the card terminals.
Stp Var actual value of the variable (variable unit)
SF Var full scale of the variable (variable unit)
Example of calculation of scale factor Analog out x scale
To display the drive speed, use an analog instrument with field of measurement from 0...2V. This means that, to display the speed of the drive, a voltage of 2V on the analog output of the drive must correspond to the maximum speed. With a scale factor equal to 1 a voltage of 10V would correspond to the maximum speed.
With a scale factor equal to 0.2 = 2V/10V a voltage of 2V would correspond to the maximum speed.
Max
0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
Menu PAR Description
15.5 1816 Analog out 1 mon
UM Type cnt INT16
FB BIT Def
0
The value of the actual voltage present on analog output 1 is displayed.
Min
0
Menu PAR Description
15.6 1818 Analog out 2 mon
UM Type cnt INT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
The value of the actual voltage or current present on analog output 2 is displayed.
Max
0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
72
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu PAR Description
15.7 1824 An out 1 absolute
15.8 1826 An out 2 absolute
UM Type FB BIT
ENUM
ENUM
Def
Disable
Disable
Min
0
0
Max
1
1
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
Enables the relative analog output as an absolute value. If this parameter is set to 1 the voltage on the analog output assumes the value of 0 - 10V regardless of the sign of the command signal.
0 Disable
1 Enable
Menu PAR Description
15.9 1832 Analog out 1 min
15.10 1834 Analog out 1 max
UM cnt INT16 cnt
Type
INT16
FB BIT Def
-16384
16384
Min
-32768
-32768
Max
+32767
+32767
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
Setting of the minimum and maximum values for the analog output for the voltage present on analog output 1
Menu PAR Description
15.11 1840 Analog out 2 min
15.12 1842 Analog out 2 max
UM cnt INT16 cnt
Type
INT16
FB BIT Def
-16384
16384
Min
-32768
-32768
Max
+32767
+32767
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
Setting of the minimum and maximum values for the analog output for the voltage present on analog output 2
Menu PAR Description
15.13 1848 Analog out 2 type
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def Min
-10V..+10V 0
Max
2
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of the type of output (in voltage or current). Depending on the output signal, move the S3 switch on the regulation card. The standard output is coded for the signal in voltage.
0 0...20mA
1 4..20mA
2 -10V..+10V
If set to 0 the analog output sends 0...20mA
If set to 1 the analog output sends 4...20mA
If set to 2 the analog output sends -10..+10V
Menu PAR Description
15.14 1850 Analog out 1X src
15.15 1852 Analog out 2X src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16/32
LINK 16/32
Def
6000
6000
Min
0
0
Max
16384
16384
Acc Mod
RW FVS
RW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signals that can be placed as variables on the analog outputs of the expansion card. The functions that can be assigned to the analog outputs are listed in the “ L_ANOUT ” selection list.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
73
Menu PAR Description
15.16 1858 Analog out 1X scale
15.17 1860 Analog out 2X scale
UM Type
FLOAT
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
1.0
1.0
Min
-20.0
-20.0
Max
20.0
20.0
Acc Mod
RW FVS
RW FVS
Parameter for setting a multiplier factor of the signal of the relative analog output of the expansion card. It can be used to amplify or reduce the input value of the relative analog output block.
+10V
2
1
Par.
1858 (1860) = 1
2
Par.
1858 (1860) = 0,5
3 Par.
1858 (1860) = -1
0V
1
Internal V
3
-10V
Vout = 10 x
( Stp Var x par. 1858 (1860)
FS Var
) where:
Vout output voltage on the card terminals.
Stp Var actual value of the variable (variable unit)
SF Var full scale of the variable (variable unit)
Example of calculation of the Analog out Xx scale factor
To display the drive speed, use an analog instrument with field of measurement from 0 ... 2V. This means that, to display the speed of the drive, a voltage of 2V on the analog output of the drive must correspond to the maximum speed. With a scale factor of 1 this would be 10V (Scale factor = 2V / 10 V = 0.200).
Menu PAR Description
15.18 1866 Analog out 1X mon
UM Type cnt INT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
The actual value of the voltage present on analog output 1 of the expansion card is displayed.
Acc Mod
ER FVS
Menu PAR Description
15.19 1868 Analog out 2X mon
UM Type cnt INT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
The actual value of the voltage or current present on analog output 2 of the expansion card is displayed.
Menu PAR Description
15.20 1874 An out 1X absolute
15.21 1876 An out 2X absolute
UM Type FB BIT
ENUM
ENUM
Def
Disable
Disable
Min
0
0
Max
1
1
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
Enables the relative analog output as an absolute value. If this parameter is set to 1 the voltage on the analog
74
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
output assumes the value of 0 - 10V regardless of the sign of the command signal.
0 Disable
1 Enable
Menu PAR Description
15.22 1882 Analog out 1X min
15.23 1884 Analog out 1X max
UM cnt INT16 cnt
Type
INT16
FB BIT Def
-16384
16384
Min
-32768
-32768
Max
+32767
+32767
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
Setting of the minimum and maximum values for the analog output for the voltage present on analog output 1 of the expansion card.
Menu PAR Description
15.24 1886 Analog out 1X type
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
-
Min
0
Max
3
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of the programmed signal on analog output 1 of the expansion card. Depending on the output signal, move the dedicated switch on the expansion card. The standard output is coded for the signal in voltage.
0 0...20mA
1 4..20mA
2 -10V..+10V
3 0..10V
If set to 0 the analog output sends 0...20mA
If set to 1 the analog output sends 4...20mA
If set to 2 the analog output sends -10..+10V
If set to 3 the analog output sends 0..+10V.
Menu PAR Description
15.25 1890 Analog out 2X min
15.26 1892 Analog out 2X max
UM cnt INT16 cnt
Type
INT16
FB BIT Def
-16384
16384
Min
-32768
-32768
Max
+32767
+32767
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
Setting of the minimum and maximum values for the analog output in current or voltage present on analog output 2 of the expansion card.
Menu PAR Description
15.27 1898 Analog out 2X type
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def Min
-10V..+10V 0
Max
3
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of the programmed signal on analog output 2 of the expansion card. Depending on the output signal, move the dedicated switch on the expansion card. The standard output is coded for the signal in voltage.
0 0...20mA
1 4..20mA
2 -10V..+10V
3 0..10V
If set to 0 the analog output sends 0...20mA
If set to 1 the analog output sends 4...20mA
If set to 2 the analog output sends -10..+10V
Menu
15.31
15.34
PAR Description
15.28 5460 Dig Analog out 0 ext
15.29 5462 Dig Analog out 1 ext
15.30 5464 Dig Analog out 2 ext
5466 Dig Analog out 3 ext
15.32 5468 Dig Analog out 4 ext
15.33 5470 Dig Analog out 5 ext
5472 Dig Analog out 6 ext
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
UM Type FB BIT
INT16 16
INT16 16
INT16 16
INT16 16
INT16 16
INT16 16
INT16 16
0
0
0
0
0
Def
0
0
Min
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
Max
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
75
15.35 5474 Dig Analog out 7 ext INT16 16 0 -32768 32767 ERW FVS
Analog output modules can have a resolution of 12 to 16 bits and scaling may vary from manufacturer to manufacturer.
E.g.:
12-bit module
Signal connected
Module configuration
-10V..+10V
0V..+10V
4..20mA
Variant 1
-2048..+2047
0..+4095
0..+32767
Variant 2
-32768..+32767
0..+2047
+6553..+32767
Variant 3
-16384..+16383
0..+16383
+3276..+16383
Variant 4
0..+32767
16-bit module
Signal connected
Module configuration
-10V..+10V
0V..+10V
Variant 1
-32768..+32767
0..+65535
Variant 2
0..+32767
Variant 3
4..20mA
There is no single unit that is suitable for all models of analog output module.
Check the scaling provided by the model being used and use the system variables accordingly.
Analog output 0 and analog output 1 can also be managed by the drive parameters.
To ensure correction operation, the scaling provided by the external module must be compatible with the scaling provided by the drive.
The drive supplies a datum for the I/O modules scaled as follows
Analog input type
-10V..+10V
0V..+10V
4..20mA
Range
-32768..+32767
0..+65535
+13107..+65535
Analog outputs 0..1 are managed via drive parameters and the value produced by the drive overwrites that written by the MDPLC or serial communication or fieldbus.
1866 An out 1X mon
R 5460 Dig Analog out 0 ext sysEAO0Value sysExtIOAnaOut0
1868 An out 2X mon
R 5462 Dig Analog out 1 ext
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
5464 Dig Analog out 2 ext
5466 Dig Analog out 3 ext
5468 Dig Analog out 4 ext
5470 Dig Analog out 5 ext
5472 Dig Analog out 6 ext
5474 Dig Analog out 7 ext sysEAO1Value sysExtIOAnaOut 1 sysExtIOAnaOut 2 sysExtIOAnaOut 3 sysExtIOAnaOut 4 sysExtIOAnaOut 5 sysExtIOAnaOut 6 sysExtIOAnaOut 7
P
D
O
P
D
O
76
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
16 – MOTOR DATA
From this menu you can enter the motor plate data and “basic” values for the voltage/frequency characteristics. It is important to enter the correct data in order to optimize drive operation and that of the application as a whole. These data are required in order to obtain: a) Computation of the normalization factors necessary for regulation b) Computation of the estimated values for the motor parameters necessary for regulation
Rated voltage, Rated speed, Rated frequency, Rated current, Cos phi, Basic voltage and Basic frequency must be entered (the Cos phi default value can be used if this value it not present on the plate). After entering these parameters, send a Take motor par command to calculate (a) and (b) above. The motor cannot be enabled until the Take motor par command has been set. If some results are inconsistent, or if the motor is much smaller than the inverter, an error message is displayed indicating a numerical capacity overflow and the previous set of parameters is restored in the
“Mot plate data” sub-menu.
P.2006
Motor & Co.
Type: ABCDE
Motor: 3 phase
Rated voltage
Rated power
Rated speed (n )
N
50 Hz
400 V
3 kW
1420 rpm
P.2000
P.2002
IEC 34-1 / VDE 0530
12345-91
I nom 6.7 A
Power factor 0.8
P.2006
Motor & Co.
Type: ABCDE
Motor: 3 phase
Rated voltage
Rated power
Rated speed (n )
N
60 Hz
575 V
2 Hp
1750 rpm
P.2000
P.2002
IEC 34-1 / VDE 0530
12345-91
I nom 2 A
Power factor 0.83
Efficiency 86.5
IP54
Made in ..............
Iso Kl F S1 IP54
Made in ..............
Iso Kl F
P.2012
Motor data plates
S1
P.2012
Menu PAR Description
16.1 2000 Rated voltage
UM
V
Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
SIZE
Min
50.0
Max
690.0
Set the motor rated voltage as indicated on the data plate. This is the voltage the drive must supply at the motor rated frequency.
Acc Mod
RWZS FVS
Menu PAR Description
16.2 2002 Rated current
UM
A
Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
SIZE
Min
1.0
Max
2200.0
Acc Mod
RWZS FVS
The motor rated current at its rated power (kW / Hp) and voltage (indicated on the motor data plate).
If using a single drive to control several motors connected in parallel (only possible in the V/f mode), enter a value that corresponds to the sum of the rated currents of all the motors; in this case do not perform any selftuning operations.
Menu PAR Description
16.3 2004 Rated speed
UM Type rpm FLOAT
FB BIT Def
SIZE
Min
10.0
Max
32000.0
Acc Mod
RWZS FVS
Rated speed of the motor with full load in rpm (rpm = m-1). In some motors the synchronous speed (e.g. 1500 rpm for a 4-pole motor) and slippage, i.e. the loss of revolutions between the motor idling condition and the rated load condition (e.g. 80 rpm), is indicated. Enter the following: synchronous speed - slippage.
Menu PAR Description
16.4 2006 Rated frequency
UM Type
Hz FLOAT
FB BIT Def
SIZE
Min
10.0
Max
1000.0
Rated frequency of the motor expressed in Hz, at which the flux weakening range starts.
Acc Mod
RWZS FVS
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
77
Menu PAR Description
16.5 2008 Pole pairs
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
SIZE
Min
1
Max
(*)
Acc Mod
RWZS FVS
Motor pole pairs. (*) Open loop (Sensorless) and Closed Loop = 20pp.
The number of motor pole pairs is calculated using the motor plate data and applying the following formula:
60 [s] x f [Hz]
P =
nN [rpm]
Where: p = motor pole pairs f = motor rated frequency (P. 2006) nN = motor rated speed (P. 2004)
Menu PAR Description
16.6 2010 Rated power
UM Type kW FLOAT
FB BIT Def
SIZE
Min
0.1
Max
1500.0
Acc Mod
RWZS FVS
Rated power of the motor at the rated voltage and frequency. This value represents the mechanical power produced on the motor shaft.
Menu PAR Description
16.7 2012 Rated power factor
UM Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
SIZE
Min
0.6
Max
0.95
Acc Mod
RWZS FVS
Motor power factor, as indicated on the data plate (Cos j ). This parameter is not always present on the motor data plate: in that case use the default value present in the drive.
Menu PAR Description
16.8 2020 Take parameters
UM Type
BIT
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
RWZ FVS
Saves the set motor data in the drive. This command must be supplied last after entering the appropriate values of all the parameters listed above. This means calculating the normalization factors (a) and estimated values for the motor parameters (b). The drive cannot be started until the Take parameters command has been set.
Note ! This is not saved permanently. Use the “ Save Parameters ” command in the DRIVE CONFIG menu to save in the permanent memory.
Menu PAR Description
16.9 2022 Autotune rotation
UM Type
BIT
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
RWZ FVS
Performs self-tuning in rotation: the motor must be uncoupled from the load or the transmission must not represent more than 5% of the load. This procedure allows the greatest degree of accuracy in measuring the motor parameters. To execute the command you must first open the hardware enabling contact between terminals
7 and S3. Next set the Regulation mode parameter to Autotune . If you are not already in Local mode, press the Local key (the LOC LED will light up) and close the hardware enabling contact again (terminals 7 and S3).
Selt-tuning can now be performed. At the end of the self-tuning procedure, open the contact between terminals
7 and S3 again and reset the parameters that were modified.
Menu PAR Description
16.10 2024 Autotune still
UM Type
BIT
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
RWZ FVS
Performs self-tuning with the motor coupled to the transmission. The self-tuning procedure may cause limited rotation of the motor shaft. To perform self-tuning, follow the procedure described for the previous parameter.
Menu PAR Description
16.11 2026 Autotune mode
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT
Selection of the motor parameter self-tuning mode.
0 Reduced
1 Extended
Def
Reduced
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
78
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
If set to 0 all the motor parameters are measured except those relating to the non-linear saturation curve. Use this mode to obtain a faster self-tuning procedure.
If set to 1 all the motor parameters are measured. Use this mode to obtain maximum efficiency: this procedure may take a few minutes.
Menu PAR Description
16.12 2028 Take par status
UM Type
ENUM
Indication of the status of parameter saving.
FB BIT Def
Required
Min
0
Max
0
Acc
R
Mod
FVS
0 Required
1 Done
The parameter displays the Required message when the motor parameters that have been entered need to be saved. When they have been saved the parameter indicates Done.
Menu PAR Description
16.13 2030 Autotune status
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Required
Indication of the status of execution of motor parameter self-tuning.
Min
0
Max
0
Acc
R
Mod
FVS
0 Required
1 Done
The parameter displays the Required message when motor parameter self-tuning is required. When self-tuning is complete the parameter indicates Done.
Def
CALCF
Min
0.0005
Max
200.0
Acc Mod
ERWS FVS
Menu PAR Description
16.14 2050 Measured Rs
UM
Measured stator resistance value.
Type ohm FLOAT
FB BIT
Menu PAR Description
16.15 2052 Measured DTL
UM
V
Type
FLOAT
Measured value of dead time compensation.
FB BIT Def
0.0
Min
0.0
Max
100.0
Acc Mod
ERWS FVS
Menu PAR Description
16.16 2054 Measured DTS
UM Type
V/A FLOAT
Measured compensation gradient value.
FB BIT
Menu PAR Description
16.17 2056 Measured Lsig
UM
Measured leakage inductance value.
Type mH FLOAT
FB BIT
Def
0.0
Def
CALCF
Min
0.0
Min
0.01
Max
100.0
Max
200.0
Acc Mod
ERWS FVS
Acc Mod
ERWS FVS
Def
CALCF
Min
0.1
Max
1000.0
Acc Mod
ERWS FVS
Menu PAR Description
16.18 2058 Measured ImN
UM
A
Type
FLOAT
Measured rated magnetizing current value.
FB BIT
Menu PAR Description
16.19 2060 Measured ImX
Menu
Measured magnetizing current saturation value.
PAR Description UM Type FB BIT
16.20 2062 Measured FlxN Wb FLOAT
Measured rated flux value.
UM
A
Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
CALCF
Def
CALCF
Min
0.0
Min
0.05
Max
0.0
Max
10.0
Acc
ERWS FVS
Acc
Mod
Mod
ERWS FVS
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
79
Menu PAR Description
16.21 2064 Measured FlxX
Measured flux saturation value.
UM Type
Wb FLOAT
FB BIT Def
CALCF
Min
0.0
Menu PAR Description
16.22 2066 Measured P1
UM Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
0.05
Min
0.0
Measured value of the first parameter to define the motor magnetization curve.
Max
0.0
Max
1.0
Menu PAR Description
16.23 2068 Measured P2
UM Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
9.0
Min
3.0
Measured value of the second parameter to define the motor magnetization curve.
Max
18.0
Max
1.0
Menu PAR Description
16.24 2070 Measured P3
UM Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
0.87
Min
0.0
Measured value of the third parameter to define the motor magnetization curve.
Menu PAR Description
16.25 2072 Measured Rr
UM
Measured rotor resistance value.
Type ohm FLOAT
FB BIT Def
CALCF
Min
0.0005
Max
200.0
Acc
Acc
Acc
Mod
ERWS FVS
Acc
ERWS FVS
Mod
ERWS FVS
ERWS FVS
Acc
Mod
Mod
Mod
ERWS FVS
Menu PAR Description
16.26 2078 Take tune parameters
UM Type
BIT
FB BIT Def
0
Saves the motor data calculated by the self-tuning procedure in the drive.
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Note ! Data are not saved permanently. Use the “ Save Parameters ” command in the DRIVE CONFIG menu to save in the permanent memory.
80
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
17 – ENCODER CONFIG
The closed-loop control mode requires a speed reading by a digital encoder on the motor shaft. The optional EXP-
ENC card is necessary in order to acquire the encoder signals. Optional cards have been developed to acquire different types of encoder signals. These enable the drive to use both incremental and absolute signals as its feedback. The natural variation in speed generated by machine load induction, known as slippage, can be compensated by the speed feedback supplied by the encoder in V/f mode. In the field oriented vector mode, closed-loop encoder feedback is essential for correct drive operation.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
81
Menu PAR Description
17.1 2100 Encoder 1 pulses
UM Type ppr UINT16
FB BIT
Setting of the number of feedback encoder impulses.
Def
CALCI
Min
CALCI
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
RWZ FVS
Menu PAR Description
17.2 2102 Encoder 1 supply
UM
V
Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
5.2
Min
5.2
Max
CALCF
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Setting of the encoder supply voltage supplied by the relative optional card. Min and max values are modified according to the type of encoder card applied.
Enc1
Enc2
Enc3
Enc4
Enc5
Enc6
Enc7
Enc8
Encoder option type
EXP-DE-I1R1F2-ADV
EXP-SE-I1R1F2-ADV
EXP-SESC-I1R1F2-ADV
EXP-EN/SSI-I1R1F2-ADV
EXP-HIP-I1R1F2-ADV
EXP-RES-I1R1-ADV
EXP-DE-I2R1F2-ADV
EXP-ASC-I1-ADV
Def
5.2V
5.2V
5.2V
5.2V
8.0V
-
5.2V
5.2V
Min
5.2V
5.2V
5.2V
5.2V
7.0V
-
5.2V
5.2V
Max
20.0V
6.0V
6.0V
10.0V
12.0V
-
20.0V
6.0V
Menu PAR Description
17.3 2104 Encoder 1 input cfg
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
TTL
Min
0
Setting of the input configuration of the incremental digital encoder, TTL or HTL.
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
0 HTL
1 TTL
The value of this parameter is automatically set in HTL when the value entered in the Encoder 1 supply parameter is more than 6.0V.
Menu PAR Description
17.4 2106 Encoder 1 repetition
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def Min
No division 0
Setting of the divider to apply to the encoder repetition output frequency.
0 No division
1 Divide 2
2 Divide 4
3 Divide 8
Max
3
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Menu PAR Description
17.5 2108 Encoder 1 signal Vpp
UM
V
Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
1.0
Min
0.8
Max
1.2
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Setting of the encoder signal peak-to-peak voltage value. Incremental sinusoidal encoders and absolute
SinCos encoders normally produce signals with a peak-to-peak voltage of 1 Vpp. Due to voltage drops along the cable, the signal may have a lower peak-to-peak voltage when it reaches the feedback card, triggering the
Speed fbk loss alarm.
This parameter is used to configure the value of the peak-to-peak voltage of the incremental sinusoidal encoders and absolute SinCos encoders on the input terminals of the feedback card.
Menu PAR Description
17.6 2110 Encoder1signal check
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Check A-B
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Configuration of which channels of the incremental digital encoder must be controlled for processing the Speed fbk loss [22] .
0 Check disabled
1 Check A-B
2 Check A-B-Z
82
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
4 Check A-B-SE
If set to 1, the application checks for the presence of the signals of channels A-B
If set to 2, the application checks for the presence of the signals of channels A-B-Z
If set to 4, the application controls loss of feedback for SE (single ended) encoders.
If the application detects the absence of feedback the Speed fbk loss [22] is generated.
As loss of feedback cannot be detected at speeds of around zero, the control is only performed if the speed reference is higher than the value set in parameter 4564 SpdFbkLoss threshold . It is also important to consider the fact that when working with a speed reference slightly above the limit set in parameter 4564 SpdFbkLoss threshold , the speed error could exceed the set threshold, given the load or current limit, and generate false alarms.
In that case increase the value of parameter 4550 SpdRefLoss threshold or of parameter 4554 SpdRefLoss holdoff .
Menu PAR Description
17.7 2112 Encoder SSI clocks
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
13
Min
11
Max
25
Acc Mod
ERWZ F_S
Setting of the length of the serial package of the SSI encoder used. The value is shown on the encoder datasheet and defined in clock cycles (usually from 13 to 25 bits).
Example of single-turn encoder
13 position bits: set par 2114 = 13.
13 clock bits: set par 2112 = 13.
Example of multi-turn encoder
13 position bits: set par 2114 = 13.
25 clock bits: set par 2112 = 25.
Menu PAR Description
17.8 2114 Encoder SSI pos bits
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
13
Min
11
Setting of the number of bits used by the SSI encoder to define the position.
See examples of PAR 2112.
Max
25
Acc Mod
ERWZ F_S
Menu PAR Descrizione
17.9 2182 Encoder ENDAT clock
UM Tipo
ENUM
FB BIT
Selection of clock value for Encoder ENDAT type.
0 1 MHz
1 500 kHz
Def
1 MHz
Menu PAR Descrizione
17.10 2116 Resolver pole pairs
UM Tipo
UINT16
FB BIT Def
1
Setting of pairs of poles of resolver used (see resolver plate data).
1 1 pair of poles
2 2 pairs of poles
Min
0
Min
1
Max
1
Max
2
Acc
ERWZ FVS
Acc
Mod
Mod
ERWZ FVS
Menu PAR Descrizione
17.11 2118 Resolver frequency
UM Tipo
Hz UINT16
FB BIT Def
5000
Min
2000.0
Value of the resolver frequency (see Resover name plate data). Step 250Hz.
Max
10000.0
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Nota! In order to manage the EXP-RES-I1R1-ADV card, three parameters need to be set: PAR 2118, 2120 and 2116.
Parameters PAR 2124, 2126, 2128, 2132 and 5132 could me modify if it is require a fine tuning of the card and resolver output voltage are outside the limits.
Plese refer to EXP-RES-I1R1-ADV Resolver option card instruction book (code 1S5F33) for more detailed informations
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
83
Menu PAR Descrizione
17.12 2120 Resolver T ratio K
UM Tipo
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
0.5
Min
0.2
Value of the resolver Trasformer ratio of used resolver (see Resolver name plate data).
Max
1.0
Def
16384 ppr
Min
0
Max
3
Menu PAR Descrizione
17.13 2122 Resolver repetition
UM Tipo
ENUM
FB BIT
Simulated selection of the resolver repetition.
0 256 ppr
1 1024 ppr
2 4096 ppr
3 16384 ppr
Acc
ERWZ FVS
Acc
Mod
Mod
ERWZ FVS
Menu PAR Descrizione
17.14 2124 Resolver LOS thr
UM
V
Tipo
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
2.200
Min
0.000
Max
4.820
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Loss Of Signal threshold: Setting of the lower threshold value of the Resolver signal. Values below this setting will generate a Speed fbk loss [22] alarm.
Menu PAR Descrizione
17.15 2126 Resolver OVR thr
UM
V
Tipo
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
4.100
Min
0.000
Max
4.820
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Over range Threshold: Setting of the higher threshold value of the Resolver signal. Values higher than this setting will generate a Speed fbk loss [22] alarm.
Menu PAR Descrizione
17.16 2128 Resolver MIS thr
UM
V
Tipo
FLOAT
FB BIT
Mismatch value threshold between Sin and Cos signals.
Def
0.380
Min
0.000
Max
4.820
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Menu PAR Description
17.17 2130 Encoder 1 direction
UM
Selection of the encoder direction
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
Type
ENUM
FB BIT
By setting 0 the encoder feedback signals are not inverted.
By setting 1 the encoder feedback signals are inverted.
Def Min
Not inverted 0
Max
1
Acc Mod
RWZ FVS
Menu PAR Description
17.18 2132 Encoder 1 mode
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
None
Min
CALCI
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Setting of the method for measuring the speed of the encoder connected to the optional card. The drive automatically recognises the encoder card that is inserted and only shows the methods that are compatible.
0 None
1 Digital FP
2 Digital F
3 Sinus
4 Sinus SINCOS
5 Sinus ENDAT
6 Sinus SSI
7 Sinus HIPER
8 Resolver
9 Abs SINCOS
The speed measurement procedure depends on the type of encoder card; minimum and maximum default values are set according to the type of feedback card that is applied.
84
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Encoder option type
Enc 1
Enc 2
Enc 3
Enc 4
Enc 5
Enc 6
Enc 7
Enc 8
Def
Digital F
Sinus
Sinus SINCOS
Sinus SSI
Sinus HIPER
Resolver
Digital F
SINCOS / No inc dig
Min
Digital FP
Sinus
Sinus SINCOS
Sinus ENDAT
Sinus HIPER
Resolver
Digital FP
SINCOS / No inc dig
Max
Digital F
Sinus
Sinus SINCOS
Sinus SSI
Sinus HIPER
Resolver
Digital F
SINCOS / No inc dig
Menu PAR Description
17.19 2134 Encoder1speed filter
UM Type ms FLOAT
FB BIT Def
2.0
Min
0.1
Max
20.0
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the time constant of the filter applied to the feedback encoder pulse reading. The parameter affects both the accuracy of the speed measurement and the dynamics obtainable in closed loop control. Long updating times allow greater stability (more filtering) of the speed measurement, as a higher number of encoder pulses are counted at a given speed of rotation. On the other hand, the use of a speed measurement filter introduces delays that do not permit high control loop dynamics. Low settings extend the regulation bandwidth but may accentuate any disturbance.
Menu PAR Description
17.20 2150 Encoder 1 speed
UM Type FB BIT rpm INT16 16/32
The motor speed measured by the encoder is displayed.
Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
Acc Mod
ER FVS
Menu PAR Description
17.21 2162 Encoder 1 position
UM Type FB BIT cnt UINT16 16
Def
0
Min
0
The encoder position is displayed. The scale is Number of encoder impulses *4.
Max
0
Menu PAR Description
17.22 5100 Encoder 2 pulses
UM Type FB BIT ppr UINT16
Def
CALCI
Min
CALCI
Max
CALCI
Setting of the number of impulses/rev of the incremental encoder mounted in slot 1 or 3.
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Menu PAR Description
17.23 5102 Encoder 2 supply
UM Type
V FLOAT
FB BIT Def
5.2
Min
5.2
Max
CALCF
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Setting of the encoder supply voltage supplied by the relative optional card. Min and max values refer to the incremental digital encoder cards with one or two encoders.
Menu PAR Description
17.24 5104 Encoder 2 input cfg
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
TTL
Min
0
Setting of the input configuration of the incremental digital encoder, TTL or HTL.
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
0 HTL
1 TTL
The value of this parameter is automatically set in HTL when the value entered in the Encoder 2 supply parameter is more than 6.0V.
Menu PAR Description
17.25 5106 Encoder 2 repetition
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def Min
No division 0
Setting of the divider to apply to the encoder repetition output frequency.
0 No division
1 Divide 2
2 Divide 4
3 Divide 8
Max
3
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
85
Menu PAR Description
17.26 5110 Encoder2signal check
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Contr A-B
Min
0
Max
3
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Configuration of which channels of the incremental digital encoder must be controlled for processing the Speed fbk loss [22] .
0 Check disabled
1 Check A-B
2 Check A-B-Z
4 Check A-B-SE
If set to 1, the application checks for the presence of the signals of channels A-B
If set to 2, the application checks for the presence of the signals of channels A-B-Z
If set to 4, the application controls loss of feedback for SE (single ended) encoders.
If the application detects the absence of feedback the Speed fbk loss [22] is generated.
As loss of feedback cannot be detected at speeds of around zero, the control is only performed if the speed reference is higher than the value set in parameter 4564 SpdFbkLoss threshold . It is also important to consider the fact that when working with a speed reference slightly above the limit set in parameter 4564 SpdFbkLoss threshold , the speed error could exceed the set threshold, given the load or current limit, and generate false alarms.
In that case increase the value of parameter 4550 SpdRefLoss threshold or of parameter 4554 SpdRefLoss holdoff .
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Menu PAR Description
17.27 5130 Encoder 2 direction
UM
Selection of the encoder direction
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
Type
ENUM
FB BIT
If set to 0 the encoder feedback signals are not inverted.
If set to 1 the encoder feedback signals are inverted.
Def Min
Not inverted 0
Menu PAR Description
17.28 5132 Encoder 2 mode
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
None
Min
CALCI
Max
CALCI
Setting of the method for measuring the speed of the digital encoder connected to the optional card.
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
0 Nessuna
1 Digital FP
2 Digital F
3 Sinus
4 Sinus SINCOS
5 Sinus ENDAT
6 Sinus SSI
7 Sinus HIPER
8 Resolver
9 Abs SINCOS
If set to 1 the frequency and period measurement method is selected. This type of measurement achieves a high level of accuracy and performance at medium and high speeds.
If set to 2 the frequency measurement method is selected. This type of selection is preferable for applications required to operate at very low speeds.
The other settings are relative to the type of encoder used.
Menu PAR Description
17.29 5134 Encoder2speed filter
UM Type ms FLOAT
FB BIT Def
2.0
Min
0.1
Max
20.0
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the time constant of the filter applied to the reading of the feedback encoder impulses. The parameter affects both the precision of the speed measurement and the dynamics obtainable in the closed-loop
86
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
control mode. Long update times provide greater stability (increased filtering) of speed measurement, as more encoder impulses are counted at a given speed of rotation. On the other hand, the speed measurement filter adds delays that prevent high control loop dynamics. Low settings increase the regulation bandwidth but could accentuate disturbance.
Menu PAR Description
17.30 5150 Encoder 2 speed
UM Type FB BIT rpm INT16 16/32BIT
The speed measured for encoder 2 is displayed.
Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
Menu PAR Description
17.31 5162 Encoder 2 position
UM Type FB BIT cnt UINT16 16
Def
0
Min
0
The encoder position is displayed. The scaling factor is Number encoder impulses *4.
Max
0
Menu PAR Description
17.32 5200 Encoder 3 pulses
UM Type FB BIT ppr UINT16
Def
1024
Min
128
Max
16384
Setting of the number of impulses/rev of the incremental encoder mounted in slot 1 or 3.
Acc Mod
ER FVS
Acc
ER FVS
Acc
Mod
Mod
ERWZ FVS
Menu PAR Description
17.33 5204 Encoder 3 input cfg
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
TTL
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Setting of the input configuration of incremental digital encoder 3, TTL or HTL. If the encoder has an internal power supply the level of the encoder’s supply voltage is equal to that set for encoder 2.
0 HTL
1 TTL
The value of this parameter is automatically set in HTL when the value entered in the Encoder 2 supply parameter is more than 6.0V.
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Menu PAR Description
17.34 5230 Encoder 3 direction
UM
Selection of the encoder direction
Type
ENUM
FB BIT
0 Not inverted
1 Inverted
If set to 0 the encoder feedback signals are not inverted.
If set to 1 the encoder feedback signals are inverted.
Def Min
Not inverted 0
Menu PAR Description
17.35 5262 Encoder 3 position
UM Type FB BIT cnt UINT16 16
Def
0
Min
0
The encoder position is displayed. The scaling factor is Number encoder impulses *4.
Max
0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
Menu PAR Description
17.36 5310 Encoder sel src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
6000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the input to be used to select the speed feedback encoder. The digital inputs that can be used can be selected from the “L_DIGSEL2” selection list.
When the value of the signal is 0, it is associated with encoder 1.
When the value of the signal is 1, it is associated with encoder 2.
Menu PAR Description
17.37 5314 Encoder sel mon
UM Type FB BIT
UINT16
The encoder selected as the feedback device is displayed.
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ER FVS
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
87
0 Encoder 1
1 Encoder 2
Menu PAR Description
17.38 2172 SpdFbkLoss code
UM Type FB BIT
UINT32
Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
The Speed fbk loss alarm generated by an encoder fault is displayed. As each type of encoder generates the alarm differently (incremental signal error, absolute signal error, serial error), this parameter displays information about the alarm that has occurred. If there are several, simultaneous causes, these are shown in this parameter.
3
4
1
2
Bit
0
7
8
5
6
Value
0x01
0x02
0x04
0x08
0x10
0x20
0x40
0x80
0x100
Name
CHA
CHB
CHZ
MOD_INCR
MOD_ABS
CRC_CKS_P
ACK_TMO
DT1_ERR
Error Setup
10..15
16..31
Free
Depending on the type of feedback.
For further details please refer to the description of the Speed fbk loss alarm and the “9.2.1 Speed fbk loss alarm according to the type of feedback” chapter of ADV200 QS manual.
Note ! To interpret the causes of the alarm correctly, you will need to convert the hexadecimal code written in parameter 17.29 SpdFbk-
Loss code , PAR 2172, into the corresponding binary code and then use the table of the encoder being used to check the various active bits and relative description.
Example with Endat encoder:
PAR 2172 = A0H (hexadecimal value)
A0 is not present in the value column of the “ Speed fbk loss [22] with absolute EnDat encoder” table.
A0 must be seen as a bitword meaning A0 -> 10100000 -> bit 5 and bit 7. This indicates the simultaneous intervention of the following causes:
Bit 5 = 20H Cause: disturbed SSI signals cause a CKS error or Parity
Bit 7 = 80H Cause: Encoder has detected malfunction and signals this to the drive via Error bit. Bits 16..31 contain the type of malfunction detected by the encoder.
88
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
18 – SPEED REG GAINS
The speed adaptive allows different speed regulator gains to be obtained according to the speed or another value. The behaviour of the speed regulator can thus be configured in the best way for the specific application requirements.
Note ! Current, flux and voltage regulators can be set using the self-tuning procedure. If this is not successful, current and flux regulators can be tuned manually (this does not apply to voltage regulators, whch must not be modified by the user). The speed regulator must be tuned manually. Gains are usually adjusted according to the drive speed.
Menu PAR Description
18.1 2200 Speed reg P1 gain
18.2 2202 Speed reg I1 time
UM Type perc INT16 perc INT16
FB BIT Def
100
100
Setting of the proportional and integral gain of the speed regulator, set 1.
Min
0
0
Menu PAR Description
18.3 2204 Speed reg P2 gain
UM Type perc INT16
FB BIT Def
100
18.4 2206 Speed reg I2 time perc INT16 100
Setting of the proportional and integral gain of the speed regulator, set 2.
0
Min
0
Max
1000
1000
Max
1000
1000
Acc
RW F_S
RW F_S
Acc
Mod
Mod
ERW F_S
ERW F_S
Menu PAR Description
18.5 2216 Gain adapt src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16/32
Def
664
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW F_S
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal to be used for the adaptive speed gain. The values that can be associated with the function are listed in the “ L_REF ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
18.6 2218 Gain adapt spd thr 1_2
UM Type perc FLOAT
FB BIT Def
0.0
Setting of the speed threshold for changing gains from set 1 to set 2.
Min
0.0
Max
100.0
Acc Mod
ERW F_S
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
89
Menu PAR Description
18.7 2220 Gain adapt spd band 1_2
UM Type perc FLOAT
FB BIT Def
0.0
Min
0.0
Max
100.0
Acc Mod
ERW F_S
Setting of the band within which gains vary between set 1 and set 2. The use of this parameter ensures a smooth transition between the two parameter sets.
Menu PAR Description
18.8 2226 Gain 0 enable
UM
Enabling of the gain at zero speed.
Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Disable
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERW F_S
0 Disable
1 Enable
When this parameter is set to 0 the control of gains at zero speed is disabled.
When this parameter is set to 1 the control of gains at zero speed is enabled. This function is used to improve the response of the motor below the zero speed threshold (Speed zero threshold)..
Max
1000
Acc Mod
ERW F_S
Menu PAR Description
18.9 2228 Speed reg P0 gain
UM Type perc INT16
FB BIT Def
100
Setting of the proportional gain of the speed regulator at zero speed.
Min
0
Menu PAR Description
18.10 2230 Speed reg I0 gain
UM Type perc INT16
FB BIT Def
100
Setting of the integral gain of the speed regulator at zero speed.
Min
0
Max
1000
Acc Mod
ERW F_S
Menu PAR Description
18.11 2232 Spd reg P gain Inuse
UM Type FB BIT perc INT16 16/32
Def
100
Min
0
The current proportional coefficient of the speed regulator is displayed as a percentage.
Max
1000
Menu PAR Description
18.12 2234 Spd reg I gain Inuse
UM Type FB BIT perc INT16 16/32
Def
100
Min
0
The current integral coefficient of the speed regulator is displayed as a percentage.
Max
1000
Min
0.0
Max
500.0
Menu PAR Description
18.13 2236 Speed reg P gain
UM Type
N/rpm FLOAT
FB BIT Def
CALCF
Setting of the proportional coefficient of the speed regulator.
Menu PAR Description
18.14 2238 Speed reg I time
UM Type ms FLOAT
FB BIT
Setting of the integral coefficient of the speed regulator.
Def
CALCF
Min
1.0
Max
5000.0
Acc Mod
ER F_S
Acc Mod
ER F_S
Acc
ERWS F_S
Acc
Mod
Mod
ERWS F_S
90
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu PAR Description
18.15 2244 Speed reg I dis src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16/32
Def
6000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW F_S
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal for Enabling/disabling of the Integral part of the Speed regulator (Null= enabled). The signal to be associated with this function can be selected from the “L_DIGSEL2” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
18.16 2246 Speed reg P factor
UM Type FB BIT perc FLOAT 16/32
Def
0
Monitoring of the Proportional part of the speed regulator output.
Menu PAR Description
18.17 2248 Speed reg I factor
UM Type FB BIT perc FLOAT 16/32
Def
0
Monitoring of the Integral part of the speed regulator output.
Min
0
Min
0
Max
0
Max
0
Acc
ER F_S
Acc
Mod
Mod
ER F_S
Menu PAR Description
18.18 2240 Inertia
UM Type kgm 2 FLOAT
FB BIT Def
SIZE
Min
0.001
Max
100.0
Acc Mod
RWZS F_S
Setting of the inertia compensation coefficient. An increase in the dynamic response of the speed regulator to a variation in the reference, can be modified by changing the current value during the acceleration/deceleration phase, to counter the applied machine inertia.
Menu PAR Description
18.19 2242 Bandwidth
UM Type rad/s FLOAT
FB BIT Def
SIZE
Min
1.0
Max
500.0
Acc Mod
RWZS F_S
Setting of the bandwidth. Increasing the setting of this parameter increases the dynamic response and makes the system more rigid.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
91
19 – REGULATOR PARAM
Menu PAR Description
19.1 2250 Current reg P gain
UM Type
V/A FLOAT
FB BIT Def
CALCF
Setting of the proportional coefficient of the current regulator.
Menu PAR Description
19.2 2252 Current reg I time
UM Type ms FLOAT
FB BIT
Setting of the integral coefficient of the current regulator.
Def
CALCF
Menu PAR Description
19.3 2260 Flux reg P gain
UM Type
A/Wb FLOAT
FB BIT
Setting of the proportional coefficient of the flux regulator.
Def
CALCF
Menu PAR Description
19.4 2262 Flux reg I time
UM Type ms FLOAT
FB BIT
Setting of the integral coefficient of the flux regulator.
Def
CALCF
92
Min
0.0
Min
0.01
Min
0.0
Min
0.01
Max
0.0
Acc Mod
ERWS F_S
Max
10000.0
Acc Mod
ERWS F_S
Max
0.0
Acc Mod
ERWS F__
Max
10000.0
Acc Mod
ERWS F__
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu PAR Description
19.5 2264 Flux reg P gain OL
UM Type
A/Wb FLOAT
FB BIT Def
CALCF
Min
0.0
Max
0.0
Acc Mod
ERWS __S
Setting of the flux regulator proportional gain when the drive is used in open loop sensorless vector control mode. This parameter is set automatically by the self-tuning procedure.
Menu PAR Description
19.6 2266 Flux reg I time OL
UM Type ms FLOAT
FB BIT Def
CALCF
Min
0.01
Max
10000.0
Acc Mod
ERWS __S
Setting of the flux regulator integral time when the drive is used in open loop sensorless vector control mode.
This parameter is set automatically by the self-tuning procedure.
Menu PAR Description
19.7 2270 Voltage reg P gain
UM Type
Wb/V FLOAT
FB BIT Def
CALCF
Setting of the proportional coefficient of the voltage regulator.
Min
0.0
Max
0.0
Acc Mod
ERWS F_S
Max
100.0
Acc Mod
ERWS F_S
Menu PAR Description
19.8 2272 Voltage reg I time
UM s
Type
FLOAT
FB BIT
Setting of the integral coefficient of the voltage regulator.
Def
CALCF
Min
0.1
Dead time compensation
Output voltage
Dead time slope
Voltage command to PWM
Dead time limit
Menu
The dead time compensation function ( Dead time compensation ), compensates the distortion of output voltage caused by the voltage drop on the IGBT devices and their switching characteristics.
Distortion of output voltage could cause irregular motor rotation.
PAR Description
19.9 2280 Dead time limit
UM
V
Type
FLOAT
FB BIT
Setting of the dead time voltage compensation value.
Def
SIZE
Min
0.0
Max
50.0
Acc Mod
ERWS FVS
Menu PAR Description
19.10 2282 Dead time slope
UM Type
V/A FLOAT
FB BIT
Setting of the dead time compensation slope value.
Def
SIZE
Min
0.0
Max
200.0
Acc Mod
ERWS FVS
Menu PAR Description
19.11 2290 Voltage base
UM
V
Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
CALCF
Min
50.0
Max
690.0
Acc Mod
ERWS F_S
Setting of the voltage value that determines the threshold at which flux weakening starts (maximum drive output voltage). If this parameter is set to a value equal to the nominal speed of the motor, operation is at nominal flux in the constant torque region and weakened flux at higher frequencies. The default value is set to the voltage supply value.
Menu PAR Description
19.12 2292 Voltage margin
UM Type perc FLOAT
FB BIT Def
5.0
Min
0.0
Max
10.0
Acc Mod
ERWS F_S
Setting of the voltage regulation margin according to the available voltage. In case of a Voltage base setting
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
93
Menu PAR Description
19.13 2300 Minimum speed OL
UM Type rpm INT16
FB BIT Def
30
Min
0
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
ERW __S
Setting of the minimum speed threshold in the Flux vector OL control mode. Below this limit the sensorless regulator is disabled.
Menu close to or equal to the actual mains value, Voltage margin represents the margin allowable by the voltage regulation to perform rapid current variations when load steps are suddenly applied.
A value of 5% allows a very fast response to load steps but with a loss of output voltage and thus power output
(reduced power output).
The minimum value (1%) allows a maximum output voltage (around 98%) of the mains voltage to be achieved but with loss of quality of the dynamic response.
PAR Description
19.14 2302 Min speed delay OL
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT
Setting of the delay for disabling the sensorless regulator.
Def
200
Min
0
Max
5000
Acc Mod
ERW __S
Menu PAR Description
19.15 2304 Speed filter OL
UM Type ms FLOAT
FB BIT Def
5.0
Min
0.1
Max
20.0
Acc Mod
ERWZ __S
Setting of the time constant for the estimated speed in Flux vector OL mode. By increasing this parameter it is possible to reduce the level of disturbance of the estimated speed, but the speed control dynamics are also lowered.
Acc Mod
ERW __S
Menu PAR Description
19.16 2306 Flux observe gain OL
UM Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
250.0
Min
10.0
Proportional gain of the internal flux observer in the open-loop flux vector control mode.
In case of instability, try changing the value and setting half or twice the default value.
Max
5000.0
Menu PAR Description
19.17 2308 OverFlux perc
UM
The value is expressed as the percentage in excess of the rated flux.
OverFlux perc (%)
PAR 2308
Type perc FLOAT
FB BIT Def
100.0
Min
100.0
Max
140.0
120%
Acc Mod
ERW __S
100%
80%
Flux step
PAR 2314
200 400 600 800 1000 1200
OverFlux spd thr (rpm)
PAR 2312
Menu PAR Description
19.18 2310 Flux weakening OL
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Enable
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERWZ __S
Enables or disables flux reduction in the open-loop flux vector control mode.
If set to Disable, the flux is not reduced when the speed of the motor exceeds the nominal speed. This results in loss of control and instability.
To prevent this problem, set the parameter to Enable.
In the open-loop mode a flux value of less than the nominal speed of the motor is advantageous in terms of
94
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
stability.
0 Disable
1 Enable
Menu PAR Description
19.19 2312 OverFlux spd thr
UM Type rpm FLOAT
FB BIT Def
400
Min
10.0
Speed limit below which the overflux value set in PAR 2308 OverFlux perc .
Max
1000.0
Acc Mod
ERW __S
Menu PAR Description
19.20 2314 Flux step
UM Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
20.0
Min
1
Max
2000
Acc Mod
ERW __S
Setting of the ramp time in the transition between the rated flux and the overflux value set in PAR 2308 Over-
Flux perc .
Menu PAR Description
19.21 2320 Magnetization time
UM Type FB BIT ms UINT16
Def
256
Min
128
Max
4096
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
This parameter is used to slow down the magnetisation transient and prevent the motor shaft from rotating due to the alignment of the stator and rotor.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
95
20 – TORQUE CONFIG
Menu PAR Description
20.1 2350 Torque curr lim Pos
UM Type FB BIT
A FLOAT 16/32
Def
CALCF
Min
0.0
Max
CALCF
Acc Mod
ERWS FVS
Setting of the active torque limit of the drive for the positive current direction (clockwise rotation and anti-clockwise braking).
Menu PAR Description
20.2 2352 Torque curr lim Neg
UM Type FB BIT
A FLOAT 16/32
Def
CALCF
Min
0.0
Max
CALCF
Acc Mod
ERWS FVS
Setting of the active torque limit of the drive for the negative current direction (anti-clockwise rotation and clockwise braking).
Max
4
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Menu PAR Description
20.3 2354 Torque curr lim sel
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Off
Setting of the type of behaviour of the drive in the current limit condition.
Min
0
0 Off
1 T clim +/-
96
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
2 T clim mot/gen
3 T lim sym
4 T lim pos/neg
If set to 0 no specific type of current limitation is set.
If set to 1 the active positive torque limit is Torque curr lim Pos and the active negative torque limit is Torque curr lim Neg ; the limit is provided on the torque current.
Torque limits with Torque curr lim Sel = 1 Torque limits with Torque curr lim sel = 2
If set to 2 three conditions are possible:
1 - If the motor speed is > +1% of Rated speed the active positive torque limit is Torque curr lim Pos and the active negative torque limit is Torque curr lim Neg .
2 - If the motor speed is < -1% of Rated speed the active positive torque limit is Torque curr lim Neg and the active negative torque limit is Torque curr lim Pos .
3 - If -1% of Motor non speed < motor speed < + 1% of Rated speed the active positive torque limit is
Torque curr lim Pos and the active negative torque limit is Torque curr lim Neg
If set to 3 the torque limits are symmetrical. The torque reference is the value of parameter 2358 Torque lim pos src . This mode is not managed in the V/f control mode. The limit is provided on the torque current.
If set to 4 the torque limits are assigned independently, setting the value of parameter 2358 Torque lim pos src as the positive torque reference and the value of parameter 2370 Torque lim neg src as the negative torque reference. The torque reference is the value of parameter 2370 Torque lim neg src . This mode is not managed in the V/f control mode. The limit is provided on the torque current.
Menu PAR Description
20.4 2358 Torque lim pos src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16/32
Def
6000
Selection of the origin (source) to be used to set the torque limit:
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERWZ F_S
If parameter 2354 Torque curr lim sel is set to 3 the torque limit is symmetrical
If parameter 2354 Torque curr lim sel is set to 4 the torque limit is positive
The signals that can be associated with the function can be selected from the “L_PLIM” selection list.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
97
Menu PAR Description
20.5 2370 Torque lim neg src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16/32BIT
Def
6000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Selection of the origin (source) to be used for the negative torque limit. The signals that can be associated with the function can be selected from the “L_LIM” selection list
Menu PAR Description
20.6 2372 Torque limit pos
UM Type FB BIT perc FLOAT 16/32
Setting of the positive limit for torque limitation.
Def
CALCF
Min
0.0
Max
CALCF
Acc Mod
ERW F_S
Menu PAR Description
20.7 2374 Torque limit neg
UM Type FB BIT perc FLOAT 16/32
Setting of the negative limit for torque limitation.
Def
CALCF
Min
0.0
Max
CALCF
Acc Mod
ERW F_S
Menu PAR Description
20.8 2376 Torque lim unit sel
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT
Setting of the unit of measure for torque limits.
0 %
1 Nm
Def
%
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERW F_S
Menu PAR Description
20.9 2360 Torque lim Pos Inuse
UM Type FB BIT
A FLOAT 16/32
Def
0.0
Min
0.0
Max
0.0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
The positive torque limit value currently being used is displayed. When parameter 2354 is set to [3] T lim sym or [4] T lim pos/neg, the unit of measure of parameter 2360 is Nm.
Menu PAR Description
20.10 2362 Torque lim Neg Inuse
UM Type FB BIT
A FLOAT 16/32
Def
0.0
Min
0.0
Max
0.0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
The negative torque limit value currently being used is displayed. When parameter 2354 is set to [3] T lim sym or [4] T lim pos/neg, the unit of measure of parameter 2362 is Nm.
Menu PAR Description
20.11 2378 Torque ref 1 filter
UM Type FB BIT ms FLOAT
Torque Feed forward filter. If IPA2378=0, disabled.
Def
0.0
Min
0.0
Max
1000.0
Acc Mod
ERW F_S
Menu PAR Description
20.12 2380 Dig torque ref 1
UM Type FB BIT perc FLOAT 16/32
Def
0.0
Min
-300.0
Max
300.0
Acc Mod
ERW F_S
Setting of a digital torque reference. The current reference value is proportional to the active motor current and determines the torque value. The sign determines the torque direction.
Menu PAR Description
20.13 2382 Torque ref 1 src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16/32
Def
3104
Min
0.0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERWZ F_S
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal to be used for the torque reference. The values that can be sociabili alla funzione sono nella lista di selezione “ L_VREF ”.
Menu PAR Description
20.14 2392 Torque ref 1 mon %
Torque ref 1 monitor in %
UM Type FB BIT perc FLOAT 16/32
Def
0.0
Min
0.0
Max
0.0
Acc Mod
ER F_S
Menu PAR Description
20.15 2348 Torque ref 1 mon
Torque ref 1 monitor in Nm.
UM Type FB BIT
Nm FLOAT
Def
0.0
Min
0.0
Max
0.0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
98
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu PAR Description
20.16 2384 Torque ref filter
UM Type ms FLOAT
FB BIT
Setting of a filter on the torque reference monitoring.
Menu PAR Description
20.17 2386 Torque ref %
UM Type FB BIT perc FLOAT 16/32
Monitoring of the torque reference value in %.
Menu PAR Description
20.18 2390 Torque ref
UM Type FB BIT
Nm FLOAT 16/32
Monitoring of the torque reference value in Nm.
Def
1.0
Def
0.0
Def
0.0
Min
0.1
Min
0.0
Min
0.0
Max
10.0
Max
0.0
Max
0.0
Acc
ERW F_S
Acc
Mod
Mod
ER F_S
Acc Mod
ER F_S
Menu PAR Description
20.19 2394 Torque %
UM Type FB BIT perc FLOAT 16/32
Monitoring of the % value of the motor nominal Torque.
Values are available thru analog outputs.
Def
0.0
Menu PAR Description
20.20 2398 Torque
UM Type FB BIT
Nm FLOAT
Monitoring of the Nm value of the motor nominal Torque.
Values are available thru analog outputs.
Def
0.0
Min
0.0
Min
0.0
Max
0.0
Max
0.0
Acc
ER F_S
Acc
Mod
Mod
ER F_S
Menu PAR Description
20.21 2366 Torque curr lim Red
UM Type FB BIT
A FLOAT 16/32BIT
Def
CALCF
Min
0.0
Max
CALCF
Acc Mod
ERWS F_S
Setting of the torque current limit when the 2368 Torque clim Red src command is enabled. The default value and maximum value are automatically calculated by the drive whenever any changes are made to the motor plate data and after autotuning.
Menu PAR Description
20.22 2368 Torque clim Red src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
6000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW F_S
Selection of the origin (source) to be used to reduce the torque current limit. When this command is enabled the torque limit passes to the level set in parameter 2366 Torque curr lim Red . The signals that can be associated with the function can be selected from the “L_DIGSEL2” selection list.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
99
21 – FV PARAMETERS
Menu PAR Description
21.1 2400 Voltage flux boost
UM Type perc FLOAT
FB BIT Def
0.0
Min
0.0
Max
15.0
Acc Mod
RWS V
Setting of the boost voltage. The resistive impedance of the stator windings causes a voltage drop within the motor, which results in a reduction in torque in the lower speed range. This effect can be compensated by boosting the output voltage. If self-tuning is performed, the boost value is calculated automatically.
Menu PAR Description
21.2 2402 Voltage boost gain
UM Type
V/A FLOAT
FB BIT Def
0.0
Min
0.0
Max
0.0
Acc Mod
ERWS V
Manual setting of the voltage boost gain to apply to the motor terminals for the set V/f characteristic curve. If self-tuning is performed, the boost value is calculated automatically.
Menu PAR Description
21.3 2404 Voltage torque boost
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Disable
Min
0
Enables vector torque compensation. The default drive setting is to pure V/f control.
0 Disable
1 Enable
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERWZ V
Menu PAR Description
21.4 2406 Vf voltage
UM
V
Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
CALCF
Min
10.0
Max
690.0
Acc Mod
ERWZS V
Setting of the maximum voltage value to be applied at the motor terminals (usually set according to the motor data plate).
100
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu PAR Description
21.5 2408 Vf frequency
UM Type
Hz FLOAT
FB BIT Def
CALCF
Min
10.0
Max
2000.0
Acc Mod
ERWZS V
Setting of the motor rated frequency (indicated on the motor data plate)
This is the frequency at which the drive output voltage reaches the maximum output voltage ( Vf voltage ) on the motor.
Menu PAR Description
21.6 2410 Vf voltage 1
UM
V
Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
CALCF
Min
CALCF
Setting of an intermediate voltage value for the custom V/f characteristic curve.
Max
CALCF
Acc Mod
ERWZS V
Menu PAR Description
21.7 2412 Vf frequency 1
UM Type
Hz FLOAT
FB BIT Def
CALCF
Min
0.0
Setting of an intermediate frequency value for the custom V/f characteristic curve.
Max
CALCF
Acc Mod
ERWZS V
Menu PAR Description
21.8 2414 Vf voltage 0
UM Type
V FLOAT
FB BIT Def
CALCF
Min
0.0
Max
CALCF
Acc Mod
ERWZS V
Compensation of IR voltage drop at 0 Hz. This parameter must be increased in case of pure V/f control. The increase depends on the size of the motor. Values that are too high could cause an overcurrent and motor saturation.
Menu PAR Description
21.9 2430 Vf shape
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT
Selection of the type of V/f characteristic curve
Def
Linear
Min
0
Max
2
Acc Mod
ERWS V
0 Linear
1 Custom
2 Quadratic
Set 0 ( Linear ) to obtain a linear V/f characteristic curve, on which the intermediate points are reset to a value that is equal to half those of parameters 2406 and 2408 .
The Boost joins the curve automatically.
V
Par.2406
Par.2410
2
Par.2400
Par.2412
2
Par.2408
Hz
Set 1 ( Custom ) to obtain a customized V/f characteristic curve, in which the intermediate voltage and frequency values are defined by parameters 2410 and 2412 , as is the point at which the Boost joins the characteristic curve.
V
Par.2406
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Par.2410
Par.2400
Par.2412
Par.2408
Hz
101
Set 2 ( Quadratic ) to obtain a quadratic V/f characteristic curve, useful for controlling pumps and fans, where torque is proportional to the square of the speed. When this type of curve is selected, the median voltage point is fixed at 0.25% of the maximum output voltage (par.
2406 ), and the median frequency point at 50% of the basic frequency (par.
2408 ).
V
Par.2406
(Par.2410 x 0,25)
Par.2400
Speed setpoint
PAR 664
Measured speed
Par.2412
2
Par.2408
Slip comp
Slip comp
PAR 2440
Slip comp filter
PAR 2442
Slip comp mode
PAR 2444
Slip P gain
PAR 2446
Slip I gain
PAR 2448
Hz
Menu PAR Description
21.10 2440 Slip comp
UM Type
Hz FLOAT
FB BIT Def
CALCF
Min
0.0
Max
10.0
Acc Mod
RWS V
Setting of the slip compensation. When the asynchronous motor is loaded, the mechanical speed of the motor shaft varies according to the electric slippage, which affects torque generation. The slip compensation function can be used to maintain a constant motor shaft speed. Compensation is performed by varying the drive output frequency as a function of its output current and the motor parameters. Thus, to obtain the best effect, the motor plate data must be set appropriately, and the correct stator resistance value (Par.
2050 ) must be set or measured using the self-tuning function, The slip compensation value is calculated automatically during the self-tuning procedure or set manually in this parameter.
During slip compensation tuning the drive must not be in the current limit condition.
Menu PAR Description
21.11 2442 Slip comp filter
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
200
Min
50
Max
5000
Acc Mod
ERW V
Setting of the slip compensation filter. The value set in this parameter determines the slip compensation function reaction time. The lower this parameter is set, the greater the slip compensation reaction. If this parameter is too low, it could cause undesirable oscillations in speed after sudden variations to the applied load.
Menu PAR Description
21.12 2444 Slip comp mode
UM Type
ENUM
Setting of the slip compensation mode.
FB BIT
0 Open loop
1 Closed loop
Def
Open loop
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERW V
102
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
When set to 0 ( Open loop ) the slip compensation value is that set manually in parameter 5210 or calculated by the self-tuning procedure.
If set to 1 (Closed loop ) the slip compensation value is measured by the reading of the signals by a digital encoder keyed to the motor shaft. The EXP-DE-I1R1F1-ADV expansion card must be installed in the drive in order to acquire encoder signals.
Menu PAR Description
21.13 2446 Slip P gain
UM Type perc FLOAT
FB BIT
Setting of the slip compensation proportional gain.
Def
1.0
Min
0.0
Max
100.0
Acc Mod
ERWS V
Menu PAR Description
21.14 2448 Slip I gain
UM Type perc FLOAT
FB BIT
Setting of the slip compensation integral gain.
Vf limit
Def
1.5
Min
0.0
Max
100.0
Acc Mod
ERWS V
Vfcurrent lim I time
PAR 2362
Vfcurrent lim P time
PAR 2460
Torque curr lim Pos
PAR 2350
Torque curr lim Neg
PAR 2352
Torque curr lim sel
PAR 2354
Torque lim Pos Inuse
PAR 2360
Torque lim Neg Inuse
PAR 2362
Menu PAR Description
21.15 2460 Vfcurrent lim P gain
UM Type
Hz/A FLOAT
FB BIT Def
CALCF
Min
0.0
Max
1000.0
Acc Mod
ERWS V
Setting of the proportional gain limit in V/f mode. This is calculated automatically if the self-tuning procedure is performed.
Menu PAR Description
21.16 2462 Vfcurrent lim I time
UM Type ms FLOAT
FB BIT Def
CALCF
Min
1.0
Max
50.0
Acc Mod
ERWS V
Setting of the proportional gain limit in V/f mode. This is calculated automatically if the self-tuning procedure is performed.
Menu PAR Description
21.17 2470 Damping gain
UM Type perc UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
100
Acc Mod
ERW V
Setting of the damping gain. The parameter is used to eliminate any oscillations or faults in the drive output current, deriving from configurations capable of generating oscillations in the drive/cable/motor system. If oscillations occur, gradually increase the value of this parameter, until they disappear.
Menu PAR Description
21.18 2472 Damping threshold 1
UM Type
Hz INT16
FB BIT Def
20
Min
5
Max
100
Acc Mod
ERW V
Setting of the first damping gain regulation threshold. These settings are usually effective for intermediate frequencies and make it possible to limit motor oscillations.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
103
Menu PAR Description
21.19 2474 Damping threshold 2
UM Type
Hz INT16
FB BIT Def
30
Min
5
Max
100
Acc Mod
ERW V
Setting of the second damping gain regulation threshold. These settings are usually effective for intermediate frequencies and make it possible to limit motor oscillations.
Menu PAR Description
21.20 2480 Vf min frequency
UM Type
Hz FLOAT
FB BIT Def
1.0
Min
0.2
Max
5.0
Acc Mod
ERW V
Setting of the minimum frequency in the V/f control mode. This represents the minimum output frequency, below which frequency regulations are ineffective. It is not possible to go below this value, regardless of the reference that has been set.
Max
5000
Acc Mod
ERW V
Menu PAR Description
21.21 2482 Vf min freq delay
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
800
Min
0
Setting of the delay for the minimum frequency signal in the V/f control mode.
Menu PAR Description
21.22 2490 Dig Vf scale
UM Type FB BIT
FLOAT 16/32
Def
1.0
Min
0.0
Setting of a digital multiplier factor for the drive output voltage in the V/f mode.
Max
1.0
Acc Mod
ERWZ V
Menu PAR Description
21.23 2492 Vf scale src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16/32
Def
3374
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW V
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal to be used to set a multiplier factor for the drive output voltage. The associable functions are listed in the “ L_VREF ” selection list.
104
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
22 – FUNCTIONS
22.1 – FUNCTIONS/SPEED RATIO
Menu PAR Description
22.1.1 3000 Dig speed ratio
UM Type FB BIT perc INT16 16/32
Def
100
Min
CALCI
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
This function allows a configurable speed ratio (Speed ratio) to be applied to the main reference and determines the speed ratio percentage. This setting can be performed in digital form, via fieldbus, or through an analog input. This function is useful in “multi drive” systems where a slip value is required between the various motors being used. The resulting speed value can be read through the Speed ratio mon parameter on a programmable analog output.
Menu PAR Description
22.1.2 3002 Speed ratio src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16/32
Def
3000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal that determines the speed ratio percentage value. The terminal to be associated with this function can be selected from the “L_VREF” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
22.1.3 3008 Speed ratio div
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
1
Min
1
Max
1000
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
This parameter defines the number of decimal positions for setting PAR 3000 Dig speed ratio . Possible values are shown in the table below:
Speed ratio divider Corresponding % value
1 1
10 10
100 100
1000 1000
1
10
100
1000
Values that can be set in
PAR 3000 Dig speed ratio
0-200
0-2000
0-20000
0-32000
0-200
0-200.0
0-200.00
0-32.000
Menu PAR Description
22.1.4 3010 Speed ratio mon
UM Type
FLOAT INT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
The speed ratio value to apply to the selected speed reference signal value is displayed.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Acc Mod
ER FVS
105
22.2 – FUNCTIONS/DROOP
The Droop function is only active in Regulation mode = Flux vector OL or Flux vector CL .
The block consists of:
- a node of comparison between Droop ref src connected to the Analog inp of the master drive torque reference
(set Torque ref nofilter on the master analog output) and slave drive torque reference ( Torque ref nofilter produced by the speed regulator).
- a proportional regulator the output of which is added to or subtracted from the reference of the slave drive speed regulator. Set Speed ref 1 src equal to Droop out mon .
Before it is applied to the reference of the slave drive speed regulator, the adjustment passes through a low-pass filter and a limit.
The Droop function is used to control two coupled motors.
The advantage of using the Droop block is that the speed regulator can remain enabled on both drives. If using the
Droop function, it can be adjusted to avoid speed regulator saturation on one of the two drives. Should there be a loss of load by one of the two drives, the adjustment provided by the Droop block is limited by the dedicated parameter.
This function is used to scale the current. This block is typically used when two motors are coupled mechanically to one another (for example if they are connected to the same shaft). They must turn at the same speed. If one of the two motors tends to turn faster, the result is a difference in the load conditions which leads to an Overload condition. The second motor acts as a brake. This causes a current unbalance, which can be eliminated by using the Droop function.
An adjustment is added to or subtracted from the reference of the slave drive speed regulator (proportional to the load difference) to re-balance the two currents.
Example of machine on which the droop function can be used.
106
M1
DRIVE
MASTER
Analog output
LINE SPEED
+
M2
Analog input
DRIVE
SLAVE
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Parameter configuration:
Master drive:
Analog out x src connected to Torque ref nofilter
Slave drive:
Droop ref src connected to Analog inp .
Speed ref 1 src connected to Droop out mon .
Set “ Droop gain ”, Droop limit , Droop filter .
Menu PAR Description
22.2.1 3052 Droop ref src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16/32
Def
6000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW F_S
This parameter can be used to select the origin (source) of the Droop ref src signal. The signal to be associated with this function can be selected from the “ L_LIM ” selection list. Select an analog input to which an analog signal from the master drive with information about the torque reference level will be connected.
Menu PAR Description
22.2.2 3060 Droop gain
UM Type perc FLOAT
FB BIT Def
0.0
Min
0.0
Max
100.0
Acc Mod
ERW F_S
Use the Droop gain parameter to tune the proportional regulator gain. Setting this parameter to 0.0 forces the output of the Droop block to 0.
Menu PAR Description
22.2.3 3062 Droop filter
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
10
The Droop filter parameter can be used to tune the filter time constant.
Min
1
Max
100
Acc Mod
ERW F_S
Menu PAR Description
22.2.4 3064 Droop limit
UM Type FB BIT rpm INT16 16/32
Def
30
Min
0
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
ERWZ F_S
The Droop limit parameter can be used to tune the absolute value of the maximum adjustment applied by the
Droop block to the speed reference.
Menu PAR Description
22.2.5 3070 Droop out mon
UM Type FB BIT rpm INT16 16/32
Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
Acc Mod
ER F_S
The Droop out mon parameter can be used to read the size of the adjustment applied by the Droop block.
This variable is typically connected to Speed ref 1 src to add or substrat the adjustment by the Droop function to or from the speed reference.
This parameter is available in the speed reference, analog output, slave->master and compare selection lists.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
107
22.3 – FUNCTIONS/INERTIA COMP
An increase in the dynamic response of the speed regulator with a variation in the reference, can be modified by varying the current value during the acceleration/deceleration phase, to counter the applied inertia of the machine.
These parameters can be set manually by the user.
Menu PAR Description
22.3.1 3100 Inertia comp
UM Type kgm 2 FLOAT
FB BIT
Total value of the inertia on the motor shaft in Kgm² .
Def
0.0
Min
0.0
Max
100.0
Acc Mod
ERWS F_S
Max
100
Acc Mod
ERW F_S
Menu PAR Description
22.3.2 3102 Inertia comp filter
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
30
Min
1
Setting of a filter on the torque compensation. The filter reduces noise due to speed differentiation in the inertia block.
Menu PAR Description
22.3.3 3104 Inertia comp mon
UM Type FB BIT perc FLOAT 16/32
Def
0.0
Min
0.0
The value of inertia compensation on the function block output is displayed.
Max
0.0
Acc Mod
ER F_S
108
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
22.4 – FUNCTIONS/DC BRAKING
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
109
The drive is capable of managing a direct current injection phase. During this phase a braking torque is generated that can be used to stop the motor or block the rotor.
The following characteristics can be configured:
- signal used to activate the direct current injection phase
- direct current injection phase activation mode
- delay between activation of request for DC braking and start of direct current injection
- duration of direct current injection phase
- intensity of injected direct current
This function is useful for:
- slowing the motor running at any speed to zero speed
- slowing a motor driven by the load before applying the start command
- keeping the rotor blocked at the end of a deceleration ramp following a stop command.
This function cannot be used for intermediate braking as the motor speed must be brought to zero.
During the direct current injection phase the kinetic energy of the motor is dissipated as heat in the motor.
The following parameters allow complete control of the function.
Menu PAR Description
22.4.1 3150 DC braking cmd src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
6000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
This parameter is used to select the origin (source) of the DC braking cmd signal. The signal to be associated with this function can be selected from the “L_DIGSEL2” selection list.
If the command is activated (=1) DC braking is enabled.
In the default condition the origin of the DC braking cmd signal is 6000 (disabled).
Note! During the injection phase in DC on control, the ramp reference is set to zero to prevent any excessively rapid restarts at the end of the phase.
Menu PAR Description
22.4.2 3152 DC brake mode
UM Type
ENUM
Setting of the direct current braking mode.
FB BIT Def
Off
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
0 Off
1 Stop
2 Cmd
3 Cmd&Stop
4 Start
5 Start&Stop
6 Cmd&Start
7 Cmd&Start&Stop
If set to 0 the direct current injection phase is never executed.
If set to 1 the direct current injection phase is executed when the stop command is sent and the speed reference threshold = zero has been reached.
In “Cmd” mode 2 the direct current injection phase is executed when the DC braking cmd configured using parameter PAR 3150 DC braking cmd src is sent.
In “Cmd&Stop” 3 modes the direct current injection phase is executed when one of the two conditions described in the “Stop” or “Cmd” modes is present.
In “ Start ” mode 4 the direct current injection phase is executed when the start command is sent
In “ Start&Stop” mode 5 the direct current injection phase is executed when the start command is sent and when the stop command is sent and the speed reference threshold = zero has been reached.
In “ Cmd&Start ” mode 6 the direct current injection phase is executed when one of the two conditions described in the “Cmd” or “Start” modes is present.
In “ Cmd&Start&Stop ” mode 7 the direct current injection phase is executed when one of the three conditions described in the “Cmd” or “Start” or “Stop”modes is present.
110
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Note: During DC braking injection, ramp reference is set to zero
When DC injection is required with start command, is exchecuted when speed reference threshold = zero has been reached
Mode 1 Example:
With the motor running at any speed, when the stop command is enabled the ramp output decreases according to the selected ramp time. When the speed reference threshold = zero is reached PAR 934 Riferimento = 0 the direct current injection phase is enabled and direct current injection starts after a delay set in PAR 3154 DC brake delay . PAR 3156 DC brake duration is used to configure the duration of the injection phase and PAR
3158 DC brake current is used to configure the intensity of the injection phase current.
Mode 2 Example:
Motor running driven by load. When the drive is enabled and the DC braking cmd is sent the direct current injection phase is activated. When the command is enabled and after the delay configured in PAR 3154 DC brake delay direct current injection starts. PAR 3156 DC brake duration is used to configure the duration of the injection phase and PAR 3158 DC brake current is used to configure the intensity of the injection phase current.
If the command is an impulse shorter than the time set with PAR 3156 Durata frenatura DC , the direct current injection phase continues at least for the time set in parameter 3156 DC brake duration .
If the command is an impulse longer than the time set with 3156 DC brake duration , the direct current injection phase continues for as long as the command is present.
Menu PAR Description
22.4.3 3154 DC brake delay
UM s
Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
0.5
Min
0.00
Max
30.0
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
This parameter is used to configure the delay in seconds between the moment DC braking is requested and the moment direct current injection starts. This delay enables the motor to demagnetise, and thus avoid an overcurrent due to the electromotive force of the motor (e.f.m.).
The value of this parameter, added to parameter 3156 DC brake duration , must be lower than the value of parameter 1006 Speed 0 disable dly , otherwise direct current injection will stop when the drive is disabled.
Menu PAR Description
22.4.4 3156 DC brake duration
UM s
Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
1.0
Min
0.01
Max
30.0
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
This parameter is used to configure the duration of direct current injection in the stator windings.
The value of this parameter, added to parameter 3154 DC brake delay , must be lower than the value of parameter 1006 Speed 0 disable dly , otherwise direct current injection will stop when the drive is disabled.
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Menu PAR Description
22.4.5 3158 DC brake current
UM Type perc FLOAT
FB BIT Def
50.0
Min
0.0
Max
150.0
This parameter is used to configure the value of the injected direct current.
It is expressed as a percentage of the drive continuous current (PAR 488 Drive cont current ).
Menu PAR Description
22.4.6 3160 DC brake state
0 Non active
1 Active
UM Type FB BIT
ENUM 16
The status of direct current braking is displayed.
Def Min
Non active 0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ER FVS
Note ! During the direct current injection phase the Enable command should not be enabled. If the Enable command is sent to the drive, the ramp output starts following the set reference; direct current output is produced in any case. The moment the DC braking cmd is removed there is immediately a speed step without performing a change in the ramp.
During the direct current injection phase, for the Jog command follow the instructions provided for the Enable command.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
111
22.5 – FUNCTIONS/MOTOR OVERLOAD
The overload control function provides integrator logic to protect the motor against thermal overload. This protection presents the characteristic I²t behaviour and is an emulation of the thermal relay of the motor controlled by the ADV drive.
When the function is enabled, the value reached by the integrator is stored each time the drive is switched off. The saved value is restored each time the drive is switched on.
I2tm Overload time – PAR 3216 Motor Fan type = (1) Servo fan
I2tm Overload time - PAR 3216 Motor Fan type = (0) Auto fan - PAR 260 Motor speed > PAR 2004 Rated Speed
Time [s]
PAR 3204 Motor ovld time
Motor current[A]
(PAR 2002 Rated Current)*(PAR 3206 Motor service factor)
(PAR 2002 Rated Current)*(PAR 3206 Motor service factor )*(PAR 3202 Motor ovld factor)
I2tm Overload time – PAR 3216 Motor Fan type = (1) Servo fan
I2tm Overload time - PAR 3216 Motor Fan type = (0) Auto fan - PAR 260 Motor speed > PAR 2004 Rated Speed
Time [s]
(PAR 260 Motor speed = 0)
(PAR 260 Motor speed = (PAR 2004 Rated Speed/2)) * 25 / 100
(PAR 260 Motor speed = (PAR 2004 Rated Speed/2)) * 50 / 100
(PAR 260 Motor speed = (PAR 2004 Rated Speed/2)) * 75 / 100
(PAR 260 Motor speed = (PAR 2004 Rated Speed/2))
PAR 3204 Motor ovld time
Motor current[A]
(PAR 2002 Rated Current)*( 3206Motor service factor )*(PAR 3218 Motor derat factor)
(PAR 2002 Rated Current)*(PAR 3206 Motor service factor)
(PAR 2002 Rated Current)*(PAR 3206 Motor service factor )*(PAR 3202 Motor ovld factor)
Menu PAR Description
22.5.1 3200 Motor ovld enable
UM Type
BIT
Enabling of the motor overload control.
FB BIT
0 Disable
1 Enable
If set to 0 the MOTOR OVERLOAD function is disabled.
If set to 1 the MOTOR OVERLOAD function is enabled.
Def
0
112
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu PAR Description
22.5.2 3202 Motor ovld factor
UM Type perc FLOAT
FB BIT Def
150.0
Min
100.0
Max
300.0
Acc Mod
ERWS FVS
Menu
Setting of the motor overload value. The value is expressed as a percentage of Rated current (PAR 2002) *
Motor service factor (PAR 3206).
The current obtained from Rated current (PAR 2002) * Motor service factor (PAR 3206) * Motor ovld factor
(PAR 3202) is the maximum current that can circulate in the motor.
If the MOTOR OVERLOAD function is enabled the drive automatically sets the torque current limit so that Iout max. does not exceed this value. The MOTOR OVERLOAD function can be used to deliver current to the motor at the overload value for a time set in Motor ovld time (PAR 3204). After the set time, the MOTOR OVER-
LOAD function automatically sets the torque current limit so that Iout max. does not exceed Rated current
(PAR 2002) * Motor service factor (PAR 3206).
If the value of parameter 3202 Motor ovld factor is 100 % the overload current of the Motor Overload function is equal to the continuous current of the Motor Overload function. In this case the drive behaves as if the overload cycle has been executed and so sets the torque current limit so that Iout max is not more than the continuous current, i.e. Rated current (PAR 2002) * Motor service factor (PAR 3206).
PAR Description UM Type FB BIT Def Min Max Acc Mod
22.5.3 3204 Motor ovld time s FLOAT 30.0 10.0 300.0 ERWS FVS
Setting of the motor overload duration in seconds.
With the MOTOR OVERLOAD function a current equal to the level of Rated current (PAR 2002) * Motor service factor (PAR 3206) * Motor ovld factor (PAR 3202) is supplied to the motor for the time set in Motor ovld time (PAR 3204).
The MOTOR OVERLOAD protection intervention time depends on the level of current circulating in the motor, a current equal to the overload level is allowed for the time set in Motor ovld time a current at below the overload level is allowed for longer.
This alarm can be assigned to a programmable digital output ( Motor overload trip ).
The trip time depends on the motor current value, see figure on previous page.
Menu PAR Description
22.5.4 3206 Motor service factor
UM Type perc FLOAT
FB BIT Def
100.0
Min
25.0
Max
200.0
Acc Mod
ERWS FVS
Setting of the motor service factor. The value is expressed as a percentage of Rated current (PAR 2002).
Rated current (PAR 2002) * Motor service factor (PAR 3206) is the point at which the integrator logic is enabled.
The current obtained from Rated current (PAR 2002) * Motor service factor (PAR 3206) * Motor ovld factor
(PAR 3202) is the maximum current that can circulate in the motor.
If the MOTOR OVERLOAD function is enabled the drive automatically sets the torque current limit so that Iout max. does not exceed this value. The MOTOR OVERLOAD function can be used to deliver current to the motor at the overload value for a time set in Motor ovld time (PAR 3204). After the set time, the MOTOR OVER-
LOAD function automatically sets the torque current limit so that Iout max. does not exceed Rated current
(PAR 2002) * Motor service factor (PAR 3206).
Menu PAR Description
22.5.5 3216 Motor fan type
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Servo fan
This parameter is used to set the type of motor cooling system.
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERW F_S
0 Auto fan
1 Servo fan
Auto fan indicates the presence of a fan unit mounted on the motor shaft that therefore turns at a speed proportional to the motor speed. Cooling is not very effective at low motor speeds.
Servo fan indicates the presence of an independent fan unit that therefore always runs at the rated speed. It ensures optimum cooling efficiency at all motor speeds.
When the current motor speed is below (PAR 2004 Rated speed / 2) and PAR 3216 Motor fan type = Auto fan; , the MOTOR OVERLOAD protection intervention time must be reduced as cooling is insufficient.
At below (PAR 2004 Rated speed / 2) the protection intervention time is reduced by reducing the direct current of the MOTOR OVERLOAD function.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
113
When the motor speed is equal to (PAR 2004 Rated speed / 2) the direct current of the MOTOR OVERLOAD function is equal to PAR 2002 Rated current * PAR 3206 Motor service factor , , whereas below that limit it is modified following a linear pattern until PAR 2002 Rated current * 3206 Motor service factor * PAR 3218 Motor derat factor when the motor speed reaches zero.
The overload current of the MOTOR OVERLOAD function is obtained by PAR 2002 Rated current * 3206 Motor service factor * PAR 3202 Motor ovld factor and is the maximum current that can circulate in the motor. If the
MOTOR OVERLOAD function is enabled the drive automatically sets the torque current limit so that Iout max. does not exceed this value.
With the MOTOR OVERLOAD function a current equal to the Overload level is supplied to the motor for the maximum time set in PAR 3204 Motor ovld time , The slower the motor speed, the shorter the time allowed (see figure at beginning of chapter).
After the set time, the MOTOR OVERLOAD function automatically sets the torque current limit so that Iout max. does not exceed the direct current of the MOTOR OVERLOAD function.
When the motor current speed exceeds (PAR 2004 Rated speed / 2) and PAR 3216 Motor fan type = Auto fan, the direct current is not reduced as cooling is sufficient.
When PAR 3216 Motor fan type = Servo fan, the direct current is not reduced as cooling is sufficient.
Menu PAR Description
22.5.6 3218 Motor derat factor
UM Type perc FLOAT
FB BIT Def
50.0
Min
0.0
Max
100.0
Acc Mod
ERWS F_S
This parameter is used to set the derating factor. The value is expressed as a percentage of PAR 2002 Rated current * PAR 3206 Motor service factor .
When the current motor speed is below (PAR 2004 Rated speed / 2) and PAR 3216 Motor fan type = Auto fan, the protection intervention time must be reduced as cooling is insufficient.
At below (PAR 2004 Rated speed / 2) sthe protection intervention time is reduced by reducing the direct current of the MOTOR OVERLOAD function.
When the motor speed is equal to (PAR 2004 Rated speed / 2) ) the direct current of the MOTOR OVERLOAD function is equal to PAR 2002 Rated current * PAR 3206 Motor service factor , whereas below that limit it is modified following a linear pattern until PAR 2002 Rated current * PAR 3206 Motor service factor * PAR 3218
Motor derat factor when the motor speed reaches zero.
The overload current of the MOTOR OVERLOAD function is obtained by PAR 2002 Rated current * PAR 3206
Motor service factor * PAR 3202 Motor ovld factor and is the maximum current that can circulate in the motor. If the MOTOR OVERLOAD function is enabled the drive automatically sets the torque current limit so that
Iout max. does not exceed this value.
With the MOTOR OVERLOAD function a current equal to the Overload level is supplied to the motor for the maximum time set in PAR 3204 Motor ovld time , The slower the motor speed, the shorter the time allowed
(see graphs).
After the set time, the MOTOR OVERLOAD function automatically sets the torque current limit so that Iout max. does not exceed the direct current of the MOTOR OVERLOAD function.
When the motor current speed exceeds (PAR 2004 Rated speed / 2) and PAR 3216 Motor fan type = Auto fan, the direct current is not reduced as cooling is sufficient.
When PAR 3216 Motor fan type = Servo fan, the direct current is not reduced as cooling is sufficient.
If the value of parameter 3202 Motor ovld factor is 100 % the overload current of the Motor Overload function is equal to the continuous current of the Motor Overload function. In this case the drive behaves as if the overload cycle has been executed and so sets the torque current limit so that Iout max is not more than the continuous current, i.e. Rated current (PAR 2002) * Motor service factor (PAR 3206) * Motor derat factor
(PAR 3218).
We recommend setting parameter 3218 Motor derat factor to a value so that Rated current (PAR 2002) *
Motor service factor (PAR 3206) * Motor derat factor (PAR 3218) produces a result that is more than the motor magnetisation current.
114
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
22.6 – FUNCTIONS/BRES OVERLOAD
Warning
Braking resistors may be subject to sudden overloads following failures.
Always protect resistors by using thermal protection devices.
These devices do not have to interrupt the circuit where the resistor is installed, but their auxiliary contact must interrupt the power supply of the drive power section. If the resistor requires the presence of a protection contact, this must be used together with the one belonging to the thermal protection device.
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Menu PAR Description
22.6.1 3250 Bres control
UM Type
BIT
FB BIT Def
0
Enabling of the overload control of the external braking resistor.
Menu PAR Description UM Type FB BIT
22.6.2 3252 Bres value ohm FLOAT
Setting of the ohm value of the external braking resistor.
Def
SIZE
Min
0
Min
5.0
Max
1
Max
1000.0
Menu PAR Description UM Type FB BIT Def Min Max
22.6.3 3254 Bres cont power kW FLOAT SIZE 0.1 100.0
Setting of the power that can be continuously dissipated by the external braking resistor.
Menu PAR Description UM Type FB BIT
22.6.4 3256 Bres overload factor FLOAT
Setting of the external resistor overload factor.
Def
SIZE
Min
1.5
Max
10.0
Menu PAR Description
22.6.5 3258 Bres overload time
UM s
Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
SIZE
Setting of the intervention time of the external braking resistor overload.
Min
0.5
Max
50.0
Acc Mod
ERWS FVS
Acc Mod
ERWS FVS
Acc Mod
ERWS FVS
Acc Mod
ERWS FVS
22.7 – FUNCTIONS/DOUBLE PAR SET
Two independent sets of parameters can be stored in the ADV200 drive. These can be selected via the keypad or by using an external command.
This makes it possible to change all the drive parameters quickly and automatically according to the various operating requirements. For example, two motors with different characteristics can be controlled alternately.
MDPLC application parameters are not included in the two sets of parameters. This makes it possible to switch between all drive parameters in two separate groups, while having a single set of parameters for the application.
With the GF_eXpress configurator this function can be managed using the commands in the program toolbar.
R0|1 -> “read set 0/1”
This command is used to read set 0 (and store set 1 in a .gfe file) or vice versa, depending on which set is currently active
W0|1 -> “ write set 0/1”
This command is used to load both sets of parameters to the drive
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
115
The toolbar commands “ Copy set 0 ” and “ Copy set 1 ” are used, after opening a .gfe file where the two sets have been stored, to load set 0 and set 1, respectively, to the parameter grid, without interacting with the drive. The previous contents of the parameter grid (which will not necessarily have coincided with either set 0 or set 1) are lost. Use this command to find out which values will actually be sent to the drive.
Menu PAR Description
22.7.1 3300 Par set enable
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT
Enabling of management of two parameter sets
0 Disable
1 Enable
Def
Disable
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
When set to 0 only one parameter set is managed (the one used as the default set).
If set to 1 two separate parameter sets can be configured. These can be selected using a command signal on a digital input of the terminal strip.
Menu PAR Description UM Type FB BIT Def Min Max Acc Mod
22.7.2 3302 Par set select src LINK 16 6000 0 16384 ERWZ FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal to be used to select the parameter set. The terminal or digital command that can be associated with this function can be selected from among those available in the “ L_DIG-
SEL2 ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
22.7.3 3304 Par set select mon
UM Type FB BIT
ENUM 16
The parameter set currently in use is displayed.
0 Set 0
1 Set 1
Def
Set 0
Min
0
Max
0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
Menu PAR Description
22.7.4 3306 Par set 0 to 1 copy
UM Type
BIT
FB BIT Def
0
Procedures for setting up and managing the double parameter set
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Creating the second set:
This function copies parameter set 0 onto set 1. Before enabling management of the double parameter set, the first set should be programmed with the correct values.
When the first set is ready, the second can be activated as follows:
1 Activate management of the double parameter set by enabling parameter 3300 Par set enable .
2 Copy set 0 onto set 1 using command 3306 Par set 0 to 1 copy .
This creates an initial parameter base in set 1 to which changes can be made.
Save the parameters.
3 Activate set 1 using parameter 3302 Par set select src .
To select set 1 manually, set this parameter to “ One ”.
Otherwise select the desired source.
4 Modify the parameters in set 1 as necessary.
5 Save the parameters.
You can change the set being used by changing the source selected in parameter 3302 Par set select src .
This can only be changed with the drive disabled.
When the double parameter set is active, the number of the set being used is shown next to the number of each parameter on the keypad.
Modifying and saving parameters:
When the double parameter set is active, any parameters that need to be the same in the two sets must be modified in each set separately.
Parameters are only saved in the set that is active at the time. To save both sets, you must first save one and then select and save the other.
Note !
Any changes to the parameters regarding the “parameter sets”, performed when enabled, will be lost at the next switching unless a Par set 0 to 1 copy command is sent. To save data permanently (even when the drive is switched off), send the Save parameters command (DRIVE CONFIG menu).
116
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
22.8 – FUNCTIONS/SPEED CAPTURE
This function allows the drive to capture a motor running due to inertia or driven by the load. The function is also enabled in case of an automatic restart after an alarm condition.
Main fields of application:
- Capturing a motor set in motion by the load (for example pump motors driven by the fluid)
- Capturing a motor connected directly to the power mains
- Capturing a motor running due to temporary disabling of the drive
- Capturing a motor that is running in the case of an automatic restart after an alarm
Note !
If the drive is enabled with the motor running and this function disabled, the drive could be blocked due to the intervention of the
Overcurrent or Undercurrent protections
Menu PAR Description
22.8.1 3350 Speed capture
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Disable
Min
0
This parameter is used to enable the function to capture a motor that is running.
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERW FV_
0 Disable
1 Alarm restart
2 Enable&restart
If set to 0 the capture running motor function is disabled. The output frequency starts from 0 and passes to the set reference value using the ramp.
If set to 1 the capture running motor function is executed at restart each time an alarm is automatically reset.
If set to 2 the capture running motor function is executed each time the drive is enabled and each time an alarm is automatically reset.
This function is available with Regulation mode = Flux vector CL (asynchronous and synchronous motors) or V/f control (asynchronous motors).
This function is not available with Regulation mode = Flux vector OL .
With Regulation mode = Flux vector CL the capture procedure consists of forcing the output frequency to the value measured by the encoder, and then bringing the motor speed to the reference value using the ramp
Flux vector CL
OutFreq
MotorSpd
OutCurr
Acceleration
Par 3366
Waiting for demagnetiz
Magnetiz
SpeedCapture_00.vsd
With Regulation mode = V/f control the capture procedure consists of altering the inverter output frequency until the actual motor speed is detected, then increasing the motor speed to the reference value using the ramp. The procedure can take several seconds, depending on the type of load and parameter settings. If this function is enabled on a motor at speed = 0 and drive speed reference = 0, the motor might start running until the moment the drive detects the actual motor speed, after which the motor speed passes to the speed reference setting, i.e. 0. The initial value of the output frequency depends on the condition that generated the
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
117
capture procedure. Various conditions are possible:
Condition
First enabling of the drive after power-on
Drive enabled and demagnetising for a time > Par 3376 Vf catch lastref dly
Drive enabled and demagnetising for a time < Par 3376 Vf catch lastref dly
Automatic restart after an alarm
Vf control
Frequency value
Par 3364 Vf catch start freq
Par 3364 Vf catch start freq
Last frequency before disabling the drive
Last frequency before the alarm occurred
Par 3368
Search time
OutFreq
MotorSpd
OutCurr
Par 3370 P gain
Par 3372 I gain
Speed search
Magnetiz
Acceleration
Par 3366
Waiting for demagnetiz
SpeedCapture_01.vsd
Menu PAR Description
22.8.2 3364 Vf catch start freq
UM Type
Hz FLOAT
FB BIT Def
(*)
Min
-500.0
Max
500.0
Acc Mod
ERWZ V
(*) Default: EU=50,0; USA = 60.0 (PAR 486 Drive region , 0 = EU; 1 = USA)
This parameter is used to configure the frequency at which the procedure to capture a motor that is running starts. This parameter is used if:
Condition
First enabling of the drive after power-on
Drive enabled and demagnetising for a time > Par 3376 Vf catch lastref dly
Frequency value
Par 3364 Vf catch start freq
Par 3364 Vf catch start freq
This parameter must be set to a frequency that is higher than the frequency at which the motor is running at the beginning of the capture procedure. If the conditions are not always identical the maximum frequency or a few
Hz below this must be set. The reference sign setting must be the same as the sign of the frequency at which the motor is running.
If a frequency value close to the actual frequency is set, the capture time is short. If there is a big difference between the frequency value setting and the actual frequency, the capture time is longer.
The recommended setting for this parameter is 0 if the function is enabled for use to capture a motor running due to a temporary disabling of the drive or to capture a motor running in the case of an automatic restart after an alarm; or in case of enabling after power-on or after prolonged periods of disabling, the motor speed is certainly 0.
Menu PAR Description
22.8.3 3366 Vf catch enable dly
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
1000
Min
10
Max
10000
Acc Mod
ERWZ V
This parameter is used to configure the time to wait for demagnetisation of the motor before executing the procedure to capture the motor that is running. The waiting time for demagnetisation is measured starting from the moment the drive detects that the conditions are OK to execute the capture procedure. This parameter is useful for automatic restarts after an alarm.
If the motor flux is not zero when the enable command is sent the drive might generate the Overcurrent alarm.
The value to set depends on the size of the motor. Large motors have a high rotor time constant and therefore
118
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
require a long demagnetisation time. Setting a higher value than necessary is not a problem.
Menu PAR Description
22.8.4 3368 Vf catch search time
UM s
Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
2.0
Min
1.0
Max
30.0
Acc Mod
ERW V
This parameter is used to configure the speed at which the output frequency changes for synchronisation with the motor running. It represents the time in which the frequency would change from 50 Hz to zero if the output current were equal to the drive continuous current.
The default setting is correct for most applications.
Low values require high current levels but guarantee fast synchronisation.
High values require low current levels but synchronisation takes longer.
During the synchronisation procedure the motor may change its speed of rotation. The longer the synchronisation phase the more evident the change in the speed of rotation.
Menu PAR Description
22.8.5 3370 Vf catch P gain
UM Type perc FLOAT
FB BIT Def
10.0
Min
0.0
Max
100.0
Acc Mod
ERW V
This parameter is used to set the proportional gain of the current regulator used by the procedure to capture a motor that is running. Values that are too low could trigger the Overcurrent protection. Changing this value is not recommended.
Menu PAR Description
22.8.6 3372 Vf catch I time
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
200
Min
200
Max
1000
Acc Mod
ERW V
This parameter is used to set the integral time of the current regulator used by the procedure to capture a motor that is running. Changing this value is not recommended.
Menu PAR Description
22.8.7 3376 Vf catch lastref dly
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
30000
Acc Mod
ERWZ V
This parameter is used to set the time within which the drive must be enabled in order to start the capture procedure at the output frequency present before disabling the drive. If the time that elapses from the moment the drive is disabled exceeds the time set in this parameter, the capture procedure starts from the frequency set in parameter 3364 Vf catch start freq .
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
119
22.9 – FUNCTIONS/POWER LOSS
120
This function controls a loss of power or temporary mains failure.
When the function is enabled the system stops with the controlled ramp; the power regenerated by the load sustains the DC link power supply so that the motor speed can be controlled. The speed of the motor is controlled for as long as power can be recovered (motor speed almost zero but not zero), after which the Undervoltage alarm is generated and the motor performs an uncontrolled stop due to inertia.
The function is only effective with loads that accumulate sufficient energy (typically loads with a high moment of inertia and which the moment the power loss occurs have a speed of rotation not close to zero). The function cannot be used for passive loads.
The function can only be used with Regulation mode = Flux vector CL (asynchronous and synchronous motors) and Regulation mode = V/f control (asynchronous motors).
The Powerloss function is enabled when the DC link voltage falls below a threshold configured internally as a function of the mains voltage at a value that is higher than the Undervoltage threshold. When the function is enabled the drive controls a stop with a user-definable deceleration ramp. In this phase the current limit is controlled by a regulator on the DC link voltage and the setpoint is a threshold configured internally as a function of the mains voltage at a value below the Overvoltage threshold.
The regulator envisages two setting parameters (proportional and integral) calculated in advance by the drive as a function of the size of the motor and plate data. If the regulator acts on the current limit the motor speed does not follow the set deceleration ramp. The function continues for as long as power can be recovered, after which the Undervoltage alarm is generated. If the mains supply is restored during the deceleration ramp phase, the user can configure how the drive should behave. The following options are available: continue in any case until reaching zero speed or stop the deceleration ramp and pass to the set reference.
The drive does not automatically recognise the fact that the mains supply has been restored. This information must be supplied from the outside via the Powerloss mains src digital input.
The presence of the braking unit prevents the intervention of the Overvoltage alarm and the function has the advantage of being able to stop the motor while guaranteeing the set time.
As the setpoint of the Powerloss function regulator is higher than the brake activation threshold, it is not enabled and the current limit is not altered to allow compliance with the set deceleration ramp time. The intervention of the braking unit dissipates the energy of the motor in the resistor, reducing the amount of power available to sustain the DC link and the time available to control stopping of the motor. The presence of the braking unit could mean that the speed of the motor from which no power can be recovered is higher than that with no braking unit.
The function can be used on machines with a single drive as well as on machines with several drives, the speeds of which must always be synchronised.
For machines with a single drive, enabling the Powerloss function is sufficient.
For machines with several drives, the DC links must be connected: the Powerloss function must only be enabled on the drive identified as the master and not on the slaves. The master drive is normally the one that controls the load with the highest inertia. The master drive sends the Powerloss nextratio signal with the ratio
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
between the motor speed and the speed reference. Line synchronisation can be achieved by connecting the
Powerloss nextratio output of the master to the Speed ratio src input (selection list L_VREF) of the slave drives. The master => slave connection can be achieved via analog signals or fieldbus.
To ensure correct operation of the Powerloss function, the following alarms must be configured as described below:
Since the speed reference and current limit are controlled internally by the Powerloss function, a difference could occur between the speed reference and motor speed with subsequent activation of the Perd Riferim alarm: to avoid this, set Par 4552 SpdRefLoss activity = Ignore
During the power failure, the power supply phase loss detection system might not work properly with subsequent activation of the Phaseloss alarm: to avoid this, set Par 4660 PhLoss activity=Ignore .
Powerloss
Drv enable
The mains supply is restored while the function is enabled
Power supply
Vdc
The drive switches itself off if the power supply is not restored
Speed ref
Speed
Speed ref
Powerloss
Next active
Powerloss
Ramp down
Powerloss
Next ratio
Detection possible when the external sensor detects that the mains supply has been restored
Speed
Menu PAR Description
22.9.1 3400 Powerloss function
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT
This parameter is used to enable the Powerloss function.
0 Disable
1 Enable
Def
Disable
Min
0 1
PowerLoss_01. vsd
Max Acc Mod
ERWZ F__
If set to 0 the Powerloss function is disabled. The Undervoltage alarm is generated in the event of a power failure.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
121
If set to 1 the Powerloss function is enabled. In case of a power failure the function is enabled to try to control the motor speed and prevent the intervention of the Undervoltage alarm.
Menu PAR Description
22.9.2 3402 Powerloss accel time
UM s
Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
10.0
Min
0.01
Max
100.0
Acc Mod
ERW F__
Setting of the acceleration time used in the Powerloss operating mode. The acceleration ramp time is used when Powerloss mode = Restart has been selected and must be adjusted to suit machine requirements.
Menu PAR Description
22.9.3 3404 Powerloss decel time
UM s
Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
2.0
Min
0.01
Max
100.0
Acc Mod
ERW F__
Setting of the deceleration time used during Powerloss operating mode.
The deceleration ramp time must be short enough (in case of low speeds) to allow the drive to enter regeneration mode quickly, otherwise the Undervoltage alarm is generated. If the deceleration ramp time setting is too short, when the drive enters regeneration mode it might not be able to control the DC link voltage and the
Overvoltage alarm would be generated.
Longer deceleration times are necessary at high motor speeds to prevent the Overvoltage alarm from being generated.
This parameter must be adjusted so as to reach a compromise between low speed and high speed motor operation.
Menu PAR Description
22.9.4 3410 Powerloss Vdcref
UM
V
Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
CALCF
Min
0.0
Max
CALCF
Acc Mod
ERWZS FV_
Setting of the voltage control limit on the DC-link during a controlled stop with loss of supply voltage The maximum value that can be set is the drive overvoltage limit.
Menu PAR Description
22.9.5 3420 Powerloss P gain
UM Type
A/V FLOAT
FB BIT Def
CALCF
Min
0
Max
100.000
Acc Mod
ERWS F__
Setting of the proportional gain during the Powerloss function.
Increase in case of Overvoltage error; the Undervoltage alarm can also be prevented by increasing the deceleration time.
Increase if the DC link voltage is set to a value other than the setpoint.
Menu PAR Description
22.9.6 3422 Powerloss I gain
UM Type ms FLOAT
FB BIT Def
CALCF
Setting of the integral gain during the Powerloss function.
Reduce if the DC link voltage is set to a value other than the setpoint.
Min
1.0
Max
1000.0
Acc Mod
ERWS F__
Menu PAR Description
22.9.7 3438 Powerloss mode
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def Min
Ramp down 0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERWZ F__
This parameter is used to configure the behaviour of the Powerloss function when the mains supply is restored.
It is possible to set whether the drive should continue at zero speed or return to the setpoint when the mains supply is restored. The drive does not automatically recognise the fact that the mains supply has been restored. This information must be supplied from the outside via the Powerloss mains src digital input.
0 Ramp down
1 Restart
122
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Example 1) End of ramp and mains supply not restored
The drive controls a deceleration with the ramp set in Powerloss decel time .
The drive automatically controls the DC link voltage and prevents the Overvoltage alarm.
If the mains supply is not restored close to a speed of zero, when there is insufficient regenerated power, the
Undervoltage alarm is generated and the drive may switch itself off.
Ramp down and mains supply not restored
Drv enable
The mains supply is not restored while the function is enabled
Power supply
Vdc
The drive switches itself off if the power supply is not restored
Speed ref
Speed
Speed ref
Powerloss
Next active
Powerloss
Ramp down
Powerloss
Next ratio
Speed
PowerLoss_02. vsd
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
123
124
Example 2) End of ramp and mains supply restored
The drive controls a deceleration with the ramp set in Powerloss decel time .
The drive automatically controls the DC link voltage and prevents the Overvoltage alarm.
If the mains supply is restored and the Mains voltage OK signal is applied, the drive passes to zero speed and remains enabled at zero speed. To restart disable and enable the drive.
Ramp down and mains supply restored
Drv enable
The mains supply is restored while the function is enabled
Power supply
Vdc
Speed ref
Speed
Speed ref
Powerloss
Next active
Powerloss
Ramp down
Powerloss
Next ratio
Speed
PowerLoss_03. vsd
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Example 3) Restart and mains supply not restored
The drive controls a deceleration with the ramp set in Powerloss decel time .
The drive automatically controls the DC link voltage and prevents the Overvoltage alarm.
If the mains supply is not restored close to a speed of zero, when there is insufficient regenerated power, the
Undervoltage alarm is generated and the drive may switch itself off.
Restart and mains supply not restored
Drv enable
The mains supply is not restored while the function is enabled
Power supply
Vdc
The drive switches itself off if the power supply is not restored
Speed ref
Speed
Speed ref
Powerloss
Next active
Powerloss
Ramp down
Powerloss
Next ratio
Speed
PowerLoss_04. vsd
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
125
Example 4) Restart and mains supply restored
The drive controls a deceleration with the ramp set in Powerloss decel time .
The drive automatically controls the DC link voltage and prevents the Overvoltage alarm.
If the mains supply is restored and the Mains voltage OK signal is applied, the drive immediately stops the deceleration ramp and executes the acceleration ramp set in Powerloss accel time to pass to the set reference.
Restart and mains supply restored
Drv enable
The mains supply is restored while the function is enabled
Power supply
Vdc
The drive switches itself off if the power supply is not restored
Detection possible when the external sensor detects that the mains supply has been restored
Speed ref
Speed
Speed ref
Powerloss
Next active
Powerloss
Ramp down
Powerloss
Next ratio
Speed
PowerLoss_05. vsd
Menu PAR Description
22.9.8 3440 Powerloss mains src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
6000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERWZ F__
This parameter is used to select the origin (source) of the Mains voltage OK signal. The signal to be associated with this function can be selected from the “L_DIGSEL2” selection list.
126
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
If the signal is not enabled it means the power supply is not present ( Mains voltage not OK ), whereas if the signal is enabled it means the power supply is present ( Mains voltage OK ).
In the default condition the origin of the Powerloss mains src signal is Zero .
The user must connect an external sensor to inform the drive of the mains supply status.
If the function is configured as Powerloss mode = Restart , when the Mains voltage OK signal is enabled the drive stops the deceleration ramp and passes to the set reference.
For machines with several drives the external sensor signal must only be connected to the master drive.
22.10 – FUNCTIONS/COMPARE
This function allows the comparison among two signals or values.
Menu PAR Description
22.10.1 3650 Dig compare input 1
UM Type FB BIT perc FLOAT 32
Def
0.0
Setting of the digital value of the first element of comparison.
Menu PAR Description
22.10.2 3652 Dig compare input 2
UM Type FB BIT perc FLOAT 32
Def
0.0
Setting of the digital value of the second element of comparison.
Min
-100.0
Min
-100.0
Max
100.0
Max
100.0
Acc
ERW FVS
Acc
Mod
Mod
ERW FVS
Menu PAR Description
22.10.3 3660 Compare input 1 src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 32
Def
3650
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal to be used as the first term of comparison. The values that can be selected in the compare function are listed in the “ L_CMP ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
22.10.4 3662 Compare input 2 src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 32
Def
3652
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal to be used as the second term of comparison. The values that can be selected in the compare function are listed in the “ L_CMP ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
22.10.5 3670 Compare function
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
None
Min
0
Max
8
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the compare function between Compare input 2 and Compare input 1 to enable Compare output
PAR 3676.
0 None
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
127
1 Inp1=Inp2
2 Inp1!=Inp2
3 Inp1<Inp2
4 Inp1>Inp2
5 |Inp1|=|Inp2|
6 |Inp1|!=|Inp2|
7 |Inp1|<|Inp2|
8 |Inp1|>|Inp2|
If set to 0 the comparator is not enabled
If set to 1 the comparator output is enabled when the value of Compare digital inp 1 is inside the window resulting from the value of Compare digital inp 2 ± the tolerance set via the Comparator Window .
If set to 2 the comparator output is enabled when the value of Compare digital inp 1 is not inside the window resulting from the value of Compare digital inp 2 ± the tolerance set via the Comparator Window .
If set to 3 the comparator output is enabled when Compare input 1 is less than Compare input 2 .
If set to 4 the comparator output is enabled when Compare input 1 is greater than Compare input 2 .
If set to 5 the comparator output is enabled when the value of Compare digital inp 1 is inside the window resulting from the absolute value of Compare digital inp 2 ± the tolerance set via the Comparator Window .
If set to 6 the comparator output is enabled when the absolute value of Compare digital inp 1 is not inside the window resulting from the absolute value of Compare digital inp 2 ± the tolerance set via the Comparator
Window .
If set to 7 the comparator output is enabled when the absolute value of Compare digital inp 1 is less than the absolute value of Compare digital inp 2 .
If set to 8 the comparator output is enabled when the absolute value of Digital compar inp1 is more than the absolute value of Digital compar in2 .
Menu PAR Description
22.10.6 3672 Compare window
UM Type perc FLOAT
FB BIT Def
0.0
Setting of the tolerance window for comparing the Compare input 1 and Compare input 2 signals.
Menu PAR Description
22.10.7 3674 Compare delay
UM s
Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
0.0
Min
0.0
Max
30.0
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the delay for signalling the result of the comparison.
Min
0.0
Max
100.0
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Menu PAR Description
22.10.8 3676 Compare output
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
The status of the comparator output is displayed:
0 The result of the set comparison is negative
1 The result of the set comparison is positive
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ER FVS
128
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
22.11 – FUNCTIONS/PADS
The general variables are used to exchange data between the various components of a Bus system. They are similar to the variables of a PLC. The basic structure of the system is illustrated below. Pads can be used, for example, to send information from a fieldbus to an optional card. All Pads can be read and written.
The Pads can also be used to exchange data with an MDPlc application installed in the drive. See the MDPlc manual for more details.
PROFIBUS DP, etc.
RS 485
ESC
E
FWD
REV
LOC
REM
RST
DISP
CUST
Keypad Options (Bus Interface ...)
PAD 1
PAD 9
0
PAD 2
PAD 10
0
0
PAD 3
PAD 11
0
PAD 4
0
0
PAD 12
0
PAD 5
PAD 13
0
0
PAD 6
PAD 14
0
0
PAD 7
PAD 15
0
0
PAD 8
PAD 16
0
0
0
Menu PAR Description
22.11.1 3700 Pad 1
22.11.2 3702 Pad 2
22.11.3 3704 Pad 3
22.11.4 3706 Pad 4
22.11.5 3708 Pad 5
22.11.6 3710 Pad 6
22.11.7 3712 Pad 7
22.11.8 3714 Pad 8
22.11.9 3716 Pad 9
22.11.10 3718 Pad 10
22.11.11 3720 Pad 11
22.11.12 3722 Pad 12
22.11.13 3724 Pad 13
22.11.14 3726 Pad 14
UM Type FB BIT
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
Def
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Max
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
22.11.15 3728 Pad 15
22.11.16 3730 Pad 16
INT32 32
INT32 32
0
0
0
0
0
0
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
Setting of general, 32 Bit variables. PAD parameters can be used as supporting parameters to send values written by the fieldbus, serial line, etc. to analog or digital outputs.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
129
22.12 - FUNCTIONS/VDC CONTROL
This function is used to control the voltage and power recovered in the DC link during regeneration (e.g. braking ramp). When this function is enabled, if the power regenerated by the load during braking increases the DC link voltage, the drive prevents triggering of the Overvoltage alarm by limiting the regenerated current.
The Vdc control function is enabled automatically (if parameter 3450 Vdc control function is set to 1) when the DC link voltage exceeds a preset threshold, depending on the mains voltage and lower than the Overvoltage threshold.
This threshold is also used for the regulator that controls the regenerated current limit.
If the Vdc control function is enabled, the motor speed need not follow the set ramp.
If the regulator is unable to limit the regenerated power during the deceleration ramp and prevent the Overvoltage alarm from being generated, the ramp can be temporarily blocked by setting parameter 754 Ramp freeze src using the information in Vdc ctrl ramp freeze .
The function remains enabled until the power regenerated by the load is cancelled and the DC link voltage falls below the disable threshold (below the enable threshold).
Menu PAR Description
22.12.1 3450 Vdc control function
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Disable
This parameter is used to enable the Vdc control function .
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
0 Disable
1 Enable
If set to 0 the function is disabled: in case of power recovery the Sovratensione alarm is generated.
If set to 1 the function is enabled: in case of power recovery the function is enabled and attempts to control the current regenerated by the motor and prevent the Overvoltage alarm from being generated.
Menu PAR Description
22.12.21 3470 Vdc control P gain
UM Type
A/V FLOAT
FB BIT Def
CALCF
Min
0.0
Max
100.000
Acc Mod
ERWS FVS
Setting of the proportional gain used during the Vdc control function . The set value must be increased if the
Overvoltage alarm is generated. The Sovratensione alarm can also be prevented by lengthening the deceleration ramp. The value of this parameter must also be increased if the DC link voltage is set to a value other than the setpoint
Menu PAR Description
22.12.3 3472 Vdc control I time
UM Type ms FLOAT
FB BIT Def
CALCF
Min
1.0
Max
1000.0
Acc Mod
ERWS FVS
Setting of the integral time used during the Vdc control function link voltage is set to a value other than the setpoint.
. The set value must be reduced if the DC
130
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
22.13 - FUNCTIONS/BRAKE CONTROL
This function is used to control the motor parking brake.
Do not use the Brake control and the Speed Capture functions together, as the latter, if enabled before the Start command, attempts to execute synchronisation with the motor speed and with the brake closed.
Menu PAR Description
22.13.1 3170 Brake control funct
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT
This parameter is used to enable the Brake control funct .
Def
Disable
Min
0
Max
3
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
0 Disable
1 Standard
2 Hoist mode 1
3 Hoist mode 2
If set to 0 the function is disabled:
If set to 1 the function is enabled.
Set to 2 to enable the Hoist mode 1 function for hoisting applications using the standard drive.
Set to 3 to enable the Hoist mode 2 function for hoisting applications using the drive with the special “Positioner” application.
In “ Hoist mode 1 ” all the parameters between PAR 3170 and PAR 3186 are used, whereas in “ Hoist mode
2 ” PAR 3188 and 3190 are also used, but parameter 3182 is ineffective (since it is the “torque” value that is considered, not the “current”).
If the drive is in “V/f” control mode, the only possible selection is “ Standard ” and “ Hoist mode 1 ”.
If “ Hoist mode 2 ” is enabled and the drive is thus in “ Flux vector CL ” or “ Flux vector OL ” mode, when switching to “ V/f control ” the brake control mode (PAR 3170) is automatically set to “ Disable ”.
The following can be selected, depending on the control mode used:
1) V/f control -> “Standard” ; “Hoist mode 1” (for asynchronous motors)
2) Flux vector CL -> “Standard” ; “Hoist mode 1” ; “Hoist mode 2”
3) Flux vector OL -> “Standard” ; “Hoist mode 1” ; “Hoist mode 1”
Standard
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
131
132
Opening phase:
When the drive receives the Start command it releases the brake immediately. To make sure that the brake has actually been released, the references are disabled for a time that can be set in parameter 3172 Brake open delay .
Closing phase:
When the drive receives a stop command and the Ref is 0 signal, it applies the parking brake after a time that can be set in parameter 3174 Brake close delay . Set parameter 3174 Brake close delay to a high enough value to be sure the motor has actually stopped before enabling the brake.
If this function is enabled, the brake is applied immediately if one or more alarms occur or if the drive is disabled.
“Hoist mode 1”
With parameter PAR 3194 Brake ramp freeze you can freeze the velocity reference during the brake opening and closing phases.
If PAR 3194 = “ Disable ,” “ Hoist mode 1 ” does not use velocity reference freezing.
If PAR 3194 = “ Enable ,” “ Hoist mode 1 ” uses velocity reference freezing (diagram shown below).
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Opening phase:
Setting of parameters 3172, 3176, 3182, 3184, 3186.
When the drive is in the “ Drive ready ” and “ Start ” conditions (following the enable and start commands) the brake is opened (i.e. the signal corresponding to PAR 3180 Brake control mon , which must in turn be assigned to a digital output, is raised) provided a further condition, defined by setting parameters 3182, 3184,
3186, is met once the Speed setpoint (PAR 664, considered as an absolute value) has reached the value set in PAR 3176 Brake open spd thr .
Parameter 3182 Brake open thr sel is used to establish whether the comparison is to be made with the drive output current (value 1, Output curr ) or with the torque supplied (value 0, “ Torque ref% ”).
Parameters 3184 Brake open thr and 3186 Brake open thr src are used to define the value of the threshold at which the comparison is made (this can also be set via analog input, fieldbus, Pad, FastLink…).
If the value of parameter 3182 Brake open thr sel is equal to Output curr , the brake is opened provided one of the following 3 conditions is met:
• The threshold defined by parameters 3184/3186 is positive, and the value of parameter 250 Output current is higher than the threshold.
• The threshold defined by parameters 3184/3186 is negative, and the value of parameter 250 Output current is less than the threshold.
• The threshold is zero, therefore the brake is always opened.
If the value of parameter 3182 Brake open thr sel is equal to “ Torque ref% ”, the brake is opened provided one of the following 3 conditions is met:
• The threshold defined by parameters 3184/3186 is positive, and the value of parameter 2386 Torque ref % is higher than the threshold.
• The threshold defined by parameters 3184/3186 is negative, and the value of parameter 2386 Torque ref
% is less than the threshold.
• The threshold is zero, therefore the brake is always opened.
Threshold values are expressed as a percentage and refer to the rated current or torque values of the drive.
Parameter 3172 Brake open delay can be set to define the delay between the moment the double opening condition occurs (speed reference + current or torque) and the time the open command is actually sent by the drive.
If the speed reference condition is met but not the current or torque condition, the drive enters a Brake fault alarm condition, which can be managed via parameter 4684 Brake fault activity , (set by default to Disable).
Closing phase:
If the drive is disabled (also due to any alarms that are capable of disabling it) the close brake command is sent immediately, regardless of the operating condition.
For normal closing, set parameters 3174, 3178.
When the brake has been opened, it waits for the “ Stop ” command, then sends the close command when the speed reference is less than the value set in parameter 3178 Brake close spd thr.
Parameter 3174 Brake close delay can be used to enter a delay between the moment the closing condition occurs and that in which the close command is actually sent by the drive. After the closing condition, it is also possible to restart the drive within the time set in Brake close delay, by sending the normal “ Start ” command. In that case the timer is reset and the drive waits for the closing condition again, which starts when a new “ Stop ” command is sen
Avvertenza
In V/f control mode, since there is no precise control of the actual speed and torque, the ‘Speed ref loss’ alarm is not managed, which means that external controls must be used to detect any possible loss of a suspended load.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
133
“Hoist mode 2”:
This mode can only be used when the “Positioner” application is installed in the drive.
134
Opening phase:
Setting of parameters 3172, 3176, 3184, 3186, 3188 and 2382.
Parameter 2382 Torque ref 1 src (menu 20 - TORQUE CONFIG) must be set to PAR 3192 Brake open thr mon .
Parameter 3182 Brake open thr sel is not considered, in that regardless of its value, the values considered are always to be taken as “torque” and not “current” (since the positioner can only be used in Flux vector CL mode).
When the “ Drive ready ” (enable drive) signal switches from 0->1 the open brake command is sent immediately. At the same time, parameter 3192 Brake open thr mon , added to the TORQUE CONFIG block, starts to increase in value from 0 up to the threshold value defined on the output of the selector associated with the pair of parameters 3184/3186. This value increases over a ramping up time settable in parameter 3188 Brake torque time . Parameter 3188 must be set to a value close to the brake open delay (i.e. the time it takes for the brake to be opened after the open command is sent). This ramp can be monitored via parameter 2392 Torque ref 1 mon , visible in the diagrams of GF_eXpress.
When the Start positioner command (in the list of commands of the “Positioner” application) is sent, the value of parameter 664 Speed setpoint is increased. When this speed reference reaches the threshold defined by
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
parameter 3176 Brake open spd thr (and in any case not before a time equal to PAR 3172 Brake open delay , which is always measured from the moment the brake opens) the pre-torque value injected ( Brake open thr mon ) after opening is reset to 0 with a ramping down time that is always equal to the value of 3188 Brake torque time .
In the transient opening phase the “positioner” could generate a speed reference value that is higher than the
“ Brake open spd thr ” threshold. This, in turn, could result in the removal of the pre-torque due to the incorrect assumption that a positioner has started. To prevent this, parameter 3172 Brake open delay can be set so that the comparison with the speed reference is only performed after a certain delay.
In this mode the “ Brake fault ” alarm can never be triggered as it is not envisaged in “ Hoist mode 2 ”.
Closing phase:
When the drive is disabled (also due to any alarms that are capable of disabling it) a close brake command is sent immediately, regardless of the operating condition.
For normal closing, set parameters 3174, 3178 and 3190.
When the brake opening phase is complete and after a delay equal to at least the value of 3190 Brake close wait (measured from the moment pre-torque removal ends) it waits for the speed reference to fall below the value set in 3178 Brake close spd thr .
Parameter 3174 Brake close delay can be used to enter a delay between the moment the closing condition occurs and that in which the close command is actually sent by the drive.
After the brake closing condition has occurred (within the time set in Brake close delay) it is also possible to restart the drive by sending a new positioning command. In that case the timer is reset and the drive waits for the closing condition again, which occurs when the speed reference falls to below the value of Brake close spd thr and after the delay set in Brake close wait .
Parameter 3190 Brake close wait can thus reasonably be set to a value that is slightly less than the positioning time. It ensures that within the set time the speed reference can also fall below the Brake close spd thr value without the close command being sent.
Max
60.0
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Menu PAR Description
22.13.2 3172 Brake open delay
UM Type s FLOAT
FB BIT Def
0.20
Setting of the delay for opening an external mechanical brake.
Menu PAR Description
22.13.4 3176 Brake open spd thr
UM Type rpm INT16
FB BIT
Setting of the brake opening speed threshold value.
Min
0.0
Menu PAR Description
22.13.3 3174 Brake close delay
UM Type s FLOAT
FB BIT Def
0.20
Min
0.0
Setting of the delay to reach the motor zero speed before closing the brake.
Def
0
Min
0
Max
60.0
Max
CALCI
Acc
ERW FVS
Acc
Mod
Mod
ERW FVS
Menu PAR Description
22.13.5 3178 Brake close spd thr
UM Type rpm INT16
FB BIT
Setting of the brake closing speed threshold value.
Menu PAR Description
22.13.7 3184 Brake open thr
UM Type perc FLOAT
FB BIT
Threshold value at which the comparison is made.
Def
0
Min
0
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Menu PAR Description
22.13.6 3182 Brake open thr sel
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def Min
Output curr 0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Selecting of the type of comparison between the threshold value of open brake torque and the torque value or output current of the drive.
0 Torque ref%
1 Output curr
Def
10
Min
-200.0
Max
200.0
Acc Mod
ERWZS FVS
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
135
Menu PAR Description
22.13.8 3186 Brake open thr src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16/32BIT
Def
3184
Min
0
Max
16384
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal to be used.
The values that can be selected in the compare function are listed in the “ L_TCREF ” selection list.
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Menu PAR Description
22.13.9 3188 Brake torque time
UM s
Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
0.10
Min
0.01
Max
60.0
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Ramp time of parameter 3192 Brake open thr mon to move from the value up to the threshold value defined by PAR 3184 / 3186 (only if Hoist mode 2 is selected).
Menu PAR Description
22.13.10 3190 Brake close wait
UM s
Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
2
Min
0.0
Max
60.0
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Delay before measuring the speed reference (equal to the time from opening the brake + the time up until removal of the pre-torque). Only if Hoist mode 2 has been selected.
Menu PAR Description
22.13.11 3194 Brake ramp freeze
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Disable
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
With this parameter you can freeze the velocity reference during brake opening and closing in “ Hoist Mode 1 ”.
0 Disable
1 Enable
22.14 - FUNCTIONS/DIMENSION FACT
The function factor allows the drive speed to be expressed in a unit of measure other than rpm, generally referred to as user units. A conversion factor is used to convert the value from rpm to user units. This can be set as a fraction using two parameters:
PAR 3900 Dim factor num and PAR 3902 Dim factor den .
The conversion formula is rpm = Dim factor num / Dim factor den * user unit
The unit of measure displayed for parameters expressed in user units is user definable, but requires the use of the
GF-eXpress configurator. The text of the unit of measure is set in PAR 3904 Dim factor text . Since this is a UINT32 it can contain a maximum of 4 characters.
The default values of the parameters that define the function factor are:
PAR 3900 Dim factor num = 1; PAR 3902 Dim factor den = 1; PAR 3904 Dim factor text = “rpm“
The following parameters expressed by default in rpm can be displayed in user units:
PAR Description
628 Ramp setpoint
664 Speed setpoint
260 Motor speed
600 Dig ramp ref 1
602 Dig ramp ref 2
604 Dig ramp ref 3
620 Ramp ref 1 mon
622 Ramp ref 2 mon
624 Ramp ref 3 mon
626 Ramp ref out mon
634 Ramp ref top lim
636 Ramp ref bottom lim
630 Reference skip set
632 Reference skip band
640 Dig speed ref 1
642 Dig speed ref 2
660 Speed ref 1 mon
662 Speed ref 2 mon
UM UU rpm X rpm X rpm X rpm X rpm X rpm X rpm X rpm X rpm X rpm X rpm X rpm X rpm rpm rpm X rpm X rpm X rpm X
PAR Description
810 Multi reference 5
812 Multi reference 6
814 Multi reference 7
816 Multi reference 8
818 Multi reference 9
820 Multi reference 10
822 Multi reference 11
824 Multi reference 12
826 Multi reference 13
828 Multi reference 14
830 Multi reference 15
852 Multi ref out mon
870 Mpot setpoint
876 Mpot top lim
878 Mpot bottom lim
894 Mpot output mon
910 Jog setpoint
920 Jog output mon rpm rpm rpm rpm
UM UU rpm X rpm X rpm X rpm X rpm X rpm X rpm X rpm X rpm X rpm X rpm X rpm X rpm rpm
136
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
670 Speed ref top lim
672 Speed ref bottom lim
680 Full scale speed
760 Ramp outmon
800 Multi reference 0
802 Multi reference 1
804 Multi reference 2
806 Multi reference 3
808 Multi reference 4 rpm X rpm X rpm rpm X rpm X rpm X rpm X rpm X rpm X
930 Reference 0 thr
940 Speed 0 thr
950 Speed threshold 1
952 Speed threshold 2
962 Set speed error
968 Dig set speed ref
970 Speed threshold 3
972 Speed thr hysteresis
If a function factor is set, all the parameters in the above table are converted into user units.
rpm rpm rpm rpm rpm rpm rpm rpm
Calculation of the minimum and maximum values of parameters “Dim factor num” and “Dim factor den”
Calculation of the minimum and maximum values of parameters “ Dim factor num ” and “ Dim factor den ”.
Limits must be included when setting the values of PAR 3900 Dim factor num and PAR 3902 Dim factor den to prevent the internal variables of the drive moving out of range.
Fixed limits for each of the two parameters cannot be defined since it is the ratio between the two that must be limited and because this limit also depends on parameter 680 Full scale speed .
There is the possibility of an overflow depending on the order in which the two parameters PAR 3900 Dim factor num and PAR 3902 Dim factor den are set and their initial value.
The conditions in which an overflow could occur are described in the table below.
Initial value
Den = 1 Num = 1
Den = 1 Num = 1
Den = 30 Num = 10
Den = 30 Num = 10
Values to be set
Den 30 – Num 10
Den 30 – Num 10
Den 1 – Num 1
Den 1 – Num 1
Order
Num – Den
Den – Num
Num – Den
Den – Num
Overflow
No
Si
Si
No
If an overflow occurs when setting one of the two parameters, the other parameter is automatically set to the same value so that the conversion value is equal to 1.
Sent via the configurator
If the parameters are sent by the GF-eXpress configurator, they are written in a set order and an intermediate overflow could occur while setting valid values.
If the value of the first parameter sent by the configurator generates an overflow, the second parameter is set to the same value as the first (this temporarily forces the dimension factor to 1); when the second parameter is written the dimension factor returns to the correct value.
Changing the end of scale speed
When modifying PAR 680 Full scale speed , parameters PAR 3900 Dim factor num and PAR 3902 Dim factor den are forced to 1.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
137
Menu PAR Description
22.14.1 3900 Dim factor num
Numerator dimension factor
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT
Menu PAR Description
22.14.2 3902 Dim factor den
Denominator dimension factor
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT
Def
1
Def
1
Min
1
Min
1
Max
65535
Max
65535
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Menu PAR Description
22.14.3 3904 Dim factor text
UM Type
UINT32
FB BIT Def
7172210
Min
0
Max
0
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
The unit of measure displayed for parameters expressed in user units is user definable but requires the use of the configurator. The text of the unit of measure can contain up to a maximum of 4 characters.
22.15 - FUNCTIONS/CONTROL MODE
Note! Function available only when PAR 552 Control mode select is set [1] Flux Vector CL or [2] Flux Vector OL .
Menu PAR Description
22.15.1 556 Control mode select
UM
Selection of the drive control mode.
Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Ramp
Min
0
Max
2
Acc Mod
ERWZ F_S
0 Torque
1 Speed
2 Ramp
In torque control (0 - Torque) the reference and load of the motor determine its speed and direction of rotation. Symmetrical torque limits can be set, for each direction of rotation and for motor/generator operation. This type of control is only available in the Flux vector CL control mode. In this mode the Ramp function is not used to generate the drive speed reference so it can be used in stand-alone mode.
In speed control (1 - Speed) the reference arrives straight after the ramp circuit, enabling an extremely rapid response to signal variations. This is ideal for applications that require a highly dynamic response. This type of control is available in the Flux vector CL and Flux vector OL control modes. In this mode the Ramp function is not used to generate the drive speed reference so it can be used in stand-alone mode.
In control with ramp (2 - Ramp) the speed reference is applied to the input of the “ Ramp ” block and is produced by the “ Ramp ref ” block. This allows setting of both the acceleration/deceleration times and the ramp time (linear or S-shaped with customizable jerks). This type of control is available in all control.
138
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu PAR Description
22.15.2 6200 Ctrl mode src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16BIT
Def
556
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERWZ F_S
Selection of source of Control Mode function. The parameter to be assigned to this function is selected from the “ L_CTRLMODE ” selection list.
If IPA 6200 = Control mode select , IPA6208 value is set thru IPA556.
If IPA 6200 = Ctrl mode sel mon, IPA6208 value is set thru IPA6206.
If IPA 6200 is a PAD , the PAD value will be considered.
Menu PAR Description
22.15.3 6202 Ctrl mode sel 0 src
22.15.4 6204 Ctrl mode sel 1 src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16BIT
LINK 16BIT
Selection of the drive control mode thru digital inputs
Ctrl mode sel 0 src
0
0
1
Ctrl mode sel 1 src
0
1
0
0
1
2
Def
6000
6000
Torque
Speed
Ramp
Min
0
0
Max
16384
16384
Acc Mod
ERWZ F_S
ERWZ F_S
Menu PAR Description
22.15.5 6206 Ctrl mode sel mon
UM Type
UINT32
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
3
Acc Mod
ER F_S
Monitoring of the selection done thru the IPA6202 Ctrl mode sel 0 src and IPA6204 Ctrl mode sel 1 src.
Menu PAR Description
22.15.6 6208 Ctrl mode mon
UM Type FB BIT
ENUM
Def
Torque
Min
0
Max
0
Acc Mod
ER F_S
Torque-Speed-Ramp selection done thru the IPA6200 “Ctrl mode src, IPA6202 Ctrl mode sel 0 src and
IPA6204 Ctrl mode sel 1 src.
0 Torque
1 Speed
2 Ramp
22.16 - FUNCTIONS/TEMP CONTROL
This function basically includes two comparators with hysteresis. You can manage temperature signals such as external solenoids to command activation of cooling systems for the drive and/or motor via digital outputs.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
139
Menu PAR Description
22.16.1 3500 Drv temp src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 32BIT
Def
6000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of signal origin (source) for management of a temperature signal. The parameter to be assigned to this function is selected from the “ L_TEMPCTRL ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
22.16.2 3504 Drv temp thr
UM Type FB BIT degC INT32
Setting of trip threshold for an alarm signal.
Def
45
Min
1
Max
100
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Menu PAR Description
22.16.3 3508 Drv temp hys
UM Type FB BIT degC INT32
Def
2
Setting of a tolerance band for the trip threshold set in PAR 3504.
Min
0
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Menu PAR Description
22.16.4 3502 Mot temp src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 32BIT
Def
6000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of signal origin (source) for management of a temperature signal. The parameter to be assigned to this function is selected from the “ L_TEMPCTRL ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
22.16.5 3506 Mot temp thr
UM Type FB BIT degC INT32
Setting of trip threshold for an alarm signal.
Def
45
Min
1
Max
100
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Menu PAR Description
22.16.6 3510 Mot temp hys
UM Type FB BIT degC INT32
Def
2
Setting of a tolerance band for the trip threshold set in PAR 3506.
Min
0
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
140
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
23 – COMMUNICATION
23.1 – COMMUNICATION/RS485
The ADV200 drive is provided with a standard port (9 pole sub-D connector: XS) for connecting the RS485 serial line used for drive-PC point-to-point communication (via the GF-eXpress configuration software) or for the multidrop connection.
The RS485 serial line format is: 8 data bits, no parity and one stop bit.
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Menu PAR Description
23.1.1 3800 Drive address
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
1
Min
1
Max
255
Setting of the address to which the drive responds when connected to the RS485 serial line.
Menu PAR Description
23.1.2 3802 Serial baudrate
0 9600
1 19200
2 38400
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
38400
Setting of the RS485 serial communication speed (Baud Rate).
Min
0
Max
2
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Menu PAR Description
23.1.3 3810 Serial parameter
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
None,8,1
Setting of the format of the RS485 serial communication data.
0 None,8,1
1 None,8,2
2 Even,8,1
3 Odd,8,1
Min
0
Max
3
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Menu PAR Description
23.1.4 3804 Serial protocol
UM Type
ENUM
Setting of the serial communication protocol:
FB BIT Def
Modbus
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
0 Modbus
1 Jbus
Setting to 0 selects the Modbus RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) serial communication protocol.
Setting to 1 selects the Jbus serial communication protocol. The Jbus protocol is functionally identical to the Modbus, except for the different numbering of addresses: in the Modbus these start from zero (0000 = 1st address) while in the JBUS they start from one (0001 = 1st address) and maintain this difference throughout numbering.
Menu PAR Description
23.1.5 3806 Serial delay
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
1000
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the minimum delay between the drive receiving the last byte and starting its response. This delay avoids conflicts on the serial line when the RS485 interface that is used has not been pre-set for automatic Tx/
Rx switching. The parameter only concerns the use of the standard RS485 serial line.
Example: if the delay in Tx/Rx switching on the master is a maximum of 20ms, the Ser answer delay parameter must be set to at least 20ms: 22ms
Menu PAR Description
23.1.6 3808 Serial swap data
UM Type
BIT
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
This parameter enables the exchange of the reading of the High and Low parts of the words for FLOAT,
UINT32, INT32 type parameters when using the Modbus protocol.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
141
23.2 – COMMUNICATION/FIELDBUS CONFIG
Menu PAR Description
23.2.1 4000 Fieldbus type
UM Type
ENUM
Setting of the type of fieldbus to be used.
FB BIT
0 Off
1 CanOpen
2 DeviceNet
3 Profibus
10 DS402
30 Profidrive
40 Rte
If set to 0 no fieldbus is selected.
If set to 1 the CanOpen fieldbus profile is selected.
If set to 2 the ProfiBus-DP fieldbus profile is selected.
If set to 3 the DeviceNet fieldbus profile is selected.
If set to 10 the DS402 fieldbus is selected.
If set to 30 the Profidrive fieldbus is selected.
If set to 40 the Real Time Ethernet fieldbus is selected.
Def
Off
Min
0
Menu PAR Description
23.2.2 4004 Fieldbus baudrate
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT
Setting of the communication network speed (Baud Rate).
Def
500k
0 Auto
1 125k
2 250k
3 500k
4 1M
5 9600
6 19200
7 93750
8 187.5k
9 1.5M
10 3M
11 6M
12 12M
Min
0
Menu PAR Description
23.2.3 4006 Fieldbus address
UM Type
INT16
FB BIT Def
3
Setting of the node address of the drive when connected to the network.
Min
0
Max
5
Max
12
Max
255
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Menu PAR Description
23.2.4 4010 Fieldbus M->S enable
UM
Setting of fieldbus data updating.
Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Enable
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
0 Disable
1 Enable
If set to 0 , the possibility of sending commands and references from the drive PLC via the fieldbus is disabled.
If set to 1 the possibility of sending commands and references from the drive PLC via the fieldbus is enabled.
142
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu PAR Description
23.2.5 4012 Fieldbus alarm mode
UM Type
INT32
FB BIT
Setting of the Opt Bus Fault alarm generation mode.
0 Off
1 On
Def
0
If set to 0 the alarm is only generated if the drive is enabled.
If set to 1 the alarm is generated even with the drive disabled.
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Menu PAR Description
23.2.6 4014 Fieldbus state
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Stop
Min
0
Max
9
Acc
R
The logic status of the fieldbus connection is displayed. The value depends on the type of bus that is used.
The following logic states are displayed if the CANopen or Rte fieldbus is selected:
0 Stop
1 PreOperational
2 Operational
The following logic states are displayed if the Profibus fieldbus is selected:
3 Error
4 WaitPRM
5 WaitCFG
6 DataExchange
7 DPError
Mod
FVS
The following logic states are displayed if the Rte fieldbus is selected:
8 SafeOp
9 Init
Menu PAR Description
23.2.7 4398 RTE protocol
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
None
Min
0
The Real Time Ethernet protocol implemented on the expansion card is displayed.
0 None
1 Ethercat
2 EthernetIP
3 GdNet
4 Profinet
5 ModbusTCP
6 Powerlink
Max
6
Acc Mod
ER FVS
Menu PAR Description
23.2.8 5608 IP address
UM Type FB BIT
UINT32
Def
0
Display of DCP address set via configuration of Profinet node.
Min
0
Max Acc Mod
4294967295 ER FVS
23.3 – COMMUNICATION/FIELDBUS M2S
Configuration of input data
There are 16 groups of parameters, with the same structure, for configuring data to be exchanged cyclically with the fieldbus. Each group permits the exchange of a single datum, which corresponds to a single drive parameter.
The data written by the Master (a PLC, PC or control panel) to the Slave (the drive) can be configured in the COMMU-
NICATION/FIELDBUS M2S menu, hence the name of the M->S menu:
Parameter for setting input data:
It must contain a valid IPA corresponding to the parameter to be written, or 0 if sys (PAR 4022...4172 Fieldbus M->Sn sys ) is Fill or Mdplc .
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
143
For src (Source) parameters, if you select PAR 4024 Fieldbus M->S1 mon in the corresponding enum, the value of parameter 4020 is automatically set to the IPA of the src .
E.g.: if PAR 4020 Fieldbus M->S1 ipa = 610 then PAR 610 Ramp ref 1 src = PAR 4020 Fieldbus M->S1 ipa .
For src parameters with a FB type other than 0, the datum coming to the fieldbus is not written in the enum selection but directly in the mon associated with the src .
E.g.: PAR 4020 Fieldbus M->S1 ipa = 610, the reference from the bus is sent to PAR 620 Ramp ref 1 mon , it does not modify the selection of PAR 610 Ramp ref 1 src which continues to be set to PAR 4020 Fieldbus M->S1 ipa .
If it contains a valid IPA and is forced to 0 the corresponding sys parameter assumes the value of Fill (16 or 32 depending on the previous setting), to guarantee that the structure of the exchanged data area is not changed.
PAR 4022 Fieldbus M->S1 sys Format of the datum to exchange
This parameter is automatically adjusted to the recommended value when the corresponding PAR 4020...4170
Fieldbus M->Sn mon is modified. Although the automatic value is user-definable, acceptable values depend on the datum
IPA parameter: some combinations are not allowed and generate a configuration alarm at restart.
Values:
• Not assigned : if set to “ Not assigned ” this and all subsequent groups (regardless of their sys) are not part of the data exchanged, regardless of the IPA.
• Fill16/32 : the datum is exchanged on the fieldbus but not written in any parameter.
• Eu : the datum is exchanged in 16-bit signed integer format with the parameter unit configured in the corresponding IPA or, in the case of src with the corresponding mon (e.g.: if PAR 4020 Fieldbus M->S1 ipa
= PAR 610 Ramp ref 1 src and PAR 4022 Fieldbus M->S1 sys = Eu the datum is in rpm), multiplied by div. This setting is only possible for some parameters. See the table of FBUS types in the list of parameters. For these parameters the datum is exchanged every ms.
• Eu_float : Eu_float: same as Eu, but the datum is in floating point 32-bit IEEE754 single precision format.
• Count16/32 : the datum is exchanged in internal units (see scaling table) every ms (e.g.: if PAR 4020
Fieldbus M->S1 IPA = 610, PAR 610 Ramp ref 1 src and PAR 4022 Fieldbus M->S1 sys = Count16 the datum is scaled so that a value of 0x4000 produces a reference equal to PAR 680 Full scale speed ).
This setting is only possible for some parameters. See the table of FBUS types in the list of parameters: if the field is empty Count cannot be set in the parameter. Some parameters permit the use of Count16
(usually values in which there is no need to exchange the least significant 16 bits) and Count32, according to the following rule: if FBUS = 32bit only Count32 can be set, if 16hi or 16lo Count32 and Count16 can both be set, indicating which word of the parameter is actually used. If Count32 is used and the internal type of the parameter is FLOAT the datum must be exchanged in floating point IEEE754 single precision format, otherwise as an integer (signed or unsigned, again according to the internal type).
• MdPlc16/32 : this indicates that the datum is for use by the MdPlc application, which will use the value of PAR 4024...4174 Fieldbus M->Sn mon accordingly. If set to MdPlc16 the 16 bits of the low part of the mon are exchanged, if set to MdPlc32 all 32 bits are exchanged. All this applies if PAR 4020...4170
Fieldbus M->Sn mon = 0, otherwise it behaves in the same way as Count.
• Par16/32 : this is the default setting for all parameters with FB type empty so that data cannot be exchanged at 1 ms and the datum is updated in background. The datum format depends on the format of the parameter and the setting: with Par16 the datum is a 16-bit integer (signed or unsigned, according to the external type of the parameter) with the same unit of measure as the selected parameter (multiplied by div); Par16 is only available if the parameter is not actually a 32-bit one (e.g. it is not possible for iPad and Compare). With Par32 the format is float if the external type of the parameter is float, otherwise it is integer, always with the unit of the parameter. Parameters with FB type not empty can also be exchanged as PAR, according to the same rules listed above.
If using the CANopen fieldbus, the sys is also used to structure the data area in 8-byte PDOs. The PDOs are created starting from the first group and it is necessary to guarantee that the data are contained in the PDO. Therefore, for example, a setting with PAR 4022 Fieldbus M->S1 sys = Count32, PAR 4032 Fieldbus M->S2 sys = Count16, PAR 4042
Sys M->S3 Fieldbus = Count32 is not valid, as the datum in group 3 would straddle the first two 2 PDOs. In these cases, shorter PDOs can be generated by using the Count setting with IPA 0 (in the example PAR 4040 IPA M->S3
144
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Fieldbus = 0, PAR 4042 Fieldbus M->S3 sys = Count16, PAR 4050 Fieldbus M->S4 ipa = IPA of the parameter that was previously in 3 and PAR 4052 Fieldbus M->S4 sys = Count32, thus using a first PDO with 6 bytes), or by creating unused areas in the PDO using Fill (the PDO has a size of 8 bytes but the last word is not used).
If the data cannot be mapped in the PDOs, a specific alarm is generated at startup, indicating the group with the problem. Note that this only applies to CANopen and DS402. For the other fieldbuses the exchange area is contiguous with a max size of 16 words (14 for DeviceNet).
PAR 4024 Fieldbus M->S1 mon Monitor of datum coming from the master
This is the value, already scaled in internal counts, of the datum arriving from the master. If, for example, a value equal to PAR 680 Full scale speed is sent to PAR 610 Ramp ref 1 src in rpm, the internal value is 0x40000000 =
1073741824. The scaling also includes the division of the div parameter.
PAR 4026 Fieldbus M->S1 div Divider to apply to the parameter
This can only be used for sys = Eu or Par. It divides the incoming datum by the value entered: this makes it possible to increase the resolution of the datum. For example, if IPA = PAR 610 Ramp ref 1 src , sys is automatically set to Eu.
When div = 10 is entered, the Master must send the datum in rpm multiplied by 10, for example to send a reference equal to 100.5 rpm the datum exchanged on the bus is 1005: the resolution is therefore in tenths of a degree. Before entering a value, it is important to consider the maximum value of the datum exchanged, to make sure it can be contained in a 16-bit integer (in the example, the maximum possible speed is 3276.7 rpm).
Use
This group of parameters is repeated 16 times, making it possible to configure up to 16 input data, but also bearing in mind the maximum limit of 16 words in all (14 for DeviceNet). The total number of configurable data thus also depends on the format, whether 16 or 32-bit, according to the above rules for sys .
The drive only implements the parameters in the COMMUNICATION/FIELDBUS M2S menu at startup. Once set, they must therefore be saved and the drive restarted (this procedure is not necessary for values set via dynamic mapping by the master, currently only supported by CANopen and Ethercat). The data are processed in order from 1 to the first with sys = Not assigned : depending on the configuration, an area for exchanging data with the fieldbus is created, the size and composition of which are clearly-defined.
If the data entered are not consistent (for example if sys is set as Eu or Count for a parameter that does not support these, or set to 16-bit for a parameter that can only be 32, or if the IPA does not exist, or if the PDO is not the right size, etc.) alarm “[17] Opt Bus fault ” is generated with a subcode indicating the type of problem and group in which it occurred (code meanings are described in the Interface page in Menu/FIELDBUS WORDS MAP/M->S in Gf_eXpress).
Menu PAR Description
23.3.1 4020 Fieldbus M->S1 ipa
23.3.5 4030 Fieldbus M->S2 ipa
23.3.9 4040 Fieldbus M->S3 ipa
23.3.13 4050 Fieldbus M->S4 ipa
23.3.17 4060 Fieldbus M->S5 ipa
23.3.21 4070 Fieldbus M->S6 ipa
23.3.25 4080 Fieldbus M->S7 ipa
23.3.29 4090 Fieldbus M->S8 ipa
23.3.33 4100 Fieldbus M->S9 ipa
23.3.37 4110 Fieldbus M->S10 ipa
23.3.41 4120 Fieldbus M->S11 ipa
23.3.45 4130 Fieldbus M->S12 ipa
23.3.49 4140 Fieldbus M->S13 ipa
23.3.53 4150 Fieldbus M->S14 ipa
23.3.57 4160 Fieldbus M->S15 ipa
23.3.61 4170 Fieldbus M->S16 ipa
Type FB BIT
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
UM
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Def
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
0
0
0
0
0
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
Max
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
Acc Mod
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
145
Setting of the parameter to associate with the bus channel. The default setting is 0, which means channel not active.
If the parameter to be connected is a sorg (source), the channel and parameter can also be associated by modifying the sorg parameter in its menu.
When setting a parameter, the format is also automatically set in the sys parameter.
Menu PAR Description
23.3.2 4022 Fieldbus M->S1 sys
23.3.6 4032 Fieldbus M->S2 sys
23.3.10 4042 Fieldbus M->S3 sys
23.3.14 4052 Fieldbus M->S4 sys
23.3.18 4062 Fieldbus M->S5 sys
23.3.22 4072 Fieldbus M->S6 sys
23.3.26 4082 Fieldbus M->S7 sys
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT
ENUM
ENUM
ENUM
ENUM
ENUM
ENUM
Def Min
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
10
10
10
10
Max
10
10
10
Acc Mod
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
23.3.30 4092 Fieldbus M->S8 sys
23.3.34 4102 Fieldbus M->S9 sys
23.3.38 4112 Fieldbus M->S10 sys
23.3.42 4122 Fieldbus M->S11 sys
23.3.46 4132 Fieldbus M->S12 sys
23.3.50 4142 Fieldbus M->S13 sys
23.3.54 4152 Fieldbus M->S14 sys
23.3.58 4162 Fieldbus M->S15 sys
ENUM
ENUM
ENUM
ENUM
ENUM
ENUM
ENUM
ENUM
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
23.3.62 4172 Fieldbus M->S16 sys ENUM Not assigned 0 10 RW FVS
Setting of the format of the datum received on the channel. When the src parameter is programmed, the format is automatically programmed on the relative sys. If the src parameter is reset to null, the format does not change. The value of the format can be selected from the following list, according to the parameter selected as the source:
0 Not assigned
1 Count 16
2 Count 32
3 Fill 16
4 Fill 32
5 Mdplc 16
6 Mdplc 32
7 Eu
8 Eu float
9 Par 16
10 Par 32
146
If set to 0 the channel is not assigned.
If set to 1 the datum is assigned a 16-bit count.
If set to 2 the datum is assigned a 32-bit count.
If set to 3 16 bits on the channel are reserved for the datum, not used.
If set to 4 32 bits on the channel are reserved for the datum, not used.
If set to 5 the datum is assigned a 16-bit count used by MDPLC.
If set to 6 the datum is assigned a 32-bit count used by MDPLC.
If set to 7 the datum is assigned engineering units on a 16-bit integer.
If set to 8 the datum is assigned engineering units on a 32-bit integer.
If set to 9 , the datum is assigned a 16-bit integer engineering unit format not in real time (5-10ms)
If set to 10 the datum is assigned a 32-bit integer engineering unit format or float format if the associated pa-
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
rameter is a float-type parameter not in real time (5-10ms)
Note! If the sys parameter is not assigned , none of the subsequent fieldbus channels are read, even if programmed.
Menu PAR Description
23.3.3 4024 Fieldbus M->S1 mon
23.3.7 4034 Fieldbus M->S2 mon
23.3.11 4044 Fieldbus M->S3 mon
23.3.15 4054 Fieldbus M->S4 mon
23.3.19 4064 Fieldbus M->S5 mon
23.3.23 4074 Fieldbus M->S6 mon
23.3.27 4084 Fieldbus M->S7 mon
23.3.31 4094 Fieldbus M->S8 mon
UM Type FB BIT
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
0
0
0
0
0
0
Def
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Max
0
0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
23.3.35 4104 Fieldbus M->S9 mon
23.3.39 4114 Fieldbus M->S10 mon
23.3.43 4124 Fieldbus M->S11 mon
23.3.47 4134 Fieldbus M->S12 mon
23.3.51 4144 Fieldbus M->S13 mon
23.3.55 4154 Fieldbus M->S14 mon
23.3.59 4164 Fieldbus M->S15 mon
23.3.63 4174 Fieldbus M->S16 mon
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
The value received from the bus is displayed. This parameter must be associated with the src parameter to enable the M->S channel.
The user may modify the M->S and by S->M sys parameters. The consistency of the sys with the parameter assigned to the channel is checked.
A Fieldbus M->S X Mon parameter can only be assigned to a single “src”. If assigned to more than one src, an error signal is generated during fieldbus initialization.
Menu PAR Description
23.3.4 4026 Fieldbus M->S1 div
23.3.8 4036 Fieldbus M->S2 div
23.3.12 4046 Fieldbus M->S3 div
23.3.16 4056 Fieldbus M->S4 div
23.3.20 4066 Fieldbus M->S5 div
23.3.24 4076 Fieldbus M->S6 div
23.3.28 4086 Fieldbus M->S7 div
23.3.32 4096 Fieldbus M->S8 div
UM Type
FLOAT
FB BIT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Def
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Min
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Max
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
23.3.36 4106 Fieldbus M->S9 div
23.3.40 4116 Fieldbus M->S10 div
23.3.44 4126 Fieldbus M->S11 div
23.3.48 4136 Fieldbus M->S12 div
23.3.52 4146 Fieldbus M->S13 div
23.3.56 4154 Fieldbus M->S14 div
23.3.60 4166 Fieldbus M->S15 div
23.3.64 4176 Fieldbus M->S16 div
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
The Div M->Sx fieldbus parameters can be used to increase the resolution of the datum sent on the bus to the drive in the corresponding channel in EU and EU_float exchange mode. The parameter value is used by the drive as the divider of the incoming datum, so that a number with decimal digits can be transferred.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
147
N.B.
: You must check the size in bits of the datum that is sent to make sure that the maximum value in bits fits in a 16-bit integer. For example, if specifying the divider as “Fieldbus M->Sn div” = 1000, the maximum value that can be used for the exchanged datum is 32.768 (32768/1000).
Example: Div M->Sx fieldbus = 10, M->S1 fieldbus par = Ramp ref src 1 , Sys M->S1 fieldbus = Eu . If the PLC sends the decimal value 1000 on the first word the value of ramp ref 1 on the drive is
1000/10 = 100.
23.4 – COMMUNICATION/FIELDBUS S2M
Configuration of output data
The data read by the Master (a PLC, PC or control panel) sent by the slave (the drive) can be configured in the COM-
MUNICATION/FIELDBUS S2M menu.
Since the functions of the 16 groups are similar to those of the COMMUNICATION/FIELDBUS S2M menu, only the differences are listed here:
PAR 4180 Fieldbus S->M1 ipa : unlike with M->S, the src are not managed. The IPA therefore always refers to the parameter that is entered (e.g. to monitor ramp 1 input I must select PAR 620 Ramp ref 1 mon whereas if I select PAR
610 Ramp ref 1 src I would read the selection of the enum of that src).
Moreover, with sys = MdPlc16/32, you cannot enter IPA 0 but must enter the IPA of the corresponding dig, for the first group PAR 4184 Dig Fieldbus S->M1 , etc..), the MdPlc application then writes a value in this parameter, which is sent to the bus in 16 or 32-bit format according to the sys.
If you enter 0 when the IPA was set to a value other than zero, the sys is automatically set to Fill16 or 32, to guarantee the structure of the data exchange area.
PAR 4182 Fieldbus S->M1 sys : the only difference regards the MdPlc16/32 setting, as explained above, to send all
32 bits or just the low word of the corresponding dig.
PAR 4186 Fieldbus S->M1 mul : this works symmetrically with respect to M>S. In this case a multiplier is applied to increase the resolution of the output datum (for Eu and Par only). For example, if PAR 4180 Fieldbus S->M1 ipa =
PAR 260 Motor speed, PAR 4182 Fieldbus S->M1 sys = Eu, PAR 4186 Fieldbus S->M1 mul = 10 the datum sent to the bus is in rpm multiplied by 10: if the drive turns at 100.5 rpm the master receives a value equal to 1005.
PAR 4184 Dig Fieldbus S->M1 : there are no monitors for output data, the digs send a fixed datum to the bus (with the sys set to Count32) or for the MdPlc application, which writes a value in these parameters (with sys set to Md-
Plc16/32).
The groups are processed in order at startup as for M>S. If there are any configuration errors, alarm “[17] Opt Bus fault ” is generated with a subcode indicating the type of problem and the group in which it occurred (see the S->M page in Gf_eXpress for the meaning of the code).
Menu PAR Description
23.4.1 4180 Fieldbus S->M1 ipa
23.4.5 4190 Fieldbus S->M2 ipa
23.4.9 4200 Fieldbus S->M3 ipa
23.4.13 4210 Fieldbus S->M4 ipa
23.4.17 4220 Fieldbus S->M5 ipa
23.4.21 4230 Fieldbus S->M6 ipa
23.4.25 4240 Fieldbus S->M7 ipa
23.4.29 4250 Fieldbus S->M8 ipa
23.4.33 4260 Fieldbus S->M9 ipa
23.4.37 4270 Fieldbus S->M10 ipa
23.4.41 4280 Fieldbus S->M11 ipa
23.4.45 4290 Fieldbus S->M12 ipa
UM Type FB BIT
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
0
0
0
0
0
0
Def
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
Max
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
Acc Mod
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
148
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
23.4.49 4300 Fieldbus S->M13 ipa
23.4.53 4310 Fieldbus S->M14 ipa
23.4.57 4320 Fieldbus S->M15 ipa
23.4.61 4330 Fieldbus S->M16 ipa
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
FBM2SIPA
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
20000
20000
20000
20000
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
Setting of the parameter to associate with the bus channel. The default setting is 0, which means channel not active.
When setting a parameter, the format is also automatically set in the sys parameter
Menu PAR Description
23.4.2 4182 Fieldbus S->M1 sys
23.4.6 4192 Fieldbus S->M2 sys
23.4.10 4202 Fieldbus S->M3 sys
23.4.14 4212 Fieldbus S->M4 sys
23.4.18 4222 Fieldbus S->M5 sys
23.4.22 4232 Fieldbus S->M6 sys
23.4.26 4242 Fieldbus S->M7 sys
23.4.30 4252 Fieldbus S->M8 sys
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT
ENUM
ENUM
ENUM
ENUM
ENUM
ENUM
ENUM
Def Min
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
10
10
10
10
Max
10
10
10
10
Acc Mod
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
23.4.34 4262 Fieldbus S->M9 sys
23.4.38 4272 Fieldbus S->M10 sys
23.4.42 4282 Fieldbus S->M11 sys
23.4.46 4292 Fieldbus S->M12 sys
23.4.50 4302 Fieldbus S->M13 sys
23.4.54 4312 Fieldbus S->M14 sys
23.4.58 4322 Fieldbus S->M15 sys
23.4.62 4332 Fieldbus S->M16 sys
ENUM
ENUM
ENUM
ENUM
ENUM
ENUM
ENUM
ENUM
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
Not assigned 0
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
When setting the sorg parameter the format is automatically set on the relative sys . If sorg is set to null , the data format does not change. The value of the format can be selected from the following list, according to the parameter selected as the source:
0 Not assigned
1 Count 16
2 Count 32
3 Fill 16
4 Fill 32
5 Mdplc 16
6 Mdplc 32
7 Eu
8 Eu float
9 Par 16
10 Par 32
If set to 0 the channel is not assigned.
If set to 1 the datum is assigned a 16-bit count.
If set to 2 the datum is assigned a 32-bit count.
If set to 3 16 bits on the channel are reserved for the datum, not used.
If set to 4 32 bits on the channel are reserved for the datum, not used.
If set to 5 the datum is assigned a 16-bit count used by MDPLC.
If set to 6 the datum is assigned a 32-bit count used by MDPLC.
If set to 7 the datum is assigned engineering units on a 16-bit integer.
If set to 8 the datum is assigned engineering units on a 32-bit integer.
If set to 9 , the datum is assigned a 16-bit integer engineering unit format not in real time (5-10ms)
If set to 10 the datum is assigned a 32-bit integer engineering unit format or float format if the associated pa-
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
149
rameter is a float-type parameter not in real time (5-10ms)
Note ! If the sys parameter is not assigned , none of the subsequent channels are transferred to the fieldbus, even if programmed.
Menu PAR Description
23.4.3 4184 Dig Fieldbus S->M1
23.4.7 4194 Dig Fieldbus S->M2
23.4.11 4204 Dig Fieldbus S->M3
23.4.15 4214 Dig Fieldbus S->M4
23.4.19 4224 Dig Fieldbus S->M5
23.4.23 4234 Dig Fieldbus S->M6
23.4.27 4244 Dig Fieldbus S->M7
23.4.31 4254 Dig Fieldbus S->M8
23.4.35 4264 Dig Fieldbus S->M9
23.4.39 4274 Dig Fieldbus S->M10
23.4.43 4284 Dig Fieldbus S->M11
23.4.47 4294 Dig Fieldbus S->M12
23.4.51 4304 Dig Fieldbus S->M13
23.4.55 4314 Dig Fieldbus S->M14
UM Type FB BIT
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
INT32 32
Def
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
0
0
23.4.59 4324 Dig Fieldbus S->M15
23.4.63 4334 Dig Fieldbus S->M16
INT32 32
INT32 32
0
0
0
0
If associated with the relative src, the value of this parameter is sent to the bus.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Max
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
The user may modify the M->S and by S->M sys parameters. The consistency of the sys with the parameter assigned to the channel is checked.
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
Menu PAR Description
23.4.4 4186 Fieldbus S->M1 mul
23.4.8 4196 Fieldbus S->M2 mul
23.4.12 4206 Fieldbus S->M3 mul
23.4.16 4216 Fieldbus S->M4 mul
23.4.20 4226 Fieldbus S->M5 mul
23.4.24 4236 Fieldbus S->M6 mul
23.4.28 4246 Fieldbus S->M7 mul
23.4.32 4256 Fieldbus S->M8 mul
UM Type
FLOAT
FB BIT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Def
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Min
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Max
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
23.4.36 4266 Fieldbus S->M9 mul
23.4.40 4276 Fieldbus S->M10 mul
23.4.44 4286 Fieldbus S->M11 mul
23.4.48 4296 Fieldbus S->M12 mul
23.4.52 4306 Fieldbus S->M13 mul
23.4.56 4316 Fieldbus S->M14 mul
23.4.60 4326 Fieldbus S->M15 mul
23.4.64 4336 Fieldbus S->M16 mul
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
The “ Fieldbus S->Mx mul ” parameters are multipliers that the drive applies to the datum before sending it to the bus. It is therefore possible to increase the resolution of some values read in EU and EU_float mode, also using decimal digits.
N.B.: The drive does not check that the multiplied parameter expressed in bits fits in a 16-bit integer. You must make sure that the multiplier is compatible with the maximum value of the exchanged parameter and that it
150
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
does not exceed the maximum size of 32768.
Example: Fieldbus S->Mx mul = 10, S->M1 fieldbus par = Motor speed , Sys S->M1 fieldbus = Eu .
If the motor is running at 100 rpm, the PLC reads the value 100 * 10 = 1000 on the first word that is exchanged.
23.5 – COMMUNICATION/WORD COMP
Menu PAR Description
23.5.1 4400 Word bit0 src
23.5.2 4402 Word bit1 src
23.5.3 4404 Word bit2 src
23.5.4 4406 Word bit3 src
23.5.5 4408 Word bit4 src
23.5.6 4410 Word bit5 src
23.5.7 4412 Word bit6 src
23.5.8 4414 Word bit7 src
23.5.9 4416 Word bit8 src
23.5.10 4418 Word bit9 src
23.5.11 4420 Word bit10 src
23.5.12 4422 Word bit11 src
23.5.13 4424 Word bit12 src
23.5.14 4426 Word bit13 src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
LINK 16
LINK 16
LINK 16
LINK 16
LINK 16
LINK 16
LINK 16
LINK 16
LINK 16
LINK 16
LINK 16
LINK 16
LINK 16
Def
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Max
16384
16384
16384
16384
16384
16384
16384
16384
16384
16384
16384
16384
16384
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
23.5.15 4428 Word bit14 src
23.5.16 4430 Word bit15 src
LINK 16
LINK 16
6000
6000
0
0
16384
16384
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal to be used for coding in Word comp . This function allows the user to compose a single word composed of 16 signals, each of which can be selected from among those listed in the “ L_DIGSEL1 ” selection list.
The values of the sectioned sizes are converted into a single word.
BIT_0 WORD_0 Word comp mon Word bit0 src
Word bit1 src
................
Word bit14 src
Word bit15 src
.........
BIT_14
BIT_15
Menu PAR Description
23.5.17 4432 Word comp mon
UM Type FB BIT
UINT32 16
Def
0
The hexadecimal value of the Word comp output is displayed.
23.6 – COMMUNICATION/WORD DECOMP
Menu PAR Description
23.6.1 4450 Dig word decomp
UM Type FB BIT
UINT32 16
Def
0
Setting of the digital input decoded by the “ Word decomp ” block.
Min
0
Min
0
Max
0
Max
0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
151
Menu PAR Description
23.6.2 4452 Word decomp src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
4450
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the word to be decoded by the “ Word decomp ” block. Each bit that is part of the word to be decoded is associated with the output channel of the “ Word decomp ” block. The variables that can be used for this function can be selected from among those listed in the “ L_WDECOMP ” selection list.
Word decomp src WORD_0 BIT_0
.........
BIT_14
BIT_15
Bit0 decomp mon
Bit10 decomp mon
................
Bit14 decomp mon
Bit15 decomp mon
Menu PAR Description
23.6.3 4454 Bit0 decomp mon
23.6.4 4456 Bit1 decomp mon
23.6.5 4458 Bit2 decomp mon
23.6.6 4460 Bit3 decomp mon
23.6.7 4462 Bit4 decomp mon
23.6.8 4464 Bit5 decomp mon
23.6.9 4466 Bit6 decomp mon
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
BIT 16
BIT 16
BIT 16
BIT 16
BIT 16
BIT 16
23.6.10 4468 Bit7 decomp mon
23.6.11 4470 Bit8 decomp mon
23.6.12 4472 Bit9 decomp mon
23.6.13 4474 Bit10 decomp mon
23.6.14 4476 Bit11 decomp mon
23.6.15 4478 Bit12 decomp mon
23.6.16 4480 Bit13 decomp mon
23.6.17 4482 Bit14 decomp mon
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
0
0
0
0
23.6.18 4484 Bit15 decomp mon BIT 16 0
The single bits that make up the selected word are displayed.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Def
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Max
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
0
23.7 - COMMUNICATION/EXTERNAL IO
The optional EXP-FL-XCAN-ADV card (generally inserted in slot 1) allows the number of I/Os managed by the drive to be increased, using an external device. Communication with the external device is performed via CAN using the “DS401 Device profile for generic IO modules”.
For more details see manual 1S5F32_EXP-FL-XCAN-ADV.
Acc Mod
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
Menu PAR Description
23.7.1 5480 External IO enable
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Disable
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
This parameter is used to enable or disable communication between the EXP-FL-XCAN-ADV card and the external device.
0 Disable
1 Enable
Communication is disabled in the default configuration. Communication can be enabled by setting Enable and saving the parameters. When the drive is re-started the EXP-FL-XCAN-ADV card, if installed, is recognised.
152
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
The communication is started and the external I/Os are managed. With the “ External IO enable ” set to Disable the EXP-D6A4R1-ADV can be managed, if installed.
Menu PAR Description
23.7.2 5482 External IO info
UM Type
UINT32
FB BIT Def
0
This parameter displays the number of I/O resources read by the module.
It is a 32-bit parameter made up as follows:
Min
0
Uint32
Uint16 High
Uint8 High
N. of AO
Uint8 Low
N. of AI
Uint8 High
N. of DO
The parameter is displayed in HEX format.
Max Acc
Uint8 Low
N. of DI
Mod
4294967295 ER FVS
Uint16 Low
E.g.:
PAR 5482
0x02041020
33820704
0x00000810
2064
N. of AO
0x02
2
0x00
0
N. of AI
0x04
4
0x00
0
N. of DO
0x10
16
0x08
8
N. of DI
0x20
32
0x10
16
Menu
If the configuration that is read has changed (compared to the last configuration saved or read) the drive displays and message requires the intervention of the operator in order to proceed.
PAR Description
23.7.3 5484 External IO state
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
This parameter displays the communication state
0 Off
1 On
This parameter is set to 1 (on) if the communication state is operational.
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ER FVS
Menu PAR Description
23.7.4 5486 External IO failcode
UM Type
UINT32
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max Acc Mod
4294967295 ER FVS
If an “Ext I/O fault” occurs due to the Emergency slave subcode 255..65535
alarm message, this parameter displays 4 of the 5 InfoBytes of the “Emergency” message.
See the slave manual for information about the meaning of the InfoBytes in the Emergency message (CAN slave communication module).
See Chapter C - “ExtIO fault alarm”.
23.8 - COMMUNICATION/FAST LINK
Menu PAR Description
23.8.1 5702 FL address
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
16
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
This parameter is used to enable the FastLink function and select whether the drive is to be the master or slave. If used as a slave device, the address can be selected.
0 = Disabled
1 = Master
2 = Slave 1
X = Slave X-1
16 = Slave 16
For the Pwm synchronisation to function properly, the address of the slave drive must be configured in the same order as the physical connection.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
153
Menu PAR Description
23.8.2 5818 FL bidirectional
UM Type FB BIT
ENUM
Enables/disables bi-directional Fast Link mode.
0 Disable
1 Enable
Def
Enable
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
Menu PAR Description
23.8.3 5820 FL N of slave
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
32767
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
It is a parameter related only to the master drive and it indicates which slave drives need to be interrogated.
The encoding data used is an integer having set to 1 the bit corresponding to the slaves that need to be interrogated:
- bit 0 (least significant bit)) is related to slave with address 2
- bit 1 is related to the slave with address 3
- …
- …until to the slave with address 16.
For example, if need to be interrogated slaves with address 2 and address 5, the value will be 9 (1001 binary).
If one or more slaves are not connected to the drops giving no answer, it will produce a fast link alarm on the master drive. Fast link alarm on the master will produce communication error to all the slaves connected.
Menu PAR Description
23.8.4 5710 FL sync slave type
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Pwm&Ctrl
Min
0
Max
2
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
This parameter is ineffective on the master drive.
On the slave drive this parameter is used to enable the function for generating Pwm signals that are synchronised with the Pwm signals of the master. It is also possible to enable the function for executing control tasks synchronised with execution of control tasks of the master.
Menu
0 Off
1 Pwm
Fastlink transfers information between the drives.
2 Pwm&Ctrl The Fastlink transfers information between the drives, the function for synchronising the generetion of Pwm signals with the Pwm signals of the master is enabled and the function for synchronsing control tasks with the control tasks of the master is enabled. The variables in table “Updating times for the various functions” (on manual 1S5F32_EXP-FL-XCAN-ADV) and the MDPLC tasks are also synchronised to 1 ms and 8 ms.
The Fastlink transfers information between the drives and the function for synchronising the generation of Pwm signals with the Pwm signals of the master is enabled. The variables in the 11)
Updating times for the various functions table are synchronised at 125 us
PAR Description UM Type FB BIT Def Min Max Acc Mod
23.8.5 5712 FL N Fwd slave chg UINT16 0 0 4 ERWZ FVS
There are two possible operation modes.
In the first, the master sends the data frame to the first slave. The first slave takes all the data in the frame and sends the same frame to the next slave without making any changes. The same sequence is repeated by all the slave drives.
In the second, the master sends the data frame to the first slave. The first slave takes all the data in the frame, replaces part of the data and then sends the frame to the next slave drive. The same sequence is repeated by all the slave drives.
This parameter is ineffective on the master drive.
On the slave drive this parameter is used to configure the amount of data to be replaced in the data frame.
FL N Fw slave change
0
1
2
3
4
Information replaced
None
FL Fw 1
FL Fw 1, FL Fw 2
FL Fw 1, FL Fw 2, FL Fw 3
FL Fw 1, FL Fw 2, FL Fw 3, FL Fw 4
154
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu PAR Description
23.8.6 5714 FL fault enable src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
6002
Min
0
Max
16384
This parameter is used to select the origin (source) of the FL fault enable signal.
The signal to be associated with this function can be selected from the “ L_DIGSEL1 ” selection list.
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
0 FL fault enable not active (No FastLink alarm signal)
1 FL fault enable active (FastLink alarm signal)
When the drive detects a FastLink fault, it prepares to trigger a “FastLink fault” alarm.
This command is used to select whether an alarm is generated when a fault is detected.
Alarm generation is enabled in the default configuration.
The configuration of the “ FL fault enable src ” parameter can be changed to control the phases in which alarm generation is enabled.
For example, by connecting the “ FL fault enable src ” parameter to “ Enable state mon ” you can enable generation of the “FastLink fault” alarm in the phase when the drive is enabled.
In systems where drive the drives are not powered-off simultaneously, some drives detect a FastLink fault and generate a FastLink alarm.
This parameter is used to disable the alarm at power-off by connecting the “ FL fault enable src ” parameter to
“ Enable state mon ”.
Menu PAR Description
23.8.7 5730 FL Fwd 1 src
23.8.8 5732 FL Fwd 2 src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16/32BIT
LINK 16/32BIT
Def
6000
6000
Min
0
0
Max
16384
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
23.8.9 5734 FL Fwd 3 src
23.8.10 5736 FL Fwd 4 src
LINK 16/32BIT
LINK 16/32BIT
6000
6000
0
0
16384
16384
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
This parameter is used to select the origin (source) of the FL Fw 1 src signal.
The signal to be associated with this function can be selected from the “ L_FLWORD ” selection list.
On the drive configured as the master, these parameters are used to select the data to be sent to the first slave.
On drives configured as slaves, these paramters are used to select the data that the slave must include in the data frame to replace the data received from the previous drive.
Replacement is disabled in the default configuration. It can be enabled with the PAR 5712 “ FL N Fwd slave chg “ parameter.
Menu PAR Description
23.8.11 5830 FL Rev 1 src
23.8.12 5832 FL Rev 2 src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16/32BIT
LINK 16/32BIT
Def
6000
6000
Min
0
0
Max
16384
16384
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
Parameter significant only for Slave drive, indicates what data to insert in first word to be sent to Master drive when Slave is interrogated. Selectable values are shown on the L_FLWORD list.
Menu PAR Description
23.8.13 5750 FL Fwd 1 mon
23.8.14 5752 FL Fwd 2 mon
23.8.15 5754 FL Fwd 3 mon
23.8.16 5756 FL Fwd 4 mon
23.8.17 5758 FL Fwd 5 mon
23.8.18 5760 FL Fwd 6 mon
UM Type FB BIT
INT32 32BIT
INT32 32BIT
INT32 32BIT
INT32 32BIT
INT32 32BIT
INT32 32BIT
Def
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
Max
2^32
2^32
2^32
2^32
2^32
2^32
Acc Mod
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
23.8.19 5762 FL Fwd 7 mon
23.8.20 5764 FL Fwd 8 mon
INT32 32BIT
INT32 32BIT
0
0
0
0
2^32
2^32
ER
ER
FVS
FVS
These parameters are not used on the master drive.
On the slave drive these parameters show the value received from the previous drive. The “Inv” parameters enable the value received to be used with the opposite sign, without changing any of the data sent to subsequent slaves.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
155
These parameters are available in the src analog parameter selection lists.
Menu PAR Description
23.8.21 5850 FL Rev 1 mon
23.8.22 5852 FL Rev 2 mon
23.8.23 5854 FL Rev 3 mon
UM Type FB BIT
INT32 32BIT
INT32 32BIT
INT32 32BIT
Def
0
0
0
Min
0
0
0
Max
0
0
0
23.8.24 5856 FL Rev 4 mon INT32 32BIT 0 0 0
Display of data selected via parameters FL Rev X Slave sel corresponding (PAR 5822 ... 5828).
Acc Mod
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
ER FVS
Menu PAR Description
23.8.25 5822 FL Rev 1 slave sel
23.8.26 5824 FL Rev 2 slave sel
23.8.27 5826 FL Rev 3 slave sel
UM Type FB BIT
UINT16
UINT16
UINT16
Def
0
0
0
Min
0
0
0
Max
31
31
31
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
23.8.28 5828 FL Rev 4 slave sel UINT16 0 0 31 ERWZ FVS
Parameter significant only for Master drive, indicates what data of which Slave drive to display in parameter
Mon rev X FL (you can choose to display word 1 or 2 of a Slave with address from 2 to 16). The code used assigns the significance of the first word of the Slave at address 2 to value 0, value 1 for the first word of the
Slave at address 3 …. 14 first word of the Slave at address 16, 15 has no significance, 16 second word of
Slave at address 2 … 30 second word of Slave at address 16.
Menu PAR Description
23.8.29 5720 Sync slave mon
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ER FVS
This parameter is not significant on the master drive.
On the slave drives this parameter indicates the state of the function that enables Pwm signals to be synchronised with the Pwm signals of the master and execution of control tasks to be synchronised with execution of control tasks of the master.
0 Slave not synchronised
1 Slave synchronised
Menu PAR Description
23.8.30 5722 FL fault code
UM Type
UINT32
FB BIT Def
0
This parameter is used to display the cause of the FastLink fault alarm.
See chapter C - FastLink Fault.
Min
0
Max
0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
156
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
24 – ALARM CONFIG
In the ALARM CONFIG menu the type of effect any alarm signals have on the drive is determined:
- The alarm status is saved
- How must the drive react to the alarm signal?
- Auto restart
- Alarm reset
For some alarms, behaviour can be configured separately for each signal, while for the others the Disable drive is executed. Individual signals can also be sent to a programmable digital output.
Activity Ignore The alarm is not included in the list of alarms, it is not included in the alarm log, it is not signalled on the digital outputs, no drive commands are modified.
Warning The alarm is included in the list of alarms, it is included in the alarm log, it is signalled on the digital outputs, the First alarm information is updated, the Alarm enabled information is updated, no drive commands are modified.
Disable
Stop drive The alarm is included in the list of alarms, it is included in the alarm log, it is signalled on the digital outputs, the First alarm information is updated, the Alarm enabled information is updated, a command is sent to stop and disable the motor, which stops due to inertia.
The alarm is included in the list of alarms, it is included in the alarm log, it is signalled on the digital outputs, the First alarm information is updated, the Alarm enabled information is updated, a Stop command is sent. When the zero speed is reached the drive is disabled. If Ramp control mode is enabled, the drive moves to the zero speed with the set ramp time; when the Speed delay 0 signal is activated the drive is disabled. If Speed control mode is enabled, the drive moves to the zero speed with the maximum current possible; when the Speed delay 0 signal is activated the drive is disabled. If Torque control mode is enabled, the drive moves to the zero speed with the time set by the load; when the
Speed delay 0 signal is activated the drive is disabled.
Fast stop The alarm is included in the list of alarms, it is included in the alarm log, it is signalled on the digital outputs, the First alarm information is updated, the
Alarm enabled information is updated, a Fast Stop command is sent. When the zero speed is reached the drive is disabled. If Ramp control mode is enabled, the drive moves to the zero speed with the set fast stop ramp time (deceleration time 3); when the Speed delay 0 signal is activated the drive is disabled.
If Speed control mode is enabled, the drive moves to the zero speed with the maximum current possible; when the Speed delay 0 signal is activated the drive is disabled. If Torque control mode is enabled, the drive moves to the zero speed with the set load time; when the Speed delay 0 signal is activated the drive is disabled.
n alarms with Activity = Ignore or Warning can be enabled at the same time.
If an alarm with Activity = Stop or Fast Stop is enabled and another alarm with an Activity other than Ignore or Warning is enabled, the drive stops and is disabled.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
157
Not all alarms allow the controlled stopping of the drive. The following table shows the possibility of setting the Activities for the individual alarm signals.
Alarm
ExtFlt
Motor OT
Overspeed
SpdRefLoss
SpdFbkLoss
Drive ovld
Motor ovld
Bres ovld
HTsens
InAir
Desat
IOverC
OverV
UnderV
PhLoss
Bus option
GroundFault thr
Brake fault
EXT IO
FL faukt
Missing Motor phase
Ignore
ü
ü
ü
ü
-
ü
-
-
-
-
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
-
ü
Warning
ü
ü
ü
ü
-
ü
-
-
-
-
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
-
ü
Disable drive
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Stop
ü
-
-
-
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
-
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
-
ü
Fast stop
ü
-
-
-
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
-
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
-
ü
Menu PAR Description
24.1 4500 Fault reset src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
1120
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal to be used for the command to reset the drive after an alarm. The terminal that can be used for this function can be selected from among those listed in the “ L_DIGSEL2 ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
24.2 4502 ExtFlt src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
6000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal to be used as the input for the drive external fault alarm ExtFlt .
The terminal that can be used for this function can be selected from among those listed in the “ L_DIGSEL2 ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
24.3 4504 ExtFlt activity
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Disable
Min
0
Max
4
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Setting of the behaviour of the drive in the event of an external fault alarm ExtFlt . This alarm indicates the intervention of a drive external protection.
0 Ignore
1 Warning
2 Disable
3 Stop
4 Fast stop
Menu PAR Description
24.4 4506 ExtFlt restart
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Disable
Enabling of automatic restart after the external fault alarm ExtFlt
0 Disable
1 Enable
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
RW FVS
158
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu PAR Description
24.5 4508 ExtFlt restart time
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
1000
Min
120
Max
30000
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Setting of the time within which the External Fault alarm must be reset in order to perform automatic restart.
Menu PAR Description
24.6 4510 ExtFlt holdoff
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
10000
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Setting of the delay between the signalling of the external fault alarm ExtFlt and enabling of the alarm. If an alarm condition occurs, the drive will wait for the set time before blocking is enabled. If the alarm is removed within the set time, the drive will not indicate any alarm condition.
Menu PAR Description
24.7 4516 MotorOT pre activity
UM Type FB BIT
ENUM
Manages activity from motor overtemperature prealarm.
0 Ignore
1 Warning
2 Disable
3 Stop
4 Fast stop
Def
Ignore
Min
0
Max
4
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Menu PAR Description
24.8 4518 MotorOT pre thr
UM Type FB BIT perc UINT16
Def
60
Min
0
Max
100
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Represents the threshold, in % of the value set in IPA 4532 MotorOT thr , at which the motor overtemperature prealarm trips.
Menu PAR Description
24.9 4520 MotorOT src
UM Type FB BIT
LINK 16
Def
6000
Min
0
Max
16384
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal to be used for the motor overtemperature alarm MotorOT . The terminal that can be used for this function can be selected from among those listed in the “ L_DIGSEL2 ” selection list.
Menu PAR Description
24.10 4522 MotorOT activity
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Warning
Min
0
Max
4
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Setting of the behaviour of the drive in case of a motor overtemperature alarm MotorOT . This alarm indicates that the motor temperature is too high.
0 Ignore
1 Warning
2 Disable
3 Stop
4 Fast stop
Max
1
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Menu PAR Description
24.11 4524 MotorOT restart
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Disable
Min
0
Enabling of automatic restart after the motor overtemperature alarm MotorOT .
0 Disable
1 Enable
Menu PAR Description
24.12 4526 TMotorOT restart time
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
1000
Min
120
Max
30000
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Setting of the time within which the Motor Overtemperature alarm must be reset in order to perform automatic restart.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
159
Menu PAR Description
24.13 4528 MotorOT holdoff
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
1000
Min
0
Max
30000
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Setting of the delay between the signalling of the motor overtemperature alarm MotorOT and enabling of the alarm. If an alarm condition occurs, the drive will wait for the set time before enabling the alarm. If the alarm is removed within the set time, the drive will not indicate any alarm condition.
Menu PAR Description
24.14 4530 MotorOT probe
UM Type FB BIT
ENUM
Def
SRC
Min
0
Max
8
Selection of type of sensor for measuring external temperature. The following can be selected:
0 SRC
1 Sens An1X
2 Sens An2X
3 KTY84 AnX
4 PTC AnX
5 KTY84 An1
6 KTY84 An2
7 PTC An1
8 PTC An2 alarm managed via IPA 4520 alarm managed via alarm managed via alarm managed via alarm managed via alarm managed via alarm managed via alarm managed via alarm managed via
PT100/PT1000/NI1000
PT100/PT1000/NI1000
KTY84
PTC
KTY84
KTY84
PTC
PTC
MotorOT src read by input 1 expansion card (*)
read by input 2 expansion card (*)
read by dedicated input for cards (*)
read by dedicated input for cards (*)
read by analog input 1 of control card
read by analog input 2 of control card
read by analog input 1 of control card
read by analog input 2 of control card
(*) = EXP-IO-SENS-100-ADV , EXP-IO-SENS-1000-ADV.
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Menu PAR Description
24.15 4532 MotorOT thr
UM Type FB BIT cnt UINT16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
32767
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Represents the resistance threshold at which the “ Motor OT ” alarm must trip.
The parameter is expressed in counts or ohms depending on the type of sensor selected (ohms only when selecting KTY84 An1, KTY84 An2, PTC An1, PTC An2).
Menu PAR Description
24.16 4536 MotorOT mon
UM Type FB BIT cnt INT16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
32767
Acc Mod
ER FVS
Represents the resistance measurement monitor.
The parameter is expressed in counts or ohms depending on the type of sensor selected (ohms only when selecting KTY84 An1, KTY84 An2, PTC An1, PTC An2).
Menu PAR Description
24.17 4540 Overspeed threshold
UM Type rpm INT32
FB BIT Def
CALCI
Min
0
Setting of the threshold above which the overspeed alarm Overspeed is enabled.
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Menu PAR Description
24.18 4542 Overspeed activity
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Disable
Min
0
Max
4
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Setting of the behaviour of the drive in case of a motor overspeed alarm Overspeed . This alarm indicates that the motor speed has exceeded the threshold set in the Speed ref top lim and Speed ref bottom lim parameters in the COMMANDS menu.
0 Ignore
1 Warning
2 Disable
3 Stop
4 Fast stop
Menu PAR Description
24.19 4544 Overspeed holdoff
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
5000
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Setting of the delay between the signalling of the motor overspeed alarm Overspeed and enabling of the alarm. If an alarm condition occurs, the drive will wait for the set time before enabling the alarm. If the alarm is removed within the set time, the drive will not indicate any alarm condition.
160
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu PAR Description
24.20 4550 SpdRefLoss threshold
UM Type rpm INT16
FB BIT Def
100
Min
0
Max
CALCI
Setting of the threshold below which the speed reference loss alarm SpdRefLoss occurs.
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Menu PAR Description
24.21 4552 SpdRefLoss activity
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Ignore
Min
0
Max
4
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Setting of the behaviour of the drive in case of a speed reference loss alarm SpdRefLoss . This alarm indicates that the difference between the speed regulator reference and the actual motor speed is more than 100 rpm.
This alarm must be disabled (= 0 Ignore) when parameter 556 Control mode select is set to Torque (0) or when parameter 2354 is set to a value other than zero.
0 Ignore
1 Warning
2 Disable
3 Stop
4 Fast stop
Menu PAR Description
24.22 4554 SpdRefLoss holdoff
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
1000
Min
0
Max
10000
Acc Mod
RW FV_
Setting of the delay between the signalling of the speed reference loss alarm condition SpdRefLoss and enabling of the alarm. If an alarm condition occurs, the drive will wait for the set time before enabling the alarm. If the alarm is removed within the set time, the drive will not indicate any alarm condition.
Menu PAR Description
24.23 4560 SpdFbkLoss activity
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Disable
Min
0
Max
4
Acc Mod
RW FV_
Setting of the behaviour of the drive in case of a speed feedback loss alarm SpdFbkLoss . This alarm indicates the loss of the encoder feedback signals.
0 Ignore
1 Warning
2 Disable
3 Stop
4 Fast stop
Menu PAR Description
24.24 4562 SpdFbkLoss holdoff
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
200
Min
0
Max
10000
Acc Mod
RW FVS
Setting of the delay between the signalling of the speed feedback loss alarm condition SpdFbkLoss and the enabling of the alarm. If an alarm condition occurs, the drive will wait for the set time before enabling the alarm.
If the alarm is removed within the set time, the drive will not indicate any alarm condition.
Menu PAR Description
24.25 4564 SpdFbkLoss threshold
UM Type rpm INT16
FB BIT Def
100
Min
5
Max
CALCI
Acc Mod
RW FVS
For SE (single ended) encoders and with parameters 2110 or 5110 = (3) Control A-B-SE.
The Speed fbk loss [22] alarm control is enabled when the speed reference is higher than the value set in this parameter
If using incremental digital encoders in single-ended mode, this parameter sets the limit above which the drive executes the action set with parameter 4560 SpdFbkLoss activity .
Menu PAR Description
24.26 4570 Drive ovld activity
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Ignore
Min
0
Max
4
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the behaviour of the drive in case of a drive overload alarm Drive ovld . This alarm indicates that the drive overload threshold has been reached.
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
161
0 Ignore
1 Warning
2 Disable
3 Stop
4 Fast stop
Menu PAR Description
24.27 4572 Motor ovld activity
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Warning
Min
0
Max
4
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the behaviour of the drive in case of a motor overload alarm Motor ovld [14] . This alarm indicates that the motor overload threshold has been reached.
0 Ignore
1 Warning
2 Disable
3 Stop
4 Fast stop
Menu PAR Description
24.28 4574 Bres ovld activity
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Disable
Min
0
Max
4
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the behaviour of the drive in case of a braking resistor overload alarm Bres ovld . This alarm indicates that the braking resistor overload threshold has been reached.
0 Ignore
1 Warning
2 Disable
3 Stop
4 Fast stop
Menu PAR Description
24.29 4582 HTsens restart
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Disable
Min
0
Max
1
Enabling of automatic restart after the drive heatsink overtemperature alarm HeatsinkS OTUT [10] .
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
0 Disable
1 Enable
Menu PAR Description
24.30 4584 HTsens restart time
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
20000
Min
120
Max
60000
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the time within which the HeatsinkS OTUT [10] alarm must be reset in order to perform automatic restart.
Menu PAR Description
24.31 4600 InAir activity
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Stop
Min
0
Max
4
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the behaviour of the drive in case of an intake air overtemperature alarm Intakeair OT [11].
This alarm indicates that the temperature of the intake cooling air is too high.
0 Ignore
1 Warning
2 Disable
3 Stop
4 Fast stop
Menu PAR Description
24.32 4602 InAir restart
0 Disable
1 Enable
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Disable
Min
0
Max
1
Enabling of automatic restart after the intake air overtemperature alarm Intakeair OT [11] .
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
162
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu PAR Description
24.33 4604 InAir restart time
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
1000
Min
120
Max
30000
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the time within which the Intakeair OT [11] alarm must be reset in order to perform automatic restart.
Menu PAR Description
24.34 4606 InAir holdoff
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
10000
Min
0
Max
30000
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the delay between the signalling of the intake air overtemperature alarm Intakeair OT [11] and enabling of the alarm. If an alarm condition occurs, the drive will wait for the set time before enabling the alarm. If the alarm is removed within the set time, the drive will not indicate any alarm condition.
Menu PAR Description
24.35 4610 Desat restart
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Disable
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Enabling of automatic restart after the desaturation alarm Desat . This alarm indicates a short circuit between the motor phases or on the power bridge.
0 Disable
1 Enable
Menu PAR Description
24.36 4612 Desat restart time
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
2000
Min
1000
Max
10000
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the time within which the Desaturation alarm must be reset in order to perform automatic restart.
(Time with alarm signal active + 1000 msec).
Menu PAR Description
24.37 4620 IOverC restart
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Disable
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Enabling of automatic restart after the drive overcurrent alarm. This alarm indicates an overcurrent (or short circuit between phases or towards the ground).
0 Disable
1 Enable
Menu PAR Description
24.38 4622 IOverC restart time
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
2000
Min
1000
Max
10000
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the time within which the Overcurrent alarm must be reset in order to perform automatic restart.
(Time with alarm signal active + 1000 msec).
Menu PAR Description
24.39 4630 OverV restart
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Disable
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Enabling of automatic restart after the overvoltage alarm. This alarm indicates an overvoltage on the intermediate circuit (DC link)
0 Disable
1 Enable
Menu PAR Description
24.40 4632 OverV restart time
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
2000
Min
1000
Max
10000
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the time within which the Overvoltage alarm must be reset in order to perform automatic restart.
(Time with alarm signal active + 1000 msec).
Menu PAR Description
24.41 4640 UnderV restart
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Enable
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Enabling of automatic restart after the undervoltage alarm. This alarm indicates an undervoltage on the inter-
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
163
mediate circuit (DC link)
0 Disable
1 Enable
Menu PAR Description
24.42 4642 UnderV restart time
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
1000
Min
120
Max
10000
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the time within which the Undervoltage alarm must be reset in order to perform automatic restart.
(Time with alarm signal active + 100 msec).
Menu PAR Description
24.43 4650 UVRep attempts
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
5
Min
0
Max
1000
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the maximum number of attempts at automatic restart after the Undervoltage alarm before a Mult
Undervoltage alarm is generated. If this parameter is set to 1000 an infinite number of attempts are available.
Menu PAR Description
24.44 4652 UVRep delay
UM s
Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
240
Min
0
Max
300
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the time within which, if no automatic restarts are executed after the Undervoltage alarm, the attempts counter is reset. In this way the number of attempts set in UVRep attempt are still available.
Menu PAR Description
24.45 4660 PhLoss activity
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Disable
Min
0
Max
4
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the behaviour of the drive in case of a no phase alarm. This alarm indicates the absence of a drive power supply phase.
0 Ignore
1 Warning
2 Disable
3 Stop
4 Fast stop
Menu PAR Description
24.46 4662 PhLoss restart
UM
Enabling of automatic restart after the no phase alarm.
0 Disable
1 Enable
Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Disable
Min
0
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Menu PAR Description
24.47 4664 PhLoss restart time
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
1000
Min
120
Max
10000
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the time within which the Phase loss alarm must be reset in order to perform automatic restart.
(Time with alarm signal active + 100 msec).
Max
4
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Menu PAR Description
24.48 4670 Optionbus activity
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Disable
Setting of the behaviour of the drive in case of an Opt Bus Fault alarm.
0 Ignore
1 Warning
2 Disable
3 Stop
4 Fast stop
Min
0
164
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu PAR Description
24.49 4680 Ground Fault thr
UM Type perc FLOAT
FB BIT Def
10.0
Setting of the threshold for the ground short circuit alarm Ground Fault.
Min
0
Max
150.0
Acc Mod
ERWS FVS
Menu PAR Description
24.50 4684 Brake fault activity
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Disable
Min
0
Max
4
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
This parameter can be used to configure the behaviour of the drive in the event of a mechanical brake fault.
The following activities are programmable:
0 Ignore
1 Warning
2 Disable
3 Stop
4 Fast stop
Menu PAR Description
24.51 4690 ExtIO activity
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Disable
Min
0
Max
4
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
This parameter is used to configure the behaviour of the drive if the “ Ext I/O fault” [27] alarm occurs when the
EXP-FL-XCAN-ADV card is installed.
See Chapter C - “ Ext I/O fault” [27] alarm.
When the alarm is activated due to a communication error, the last value that was received is maintained.
The following activities are programmable:
0 Ignore
1 Warning
2 Disable
3 Stop
4 Fast stop
You can check whether a card that supports XCAN External IO functions is installed from the DRIVE INFO menu for parameters 530, 532, 534 SlotX card type :
Value
832
Description
IO FastLink
Expansion
EXP-FL-XCAN-ADV XCAN External IO supported
Menu PAR Description
24.52 4940 FL fault activity
UM Type
ENUM
FB BIT Def
Disable
Min
0
Max
4
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
This parameter is used to configure the behaviour of the drive when the “ FastLink fault ” [28] alarm occurs.
If the EXP-FL-XCAN-ADV card is installed in the drive, all the FastLink communication fault signals are enabled and managed via generation of a “ FastLink fault ” [28] alarm, with different subcodes to indicate the cause of the error.
See Chapter C - “ FastLink Fault ” [28] alarm.
The following activities are programmable:
0 Ignore
1 Warning
2 Disable
3 Stop
4 Fast stop
Menu PAR Description
24.53 4654 Mot PhLoss activity
UM Type FB BIT
ENUM
Def
Ignore
Min
0
Max
4
Acc Mod
ERW FV_
The “ Motor phase loss ” alarm signals the loss of a motor phase. This parameter manages the alarm activity.
0 Ignore
1 Warning
2 Disable
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
165
3 Stop
4 Fast stop
Menu PAR Description
24.54 4656 Mot PhLoss holdoff
UM Type ms UINT16
FB BIT Def
800
Min
800
Max
10000
Represents the time the alarm condition has to persist before the alarm is actually generated.
Menu PAR Description
24.55 4658 Mot PhLoss threshold
UM Type
A FLOAT
FB BIT Def
CALCF
Represents a current threshold for generating the alarm.
The value has to be lower than the torque current value set in the drive.
Min
0
Max
CALCF
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Menu PAR Description
24.56 4700 Alarm dig sel 1
24.57 4702 Alarm dig sel 2
24.58 4704 Alarm dig sel 3
24.59 4706 Alarm dig sel 4
UM Type
ENUM
ENUM
ENUM
ENUM
FB BIT Def
No alarm
No alarm
No alarm
No alarm
Min
0
0
0
0
Max
60
60
60
60
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
Setting of the alarm signal to enable on a digital output. The digital output is selected using parameters Alm dig out mon 1÷4 , which can be enabled in the L_DIGSEL1 selection list.
0 No alarm
1 Overvoltage
2 Undervoltage
3 Ground fault
4 Overcurrent
5 Desaturation
6 MultiUndervolt
7 MultiOvercurr
8 MultiDesat
9 Heatsink OT
10 HeatsinkS OTUT
11 Intakeair OT
12 Motor OT
13 Drive overload
14 Motor overload
15 Bres overload
16 Phaseloss
17 Opt Bus fault
18 Opt 1 IO fault
19 Opt 2 IO fault
20 Opt Enc fault
21 External fault
22 Speed fbk loss
23 Overspeed
24 Speed ref loss
25 Emg stop alarm
26 Power down
27 ExtIO fault
28 FastLink fault
29 Brake fault
30 Motor pre OT
31 Mot phase loss
32 Not Used2
33 Plc1 fault
34 Plc2 fault
166
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
35 Plc3 fault
36 Plc4 fault
37 Plc5 fault
38 Plc6 fault
39 Plc7 fault
40 Plc8 fault
41
42
Watchdog
Trap error
43 System error
44 User error
45 Param error
46 Load def par
47 Plc cfg error
48 Load def plc
49 Key failed
50 Encoder error
51 Opt cfg change
52 Not Used3
53 Plc9 fault
54 Plc10 fault
55 Plc11 fault
56 Plc12 fault
57 Plc13 fault
58 Plc14 fault
59 Plc15 fault
60 Plc16 fault
Menu PAR Description
24.60 4720 Alm autoreset time
UM s
Type
FLOAT
FB BIT Def
0.0
Min
0.0
Max
60.0
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
Setting of the time interval that must pass before executing an automatic reset.
If no alarms are enabled the drive is set to restart.
If some alarms are still enabled the drive is set to execute a new attempt at automatic reset.
At each attempted reset a counter increases. If the limit set in the Alm autoreset number parameter is reached the drive is set to make no more attempts at reset and waits for a user reset.
The counter is set to zero when an automatic reset or user reset is performed and no alarms are enabled.
If the parameter is 0 the function is disabled.
Menu PAR Description
24.61 4722 Alm autoreset number
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
20
Setting of the maximum number of attempted automatic resets.
Min
0
Max
100
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
167
25 – ALARM LOG
This is the menu in which the log of previous alarms is saved, with the time the alarm occurred (in relation to the Time drive power on parameter). The alarms are displayed starting from the most recent (No. 1) up to the furthest back in time (No. 30). Up to 30 alarm signals can be displayed. The sub-code is used by service technicians to identify the specific type of alarm. Press the ▲ and ▼ keys to scroll the screen pages of the alarm log. The alarm log cannot be deleted.
Alarm number
T+ TEN LOC Ilim n=0 AL
1 PhaseLoss
110:32
2 Undervoltage
110:25
0000H
0000H
Alarm description
Sub-code
Time alarm occurred
T+ TEN LOC Ilim n=0 AL
3 SpdFbkLoss
110:20
4 Overspeed
109:25
0000H
0000H
168
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
26 – APPLICATION
This menu is designed to host two applications using the MDPlc program.
The PID application is installed by default in the APPLICATION / APPLICATION 1 menu.
The APPLICATION / APPLICATION 2 menu is available for custom applications.
It will not be possible to use both applications simultaneously. The 558 Application select parameter in the DRIVE
CONFIG menu must be used to select between the two possible applications.
T+ TEN LOC ILim n:0 AL
01 MONITOR
02 DRIVE INFO
03 STARTUP WIZARD
04 DRIVE CONFIG
T+ TEN LOC ILim n:0 AL
01 MONITOR
02 DRIVE INFO
03 STARTUP WIZARD
04 DRIVE CONFIG
T+ TEN LOC ILim n:0 AL
01 MONITOR
02 DRIVE INFO
03 STARTUP WIZARD
04 DRIVE CONFIG
X 2
X 4
EN LOC ILim n:0 AL T+ T-
0 4 . 0 3 PA R :
Access mode
Eas Y
Value 0
5 5 4
T+ TEN LOC ILim n:0 AL
0 4 . 0 5 PA R :
Application select
None
Value 0
5 5 8
T+ T-
0 4 . 0 1
EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
PA R : 5 5 0
E
Press E to execute
T+ TEN LOC ILim n:0 AL
0 4 . 0 3 PA R :
Access mode
5 5 4
E E
E
Value 1
T+ TEN LOC ILim n:0 AL
0 4 . 0 5 PA R :
Application select
Application 1
Value 1
5 5 8
T+ T-
0 4 . 0 1
EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
PA R : 5 5 0
E
T+ T-
0 4 . 0 1
EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
PA R : 5 5 0
Done
Switch the drive off and then switch it on again.
The PID menu will be available via keypad.
T+ TEN LOC ILim n:0 AL
23 COMMUNICATION
24 ALARM CONFIG
25 ALARM LOG
26 PID
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
169
PARAMETERS ON SELECTION LISTS, BUT NOT DISPLAYED ON KEYPAD
Menu PAR Description
220 Theta ref mon
UM Type
INT32
Monitor value of the electrical motor angle.
FB BIT Def
0.0
Min
0.0
Max
0.0
Acc
ER
Mod
Menu
Menu
Menu
Menu
PAR Description
224 Flux ref mon
UM
Monitor value of the Flux reference.
Type
INT32
FB BIT
PAR Description
262 Motor speed nofilter
UM Type FB BIT
FF INT16 16
This parameter indicates the unfiltered motor speed.
Def
0.0
Def
0
Min
0.0
Min
0
Max
0.0
Max
0
Acc
ER
Acc
ER
Mod
Mod
PAR Description
362 Drive overload trip
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc
ER
Mod
This signal indicates that the drive is in the overload condition. In the default condition the alarm is not triggered as the relative action is set to Ignore .
PAR Description
366 Drive overload 80
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc
ER
This signal indicates that the drive has reached 80% of the thermal image accumulator (drive overload).
Mod
Menu
Menu
PAR Description
626 Ramp ref out mon
UM Type FB BIT
FF INT16 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
This parameter displays the reference value output of the ramp remference function block.
PAR Description
760 Ramp out mon
UM Type FB BIT
FF INT16 16
Def
0
Min
0
This parameter displays the reference value output of the ramp function block.
Max
0
Min
0
Max
1
Menu PAR Description
764 Ramp acc state
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
This signal indicates whether the acceleration ramp is active.
Menu PAR Description
766 SRamp dec state
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
This signal indicates whether the deceleration ramp is active.
Min
0
Max
1
Acc
ER
Mod
Acc
ER
Mod
Acc
ER
Mod
Acc
ER
Mod
Menu PAR Description
934 Ref is 0
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc
ER
This signal is active when the reference is below the limit set in parameter 930 Reference 0 threshold .
Mod
Menu
Menu
170
PAR Description
936 Ref is 0 delay
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc
ER
Mod
This parameter is active when the reference is below the threshold set in parameter 930 Reference 0 threshold . The signal is enabled after the delay set with parameter 932 Reference delay 0 .
PAR Description
944 Speed is 0
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc
ER
Mod
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu
Menu
This parameter is active when the speed is below the threshold set in parameter 940 Speed 0 threshold .
PAR Description
946 Speed is 0 delay
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc
ER
Mod
This signal is active when the reference is below the threshold set in parameter 940 Speed 0 threshold . The signal is activated after the delay set in parameter 942 Speed 0 delay .
PAR Description
956 Speed thr 1_2 mon
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc
ER
Mod
To display the speed threshold status: if the motor speed is higher than the value set in parameter 950 Speed threshold 1 or lower than the value set in parameter 952 Speed threshold 2 this parameter assumes the value of 0.
If the motor speed is between the value of 950 Speed threshold 1 and that of 952 Speed threshold 2 , this parameter assumes the value of 1.
Use parameter 954 Speed threshold dly to set a delay time for the transition from 0 to 1 of parameter 956
Speed thr 1_2 mon ; the transition from 1 to 0 is always immediate.
When 950 Speed threshold 1 is set to a value higher than 952 Speed threshold 2 , if the motor speed is between the thresholds this parameter assumes the value of 1. If 950 Speed threshold 1 is set to a value lower than 952 Speed threshold 2 , the threshold status is not significant
Menu
Menu
Menu
Menu
Menu
PAR Description
966 Set speed
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc
ER
Mod
This signal is active when the error between the speed reference and actual motor speed is greater than the tolerance set in parameter 962 Set speed error .
PAR Description
976 Speed thr 3 mon
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
The status of the block that detects exceeding of the speed 3 threshold is displayed.
0 Actual speed below threshold
1 Actual speed above threshold
Max
1
PAR Description
986 Current thr mon
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
The status of the block that detects exceeding of the current threshold is displayed.
0 Actual output current below threshold
1 Actual output current above threshold.
Max
1
Acc
ER
Acc
ER
Mod
Mod
Acc
ER
Mod PAR Description
1030 Local/remote mon
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
This signal is active when the drive is in the Remote operating mode.
0 Local
1 Remote
Min
0
Max
1
PAR Description
1060 Sequencer status
UM Type FB BIT
UINT16 16
Def
0
Min
0
This signal indicates the state of the “machine states” that controls drive operation.
STS_INIT
STS_MAGN
STS_STOP
STS_START
STS_FS_STOP
0
1
2
3
4
Max
0
Acc
ER
Mod
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
171
Menu
STS_FS_START
STS_QSTOP
STS_FS_MAGN
STS_W_QSTOP
STS_READY 9
STS_MAGN_START 10
STS_ALM_DISABLED 11
STS_ALM_END_ACTION 12
7
8
5
6
STS_ALM_STOP
STS_ALM_FSTOP
13
14
STS_ALM_R_TO_NORMAL 15
STS_READY_START 16
STS_READY_FSTOP 17
STS_ALM_NO_RESTART 18
STS_FS_MAGN_START 19
PAR Description
1062 Drive OK
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
This signal is active when the drive is in the “OK” condition and no alarms are present.
Connected to the relay output, the normally open relay contact closes when:
- the drive is powered
- no alarm conditions are active.
Max
1
Acc
ER
Mod
Menu
Menu
Menu
172
PAR Description
1064 Drive ready
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
This signal is active when the drive reference is in the “Ready” to run condition.
Connected to the relay output, the normally open relay contact closes when:
- the drive is powered
- preloading is complete
- no alarm conditions are active
- the drive is enabled
- motor magnetisation is complete.
PAR Description
1110 Digital input E mon
1112 Digital input 1 mon
1114 Digital input 2 mon
1116 Digital input 3 mon
1118 Digital input 4 mon
1120 Digital input 5 mon
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
BIT 16
BIT 16
BIT
BIT
BIT
16
16
16
Def
0
0
0
0
0
0
These signals represent the state of the corresponding digital input.
0
0
0
0
0
Min
0
PAR Description
1210 Digital input 1X mon
1212 Digital input 2X mon
1214 Digital input 3X mon
1216 Digital input 4X mon
1218 Digital input 5X mon
1220 Digital input 6X mon
1222 Digital input 7X mon
1224 Digital input 8X mon
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
BIT 16
BIT 16
BIT 16
BIT 16
BIT 16
BIT 16
BIT 16
0
0
0
Def
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
0
0
0
0
0
Max
1
1
1
1
Max
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Max
1
Acc
ER
Mod
ER
ER
ER
Acc
ER
ER
ER
Mod
ER
ER
ER
Acc
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
Mod
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu
Menu
Menu
Menu
5510 Digital input 9X mon
5512 Digital input 10X mon
5514 Digital input 11X mon
5516 Digital input 12X mon
5518 Digital input 13X mon
BIT 16
BIT 16
BIT 16
BIT 16
BIT 16
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
5520 Digital input 14X mon
5522 Digital input 15X mon
5524 Digital input 16X mon
BIT
BIT
BIT
16
16
16
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
These signals represent the state of the corresponding digital input on the expansion card..
PAR Descrizione
2396 Torque nofilter
UM Tipo FB BIT perc FLOAT 16
Monitoring of the actual torque reference without filters.
Def
0.0
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
PAR Description
1530 Analog inp1
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc
ER
Mod
This signal is active when the value of the analog input is below the threshold set in parameter 1520 Analog inp 1 thr .
PAR Description
1580 Analog inp2
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc
ER
Mod
This signal is active when the value of the analog input is below the threshold set in parameter 1570 Analog inp 2 thr.
PAR Description
2388 Torque ref nofilter
UM Type FB BIT perc FLOAT 16
Def
0.0
Min
0.0
Max
0.0
Acc
ER
The torque control reference current without filter is displayed (in Flux vector OL and field-oriented vector mode).
Mod
Min
0.0
Max
0.0
Acc
ER
Mod
Menu
Menu
PAR Description
3006 Speed ratio out mon
UM Type FB BIT rpm INT16 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
This parameter displays the value of the speed ratio used by the “Speed draw” function (speed ratio).
Acc
ER
Mod
PAR Description
2392 Torque ref 1 mon
UM Type FB BIT perc FLOAT 16/32
The total value of torque reference 1 is displayed.
Def
0.0
Min
-300.0
Max
300.0
Acc
ERW
Mod
Max
1
Acc
ER
Mod Menu
Menu
Menu
PAR Description
3180 Brake control mon
UM Type FB BIT rpm INT16 16
This parameter displays the status of the brake command.
Def
0
0 Brake closed
1 Brake open
Min
0
PAR Description
3192 Brake open thr mon
UM Type perc FLOAT
FB BIT Def
0
Brake opening threshold value. Only if Hoist mode 2 has been selected.
Min
0.0
PAR Description
3214 Motor overload trip
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
This signal is active when the drive is in the motor overload alarm condition.
Max
0
Max
1
Acc
ERS
Acc
ER
Mod
Mod
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
173
Menu
Menu
PAR Description
3262 Bres overload trip
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
This signal is active when the drive is in the braking resistor overload alarm condition.
Max
1
PAR Description
3374 Vf catch out
UM Type FB BIT
INT32 16
Def
0
Min
0
The voltage applied during capture on-the-fly of the motor in Vf mode is displayed.
Max
0
Acc
ER
Acc
ER
Mod
Mod
Menu
Menu
PAR Description
3442 Powerloss rampdown
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
This parameter indicates the status of the Powerloss function deceleration ramp
0 Powerloss function deceleration ramp not ended
1 Powerloss function deceleration ramp ended
The signal is enabled at the end of the Powerloss function deceleration ramp.
The signal is disabled at different times depending on the Powerloss mode setting.
Max
1
Acc
ER
Mod
PAR Description
3446 Powerloss nextratio
UM Type FB BIT
INT32 32
Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
Acc
ER
Mod
This parameter gives the ratio between the motor speed and the speed reference.
For machines with several drives, line synchronisation can be achieved by connecting the Powerloss mode output of the master to the Speed ratio src input of the slave drives. The master => slave connection can be achieved via analog signals or fieldbus.
The value 2^30 corresponds to a ratio of 1.
Menu
Menu
Menu
Menu
PAR Description
3448 Powerloss nextactive
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
This parameter indicates the status of the Powerloss function
Min
0
0 Powerloss not enabled
1 Powerloss enabled
The function is enabled when there is a power failure.
The function is disabled at different times depending on the Powerloss mode setting.
Max
1
Acc
ER
Mod
PAR Description
3480 Vdc ctrl ramp freeze
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc
ER
This parameter displays when the deceleration ramp block is requested during the Vdc control function .
Mod
0 VdcCtrl function not enabled
1 VdcCtrl function enabled
PAR Description
3512 Drv thr overtemp mon
Signals that the threshold set in PAR 3504 Drv temp thr has been exceeded.
0 Threshold not exceeded
1 Threshold exceeded
UM Type FB BIT
UINT32
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Acc
ER
Mod
PAR Description
3514 Mot thr overtemp mon
UM Type FB BIT
UINT32
Def
0
Min
0
Signals that the threshold set in PAR 3506 Mot temp thr has been exceeded.
Max
1
Acc
ER
Mod
174
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Menu
Menu
Menu
Menu
0 Threshold not exceeded
1 Threshold exceeded
PAR Description
4372 DS402 status word
UM Type FB BIT
UINT16 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
65535
Acc
ER
Mod
This parameter displays the status word according to the DS402 profile. For more information reference should be made to the fieldbus manual.
PAR Description
4394 PFdrv status word 1
UM Type FB BIT
UINT16 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
65535
Acc
ER
Mod
This parameter displays the status word 1 according to the Profidrives profile. For more information reference should be made to the fieldbus manual.
PAR Description
4396 PFdrv status word 2
UM Type FB BIT
UINT16 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
65535
Acc
ER
Mod
This parameter displays the status word 2 according to the Profidrives profile. For more information reference should be made to the fieldbus manual.
PAR Description
4538 KTY84/PTC current
UM Type FB BIT mA UINT32
Def
2
Value of current flowing in connected temperature sensor KTY84.
Min
1
Max
10
Acc
ERWS
Mod
Menu
Menu
Menu
Menu
Menu
PAR Description
4708 Alm dig out mon 1
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
This signal is activated when the alarm configured in parameter 4700 alarm dig sel 1 is active.
PAR Description
4710 Alm dig out mon 2
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
This signal is activated when the alarm configured in parameter 4702 alarm dig sel 2 is active.
PAR Description
4712 Alm dig out mon 3
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
This signal is activated when the alarm configured in parameter 4704 alarm dig sel 3 is active.
PAR Description
4714 Alm dig out mon 4
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
This signal is activated when the alarm configured in parameter 4706 alarm dig sel 4 is active.
PAR Description
4770 First alarm
0 No alarm
1 Overvoltage
2 Undervoltage
3 Ground fault
4 Overcurrent
5 Desaturation
6 MultiUndervolt
7 MultiOvercurr
8 MultiDesat
9 Heatsink OT
UM Type FB BIT
UINT32 16
This parameter displays the first alarm to be activated.
Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
Acc
ER
Mod
Acc
ER
Mod
Acc
ER
Mod
Acc
ER
Mod
Acc
ERW
Mod
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
175
Menu
10 HeatsinkS OTUT
11 Intakeair OT
12 Motor OT
13 Drive overload
14 Motor overload
15 Bres overload
16 Phaseloss
17 Opt Bus fault
18 Opt 1 IO fault
19 Opt 2 IO fault
20 Opt Enc fault
21 External fault
22 Speed fbk loss
23 Overspeed
24 Speed ref loss
25 Emg stop alarm
26 Power down
27 ExtIO fault
28 FastLink fault
29 Brake fault
30 Motor pre OT
31 Mot phase loss
32 Not Used2
33 Plc1 fault
34 Plc2 fault
35 Plc3 fault
36 Plc4 fault
37 Plc5 fault
38 Plc6 fault
39 Plc7 fault
40 Plc8 fault
41 Watchdog
42 Trap error
43 System error
44 User error
45 Param error
46 Load def par
47 Plc cfg error
48 Load def plc
49 Key failed
50 Encoder error
51 Opt cfg change
52 Not Used3
53 Plc9 fault
54 Plc10 fault
55 Plc11 fault
56 Plc12 fault
57 Plc13 fault
58 Plc14 fault
59 Plc15 fault
60 Plc16 fault
PAR Description
4780 Alarm PLC
UM Type
UINT16
FB BIT Def
0
Min
0
Max
0
Acc
ER
This parameter displays the state of the alarms generated by the application written with the internal PLC
Mod
Bit
0
Description
1 = PLC 1 fault active
176
ADV200 • Troubleshooting
Menu
Menu
3
4
5
1
2
6
7
1 = PLC 2 fault active
1 = PLC 3 fault active
1 = PLC 4 fault active
1 = PLC 5 fault active
1 = PLC 6 fault active
1 = PLC 7 fault active
1 = PLC 8 fault active
PAR Description
4840 Alarm lo state
UM Type FB BIT
UINT32 32
Def
0
This parameter displays the state of alarms 1..32 of the drive.
Bit
27
28
29
30
31
23
24
25
26
19
20
21
22
15
16
17
18
6
7
8
9
2
3
0
1
4
5
10
11
12
13
14
Description
1 = Overvoltage active
1 = Undervoltage active
1 = Ground fault active
1 = Overcurrent active
1 = Desaturation active
1 – MultiUndervolt active
1 = MultiOvercurr active
1 – MultiDesat active
1 = Heatsink OT active
1 = Heatsink lin OT active
1 = Air OT active
1 = Motor OT active
1 = Drive overload active
1 = Motor overload active
1 = Bres overload active
1 = Phase loss active
1 = Opt bus fault active
1 = Opt 1 I/O fault active
1 = Opt 2 I/O fault active
1 = Opt enc fault active
1 = External fault active
1 = Fbk loss active
1 = Overspeed active
1 = Ref loss active
1 = Emg stop alarm active
1 = Power down active
1 = not used
1 = not used
1 = not used
1 = not used
1 = not used
1 = not used
Min
0
Min
0
PAR Description
4842 Alarm hi state
UM Type FB BIT
UINT32 32
Def
0
This parameter displays the state of alarms 33...64 of the drive.
Bit
4
5
6
0
1
2
3
Description
1 = PLC 1 fault active
1 = PLC 2 fault active
1 = PLC 3 fault active
1 = PLC 4 fault active
1 = PLC 5 fault active
1 = PLC 6 fault active
1 = PLC 7 fault active
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
Max
0
Acc
ER
Mod
Max
0
Acc
ER
Mod
177
Menu
Menu
Menu
Menu
Menu
7 1 = PLC 8 fault active
PAR Description
5800 FL Fwd 1 inv mon
5802 FL Fwd 2 inv mon
5804 FL Fwd 3 inv mon
5806 FL Fwd 4 inv mon
5808 FL Fwd 5 inv mon
UM Type FB BIT
INT32 32BIT
INT32 32BIT
INT32 32BIT
INT32 32BIT
INT32 32BIT
0
0
0
0
Def
0
0
0
0
0
Min
0
0
0
0
0
Max
0
Acc
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
Mod
5810 FL Fwd 6 inv mon
5812 FL Fwd 7 inv mon
5814 FL Fwd 8 inv mon
INT32 32BIT
INT32 32BIT
INT32 32BIT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ER
ER
ER
These parameters are not used on the master drive.
On the slave drive these parameters show the value received from the previous drive. The “ Inv” parameters enable the value received to be used with the opposite sign, without changing any of the data sent to subsequent slaves.
These parameters are available in the “src” analog parameter selection lists.
Min
0
Max
0
Acc
ER
Mod PAR Description
6000 Null
UM Type FB BIT
UINT32 32
Def
0
This signal forces the variable to the zero level (always disabled).
PAR Description
6002 One
UM Type FB BIT
UINT32 32
This signal forces the variable to level one (always active).
Def
1
Min
1
Max
1
Acc
ER
Mod
Max
1
Acc
ER
Mod PAR Description
6004 Speed limit state
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
This signal is activated when the drive is in the speed limit condition.
Min
0
PAR Description
6006 Current limit state
UM Type FB BIT
BIT 16
Def
0
This signal is activated when the drive is in the current limit condition.
Min
0
Max
1
Acc
ER
Mod
178
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
C – TROUBLESHOOTING - Alarms
Note !
To reset alarms, see Quick start guide, paragraph 6.6.1
.
In the following table, the Code is visible only from serial line.
Code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Error message shown on the display
No alarm
Overvoltage
Undervoltage
Ground fault
Overcurrent
Desaturation
MultiUndervolt
MultiOvercurr
MultiDesat
Heatsink OT
HeatsinkS OTUT
Intakeair OT
Sub-code Description
Condition: No alarm present
Condition: DC link overvoltage alarm due to energy recovered from the motor.
The voltage arriving at the drive power section is too high compared to the maximum threshold relating to the PAR 560 Mains voltage parameter setting.
Solution:
- Extend the deceleration ramp.
- Use a braking resistor between terminals BR1 and BR2 to dissipate the recovered energy
- Use the VDC Control function
Condition: DC link undervoltage alarm.
The voltage arriving at the drive power section is too low compared to the minimum threshold relating to the PAR 560 Mains voltage parameter setting due to:
- the mains voltage being too low or overextended voltage drops.
- poor cable connections (e.g. loose contactor terminals, inductance, filter, etc. ).
Solution: Check the connections.
Condition: Ground short circuit alarm
Solution:
- Check drive and motor wiring.
- Check that the motor is not grounded.
Condition: Instantaneous overcurrent protection intervention alarm.
This may be due to the incorrect setting of current regulator parameters or a short circuit between phases or ground fault on the drive output.
Solution:
- Check the current regulator parameters
- Check wiring towards the motor
Condition: Instantaneous overcurrent in the IGBT bridge alarm.
Solution: Switch the drive off and then switch it on again.
If the alarm persists, contact the technical service centre.
Condition: The number of attempted automatic restarts after the Undervoltage alarm has exceeded the set
PAR 4650 UVRep attempts value in the PAR 4652 UVRep delay time.
Solution: Too many Undervoltage alarms.
Adopt the proposed solutions for the Undervoltage alarm.
Condition: 2 attempted automatic restarts after the Overcurrent alarm within 30 seconds. If more than 30 seconds pass after the Overcurrent alarm was generated, the attempt counter is reset.
Solution: Too many Overcurrent alarms. Adopt the proposed solutions for the Overcurrent alarm.
Condition: 2 attempted at automatic restarts after the Desaturation alarm within 30 seconds. If more than
30 seconds pass after the Desaturation alarm was generated, the attempt counter is reset.
Solution: Too many Desaturation alarms.
Adopt the proposed solutions for the Desaturation alarm.
Condition: Heatsink temperature too high alarm
Solution:
- Verify the correct operation of the cooling fan.
- Check that the heatsinks are not clogged
Condition: Heatsink temperature too high or too low alarm
The temperature has exceeded the upper or lower limit set for the linear temperature transducer.
Solution:
- Verify the correct operation of the cooling fan.
- Check that the heatsinks are not clogged
- Check that the openings for the cabinet cooling air are not blocked.
Condition: Intake air temperature too high alarm.
Solution: Check correct fan operation
ADV200 • Troubleshooting
179
18
19
20
Code
12
13
14
15
16
17
21
22
Error message shown on the display
Motor OT
Drive overload
Motor overload
Bres overload
Phaseloss
Opt Bus fault
Opt 1 IO fault
Opt 2 IO fault
Opt Enc fault
External fault
Speed fbk loss
Sub-code Description
Condition: Motor overtemperature alarm. Possible causes:
- Load cycle too heavy
- The motor is installed in a place where the ambient temperature is too high
- If the motor is provided with a blower: the fan is not working
- If the motor is not provided with a blower: the load is too high at slow speeds. Cooling the fan on the motor shaft is not sufficient for this load cycle.
- The motor is used at less than the rated frequency, causing additional magnetic losses.
Solution:
- Change the processing cycle.
- Use a cooling fan to cool the motor.
Condition: Drive overload alarm.
The overload threshold of the accumulator of the I²t drive thermal image has been exceeded.
Solution: Check that the size of the drive is suitable for the application.
Condition: Motor overload alarm.
The current absorbed during operation is greater than that specified on the motor data plate. The overload threshold of the accumulator of the I²t motor thermal image has been exceeded.
Solution:
- Reduce the motor load.
- Increase the size of the motor.
Condition: Braking resistor overload alarm.
The current absorbed by the resistor is greater than the rated current. The overload threshold of the accumulator of the I²t braking resistor thermal image has been exceeded.
Solution: Increase the Watt value of the braking resistor
Condition: Power phase loss alarm.
Solution: Check the mains voltage and whether any protections upstream of the drive have been tripped.
Condition: Error in the configuration stage or communication error.
XXX0H-X If the first digit to the left of “H” in the alarm sub-code is 0, the error regards a communication problem.
XXXXH-X If the first digit to the left of “H” in the alarm sub-code is other than 0, the error regards a configuration problem.
Solution: For configuration errors, check the configuration of the bus communication, type of bus, baudrate, address, parameter setting.
For communication errors verify wiring, resistance of terminations, interference immunity, timeout settings.
For further details, please refer to the user guide for the specific bus.
Condition: Error in the communication between Regulation and I/O expansion card in slot 1
Solution: Check that it has been inserted correctly, see chapter 10.5 ADV200 QS manual.
Condition: Error in the communication between Regulation and I/O expansion card in slot 2 or 3
Solution: Check that it has been inserted correctly, see chapter 10.5 ADV200 QS manual.
Condition: Error in the communication between Regulation and Encoder feedback card.
Solution: Check that it has been inserted correctly, see chapter 10.5 ADV200 QS manual.
Condition: External alarm present.
A digital input has been programmed as an external alarm, but the +24V voltage is not available on the terminal.
Solution: Check that the terminal screws are tight
Condition: Speed feedback loss alarm.
The encoder is not connected, not connected properly or not powered: verify encoder operation by selecting the Motor speed parameter in the MONITOR menu.
180
ADV200 • Troubleshooting
Code
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33 ... 40
41
Error message shown on the display
Overspeed
Speed ref loss
Emg stop alarm
Power down
ExtIO fault
FastLink fault
Brake fault
Motor pre OT
Mot phase loss
Sub-code Description
Solution:
- Check encoder wiring for integrity.
- Check that the encoder is connected to the power supply.
- With the drive disabled, turn the motor clockwise (seen from the motor shaft side). A positive value must be displayed.
- If the value does not change or values are indicated randomly, check the encoder power supply and cables.
- If the value displayed is negative, invert the encoder connections. Change channel A+ and A- or B+ and B-.
- Check that the encoder electronics are consistent with those of the relative expansion card.
- Generated in case of an encoder fault. Each type of encoder generates a “Loss of feedback” alarm differently. See parameter 2172 SpdFbkLoss code for information about the cause of the alarm and chapter C.1
Speed fbk loss alarm.
Condition: Motor overspeed alarm.
The motor speed exceeds the limits set in the PAR 670 Speed ref top lim and PAR 672 Speed ref bottom lim parameters.
Solution:
- Limit the speed reference.
- Check that the motor is not driven in overspeed during rotation.
Condition: Speed reference loss alarm; occurs if the difference between the speed regulator reference and the actual motor speed is more than 100 rpm. This condition occurs because the drive is in the current limit condition. It is only available in the Flux Vect OL and Flux Vect OC mode.
Solution:
- Check the drive load conditions
- Check the number of encoder impulses
Condition: Emergency stop alarm.
The Stop key on the keypad was pressed with the PAR 1008 Stop key mode parameter set to
EmgStop&Alarm.
Active in remote control mode (PAR 1012=1) both by using “Terminals” command or “Digital” commands and, in local control mode (PAR 1012=0) by using “Terminals” command.
Solution:
Eliminate the reason for which the Stop key on the keypad was pressed and reset the drive.
Condition: The drive was enabled with no supply voltage at the power section.
Solution: Check the drive power supply
Condition: Communication fault with the external module.
Solution:
See paragraph “C-2 “ExtIO fault” Alarm” on page 190
Condition: FastLink communication fault
Solution:
See paragraph “C-3 “Fastlink” Alarm” on page 191
Condition: Incorrect setting of brake control function parameters.
Solution: See menu 22.13 - FUNCTIONS/BRAKE CONTROL
Condition: Motor overtemperature prealarm. % value of threshold compared to PAR 4532 MotorOT thr,
Solution:
- Value set too low for duty cycle
- Heavy duty cycle
Condition: Output phase loss.
Solution: Check Drive/motor connection.
Not Used 2
Plc1 fault
...
Plc8 fault
Watchdog
Condition: Enabled application developed in the IEC 61131-3 environment has found the conditions for generating this specific alarm to be true. The meaning of the alarm depends on the type of application. For more information, refer to the documentation concerning the specific application..
XXXXH-X The XXXXH-X code indicates the reason for the error: make a note of this to discuss it with the service centre.
Solution: Refer to the documentation concerning the enabled application.
Condition: may occur during functioning when the watchdog protection of the micro is activated; the alarm is inserted in the alarm list and alarm log. After this alarm:
- the drive automatically runs a reset
- motor control is not available.
ADV200 • Troubleshooting
181
Code
42
43
44
45
46
47
Error message shown on the display
Trap error
System error
User error
Param error
Load default
Plc cfg error
Sub-code Description
XXXXH-X The XXXXH-X code indicates the reason for the error: take note for examination with the service centre.
Solution: If the alarm was a consequence of a variation to the drive configuration (parameter setting, installation of an option, downloading of a PLC application), remove it.
Switch the drive off and then switch it on again.
Condition: this condition can occur during operation when the trap micro protection is enabled; the alarm is included in the list of alarms and alarm log. After this alarm:
- the drive automatically runs a reset
- motor control is not available.
XXXXH-X The XXXXH-X code (SubHandler-Class) indicates the reason for the error: take note for examination with the service centre.
Solution: If the alarm was a consequence of a variation to the drive configuration (parameter setting, installation of an option, downloading of a PLC application), remove it.
Switch the drive off and then switch it on again.
Condition: this condition can occur during operation when the operating system protection is enabled; the alarm is included in the list of alarms and alarm log. After this alarm:
- the drive automatically runs a reset
- motor control is not available.
XXXXH-X The XXXXH-X code (Error-Pid) indicates the reason for the error: take note for examination with the service centre.
Solution: If the alarm was a consequence of a variation to the drive configuration (parameter setting, installation of an option, downloading of a PLC application), remove it.
Switch the drive off and then switch it on again.
Condition: this condition can occur during operation when the software protection is enabled; the alarm is included in the list of alarms and alarm log. After this alarm:
- the drive automatically runs a reset
- motor control is not available.
XXXXH-X The XXXXH-X (Error-Pid) code indicates the reason for the error: make a note of this to discuss it with the service centre.
Solution: If the alarm was a consequence of a variation to the drive configuration (parameter setting, installation of an option, downloading of a PLC application), remove it.
Switch the drive off and then switch it on again.
Condition: if an error occurs during the enabling of the parameter database saved in the Flash memory; the alarm is included in the list of alarms and alarm log.
XXXH-X The code XXXXH-X indicates the IPA of the parameter that has been set outside the range allowed when the database is enabled.
Solution: Set the parameter causing the error to a value within the range and run Save parameter . Switch the drive off and then switch it back on again.
If the IPA of the parameter is not shown in the manual, contact the service centre.
Condition: this can occur during loading of the parameter database saved in the Flash memory it is normal if it appears in the following conditions: the first time the drive is switched on, when a new version of the firmware is downloaded, when the regulation is installed on a new size, when a new region is entered. If this message appears when the drive is already in use it means there has been a problem in the parameter database saved in the Flash memory.
If this message is displayed the drive restores the default database, i.e. the one downloaded.
0001H-1 The database saved is not valid
0002H-2 The database saved is not compatible
0003H-3 The saved database refers to a different size and not to the current size
0004H-4 The saved database refers to a different region and not to the current region
Solution: Set the parameters to the desired value and run Save parameter
Condition: this can occur during loading of the MDPLC application
The Mdplc application present on the drive is not run.
0004H-4
The application that has been downloaded has a different Crc on the DataBlock and Function table.
0065H-101 The application that has been downloaded has an invalid identification code (Info).
0066H-102 The applciation that has been downloaded uses an incorrect task number (Info).
0067H-103 The application that has been downloaded has an incorrect software configuration.
182
ADV200 • Troubleshooting
Code
48
49
50
51
52
53 ... 60
Error message shown on the display
Load def plc
Key failed
Encoder error
Opt cfg change
Sub-code Description
0068H-104
0069H-105
The application that has been downloaded has a different Crc on the DataBlock and Function table.
A Trap error or System error has occurred.
The drive has automatically executed a Power-up operation.
Application not executed.
See the Alarm List for more information about an error that has occurred.
006AH-106 The application that has been downloaded has an invalid identification code (Task).
006BH-107 The application that has been downloaded uses an incorrect task number (Task).
006CH-108 The application that has been downloaded has an incorrect Crc (Tables + Code)
Solution: Remove the MDPLC application or download a correct MDPLC application.
Condition: this can occur during loading of the parameter database saved in the Flash memory of the
MDPLC application
it is normal if it appears the first time the drive is switched on, after downloading a new application. If this message appears when the drive is already in use it means there has been a problem in the parameter database saved in the Flash memory.
If this message appears the drive automatically runs the Load default command.
0001H-1 The database saved is not valid
Solution: Set the parameters to the desired value and run Save parameter.
Condition: Shis may occur at drive power-on if the incorrect enabling key was inserted for a given firmware function.
0001H-1 Incorrect PLC key. PLC application not available.
Solution: Ask Gefran for the correct key to enable the desired firmware function.
Condition: this condition may occur when the drive is powered during encoder setup each time parameter
552 Regulation mode is set.
100H-256
An error occurred during setup; the information received from the encoder is not reliable. If the encoder is used for feedback the Speed fbk loss [22] alarm is also generated.
Solution : Take the recommended action for the Speed fbk loss [22] alarm.
200H-512
Cause: The firmware on the optional encoder card is incompatible with that on the regulation card. The information received from the encoder is not reliable
Solution : Contact Gefran in order to update the firmware on the optional encoder card.
Condition : this may occur when powering the drive if an expansion card has been removed or replaced or the incorrect enable key is inserted for a given firmware function.
0064H-100 Card removed from slot 1.
0014H-20 Card removed from slot 2
0003H-3 Card removed from slot 3
0078H-120 Card removed from slot 1 and from slot 2
0067H-103 Card removed from slot 1 and from slot 3.
0017H-23 Card removed from slot 2 and from slot 3.
007BH-123 Card removed from slot 1, from slot 2 and from slot 3
Solution : Check the hardware configuration, then press ESC. Save the parameters ( Save parameters , menu 04.01 par 550) to save the new hardware configuration.
Not Used 3
Plc9 fault
...
Plc16 fault
Condition: Enabled application developed in the IEC 61131-3 environment has found the conditions for generating this specific alarm to be true. The meaning of the alarm depends on the type of application. For more information, refer to the documentation concerning the specific application..
XXXXH-X The XXXXH-X code indicates the reason for the error: make a note of this to discuss it with the service centre.
Solution: Refer to the documentation concerning the enabled application.
ADV200 • Troubleshooting
183
C-1 Speed fbk loss alarm according to the type of feedback
Note !
To interpret the causes of the alarm correctly, read the parameter 17.30 SpdFbkLoss code , PAR 2172, as described below.
Take the digits of the number in hexadecimal format and enter them in the table below:
D7..D4
D3 D2 D1 D0
Value
For each D0, D1, D2, D3 value other than 0x0 (0x0 = no alarm active)search for the sub-values it can be divided into in the table below.
D0 D1 D2 D3
0x0
0x1
0x2
0x3
0x4
0x5
0xA
0xB
0xC
0xD
0x6
0x7
0x8
0x9
0xE
0xF
0x0
0x1
0x0
0x1
0x0
0x1
0x0
0x1
0x0
0x1
0x0
0x1
0x0
0x1
0x0
0x1
0x2
0x2
0x0
0x0
0x2
0x2
0x2
0x2
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x2
0x2
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x4
0x4
0x4
0x4
0x4
0x4
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x4
0x4
0x8
0x8
0x8
0x8
0x8
0x8
0x0
0x0
0x8
0x8
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
In the table regarding the type of encoder in use, search for the sub-values obtained from each D0, D1, D2, D3 digit in the corresponding columns Value.D0, Value.D1, Value.D2, Value.D3.
Example with Endat encoder:
PAR 2172 = A0H
Take the digits of the number in hexadecimal format and enter them in the table below:
Value
D7..D4
D3 D2 D1
0xA
D0
0x0
184
For each D0, D1, D2, D3 value other than 0x0 search for the sub-values it can be divided into in table 1.
D0 D1 D2 D3
0x0
0x1
0x2
0x3
0x4
0x5
0x6
0x7
0x8
0x9
0xA
0xB
0x0
0x0
0x8
0x8
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x8
0x8
0x4
0x4
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x4
0x4
0x0
0x0
0x2
0x2
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x2
0x2
0x0
0x0
0x2
0x2
0x0
0x1
0x0
0x1
0x0
0x1
0x0
0x1
0x0
0x1
0x0
0x1
ADV200 • Troubleshooting
0xC
0xD
0xE
0xF
0x8
0x8
0x8
0x8
0x4
0x4
0x4
0x4
0x0
0x0
0x2
0x2
0x0
0x1
0x0
0x1
For each D0, D1, D2, D3 value other than 0x0 search for the sub-values it can be divided into in table 1.
In the table regarding the type of encoder in use, search for the sub-values obtained from each D0, D1, D2, D3 digit in the corresponding columns Value.D0, Value.D1, Value.D2, Value.D3
Value.D1 = 2H
Cause: (CRC_CKS_P)disturbed SSI signals cause a CKS error or Parity.
Valore.D1 = 8H
Cause: (DT1_ERR) Encoder has detected a malfunction and signals this to the drive via Error bit. Bits 16..31 contain the type of malfunction detected by the encoder.
● Speed fbk loss [22] alarm with digital incremental encoder
Bit D7..
D4
0
Value
D3 D2 D1 D0
0x1
1
2
0x2
0x4
Name
CHA
CHB
CHZ
Description
Cause: no impulses or disturbance on incremental channel A.
Solution: Check the connection of the encoder-drive channel A, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage.
Check parameters 2102 Encoder 1 supply and 2104 Encoder 1 input cfg (if encoder 1 is used).
Check parameters 5102 Encoder 2 supply and 5104 Encoder 2 input cfg (if encoder 2 is used).
Cause: no impulses or disturbance on incremental channel B.
Solution: Check the connection of the encoder-drive channel B, check the connection of the screen, check the Encoder 1 supply voltage.
Check parameters 2102 Encoder 1 supply and 2104 Encoder 1 input cfg (if encoder 1 is used).
Check parameters 5102 Encoder 2 supply and 5104 Encoder 2 input cfg (if encoder 2 is used).
Cause: no impulses or disturbance on incremental channel Z.
Solution: Check the connection of the encoder-drive channel Z, check the connection of the screen, check the Encoder 1 supply voltage.
Check parameters 2102 Encoder 1 supply and 2104 Encoder 1 input cfg (if encoder 1 is used).
Check parameters 5102 Encoder 2 supply and 5104 Encoder 2 input cfg (if encoder 2 is used).
● Speed fbk loss [22] alarm with sinusoidal incremental encoder
Bit
3
D7..
D4
Value
D3 D2 D1 D0
0x8
Description
Name
MOD_
INCR
Cause: voltage level not correct or disturbance on signals of incremental channels
A-B.
Solution: Check the connection of the encoder-drive channels A-B, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter 2102
Encoder 1 supply, check parameter 2108 Encoder 1 signal Vpp.
ADV200 • Troubleshooting
185
186
● Speed fbk loss [22] alarm with SinCos encoder
Bit D7..
D4
3
4
Value Description
D3 D2 D1 D0
Name
0x8
MOD_
INCR
0x1 0x0 MOD_ABS
Cause: voltage level not correct or disturbance on signals of incremental channels
A-B.
Solution: Check the connection of the the encoder-drive channels A-B, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter 2102
Encoder 1 supply , check parameter 2108 Encoder 1 signal Vpp .
Cause: voltage level not correct or disturbance on signals of absolute SinCos channels.
Solution: Check the connection of the the encoder-drive channels A-B, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter 2102
Encoder 1 supply , check parameter 2108 Encoder 1 signal Vpp .
● Speed fbk loss [22] alarm with SSI absolute encoder
Bit D7..
D4
3
5
8
Value
D3 D2 D1 D0
0x8
0x2 0x0
0x1 0x0 0x0
Name
Description
MOD_
INCR
Cause: voltage level not correct or disturbance on signals of incremental channels
A-B.
Solution: Check the connection of the the encoder-drive channels A-B, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter 2102
Encoder 1 supply , check parameter 2108 Encoder 1 signal Vpp .
Cause: SSI signals not present or disturbed.
CRC_
CKS_P
Setup error
Solution: Check the connection of the clock and encoder-drive data, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter 2102
Encoder 1 supply , check parameter 2112 Encoder 1 SSI bits .
Cause: An error occurred during setup.
Solution: Check the connection of the clock and encoder-drive data, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter 2102
Encoder 1 supply , check parameter 2112 Encoder 1 SSI bits .
● Speed fbk loss [22] alarm with EnDat absolute encoder
Bit D7..
D4
3
5
8
Value
D3 D2 D1 D0
0x8
0x2 0x0
0x1 0x0 0x0
Name
Description
MOD_
INCR
Cause: v oltage level not correct or disturbance on signals of incremental channels
A-B.
Solution: Check the connection of the the encoder-drive channels A-B, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter 2102
Encoder 1 supply , check parameter 2108 Encoder 1 signal Vpp .
Cause: SSI signals not present or disturbed cause an error on CRC CRC_
CKS_P
Setup error
Solution: Check the connection of the clock and encoder-drive data, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter 2102
Encoder 1 supply .
Cause: An error occurred during setup.
Solution: Check the connection of the clock and encoder-drive data, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter 2102
Encoder 1 supply .
ADV200 • Troubleshooting
The following conditions occur while resetting the encoder following Speed fbk loss [22] activation
Bit
6
7
D7..
D4
16.31 xxxx
Value Description
D3 D2 D1 D0
Name
0x4 0x0 ACK_TMO Cause: SSI signals not present or disturbed cause an error on CRC
0x8 0x0 DT1_ERR
Solution: Check the connection of the clock and encoder-drive data, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter
2102 Encoder 1 supply .
Cause: Encoder has detected malfunction and signals this to the drive via bit DT1.
Bits 16..31 contain the type of malfunction detected by the encoder.
Solution: See the encoder manufacturer's technical guide.
Bit =0 =1
0
1
Light source
Signal amplitude
OK Failure (1)
OK Erroneous (1)
2
3
4
5
Position value
Over voltage
OK Erroneous (1)
NO Yes (1)
Under voltage
Over current
Battery
NO Under voltage supply (1)
NO Yes (1)
OK Change the battery (2) 6
7..15
(1) Can also be set after the power supply is switched off or on.
(2) Only for battery-buffered encoders
● Speed fbk loss [22] alarm with Hiperface absolute encoder
Bit
3
D7..
D4
Value
D3 D2 D1 D0
0x8
Name
5
6
8
0x2 0x0
0x4 0x0
0x1 0x0 0x0
Description
Cause: voltage level not correct or disturbance on signals of incremental channels
A-B.
Solution: Check the connection of the the encoder-drive channels A-B, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter 2102
Encoder 1 supply , check parameter 2108 Encoder 1 signal Vpp .
Cause: disturbed SSI signals cause a CKS error or Parity
Solution: Check the connection of the clock and encoder-drive data, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter 2102
Encoder 1 supply .
Cause: Encoder does not recognise the command that has been sent to it and replies with ACK. The SSI signals not present cause a TMO error.
Solution: Check the connection of the clock and encoder-drive data, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter 2102
Encoder 1 supply.
Cause: An error occurred during setup.
Solution: Check the connection of the clock and encoder-drive data, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter 2102
Encoder 1 supply .
The following conditions occur while resetting the encoder following Speed fbk loss [22] activation.
ADV200 • Troubleshooting
187
188
Bit
7
D7..
D4
16.31 xxxx
Value
D3 D2 D1 D0
Name
Description
0x8 0x0 DT1_ERR
Cause: Encoder has detected malfunction and signals this to the drive via Error bit.
Bits 16..31 contain the type of malfunction detected by the encoder.
Solution: See the encoder manufacturer's technical guide.
Type Code Description
Transmission
09h Transmitted parity bit is incorrect
0AH Checksum of transmitted data is wrong
0BH Incorrect command code
0CH Wrong number of transmitted data
0DH Illegal transmitted command argument
0FH Wrong access authorization specified
0EH Selected field has READ ONLY status
10H Data field (re) definition not executable due to field size
11H Specified address is not available in selected field
12H Selected field does not yet exist
00H No encoder error, no error message
03H Data field operations disabled
04H Analog monitoring inoperative
08H Counting register overflow
01H Encoder analog signals are unreliable
02H Wrong synchronisation or offset
05H-
07H
1CH-
1DH
Encoder-internal hardware fault, no operation possible
Error in sampling, no operation possible
1EH Permissible operation temperature is exceeded
(1) Can also be set after the power supply is switched off or on.
(2) Only for battery-buffered encoders
● Speed fbk loss [22] alarm with Resolver
Code Name Error description
0x00000001 D0 FAULT REGISTER Configuration parity error
0x00000002 D1 FAULT REGISTER Phase error exceeds phase lock range
0x00000004 D2 FAULT REGISTER Velocity exceeds maximum tracking rate
0x00000008 D3 FAULT REGISTER
Tracking error exceeds LOT (Loss of
Signal) threshold
0x00000010
0x00000020
D4 FAULT REGISTER
D5 FAULT REGISTER
SIN/COS inputs exceed DOS (Degradation of signal) mismatch threshold
SIN/COS inputs exceed DOS (Degradation of signal) over range threshold
0x00000040 D6 FAULT REGISTER
SIN/COS inputs below LOS (Loss of
Signal) threshold
0x00000080 D7 FAULT REGISTER SIN/COS inputs clipped
Possible solution
Reset Resolver card
Check the connection of the Resolver input pins
(SIN-,SIN+,COS-,COS+), check PAR 2128
Check the connection of the Resolver input pins
(SIN-,SIN+,COS-,COS+), check PAR 2126
Check the connection of the Resolver input pins
(SIN-,SIN+,COS-,COS+), check PAR 2124
Check if any of the Resolver input pins (SIN-
,SIN+,COS-,COS+) are shorted with power input or ground of the resolver board
ADV200 • Troubleshooting
C-1.1 Reset Speed fbk loss alarm
The reasons for activating the Speed fbk loss alarm and the information acquired by the encoder are shown in parameter 2172 SpdFbkLoss code.
If no card has been installed the Speed fbk loss [22] alarm is generated and no cause is displayed in parameter 2172 SpdFbkLoss code . Several causes may be present at the same time.
If no card is recognised, the system runs a routine that always returns Speed fbk loss [22] active without specifying a cause.
C-1.2 Encoder error alarm
Setup is performed each time the drive is turned on, regardless of the regulation mode that has been selected.
If an error is detected during setup the Encoder error alarm is generated with the following codes:
Bit
8
9
D7..
D4
Value
D3 D2 D1 D0
Name
Description
0x1 0x0 0x0
0x2 0x0 0x0
Setup error
Compatibility error
Cause: An error occurred during setup. When this has been signalled the information obtained from the encoder is not reliable.
Solution: Take the action recommended for Speed fbk loss [22] alarm according to the type of encoder.
Cause: Firmware on option card incompatible with firmware on regulation card.
When this has been signalled the information obtained from the encoder is not reliable.
Solution: Contact Gefran in order to update the firmware on the optional card.
ADV200 • Troubleshooting
189
190
C-2 “ExtIO fault” Alarm
The drive may generate an “ExtIO fault” alarm for a series of reasons. At drive startup there may be problems with configuration, associated with the EXP-FL-XCAN-ADV card or parameter settings. During the Config phase the alarm might depend on an SDO communication error. During the Control phase the HeartBeat or
NodeGuarding protocol might fail due to an interruption in the communication with the slave. An Emergency message sent by the slave could generate the “ExtIO fault” alarm.
Each reason for the alarm can be identified by to the associated subcode.
The table below shows information about the subcodes and how to associate these with the cause of the alarm, to enable troubleshooting and proper use of the system.
0
1..51
200
202
203
204
Subcode
0
1h..35h
0xC8
0xCA
0xCB
0xCC
Description
BusLoss
SDO error
CAN error
Config error
Lost Messages
Opt IO installed
255..65535
0xFF..0xFFFF
Slave Emergency
Remarks
Loss of communication in the Operational state
Error sending the SDO. See the SDO Configuration Table on appendix to identify the object with the problem
Internal hardware fault; if the problem cannot be solved, replace the regulation card
The number or I/Os in the slave module has changed. Check parameter 5482
External IO info . Save the parameters to store the current configuraiton.
TPDOs coming from the slave too frequently. Check that the slave meets CANopen specifications for TPDO sending times
An optional internal I/O expansion card has been installed. The EXP-XCAN-ADV card functions are not available.
Emergency message sent by the slave.
If the alarm is due to an Emergency message sent by the slave, the subcode contains the error code (Error code low and Error code Hi) of the message, while 4 of the 5 additional bytes in the message are shown by parameter 5486 External IO Failcode .
Emergency message content:
Byte0
Error code
Low
Subcode
Byte1 Byte2
Error code Hi Error register
Byte3
Info 0
Byte4
Info 1
Byte5
Info 2
PAR 5486 External IO Failcode
Byte6
Info3
Byte7
Info4
See the slave manual for information about the meaning of the Emergency message.
ADV200 • Troubleshooting
C-3 “Fastlink” Alarm
Reasons why the FastLink alarm is generated:
Bit
Name
0
D3 D2 D1 D0
0x1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
0x1
0x2
0X4
0x1
0x2
0x4
0x8
0x2
0x4
0x8
Description
Cks
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
RX Timeout
Pwm sync slave
Cause: The drive has detected a checksum error
Solution: Take all the necessary precautions to increase the resistance of the drive to disturbance
Cause:
Solution:
Cause:
Solution:
Cause:
Solution:
Cause:
Solution:
Cause: The slave drive has not received a new data frame for 2 consecutive cycles.
Solution: Take all the necessary precautions to increase the resistance of the drive to disturbance
Cause: On the slave drives there is a problem with the function that enables the generation of Pwm signals to be synchronised with the Pwm signals of the master and with the function that enables the execution of control tasks to be synchronised with execution of control tasks by the master.
An error exceeding the maximum error allowed has been detected for 4 consecutive cycles.
Solution: Take all the necessary precautions to increase the resistance of the drive to disturbance
Cable open Cause: No optical fibre.
Setup error
Compatibility error
Solution: Check connection with optical fibre.
Cause: An error occurred during setup; the information received from the FastLink is not reliable.
Solution: Check setting of FastLink parameters.
Cause: The firmware on the optional FastLink card is incompatible with that on the regulation card.
Slave answer
NOK
Solution: Contact Gefran in order to update the firmware on the optional fastlink card.
Cause: situation in which an interrogated Slave does not reply
Solution: check FastLink connection
ADV200 • Troubleshooting
191
D – MESSAGES
Note !
For more information see Quick start guide, chapter 6.7
.
Index Error message shown on the display
1
2
3
4
Load default param
Option detect slot 1
Option detect slot 2
Option detect slot 3
Sub-code Description
Condition: may occur during loading of the parameter database saved in flash normally appears in the following conditions: at initial power-on when a new firmware version is downloaded, when the regulation is installed on a new size, when the region is changed.
If this message is displayed when the drive is already operating, this means that a problem has occurred in the parameter database saved in Flash.
If this message is displayed the drive restores the default database, i.e. the one downloaded.
0001H-1 The database saved is not valid
0002H-2
0003H-3
The database saved is not compatible
The database saved refers to a different size from the current size
0004H-4 The database saved refers to a different region from the current region
Solution: Set the parameters to the value required and perform Save parameter
Condition: at power-on, the drive recognizes the presence of an optional card in one of the three expansion slots.
One of the three messages is shown on the display
5 Autotune
0H-0
0004H-4
00FFH-255
0104H-260
0204H-516
0208H-520
0301H-769
0308H-776
0408H-1032
0608H-1544
4
5
6
7
None
Can/DeviceNet
Unknown
Profibus
Rte
Enc 3 EXP-SESC- I1R1F2-ADV
I_O_1
Enc 4 EXP-EN/SSI- I1R1F2-ADV
Enc 5 EXP-HIP- I1R1F2-ADV
Enc 1 EXP-DE-I1R1F2-ADV
0701H-1793
0108H-1800
0808H-2056
0901H-2305
I_O_2
Enc 2 EXP-SE-I1R1F2-ADV
Enc 7 EXP-DE-I2R1F2-ADV
I_O_3
0D01H-3329
0508H-1288
I_O_4
Enc 6 EXP-RES-I1R1-ADV
908H-2312
0
1
Enc 8 EXP-ASC-I1-ADV
Solution:
Condition: this may occur during the Autotune procedure
No error
The commands are not configured in Local mode.
2
Solution : Execute the requested configuration
The Commands local sel parameter has not been configured from the keypad
3
Solution : Execute the requested configuration
The motor plate data parameters have changed but the Take parameters command, PAR 2020, has not been executed
Solution : Execute the Take parameters command.
Error in motor connection.
Solution :Check the motor connection, set the value of the direct current of the motor to 1/3 and perform the motor autotune procedure. Then increase the direct current until autotuning is executed. The penultimate value is the nominal current value at which the drive performs autotuning.
While running self-tuning the ESC key was pressed or the enable contact was opened or an alarm occurred. The Autotune command was sent with the drive in the alarm condition
Solution : Eliminate the reason for the alarm, remove the reason for the opening of the enable contact, reset alarms.
A setting performed by the Autotune function produced a parameter value outside the min or max range.
Solution : Check the motor plate data or drive and motor sizes have been combined incorrectly.
The Autotune command was sent without being enabled.
Solution : Close the enable contact before sending the Autotune command
192
ADV200 • Messages
Index Error message shown on the display
6
7
8
9
Power config
Save par failed
Load par failed
Load par incomplete
Sub-code Description
8
9
10
11-12
13-14
15 - 16 -17
Internal calculation error concerning IGBT control
Solution : Perform autotuning once more, if the problem persists, contact the Gefran technical support centre.
The drive has measured a stator resistance value exceeding the set limit.
Solution : contact the Gefran technical support centre.
The drive has measured a stator resistance value below the set limit.
Solution : contact the Gefran technical support centre.
Measurement of DTL internal compensation voltage outside accepted range.
Solution : check connection between drive and motor.
If correct, the drive is faulty, contact the Gefran technical support centre.
Measurement of DTS internal voltage outside accepted range.
Solution : check connection between drive and motor.
If correct, the drive is faulty, contact the Gefran technical support centre.
LS leakage inductance value outside accepted range.
Solution : Perform autotuning once more, if the problem persists, contact the Gefran technical support centre.
18-19
Measurement of Im magnetising current outside accepted range.
Solution : Perform autotuning once more, if the problem persists, contact the Gefran technical support centre.
Measurement of Rr rotor resistor outside accepted range.
20-21 Solution : Perform autotuning once more, if the problem persists, contact the Gefran technical support centre.
Solution: If the message appears with a value other than 0, follow the instructions supplied for each particular case and repeat Autotune . This should be performed using the wizard function available from the keypad (STARTUP WIZ-
ARD) and the Tool software on the PC.
Pay attention to all motor plate data parmaeters, especially:
- Rated speed , Motor rated speed in rpm.
- Rated frequency , Motor rated frequency in Hz
- Pole pairs , Motor pole pairs
Take care not to set the Rated speed parameter to the synchronous speed. The value of the Rated speed parameter must be less than: [( Rated frequency * 60) / Pole pairs ].
If the problem persists even after following the instructions supplied, confirm the values of the motor plate data parameters, execute the Take parameters command but not Autotune .
Condition: may occur during recognition of power cards. If this message is displayed, it is not possible to drive the motor.
0020H-32 The power card is configured for a drive that is incompatible with the regulation card
0021H-33
0017H-23
The configuration of the power card is not compatible with the regulation card
The configuration required is not available on the power card
Solution: Download the correct configuration on the power card
Condition: during transfer of the parameters from the drive to the memory of the keypad
0H-0
0025H-37
Communication error
The data saved on the keypad are not valid
0026H-38
0027H-39
0028H-40
0029H-41
Incompatible drive series
Incompatible software version
Incompatible drive size
Error during saving of parameters on the drive
Solution:
Condition: during transfer of the parameters from the memory of the keypad to the drive
0H-0
0025H-37
0026H-38
0027H-39
0028H-40
Communication error
The data saved on the keypad are not valid.
No parameter is transferred from the keypad to the drive
Incompatible control type.
No parameter is transferred from the keypad to the drive
Incompatible software version.
All the parameters present in the memory of the keypad have been transferred to the drive. The set of parameters transferred refers to a drive with a different firmware version; therefore, certain parameters may not be updated.
Incompatible control type.
All the parameters present in the memory of the keypad (excluding those that depend on the size of the drive), have been transferred to the drive. The parameters that depend on size maintain their original value.
ADV200 • Messages
193
13
14
15
16
Index Error message shown on the display
Sub-code Description
0029H-41
002AH-42
002BH-43
Error during saving of parameters on the drive.
All the parameters present in the memory of the keypad have been transferred to the drive. The transfer of one or more parameters has caused an “out of range” error, or one or more parameters does not exist. At the end of transfer, one or more parameters may not have been updated.
PLC application release and version not compatible.
All parameters in the keypad memory have been transferred to the drive.
The transferred set of parameters relates to a drive with a PLC application in which the version and release of the application are different. As a result some of the PLC application parameters may not be updated.
PLC application not compatible.
All the parameters in the keypad memory except those relating to the PLC applciation have been transferred to the drive.
The transferred set of parameters relates to a drive with a different PLC application. As a result none of the PLC application parameters are updated.
Solution: Recover a set of parameters from a compatible drive (model and size)
10 Options config error Condition: may occur at drive start-up, during recognition of the optional cards installed
11 Load def plc
0001H-1
0002H-2
0004H-4
0010H-16
0020H-32
Non-permissible optional card in slot 1
Non-permissible optional card in slot 2
Non-permissible optional card in slot 3
Conflict slot 1 with slot 2
Conflict slot 1 with slot 3
0040H-64 Conflict slot 2 with slot 3
Solution: Remove the optional cards from the incorrect slots and insert them in the correct slots
Condition: may occur during loading of the parameter database saved in the Flash of the Mdplc application
Normally appears at initial power-on after downloading a new application.
If this message is displayed when the drive is already operating, this means that a problem has occurred in the parameter database saved in Flash.
If this message appears the drive restores the default database, i.e. the one that was downloaded.
0001H-1 The database saved is not valid
Solution: Set the parameters to the value required and perform Save parameter
12 Plc cfg error
Condition: may occur during loading of the Mdplc application
The Mdplc application present on the drive is not run.
0004H-4
0065H-101
The application downloaded has a different Crc on DataBlock and Function table
The application downloaded has an invalid identifier (Info)
0066H-102
0067H-103
0068H-104
0069H-105
006AH-106
006BH-107
The application downloaded has an incorrect task number (Info)
The application downloaded has an incorrect software configuration
The application downloaded has a different Crc on DataBlock and Function table
A Trap error or System error has occurred.
The drive automatically performs a Power-up operation.
The application is not run.
See in Alarm List for further information regarding the error occurred
The application downloaded has an incorrect identifier (Task)
The application downloaded has an incorrect task number (Task)
006CH-108 The application downloaded has an incorrect Crc (Tables + Code)
Solution: Remove the Mdplc application or download a correct Mdplc application
Plc 1
Plc 2
Plc 3
Plc 4
Reserved messages and dedicated to the PLC application. See the application manual.
17
18
Option bus fault
Key failed
Condition: this may occur when the drive is turned on, during fieldbus card setup. Error during configuration or communication error.
XXX0H-X If the first digit to the left of “H” in the alarm sub-code is 0, the error regards a communication problem.
XXX0H-X If the first digit to the left of “H” in the alarm sub-code is other than 0, the error regards a configuration problem.
Solution: For configuration errors, check the configuration of the bus communication, type of bus, baudrate, address, parameter setting.
For communication errors, check wiring, termination resistors, disturbance immunity, timeout settings.
For further details, please refer to the user guide for the specific bus.
Condition : this may occur when powering the drive, if the incorrect enable key is inserted for a given firmware function.
194
ADV200 • Messages
Index Error message shown on the display
19
20
21
22
Key expiring
Param error
Encoder error
Options cfg changed
Sub-code Description
0001H-1 Incorrect PLC key. PLC application not available.
Solution : Ask Gefran to supply the correct key to enable the desired firmware function.
Condition: this may occur at drive power-on if the incorrect enabling key was inserted for a given firmware function.
At this stage the firmware function can still be used freely, but this time limit is about to expire.
xxxxH-x Number of hours for which the function can still be used freely.
Solution: Ask Gefran for the correct key to enable the desired firmware function.
Condition : if an error occurs during activation of the parameter database saved in flash; the alarm is inserted in the alarm list and alarm log.
XXX0H-X The code XXXXH-X indicates the IPA of the parameter that has been set outside the range allowed when the database is enabled.
Solution : Set the parameter causing the error to a value within the range and run Save parameters . Switch the drive off and then switch it back on again.
If the IPA of the parameter is not shown in the manual, contact the service centre.
Condition: this condition may occur when the drive is powered during encoder setup each time parameter 552 Regulation mode is set.
100H-2564 Cause : An error occurred during setup; the information received from the encoder is not reliable.
If the encoder is used for feedback the Speed fbk loss [22] alarm is also generated.
Solution: Take the recommended action for the Speed fbk loss [22] alarm.
200H-512 Cause : The firmware on the optional encoder card is incompatible with that on the regulation card. The information received from the encoder is not reliable
Solution : Contact Gefran in order to update the firmware on the optional encoder card.
Condition : this may occur when powering the drive if an expansion card has been removed or replaced or the incorrect enable key is inserted for a given firmware function.
0064H-100 Card removed from slot 1
0014H-20
0003H-3
0078H-120
0067H-103
Card removed from slot 2
Card removed from slot 3
Card removed from slot 1 and from slot 2
Card removed from slot 1 and from slot 3
0017H-23
007BH-123
Card removed from slot 2 and from slot 3
Card removed from slot 1, from slot 2 and from slot 3
Solution : Check the hardware configuration, then press ESC. Save the parameters ( Save parameters , menu 04.01 par
550) to save the new hardware configuration.
Note! For any messages that are displayed but not included in this list reference should be made to the manual for the application used by the drive.
ADV200 • Messages
195
E - Block Diagrams
System Diagrams Index
Drive overview
196
ADV200 • Block Diagrams
References
ADV200 • Block Diagrams
197
Ramps
198
ADV200 • Block Diagrams
Multireference
ADV200 • Block Diagrams
199
Motorpotentiometer
Jog function
200
ADV200 • Block Diagrams
Monitor function
ADV200 • Block Diagrams
201
202
ADV200 • Block Diagrams
Commands
ADV200 • Block Diagrams
203
204
ADV200 • Block Diagrams
Digital inputs
ADV200 • Block Diagrams
205
Digital outputs
206
ADV200 • Block Diagrams
Analog inputs
ADV200 • Block Diagrams
207
208
ADV200 • Block Diagrams
Analog outputs
ADV200 • Block Diagrams
209
210
ADV200 • Block Diagrams
Encoder config
ADV200 • Block Diagrams
211
Speed reg gains
212
ADV200 • Block Diagrams
Torque config
ADV200 • Block Diagrams
213
VF parameters
214
ADV200 • Block Diagrams
Functions
ADV200 • Block Diagrams
215
216
ADV200 • Block Diagrams
ADV200 • Block Diagrams
217
218
ADV200 • Block Diagrams
ADV200 • Block Diagrams
219
220
ADV200 • Block Diagrams
ADV200 • Parameters List
221
F - Parameters List (Expert)
Menu PAR Description
1 - MONITOR
1.1 250 Output current
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
252 Output voltage
254 Output frequency
256 Output power
628 Ramp setpoint
664 Speed setpoint
260 Motor speed
270 DC link voltage
272 Heatsink temperature
1.10 290 Motor temperature
1.11 1610 An inp 1X temp mon
1.12 1660 An inp 2X temp mon
1.13 280 Torque current ref
1.14 282 Magnet current ref
1.15 284 Torque current
1.16 286 Magnet current
1.17 3212 Motor overload accum
1.18 368 Drive overload accum
1.19 3260 Bres overload accum
1.20 1066 Enable state mon
1.21 1068 Start state mon
1.22 1070 FastStop state mon
1.23 1100 Digital input mon
1.24 1300 Digital output mon
1.25 1200 Digital input X mon
1.26 1400 Digital output X mon
1.27 5400 Dig inp 0Ext mon
1.28 5402 Dig inp 1Ext mon
1.29 5450 Digital out 0Ext mon
1.30 5452 Digital out 1Ext mon
2 - DRIVE INFO
2.1 480 Control type
2.2 482 Drive size
222
UM Type FB BIT Def perc perc perc
A
A
A
A degC degC degC degC
FF
FF
FF
V
A
V
Hz kW
INT16
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
INT16
INT16
INT16
FLOAT
UINT16 16/32 0
UINT16 16/32 0
UINT16 16/32 0
BIT 16 0
BIT
BIT
16 0
16 0
UINT16 16 0
UINT16 0
UINT16 16 0
UINT16 0
UINT32 32BIT 0
UINT32 32BIT 0
UINT32 32BIT 0
UINT32 32BIT 0
16/32 0.0
16/32 0.0
16/32 0.0
16/32 0.0
16/32 0
16/32 0
16/32 0
16/32 0.0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0.0
16BIT 0.0
16BIT 0.0
16/32 0.0
16/32 0.0
16/32 0.0
16/32 0.0
ENUM
1
2
UINT16
0
1
6
7
8
9
2
3
4
5
Asynchronous
Asynchronous
Synchronous
0
2075
2110
3150
10 3185
11 3220
12 4300
13 4370
14 4450
15 5550
16 5750
0
No power
1007
1015
1022
1030
1040
2055
Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0
0
0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0
(380V..480V)
(380V..480V)
(380V..480V)
(380V..480V)
(380V..480V)
(380V..480V)
(380V..480V)
(380V..480V)
(380V..480V)
(380V..480V)
(380V..480V)
(380V..480V)
(380V..480V)
(380V..480V)
(380V..480V)
(380V..480V)
0
0
Max Acc Mod
0
0
1
1
100
100
100
1
0
0
0
0
R
R
4294967295 ER
4294967295 ER
ER
ER
R
R
R
R
ER
ER
ER
R
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0
0
0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
R
R
R
ER
R
R
R
R
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
F_S
F_S
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
R
RS
FVS
FVS
ADV200 • Parameters List
Menu PAR Description
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.3
2.4
484 Drive family
486 Drive region
488 Drive cont current
490 Firmware ver.rel
496 Firmware type
2.8
2.9
504 Application ver.rel
506 Application type
2.10 510 Time drive power on
2.11 512 Time drive enable
2.12 514 Number power up
2.13 516 Time fan on
2.14 526 Power file ver.rel
2.15 530 Slot1 card type
ADV200 • Parameters List
UM Type FB BIT Def Min Max
A
ENUM
ENUM
FLOAT
UINT16
UINT16
1
4
0
3
4
5
6
17 5900
18 61100
19 61320
20 71600
21 72000
22 72500
23 73150
24 73550
(380V..480V)
(380V..480V)
(380V..480V)
(380V..480V)
(380V..480V)
(380V..480V)
(380V..480V)
(380V..480V)
25 400.0 kW (380V..480V)
26 500.0 kW (380V..480V)
27 630.0 kW (380V..480V)
28 710.0 kW (380V..480V)
29 900.0 kW (380V..480V)
30 1000.0 kW (380V..480V)
1
2
7
8
5750
6900
61100
61320
71600
72000
72500
73150
(690V)
(690V)
(690V)
(690V)
(690V)
(690V)
(690V)
(690V)
9 73550 (690V)
10 400.0 kW (690V)
11 500.0 kW (690V)
12 630.0 kW (690V)
13 710.0 kW (690V)
14 800.0 kW (690V)
15 1000.0 kW (690V)
2
3
0
1
16 1200.0 kW (690V)
No power 0
No power
380V..480V
500V..575V
690V
230V
EU
EU
0
0
1
USA
CALCF
0
0
0.0
0
0
0 UINT16
UINT16 h.min UINT32 h.min UINT32
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0.0
0
UINT16 h.min UINT32
0
0
UINT16
ENUM
0
0
None
None
769 I/O 1
1793 I/O 2
2305 I/O 3
3329 I/O 4
1544 Enc 1
1800 Enc 2
520 Enc 3
776 Enc 4
1032 Enc 5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Acc
RS
R
Mod
FVS
FVS
ER
ER
ER
ER
RZS FVS
R FVS
R
ER
FVS
FVS
ER
ER
R
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
223
Menu PAR Description
2.16 532 Slot2 card type
2.17 534 Slot3 card type
224
FB BIT Def Min
2056 Enc 7
4 Can/Dnet
260 Profibus
516 RTE
576 FastLink
320 I/O Ext
832 I/O FastLink
255 Unknown
2312 Enc 8
1288 Enc 6
5633 I/O 6
6401 I/O 7
7681 I/O 8
0
None
None
769 I/O 1
1793 I/O 2
2305 I/O 3
3329 I/O 4
1544 Enc 1
1800 Enc 2
520 Enc 3
776 Enc 4
1032 Enc 5
2056 Enc 7
4 Can/Dnet
260 Profibus
516 RTE
576 FastLink
320 I/O Ext
832 I/O FastLink
255 Unknown
2312 Enc 8
1288 Enc 6
5633 I/O 6
6401 I/O 7
0
7681 I/O 8
None
0 None
769 I/O 1
1793 I/O 2
2305 I/O 3
3329 I/O 4
1544 Enc 1
1800 Enc 2
520 Enc 3
776 Enc 4
1032 Enc 5
2056 Enc 7
4 Can/Dnet
260 Profibus
516 RTE
576 FastLink
320 I/O Ext
832 I/O FastLink
255 Unknown
0
Type
ENUM
ENUM
UM Max Acc Mod
0
0
R
R
FVS
FVS
ADV200 • Parameters List
Menu PAR Description
2.18 546 Fw enc sl2 ver.rel
2.19 548 Fw enc sl2 type
2.20 5300 Fw enc sl1-3 ver.rel
2.21 5302 Fw enc sl1-3 type
2.22 5724 Fw FastLink ver.rel
2.23 5726 Fw FastLink type
3 - STARTUP WIZARD
4.5
4.6
4.3
4.4
4.7
4.8
4 - DRIVE CONFIG
4.1 550 Save parameters
4.2 552 Regulation mode
554 Access mode
558 Application select
560 Mains voltage
586 DC supply
450 Undervoltage
562 Switching frequency
ADV200 • Parameters List
UM Type FB BIT Def
2312 Enc 8
1288 Enc 6
5633 I/O 6
6401 I/O 7
UINT16
7681 I/O 8
0
UINT16
UINT16
UINT16
UINT16
UINT16
0
0
0
0
0
Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
Max
0
0
0
0
0
0
Acc Mod
R
R
R
R
ER
ER
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
V
ENUM
ENUM
ENUM
BIT
ENUM
ENUM
FLOAT
ENUM
3
0
0
1
2
0 0
V/f control 0
V/f control
Flux vector OL
Flux vector CL
Autotune
Easy
Easy
0
3
4
1
2
2
0
7
8
5
6
9
0
1
1 Expert
None
None
Application 1
Application 2
400 V
None
230 V
380 V
400 V
415 V
440 V
460 V
480 V
500 V
575 V
0
SIZE
0
1
10 690 V
None
None
0
540 V (380-480V)
2
3
650 V (380-480V)
750 V (380-480V)
10 675 V (690V)
11 810 V (690V)
12 935 V (690V)
13 1120 V (690V)
0
1
2
CALCF
SIZE
1 kHz
2 kHz
4 kHz
CALCF
SIZE
1
3
1
2
SIZE
7
RW
RWZ
RW
FVS
FVS
FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERWZS FVS
ERWZS FVS
CALCF ERWZS FVS
SIZE ERWS FVS
225
Menu PAR Description
4.9 564 Ambient temperature
4.10 566 Drive overload mode
4.11 568 Switching freq mode
4.12 570 Password
4.13 572 Application key
4.14 574 Startup display
4.15 576 Display backlight
4.16 578 Language select
4.17 580 Load default
4.18 590 Save par to keypad
4.19 592 Load par from keypad
4.20 594 Keypad memory select
4.21 6100 Load synch control
5 - REFERENCES
5.1 600 Dig ramp ref 1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
602 Dig ramp ref 2
604 Dig ramp ref 3
610 Ramp ref 1 src
612 Ramp ref 2 src
614 Ramp ref 3 src
5.7
5.8
616 Ramp ref invert src
620 Ramp ref 1 mon
5.9 622 Ramp ref 2 mon
5.10 624 Ramp ref 3 mon
5.11 634 Ramp ref top lim
5.12 636 Ramp ref bottom lim
5.13 630 Reference skip set
5.14 632 Reference skip band
226
UM Type FB BIT Def Min
ENUM
ENUM
ENUM
BIT
BIT
BIT
UINT32
1
UINT32
INT16
BIT
ENUM
3
4
1
2
0
7
8
5
6
UINT16
BIT
9
7
0
5
6
3
4
6 kHz
8 kHz
10 kHz
12 kHz
16 kHz
40 degC 0
40 degC
2
0
1 50 degC
1
Heavy duty 1
Heavy duty
Light duty
Constant 0
Constant
1
0
Variable
0
0
-1
0
English
English
Italian
French
German
Spanish
Polish
Romanian
Russian
Turkish
0
0
Portuguese
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
-1
0
0
Max
1
2
1
1
5
1
1
1
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERWZS FVS
99999 ERW FVS
4294967295
ERW FVS
20000 ERW FVS
1
9
ERW
RWZ
FVS
FVS
RWZ
RW
FVS
FVS
RWZ FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF rpm rpm
FF
FF
FF
INT16
INT16
16/32 0
16/32 0
INT16
LINK
16/32 0
16/32 1500
L_MLTREF
LINK 16/32 602
L_MLTREF
LINK 16/32 894
L_MLTREF
LINK 16 1050
L_DIGSEL2
INT16 0
INT16
INT16
INT32
INT32
INT16
INT16
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CALCI
CALCI
0
0
CALCI
0
CALCI
CALCI
RW FVS
ERW FVS
CALCI ERW FVS
16384 RW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
0
0
0
16384 ERW FVS
R
ER
FVS
FVS
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
ER
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERW FVS
ERW
FVS
FVS
ADV200 • Parameters List
Menu PAR Description
5.15 640 Dig speed ref 1
5.16 642 Dig speed ref 2
5.17 650 Speed ref 1 src
5.18 652 Speed ref 2 src
5.19 654 Speed ref invert src
5.20 660 Speed ref 1 mon
5.21 662 Speed ref 2 mon
5.22 670 Speed ref top lim
5.23 672 Speed ref bottom lim
5.24 666 Speed ref filter
5.25 680 Full scale speed
5.26 222 Theta ref src
5.27 226 Flux ref src
6 - RAMPS
6.1 700 Acceleration time 0
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
702 Deceleration time 0
704 Acceleration time 1
706 Deceleration time 1
708 Acceleration time 2
710 Deceleration time 2
712 Acceleration time 3
714 Deceleration time 3
720 Ramp type
6.10 722 Multi ramp sel 0 src
6.11 724 Multi ramp sel 1 src
6.12 726 Multi ramp sel mon
6.13 730 Accel jerk time 0
6.14 732 Decel jerk time 0
6.15 734 Accel jerk time 1
6.16 736 Decel jerk time 1
6.17 738 Accel jerk time 2
6.18 740 Decel jerk time 2
6.19 742 Accel jerk time 3
6.20 744 Decel jerk time 3
6.21 750 Ramp in zero src
6.22 752 Ramp out zero src
6.23 754 Ramp freeze src
ADV200 • Parameters List s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s
UM
FF
FF
FF
FF ms rpm
FF
FF
Type FB BIT Def
INT16
INT16
LINK
16/32 0
16/32 0
16/32 640
L_MLTREF
LINK 16/32 642
L_MLTREF
LINK 16 6000
L_DIGSEL2
INT16
INT16
INT32
0
0
CALCI
INT32
UINT16
INT16
LINK
CALCI
0
CALCI
16/32 220
L_MLTREF
LINK 16/32 224
L_MLTREF
Min
0
0
0
0
CALCI
0
50
0
0
0
CALCI
CALCI
0
Max Acc Mod
CALCI ERW FVS
CALCI ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERWZ FVS
0
0
CALCI
0
1000
ER
ER
FVS
FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
32000 RWZ FVS
16384 ERW F_S
16384 ERW F_S
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
ENUM
0
1
2
3
LINK
L_DIGSEL2
16BIT 6000
LINK
L_DIGSEL2
16BIT 6000
UINT16
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
L_DIGSEL2
Linear
Linear
S-Shape
Bypass
Off
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
FLOAT
LINK
1.0
16BIT 6000
L_DIGSEL2
LINK 16BIT 6000
L_DIGSEL2
LINK 16BIT 3480 0
0
0
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.02
0
0.02
0
1000.0 RW
1000.0 RW
FVS
FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
3
1000.0 ERW FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
ERWZ FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
3
10.0
10.0
10.0
ER
ERW
ERW
ERW
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
10.0 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
227
Menu PAR Description
7 - MULTI REFERENCE
7.1 800 Multi reference 0
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
802 Multi reference 1
804 Multi reference 2
806 Multi reference 3
808 Multi reference 4
810 Multi reference 5
812 Multi reference 6
814 Multi reference 7
816 Multi reference 8
7.10 818 Multi reference 9
7.11 820 Multi reference 10
7.12 822 Multi reference 11
7.13 824 Multi reference 12
7.14 826 Multi reference 13
7.15 828 Multi reference 14
7.16 830 Multi reference 15
7.17 832 Multi ref 0 src
7.18 834 Multi ref 1 src
7.19 840 Multi ref sel 0 src
7.20 842 Multi ref sel 1 src
7.21 844 Multi ref sel 2 src
7.22 846 Multi ref sel 3 src
7.23 850 Multi ref sel mon
7.24 852 Multi ref out mon
UM
8 - MOTORPOTENTIOMETER
8.1 870 Mpot setpoint rpm
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
872 Mpot acceleration
874 Mpot deceleration
876 Mpot top lim
878 Mpot bottom lim
880 Mpot init cfg
882 Mpot preset cfg s s rpm rpm
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
228
Type FB BIT Def
INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
LINK
L_MLTREF
16/32 800
LINK
L_MLTREF
16/32 802
LINK
L_DIGSEL2
16 6000
LINK
L_DIGSEL2
16 6000
LINK
L_DIGSEL2
16 6000
LINK
L_DIGSEL2
16 6000
UINT16
INT16
0
16/32 0
16/32 0
16/32 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
INT16
FLOAT
FLOAT
INT16
INT16
ENUM
0
1
2
3
ENUM
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
8
9
16/32 0
5.0
5.0
CALCI
0.01
0.01
PAR 680 CALCI
0
Zero
Last Power Off
Zero
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
None
None
Input=0
Input=low lim
Input&ref=0
Input&ref=low
Output=0
Output=low lim
Output&ref=0
Output&ref=low
Input=upp lim
0
CALCI
0
Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
Max Acc Mod
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
16384
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
RW FVS
FVS 16384 RW
16384 RW FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
16384 RW
16384 RW
FVS
FVS
16384 ERW FVS
15
0
R
R
FVS
FVS
11
CALCI
3
CALCI R
1000.0 RW
FVS
FVS
1000.0 RW
CALCI ERW
FVS
FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ADV200 • Parameters List
Menu PAR Description
8.8 884 Mpot up src
8.9 886 Mpot down src
8.10 888 Mpot invert src
8.11 890 Mpot preset src
8.12 892 Mpot mode
8.13 894 Mpot output mon
9 - JOG FUNCTION
9.1 910 Jog setpoint
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
912 Jog acceleration
914 Jog deceleration
916 Jog cmd + src
918 Jog cmd - src
920 Jog output mon
10 - MONITOR FUNCTION
10.1 930 Reference 0 thr
10.2 932 Reference 0 delay
10.3 940 Speed 0 thr
10.4 942 Speed 0 delay
10.5 950 Speed threshold 1
10.6 952 Speed threshold 2
10.7 954 Speed threshold dly
10.8 960 Set speed ref src
10.9 962 Set speed error
10.10 964 Set speed delay
10.11 968 Dig set speed ref
10.12 970 Speed threshold 3
10.13 972 Speed thr hysteresis
10.14 980 Current threshold
10.15 982 Current thr hyster
11 - COMMANDS
11.1 1000 Commands remote sel
11.2 1002 Commands local sel
11.3 1004 Enable/disable mode
ADV200 • Parameters List s rpm s rpm
UM rpm
Type FB BIT Def
10
11
Input&ref=upp
Freeze input
LINK
L_DIGSEL2
16 6000
LINK
L_DIGSEL2
16 6000
LINK
L_DIGSEL2
16 6000
LINK
L_DIGSEL2
16 6000
ENUM
0
1
2
3
INT16
Fine&Last val
Ramp&Last val
Ramp&Follow
Fine&Last val
Fine&Follow
16/32 0
Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
INT16
FLOAT
0
5.0
FLOAT
LINK
5.0
16 6000
L_DIGSEL2
LINK 16 6000
L_DIGSEL2
INT16 16/32 0 rpm ms rpm rpm rpm perc perc rpm ms rpm ms rpm rpm ms
INT16
UINT16
INT16
UINT16
30
400
30
400
INT32
INT32
0
0
UINT16
LINK
0
16/32 628
L_CMP
INT16
UINT16
INT16
0
16/32 0
100
INT32
INT16
INT16
INT16
0
0
100
0
ENUM
0
1
ENUM
0
2
ENUM
Terminal 0
Terminal
Digital
Keypad
Terminal
Keypad
Stop/FS&Spd=0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CALCI
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CALCI
CALCI
CALCI
0.01
0.01
0
0
0
1
1
3
Max Acc Mod
16384 RW FVS
16384 RW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
3
0
16384 ERW FVS
ERW
ER
FVS
FVS
CALCI RW
1000.0 RW
1000.0 RW
16384 RW
16384 RW
0 ER
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
CALCI RW
10000 RW
CALCI RW
10000 RW
CALCI
CALCI
RW
RW
FVS
FVS
50000 RW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
CALCI RW
50000 RW
CALCI
CALCI
ERW
RW
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
CALCI
200
100
RW
RW
RW
FVS
FVS
FVS
RWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERW FVS
229
Menu PAR Description
11.4 1006 Speed 0 disable dly
11.5 1008 Stop key mode
11.6 1010 Commands safe start
11.7 1012 Dig local/remote
11.8 1014 Local/remote src
11.9 1016 Terminal Start src
11.10 1018 Digital Enable src
11.11 1020 Digital Start src
11.12 1022 FastStop src
11.13 1024 Enable cmd mon
11.14 1026 Start cmd mon
11.15 1028 FastStop cmd mon
11.16 1040 FR mode
11.17 1042 FR forward src
11.18 1044 FR reverse src
11.19 1046 FR *stop src
11.20 1048 FR start mon
11.21 1050 FR reverse mon
11.22 1052 FR cmd mon
11.23 1032 Drv interlock src
11.24 1034 Drv interlock mon
11.25 1036 FastStop mode
12 - DIGITAL INPUTS
12.1 1132 Dig inp 1 inversion
12.2 1134 Dig inp 2 inversion
12.3 1136 Dig inp 3 inversion
12.4 1138 Dig inp 4 inversion
12.5 1140 Dig inp 5 inversion
12.6 1150 Digital input E dest
12.7 1152 Digital input 1 dest
230
UM ms
Type FB BIT Def Min
0
1
2
Off
Stop/FS&Spd=0
Stop&Spd=0
3
UINT16
FS&Spd=0
1000
ENUM
0 Inactive
Inactive 0
0
1
BIT
ENUM
0
EmgStop&Alarm
16
Local
1
Remote
0
0
1
LINK
Remote
16 1012
L_DIGSEL3
LINK 16 1048
L_DIGSEL2
LINK 16 6000
L_DIGSEL2
LINK 16 6000 0
0
0
0
L_DIGSEL2
LINK 16 6000
L_DIGSEL2
BIT 16 0
BIT
BIT
ENUM
0
1
16
16
Normal
0
0
0
0
Two wire 0
Two wire
0
0
2
LINK
Three wire
16 1112
L_DIGSEL2
LINK 16 1114
L_DIGSEL2
LINK 16 6000
L_DIGSEL2
BIT 16 0
BIT 16 0
UINT16
LINK
0
16BIT 6002
L_DIGSEL2
BIT
ENUM
16BIT 0
0
1
0
Not Latched 0
Not Latched
Latched
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Max Acc Mod
1
1
1
10000 ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW
ERW
FVS
FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
2
1
1
1
16384 ERW FVS
R
R
FVS
FVS
R FVS
ERWZ FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
1
1
16384 ERW FVS
1
1
ER
ER
FVS
FVS
0 ER FVS
16384 ERW FVS
ER FVS
ERW FVS
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
ILINK
ILINK
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
ER
ER
ADV200 • Parameters List
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
Menu PAR Description
12.8 1154 Digital input 2 dest
12.9 1156 Digital input 3 dest
12.10 1158 Digital input 4 dest
12.11 1160 Digital input 5 dest
12.12 1240 Dig inp 1X inversion
12.13 1242 Dig inp 2X inversion
12.14 1244 Dig inp 3X inversion
12.15 1246 Dig inp 4X inversion
12.16 1248 Dig inp 5X inversion
12.17 1250 Dig inp 6X inversion
12.18 1252 Dig inp 7X inversion
12.19 1254 Dig inp 8X inversion
12.20 5540 Dig inp 9X inversion
12.21 5542 Dig inp10X inversion
12.22 5544 Dig inp11X inversion
12.23 5546 Dig inp12X inversion
12.24 5548 Dig inp13X inversion
12.25 5550 Dig inp14X inversion
12.26 5552 Dig inp15X inversion
12.27 5554 Dig inp16X inversion
12.28 1270 Dig input 1X dest
12.29 1272 Dig input 2X dest
12.30 1274 Dig input 3X dest
12.31 1276 Dig input 4X dest
12.32 1278 Dig input 5X dest
12.33 1280 Dig input 6X dest
12.34 1282 Dig input 7X dest
12.35 1284 Dig input 8X dest
12.36 5570 Dig input 9X dest
12.37 5572 Dig input10X dest
12.38 5574 Dig input11X dest
12.39 5576 Dig input12X dest
12.40 5578 Dig input13X dest
12.41 5580 Dig input14X dest
12.42 5582 Dig input15X dest
12.43 5584 Dig input16X dest
13 - DIGITAL OUTPUTS
13.1 1310 Digital output 1 src
13.2 1312 Digital output 2 src
13.3 1314 Digital output 3 src
13.4 1316 Digital output 4 src
13.5 1330 Dig out 1 inversion
13.6 1332 Dig out 2 inversion
13.7 1334 Dig out 3 inversion
13.8 1336 Dig out 4 inversion
13.9 1410 Dig output 1X src
ADV200 • Parameters List
Type
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
ILINK
UM FB BIT Def
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LINK
L_DIGSEL1
16 1062
LINK
L_DIGSEL1
16 1064
LINK
L_DIGSEL1
16 946
LINK
L_DIGSEL1
16 936
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
0
0
0
0
LINK
L_DIGSEL1
16 6000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Acc Mod
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
ER
ER
ER
ER
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
Max
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
16384 RW
16384 RW
16384 RW
16384 RW
1
1
1
1
RW
RW
RW
RW
16384 RW
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
231
Menu PAR Description
13.10 1412 Dig output 2X src
13.11 1414 Dig output 3X src
13.12 1416 Dig output 4X src
13.13 1418 Dig output 5X src
13.14 1420 Dig output 6X src
13.15 1422 Dig output 7X src
13.16 1424 Dig output 8X src
13.17 1426 Dig output 9X src
13.18 1430 Dig out 1X inversion
13.19 1432 Dig out 2X inversion
13.20 1434 Dig out 3X inversion
13.21 1436 Dig out 4X inversion
13.22 1438 Dig out 5X inversion
13.23 1440 Dig out 6X inversion
13.24 1442 Dig out 7X inversion
13.25 1444 Dig out 8X inversion
13.26 1446 Dig out 9X inversion
14 - ANALOG INPUTS
14.1 1500 Analog input 1 mon
14.2 1502 Analog inp 1 type
14.3 1504 Analog inp 1 scale
14.4 1506 An inp 1 offset tune
14.5 1508 An inp 1 gain tune
14.6 1510 Analog inp 1 filter
14.7 1512 Analog inp 1 top
14.8 1514 Analog inp 1 bottom
14.9 1516 Analog inp 1 offset
14.10 1518 Analog inp 1 gain
14.11 1520 Analog inp 1 thr
14.12 1522 An inp 1 deadband
14.13 1524 An inp 1 alt value
14.14 1526 An inp 1 sign src
14.15 1528 An inp 1 alt sel src
14.16 1532 Analog input 1 dest
14.17 1550 Analog input 2 mon
14.18 1552 Analog inp 2 type
14.19 1554 Analog inp 2 scale
232
UM Type FB BIT Def
LINK
L_DIGSEL1
16 6000
LINK
L_DIGSEL1
16 6000
LINK
L_DIGSEL1
16 6000
LINK
L_DIGSEL1
16 6000
LINK
L_DIGSEL1
16 6000
LINK
L_DIGSEL1
16 6000
LINK 16 6000
L_DIGSEL1
LINK 16 6000
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
L_DIGSEL1
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 cnt cnt cnt cnt perc cnt cnt ms cnt INT16
ENUM
FLOAT
BIT
BIT
FLOAT
16/32 0
0
1
2
-16384
-10V..+10V 0
-10V..+10V
0.20mA , 0.10V
4..20mA
1.0
0
0
10.0
-10.0
0
0
1.0
INT16
INT16
INT16
FLOAT
ENUM
FLOAT
0
1
2
16384
-16384
0
1.0
INT16
FLOAT
0
0.0
INT16 16/32 0
LINK
L_DIGSEL2
16 6000
LINK
L_DIGSEL2
16 6000
ILINK
INT16
0
16/32 0
-32768
-32768
-32768
-10.0
-10V..+10V 0
-10V..+10V
0.20mA , 0.10V
4..20mA
1.0 -10.0
-16384
0.0
-16384
0
0
0
-16384
16384 R
2 RW
FVS
FVS
10.0
1
RW
RW
FVS
FVS
1 RW FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
10.0 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
100.0 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
0 ER
16384 R
FVS
FVS
FVS 2
10.0
RW
RW FVS
ADV200 • Parameters List
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
Mod
FVS
FVS
FVS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Max Acc
16384 RW
16384 RW
16384 RW
16384 RW
16384 RW
16384 RW
16384 RW
16384 RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Menu PAR Description
14.20 1556 An inp 2 offset tune
14.21 1558 An inp 2 gain tune
14.22 1560 Analog inp 2 filter
14.23 1562 Analog inp 2 top
14.24 1564 Analog inp 2 bottom
14.25 1566 Analog inp 2 offset
14.26 1568 Analog inp 2 gain
14.27 1570 Analog inp 2 thr
14.28 1572 An inp 2 deadband
14.29 1574 An inp 2 alt value
14.30 1576 An inp 2 sign src
14.31 1578 An inp 2 alt sel src
14.32 1582 Analog input 2 dest
14.33 1600 Analog input 1X mon
14.34 1602 Analog inp 1X type
14.35 1604 Analog inp 1X scale
14.36 1606 An inp 1Xoffset tune
14.37 1608 An inp 1X gain tune
14.38 1612 Analog inp 1X top
14.39 1614 Analog inp 1X bottom
14.40 1616 Analog inp 1X offset
14.41 1618 Analog inp 1X gain
14.42 1626 An inp 1X sign src
14.43 1632 Analog input 1X dest
14.44 1650 Analog input 2X mon
14.45 1652 Analog inp 2X type
14.46 1654 Analog inp 2X scale
14.47 1656 An inp 2Xoffset tune
14.48 1658 An inp 2X gain tune
14.49 1662 Analog inp 2X top
14.50 1664 Analog inp 2X bottom
14.51 1666 Analog inp 2X offset
14.52 1668 Analog inp 2X gain
14.53 1676 An inp 2X sign src
14.54 1682 Analog input 2X dest
ADV200 • Parameters List
UM cnt cnt cnt cnt cnt cnt cnt cnt perc cnt cnt cnt cnt ms cnt
Type FB BIT Def Min
BIT
BIT
FLOAT
INT16
INT16
INT16
FLOAT
INT16
0
0
10.0
16384
-16384
0
1.0
0
FLOAT
INT16
0.0
16/32 0
LINK
L_DIGSEL2
16 6000 0
0.0
-16384
LINK
L_DIGSEL2
16 6000
ILINK
INT16
ENUM
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
16/32 0
-10V..+10V 0
-10V..+10V
0..10V
4..20mA
0..20mA
PT1000
NI1000
0
0
-16384
0
0
1.0
-32768
-32768
-32768
-10.0
-16384
FLOAT
BIT
BIT
INT16
INT16
INT16
FLOAT
6
0
0
PT100
1.0
16384
-16384
0
1.0
LINK
L_DIGSEL2
16 6000
ILINK
INT16
ENUM
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
16/32 0
-10V..+10V 0
-10V..+10V
0..10V
4..20mA
0..20mA
PT1000
NI1000
0
0
-16384
FLOAT
BIT
BIT
6 PT100
1.0
0
0
-20.0
0
0
0
0
-20.0
-32768
-32768
-32768
-20.0
INT16
INT16
INT16
FLOAT
16384
-16384
0
1.0
LINK
L_DIGSEL2
16 6000
ILINK 0
0
0
-32768
-32768
-32768
-20.0
Max Acc Mod
1
1
RW
RW
FVS
FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
10.0 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
100.0 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
6
16384 ERW FVS
0 ER
16384 R
RW
FVS
FVS
FVS
20.0
1
1
RW
RW
RW
FVS
FVS
FVS
32767 ERW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
6
20.0 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
0 ER
16384 R
RW
FVS
FVS
FVS
20.0
1
1
RW
RW
FVS
FVS
RW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
0
20.0 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
ER FVS
233
Menu PAR Description
14.55 5410 Analog inp 0Ext mon
14.56 5412 Analog inp 1Ext mon
14.57 5414 Analog inp 2Ext mon
14.58 5416 Analog inp 3Ext mon
14.59 5418 Analog inp 4Ext mon
14.60 5420 Analog inp 5Ext mon
14.61 5422 Analog inp 6Ext mon
14.62 5424 Analog inp 7Ext mon
15 - ANALOG OUTPUTS
15.1 1800 Analog out 1 src
15.2 1802 Analog out 2 src
15.3 1808 Analog out 1 scale
15.4 1810 Analog out 2 scale
15.5 1816 Analog out 1 mon
15.6 1818 Analog out 2 mon
15.7 1824 An out 1 absolute
15.8 1826 An out 2 absolute
15.9 1832 Analog out 1 min
15.10 1834 Analog out 1 max
15.11 1840 Analog out 2 min
15.12 1842 Analog out 2 max
15.13 1848 Analog out 2 type
15.14 1850 Analog out 1X src
15.15 1852 Analog out 2X src
15.16 1858 Analog out 1X scale
15.17 1860 Analog out 2X scale
15.18 1866 Analog out 1X mon
15.19 1868 Analog out 2X mon
15.20 1874 An out 1X absolute
15.21 1876 An out 2X absolute
15.22 1882 Analog out 1X min
15.23 1884 Analog out 1X max
15.24 1886 Analog out 1X type
234
UM Type
INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
FB BIT Def
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
Min
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
Max Acc
32767 ER
32767 ER
32767 ER
32767 ER
32767 ER
32767 ER
32767 ER
32767 ER
Mod
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS cnt cnt cnt cnt cnt cnt cnt cnt cnt cnt
1
INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
ENUM
0
1
LINK
L_ANOUT
16/32 6000
LINK
L_ANOUT
16/32 6000
FLOAT
FLOAT
INT16
INT16
ENUM
ENUM
0
0
1
Disable
1.0
1.0
0
0
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
-16384
16384
-16384
-32768
-32768
-32768
16384 -32768
-10V..+10V 0
0..20mA
4..20mA
0
0
0
0
0
0
-10.0
-10.0
1
ENUM
0
1
INT16
INT16
ENUM
2
LINK
-10V..+10V
16/32 6000
L_ANOUT
LINK 16/32 6000
L_ANOUT
FLOAT
FLOAT
INT16
INT16
ENUM
0
1.0
1.0
0
0
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
0
1
2
3
-16384
0
-32768
16384 -32768
-10V..+10V 0
0..20mA
4..20mA
-10V..+10V
0..10V
0
0
0
0
-20.0
-20.0
0
1
16384 RW
16384 RW
0
0
1
10.0
10.0
RW
RW
ER
ER
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
ERW FVS
ERW
FVS
FVS
FVS
32767 ERW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
2 ERW FVS
0
1
1
16384 RW
16384 RW
20.0
20.0
0
FVS
FVS
RW
RW
ER
ER
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
3 ERW FVS
ADV200 • Parameters List
Menu PAR Description
15.25 1890 Analog out 2X min
15.26 1892 Analog out 2X max
15.27 1898 Analog out 2X type
15.28 5460 Dig Analog out 0 ext
15.29 5462 Dig Analog out 1 ext
15.30 5464 Dig Analog out 2 ext
15.31 5466 Dig Analog out 3 ext
15.32 5468 Dig Analog out 4 ext
15.33 5470 Dig Analog out 5 ext
15.34 5472 Dig Analog out 6 ext
15.35 5474 Dig Analog out 7 ext
16 - MOTOR DATA
16.1 2000 Rated voltage
16.2 2002 Rated current
16.3 2004 Rated speed
16.4 2006 Rated frequency
16.5 2008 Pole pairs
16.6 2010 Rated power
16.7 2012 Rated power factor
16.8 2020 Take parameters
16.9 2022 Autotune rotation
16.10 2024 Autotune still
16.11 2026 Autotune mode
16.12 2028 Take par status
16.13 2030 Autotune status
16.14 2050 Measured Rs
16.15 2052 Measured DTL
16.16 2054 Measured DTS
16.17 2056 Measured Lsig
16.18 2058 Measured ImN
16.19 2060 Measured ImX
16.20 2062 Measured FlxN
16.21 2064 Measured FlxX
16.22 2066 Measured P1
16.23 2068 Measured P2
16.24 2070 Measured P3
16.25 2072 Measured Rr
16.26 2078 Take tune parameters
17 - ENCODER CONFIG
17.1 2100 Encoder 1 pulses
17.2 2102 Encoder 1 supply
ADV200 • Parameters List
UM cnt cnt
Type
INT16
INT16
ENUM
0
1
2
3
INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
FB BIT Def Min
-16384
16384
0..20mA
4..20mA
-10V..+10V 0
-10V..+10V
-32768
-32768
0..10V
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768 16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
Max Acc Mod
3
32767 ERW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
ERW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
Wb
Wb ohm
V/A mH
A
A ohm
V kW
V
A rpm
Hz
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
BIT
ENUM
0
1
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
BIT
BIT
ENUM
0
1
ENUM
0
1
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
UINT16
FLOAT
FLOAT
BIT
SIZE
SIZE
SIZE
SIZE
SIZE
SIZE
SIZE
0
0
0
Reduced 0
Reduced
Extended
Required 0
Required
Done
0
0
1
0.1
0.6
0
50.0
1.0
10.0
10.0
Required 0
Required
Done
CALCF
0.0
0.0005
0.0
0.0
CALCF
CALCF
CALCF
CALCF
CALCF
0.5
9.0
0.87
CALCF
0
0.0
0.01
0.1
0.0
0.05
0.0
0.0
3.0
0.0
0.0005
0
0
1
1
1
690.0 RWZS FVS
2200.0 RWZS FVS
32000.0 RWZS FVS
1000.0 RWZS FVS
20 RWZS FVS
1500.0 RWZS FVS
0.95
1
RWZS FVS
RWZ FVS
RWZ FVS
RWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
R FVS
0
200.0
100.0
100.0
200.0
R FVS
ERWS FVS
ERWS FVS
ERWS FVS
ERWS FVS
1500.0 ERWS FVS
0.0 ERWS FVS
10.0
0.0
1.0
18.0
ERWS FVS
ERWS FVS
ERWS FVS
ERWS FVS
1.0
200.0
1
ERWS FVS
ERWS FVS
ERWZ FVS ppr
V
UINT16
FLOAT
CALCI
5.2
CALCI
5.2
CALCI RWZ FVS
CALCF ERWZ FVS
235
Menu PAR Description
17.3 2104 Encoder 1 input cfg
17.4 2106 Encoder 1 repetition
17.5 2108 Encoder 1 signal Vpp
17.6 2110 Encoder1signal check
17.7 2112 Encoder SSI clocks
17.8 2114 Encoder SSI pos bits
17.9 2182 Encoder ENDAT clock
17.10 2116 Resolver pole pairs
17.11 2118 Resolver frequency
17.12 2120 Resolver T ratio K
17.13 2122 Resolver repetition
17.14 2124 Resolver LOS thr
17.15 2126 Resolver OVR thr
17.16 2128 Resolver MIS thr
17.17 2130 Encoder 1 direction
17.18 2132 Encoder 1 mode
17.19 2134 Encoder1speed filter
17.20 2150 Encoder 1 speed
17.21 2162 Encoder 1 position
17.22 5100 Encoder 2 pulses
17.23 5102 Encoder 2 supply
17.24 5104 Encoder 2 input cfg
236
UM
V
V
V
Hz ms rpm cnt ppr
V
V
Type FB BIT Def Min
ENUM
0
1
ENUM
0
1
2
3
FLOAT
1
2
ENUM
0
HTL
TTL
TTL
0
No division 0
No division
Divide 2
Divide 4
Divide 8
1.0
Check A-B 0
Check disabled
Check A-B
Check A-B-Z
0.8
4
UINT16
Check A-B-SE
13
UINT16
ENUM
0 1 MHz
13
1 MHz
11
11
0
1 500 kHz
UINT16 1
1 1 paia poli
1
2
UINT16
FLOAT
1
2
ENUM
0
2 paia poli
5000
0.5
256 ppr
16384 ppr 0
1024 ppr
4096 ppr
2000.0
0.2
5
6
3
4
7
8
1
2
ENUM
0
9
FLOAT
3
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
ENUM
0
1
INT16
UINT16
FLOAT
16384 ppr
2.200
4.100
0.380
0.000
0.000
0.000
Not inverted 0
Not inverted
Inverted
None
Digital FP
Digital F
Sinus
None
Sinus SINCOS
Sinus ENDAT
Sinus SSI
Sinus HIPER
Resolver
Abs SINCOS
2.0
16/32 0
UINT16 16 0
CALCI
5.2
CALCI
0.1
0
0
CALCI
5.2
ENUM
0
1
HTL
TTL
TTL
0
Max
1
3
3
1.2
25
25
1
2
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
10000.0 ERWZ FVS
1.0 ERWZ FVS
3 ERWZ FVS
4.820
4.820
4.820
1
CALCI
0
0
20.0 ERW FVS
ER
ER
FVS
FVS
1
CALCI ERWZ FVS
CALCF ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
RWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
ADV200 • Parameters List
Menu PAR Description
17.25 5106 Encoder 2 repetition
17.26 5110 Encoder2signal check
17.27 5130 Encoder 2 direction
17.28 5132 Encoder 2 mode
17.29 5134 Encoder2speed filter
17.30 5150 Encoder 2 speed
17.31 5162 Encoder 2 position
17.32 5200 Encoder 3 pulses
17.33 5204 Encoder 3 input cfg
17.34 5230 Encoder 3 direction
17.35 5262 Encoder 3 position
17.36 5310 Encoder sel src
17.37 5314 Encoder sel mon
17.38 2172 SpdFbkLoss code
18 - SPEED REG GAINS
18.1 2200 Speed reg P1 gain
18.2 2202 Speed reg I1 gain
18.3 2204 Speed reg P2 gain
18.4 2206 Speed reg I2 gain
18.5 2216 Gain adapt src
18.6 2218 Gain adp spd thr1_2
18.7 2220 Gain adp spd band1_2
18.8 2226 Gain 0 enable
18.9 2228 Speed reg P0 gain
18.10 2230 Speed reg I0 gain
ADV200 • Parameters List
UM cnt rpm cnt ppr ms
Type FB BIT Def Min
1
2
ENUM
0
3
ENUM
0
1
2
4
ENUM
0
1
6
7
8
4
5
2
3
ENUM
0
1
9
FLOAT
No division 0
No division
Divide 2
Divide 4
Divide 8
Check A-B 0
Check disabled
Check A-B
Check A-B-Z
Check A-B-SE
Not inverted 0
Not inverted
Inverted
CALCI None
None
Digital FP
Digital F
Sinus
Sinus SINCOS
Sinus ENDAT
Sinus SSI
Sinus HIPER
Resolver
Abs SINCOS
2.0 0.1
INT16 16/32 0
UINT16 16 0
UINT16
ENUM
0
1
1024
HTL
TTL
TTL
ENUM
0
Not inverted 0
Not inverted
1 Inverted
UINT16 16 0 0
LINK
L_DIGSEL2
16 6000
UINT16
UINT32
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
128
0
Max
3
1
3
CALCI
1
0
20.0
0
0
ERW FVS
ER
ER
FVS
FVS
1
16384 ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
1 ERWZ FVS
0 ER FVS
16384 ERW FVS
ER
ER
FVS
FVS
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS perc perc perc perc perc perc perc perc
INT16
INT16
INT16
INT16
LINK
L_REF
FLOAT
FLOAT
ENUM
0
1
INT16
INT16
100
100
100
100
16/32 664
0.0
0.0
Disable
Disable
Enable
100
100
0
0
0
0
0.0
0.0
0
0
0
0
1000
1000
1000
1000
RW
RW
F_S
F_S
ERW F_S
ERW F_S
1
16384 ERW F_S
100.0
100.0
ERW
ERW
ERW
F_S
F_S
F_S
1000
1000
ERW
ERW
F_S
F_S
237
Menu PAR Description
18.11 2232 Spd reg P gain Inuse
18.12 2234 Spd reg I gain Inuse
18.13 2236 Speed reg P gain
18.14 2238 Speed reg I time
18.15 2244 Speed reg I dis src
18.16 2246 Speed reg P factor
18.17 2248 Speed reg I factor
18.18 2240 Inertia
18.19 2242 Bandwidth
19 - REGULATOR PARAM
19.1 2250 Current reg P gain
19.2 2252 Current reg I time
19.3 2260 Flux reg P gain
19.4 2262 Flux reg I time
19.5 2264 Flux reg P gain OL
19.6 2266 Flux reg I time OL
19.7 2270 Voltage reg P gain
19.8 2272 Voltage reg I time
19.9 2280 Dead time limit
19.10 2282 Dead time slope
19.11 2290 Voltage base
19.12 2292 Voltage margin
19.13 2300 Minimum speed OL
19.14 2302 Min speed delay OL
19.15 2304 Speed filter OL
19.16 2306 Flux observe gain OL
19.17 2308 OverFlux perc
19.18 2310 Flux weakening OL
19.19 2312 OverFlux spd thr
19.20 2314 Flux step
19.21 2320 Magnetization time
20 - TORQUE CONFIG
20.1 2350 Torque curr lim Pos
20.2 2352 Torque curr lim Neg
20.3 2354 Torque curr lim sel
20.4 2358 Torque lim pos src
20.5 2370 Torque lim neg src
20.6 2372 Torque limit pos
20.7 2374 Torque limit neg
20.8 2376 Torque lim unit sel
238
UM Type perc perc
INT16
INT16
N/rpm FLOAT ms FLOAT
LINK perc
L_DIGSEL2
FLOAT perc FLOAT kgm2 FLOAT rad/s FLOAT
FB BIT Def
16/32 100
16/32 100
CALCF
CALCF
16/32 6000
16/32 0
16/32 0
SIZE
SIZE
Min
0
0
0.0
1.0
0
0
0
0.001
1.0
Max Acc Mod
1000
1000
ER
ER
F_S
F_S
500.0 ERWS F_S
5000.0 ERWS F_S
16384 ERW F_S
0
0
100.0
500.0
ER
ER
F_S
F_S
RWZS F_S
RWZS F_S
V
V/A
V perc rpm ms ms perc
V/A ms
FLOAT
FLOAT
A/Wb FLOAT ms FLOAT
A/Wb FLOAT ms FLOAT
Wb/V FLOAT s FLOAT rpm ms
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
INT16
UINT16
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
ENUM
FLOAT
FLOAT
UINT16
0
1
SIZE
SIZE
CALCF
5.0
30
200
5.0
250.0
100.0
Enable
Disable
CALCF
CALCF
CALCF
CALCF
CALCF
CALCF
CALCF
CALCF
Enable
400
20.0
256
10.0
1
128
0.0
0.0
50.0
0.0
0
0
0.1
10.0
100.0
0
0.0
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.0
0.01
0.0
0.1
0.0 ERWS F_S
10000.0 ERWS F_S
0.0 ERWS F__
10000.0 ERWS F__
0.0 ERWS __S
30000 ERWS __S
0.0
100.0
ERWS F_S
ERWS F_S
50.0
200.0
690.0
10.0
ERWS FVS
ERWS FVS
ERWS F_S
ERWS F_S
CALCI
5000
ERW __S
ERW __S
20.0 ERWZ __S
5000.0 ERW __S
140.0
1
ERW __S
ERWZ __S
1000.0 ERW __S
2000 ERW __S
4096 ERWZ FVS perc perc
A
A
FLOAT
FLOAT
ENUM
LINK
16/32 CALCF
16/32 CALCF
0
1
2
3
4
Off
Off
T clim +/-
T clim mot/gen
T lim sym
T lim pos/neg
16/32 6000
L_PLIM
LINK 16/32 6000
0.0
0.0
0
0
0
L_NLIM
FLOAT 16/32 CALCF
FLOAT
ENUM
0
1
16/32 CALCF
%
Nm
%
0.0
0.0
0
CALCF ERWS FVS
CALCF ERWS FVS
4 ERWZ FVS
16384 ERWZ F_S
16384 ERWZ F_S
CALCF ERW F_S
1
CALCF ERW F_S
ERW F_S
ADV200 • Parameters List
Menu PAR Description
20.9 2360 Torque lim Pos Inuse
20.10 2362 Torque lim Neg Inuse
20.11 2378 Torque ref 1 filter
20.12 2380 Dig torque ref 1
20.13 2382 Torque ref 1 src
20.14 2392 Torque ref 1 mon %
20.15 2348 Torque ref 1 mon
20.16 2384 Torque ref filter
20.17 2386 Torque ref %
20.18 2390 Torque ref
20.19 2394 Torque %
20.20 2398 Torque
20.21 2366 Torque curr lim Red
20.22 2368 Torque clim Red src
21 - VF PARAMETERS
21.1 2400 Voltage flux boost
21.2 2402 Voltage boost gain
21.3 2404 Voltage torque boost
21.4 2406 Vf voltage
21.5 2408 Vf frequency
21.6 2410 Vf voltage 1
21.7 2412 Vf frequency 1
21.8 2414 Vf voltage 0
21.9 2430 Vf shape
21.10 2440 Slip comp
21.11 2442 Slip comp filter
21.12 2444 Slip comp mode
21.13 2446 Slip P gain
21.14 2448 Slip I gain
21.15 2460 Vfcurrent lim P gain
21.16 2462 Vfcurrent lim I time
21.17 2470 Damping gain
21.18 2472 Damping threshold 1
21.19 2474 Damping threshold 2
21.20 2480 Vf min frequency
21.21 2482 Vf min freq delay
21.22 2490 Dig Vf scale
21.23 2492 Vf scale src
Hz ms
Hz
V
V
Hz
V perc
V/A perc perc
Hz/A ms perc
Hz
Hz
Hz ms
22 - FUNCTIONS
22.1 - FUNCTIONS/SPEED RATIO
UM
A perc
Nm ms perc
Nm perc
Nm
A
A ms perc
ADV200 • Parameters List
Type FB BIT Def
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
LINK
16/32 0.0
16/32 0.0
0.0
16/32 0.0
16/32 3104
L_VREF
FLOAT 16/32 0.0
FLOAT
FLOAT
0.0
1.0
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
16/32 0.0
16/32 0.0
16/32 0.0
0.0
FLOAT
LINK
L_DIGSEL2
16/32 CALCF
16 6000
FLOAT
FLOAT
ENUM
0
1
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
0.0
0.0
Disable
Disable
Enable
CALCF
CALCF
CALCF
FLOAT
FLOAT
ENUM
0
1
CALCF
CALCF
Linear
Linear
Custom
2
FLOAT
Quadratic
CALCF 0.0
UINT16
ENUM
0
200 50
Open loop 0
Open loop
0
0.0
0.0
0
0.0
0.0
10.0
10.0
CALCF
1
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
UINT16
INT16
INT16
Closed loop
1.0
1.5
CALCF
CALCF
0
20
30
FLOAT
UINT16
FLOAT
LINK
L_VREF
1.0
800
16/32 1.0
16/32 3374
5
5
1.0
0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.2
0
0.0
0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.0
Min
0.0
0.0
0.0
-300.0
0
Max Acc Mod
0.0
0.0
ER
ER
FVS
FVS
1000.0 ERW F_S
300.0 ERW F_S
16384 ERWZ F_S
0.0
0.0
10.0
0.0
ER
ER
F_S
FVS
ERW F_S
ER F_S
0.0
0.0
ER
ER
F_S
F_S
0.0 ER F_S
CALCF ERWS FVS
16384 ERW FVS
1
15.0
0.0
RWS _V_
ERWS _V_
ERWZ _V_
690.0 ERWZS _V_
2000.0 ERWZS _V_
CALCF ERWZS _V_
CALCF ERWZS _V_
2
CALCF ERWZS _V_
ERWZS _V_
10.0 RWS _V_
5000
1
ERW _V_
ERWZ _V_
100.0 ERWS _V_
100.0 ERWS _V_
1000.0 ERWS _V_
50.0
100
100
100
ERWS _V_
ERW
ERW
ERW
_V_
_V_
_V_
5.0
5000
ERW _V_
ERW _V_
1.0 ERWZ _V_
16384 ERW _V_
239
Menu PAR Description UM Type FB BIT Def Min
22.1.1 3000 Dig speed ratio
22.1.2 3002 Speed ratio src
22.1.3 3008 Speed ratio div
22.1.4 3010 Speed ratio mon
22.2 - FUNCTIONS/DROOP
22.2.1 3052 Droop ref src perc
INT16
LINK
16/32 100
16/32 3000
L_VREF
ENUM
1 1
10
100
10
100
Div 1
1000
FLOAT
1000
0
22.2.2 3060 Droop gain
22.2.3 3062 Droop filter
22.2.4 3064 Droop limit
22.2.5 3070 Droop out mon perc ms rpm rpm
LINK
L_LIM
FLOAT
UINT16
16/32 6000
0.0
10
INT16
INT16
16/32 30
16/32 0
22.3 - FUNCTIONS/INERTIA COMP
22.3.1 3100 Inertia comp
22.3.2 3102 Inertia comp filter kgm2 FLOAT ms UINT16
22.3.3 3104 Inertia comp mon perc
22.4 - FUNCTIONS/DC BRAKING
22.4.1 3150 DC braking cmd src
FLOAT
0.0
30
16/32 0.0
22.4.2 3152 DC brake mode
LINK 16 6000
L_DIGSEL2
ENUM
0
1
2
Off
Off
Stop
Cmd
3 Cmd&Stop
4 Start
5 Start&Stop
6 Cmd&Start
22.4.3 3154 DC brake delay
22.4.4 3156 DC brake duration
22.4.5 3158 DC brake current
22.4.6 3160 DC brake state s s perc
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
ENUM
22.5 - FUNCTIONS/MOTOR OVERLOAD
22.5.1 3200 Motor ovld enable BIT
7 Cmd&Start&Stop
0.5 0.00
1
1.0 0.01
50.0 0.0
16 Not active 0
0 Not active
Active
0
0
0.0
1
0.0
0
0
0
0.0
1
0
0
CALCI
0
22.5.2 3202 Motor ovld factor
22.5.3 3204 Motor ovld time
22.5.4 3206 Motor service factor
22.5.5 3216 Motor fan type perc s perc
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
ENUM
22.5.6 3218 Motor derat factor perc FLOAT
22.6 - FUNCTIONS/BRES OVERLOAD
22.6.1 3250 Bres control BIT
0
1
0
150.0
0
100.0
30.0 10.0
100.0 25.0
Servo fan 0
Auto fan
Servo fan
50.0 0.0
0 0
240
1
300.0
300.0
200.0
1
100.0
30.0
30.0
150.0
1
1
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ER FVS
ERW FVS
ERWS FVS
ERWS FVS
ERWS FVS
ERW FVS
ERWS FVS
ERWZ FVS
ADV200 • Parameters List
Max Acc Mod
0
3
CALCI ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ER FVS
16384 ERW FVS
100.0
100
ERW
ERW
FVS
FVS
CALCI
0
ERWZ FVS
ER FVS
100.0
100
0.0
ERWS FVS
ERW
ER
FVS
FVS
16384 ERW FVS
3 ERW FVS
Menu PAR Description UM Type FB BIT Def
22.6.2 3252 Bres value
22.6.3 3254 Bres cont power ohm kW
FLOAT
FLOAT
SIZE
SIZE
22.6.4 3256 Bres overload factor
22.6.5 3258 Bres overload time
22.7.2 3302 Par set select src
22.7.3 3304 Par set select mon s
FLOAT
FLOAT
22.7 - FUNCTIONS/DOUBLE PAR SET
22.7.1 3300 Par set enable ENUM
LINK
0
1
16
SIZE
SIZE
Disable
Disable
Enable
6000
L_DIGSEL2
ENUM 16 set-00
0 set-00
22.7.4 3306 Par set 0 to 1 copy BIT
1 set-01
0
Min
5.0
0.1
1.5
0.5
22.8 - FUNCTIONS/SPEED CAPTURE
22.8.1 3350 Speed capture ENUM
22.8.2 3364 Vf catch start freq
22.8.3 3366 Vf catch enable dly
22.8.4 3368 Vf catch search time
Hz ms s
FLOAT
UINT16
FLOAT
2
0
1
22.8.5 3370 Vf catch P gain
22.8.6 3372 Vf catch I time
22.8.7 3376 Vf catch lastref dly perc ms ms
FLOAT
UINT16
UINT16
22.9 - FUNCTIONS/POWER LOSS
22.9.1 3400 Powerloss function
22.9.2 3402 Powerloss accel time
22.9.3 3404 Powerloss decel time
22.9.4 3410 Powerloss Vdcref
22.9.5 3420 Powerloss P gain
22.9.6 3422 Powerloss I time
22.9.7 3438 Powerloss mode
22.9.8 3440 Powerloss mains src
A/V ms s
V s
Disable
Disable
Alarm restart
0
Enable&restart
CALCF -500.0
1000
2.0
10.0
200
0
10
1.0
0.0
200
0
ENUM
FLOAT
0
1
Disable
Disable
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
ENUM
0
LINK
L_DIGSEL2
1 Restart
16 6000
0
Enable
10.0
2.0
CALCF
CALCF
0.01
0.01
0.0
0.0
CALCF 1.0
Ramp down 0
Ramp down
0
0
0
0
0
22.10 - FUNCTIONS/COMPARE
22.10.1 3650 Dig compare input 1 perc
22.10.2 3652 Dig compare input 2
22.10.3 3660 Compare input 1 src
22.10.4 3662 Compare input 2 src
22.10.5 3670 Compare function perc
ADV200 • Parameters List
FLOAT
FLOAT
LINK
32 0.0
32 0.0
32 3650
L_CMP
LINK 32 3652
L_CMP
ENUM
0
1
Nessuna
Nessuna
Ingr1=Ingr2
0
0
-100.0
-100.0
0
Max Acc Mod
1000.0 ERWS FVS
100.0 ERWS FVS
10.0
50.0
ERWS FVS
ERWS FVS
1
0
1 ERW FVS
16384 ERWZ FVS
ER
ERW
FVS
FVS
1 ERW FV_
500.0 ERWZ _V_
10000 ERWZ _V_
30.0
100.0
ERW
ERW
_V_
_V_
1000 ERW _V_
30000 ERWZ _V_
1 ERWZ FV_
100.0
100.0
ERW FV_
ERW FV_
CALCF ERWZS FV_
100.000 ERWS FV_
1000.0 ERWS FV_
1 ERWZ FV_
16384 ERWZ FV_
100.0 ERW
100.0 ERW
16384 ERW
16384 ERW
8 ERW
241
Menu PAR Description
22.10.6 3672 Compare window
22.10.7 3674 Compare delay
22.10.8 3676 Compare output
UM s perc
Type
FLOAT
FLOAT
BIT
FB BIT Def Min
8
4
5
2
3
6
7
0.0
16 0
Ingr1!=Ingr2
Ingr1<Ingr2
Inrg1>Ingr2
|Ing1|=|Ing2|
|Ing1|!=|Ing2|
|Ing1|<|Ing2|
|Ing1|>|Ing2|
0.0 0.0
0.0
0
22.11 - FUNCTIONS/PADS
22.11.1 3700 Pad 1
22.11.2 3702 Pad 2
22.11.3 3704 Pad 3
22.11.4 3706 Pad 4
22.11.5 3708 Pad 5
22.11.6 3710 Pad 6
22.11.7 3712 Pad 7
22.11.8 3714 Pad 8
22.11.9 3716 Pad 9
22.11.10 3718 Pad 10
22.11.11 3720 Pad 11
22.11.12 3722 Pad 12
22.11.13 3724 Pad 13
22.11.14 3726 Pad 14
22.11.15 3728 Pad 15
22.11.16 3730 Pad 16
INT32
INT32
INT32
INT32
INT32
INT32
INT32
INT32
INT32
INT32
INT32
INT32
INT32
INT32
INT32
INT32
22.12 - FUNCTIONS/VDC CONTROL
22.12.1 3450 Vdc control function
22.12.2 3470 Vdc control P gain
22.12.3 3472 Vdc control I time
A/V ms
ENUM
FLOAT
FLOAT
32 0
32 0
32 0
32 0
32 0
32 0
32 0
32 0
32 0
32 0
32 0
32 0
32 0
32 0
32 0
32 0
1
0
Disable
Disable
Enable
CALCF
CALCF
0
0.0
1.0
22.13 - FUNCTIONS/BRAKE CONTROL
22.13.1 3170 Brake control funct ENUM
22.13.2 3172 Brake open delay
22.13.3 3174 Brake close delay
22.13.4 3176 Brake open spd thr
22.13.5 3178 Brake close spd thr
22.13.6 3182 Brake open thr sel
22.13.7 3184 Brake open thr
22.13.8 3186 Brake open thr src
22.13.9 3188 Brake torque time
22.13.10 3190 Brake close wait s s rpm rpm s perc s
FLOAT
FLOAT
INT16
INT16
ENUM
0
1
3
0
1
2
Disable
Disable
Standard
Hoist mode 1
0
Hoist mode 2
0.20 0
0.20
0
0 0
Output curr 0
Torque ref%
Output curr
0
0
FLOAT
LINK
L_TCREF
FLOAT
FLOAT
10
16/32BIT 3184
0.10
2
-200.0
0
0.01
0.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
242
Max
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
Acc Mod
100.0
30.0
1
ERW
ERW
ER
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
1 ERWZ FVS
100.000 ERWS FVS
1000.0 ERWS FVS
ERWZ FVS
1
60.0
60.0
CALCI
CALCI
ERW
ERW
ERW
ERW
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
ERWZ FVS
200.0 ERWZS FVS
16384 ERWZ FVS
60.0
60.0
ERWZ FVS
ERW FVS
ADV200 • Parameters List
Menu PAR Description
22.12.11 3194 Brake ramp freeze
UM Type
ENUM
0
1
22.14 - FUNCTIONS/DIMENSION FACT
22.14.1 3900 Dim factor num UINT16
22.14.2 3902 Dim factor den
22.14.3 3904 Dim factor text
UINT16
UINT32
FB BIT Def
Disable
Disable
Enable
1
1
7172210 0
1
1
Min
0
22.15 - FUNCTIONS/CONTROL MODE
22.15.1 556 Control mode select ENUM
22.15.2 6200 Ctrl mode src
22.15.3 6202 Ctrl mode sel 0 src
LINK
0
1
2
Ramp
Torque
Speed
Ramp
16BIT 556
L_CTRLMODE
LINK 16BIT 6000
22.15.4 6204 Ctrl mode sel 1 src
22.15.5 6206 Ctrl mode sel mon
22.15.6 6208 Ctrl mode mon
L_DIGSEL2
LINK
L_DIGSEL2
UINT32
16BIT 6000
ENUM
0
1
2
0
Torque
Torque
Speed
Ramp
22.16 - FUNCTIONS/TEMP CONTROL
22.16.1 3500 Drv temp src LINK
L_TEMPCTRL
32BIT 6000
22.16.2 3504 Drv temp thr
22.16.3 3508 Drv temp hys
22.16.4 3502 Mot temp src
22.16.5 3506 Mot temp thr
22.16.6 3510 Mot temp hys degC degC degC degC
INT32
INT32
LINK
L_TEMPCTRL
INT32
INT32
45
2
32BIT 6000
45
2
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
23 - COMMUNICATION
23.1 - COMMUNICATION/RS485
23.1.1 3800 Drive address
23.1.2 3802 Serial baudrate
23.1.3 3810 Serial parameter
23.1.4 3804 Serial protocol
23.1.5 3806 Serial delay ms
UINT16
ENUM
0
1
ENUM
ENUM
3
0
2
0
1
2
UINT16
1
1
38400
9600
19200
38400
None,8,1 0
None,8,1
None,8,2
Even,8,1
Odd,8,1
Modbus 0
Modbus
1
0
Jbus
0 0
ADV200 • Parameters List
Max
1
Acc Mod
ERWZ FVS
65535 ERW FVS
65535 ERW FVS
0 ERW FVS
2 ERWZ F_S
16384 ERWZ F_S
16384 ERWZ F_S
16384 ERWZ F_S
3
0
ER
ER
F_S
F_S
16384 ERW FVS
100 ERW FVS
CALCI ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
100
CALCI
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
255
2
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
3 ERW FVS
1 ERW FVS
1000 ERW FVS
243
Menu PAR Description
23.1.6 3808 Serial swap data
UM Type
BIT
FB BIT Def
0
23.2 - COMMUNICATION/FIELDBUS CONFIG
23.2.1 4000 Fieldbus type ENUM
0
1
2
Off
Off
CanOpen
DeviceNet
3 Profibus
10 DS402
30 Profidrive
23.2.2 4004 Fieldbus baudrate
23.2.3 4006 Fieldbus address
23.2.4 4010 Abilit bus campoM->S
23.2.5 4012 Modo all bus campo
23.2.6 4014 Fieldbus state
23.2.7 4398 RTE protocol
23.2.8 5608 IP address
0
ENUM
INT16
ENUM
4
5
2
3
0
1
40 Rte
500k
Auto
125k
250k
500k
1M
9600
8
9
6
7
19200
93750
187,5k
1,5M
10 3M
11 6M
12 12M
0
1
3
Enable
Disable
Enable
0
INT32
ENUM
ENUM
107 Profidrive
UINT32 0
3
4
1
2
0
7
8
5
6
0
Stop
Stop
PreOperational
Operational
Error
WaitPRM
WaitCFG
DataExchange
DPError
SafeOp
9 Init
None
0 None
1 Ethercat
2 EthernetIP
3 GdNet
4 Profinet
5 ModbusTCP
6 Powerlink
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
0
23.3 - COMMUNICATION/FIELDBUS M->S
23.3.1 4020 Fieldbus M->S1 ipa FBM2SIPA 0
23.3.2 4022 Fieldbus M->S1 sys ENUM
0 20000
Not assigned 0
244
6
12
1
9
Max
1
255
1
0
Acc Mod
ERW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
R FVS
ER FVS
4294967295 ER FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
ADV200 • Parameters List
Menu PAR Description
23.3.3 4024 Fieldbus M->S1 mon
23.3.4 4026 Fieldbus M->S1 div
23.3.5 4030 Fieldbus M->S2 ipa
23.3.6 4032 Fieldbus M->S2 sys
23.3.7 4034 Fieldbus M->S2 mon
23.3.8 4036 Fieldbus M->S2 div
23.3.9 4040 Fieldbus M->S3 ipa
23.3.10 4042 Fieldbus M->S3 sys
23.3.11 4044 Fieldbus M->S3 mon
23.3.12 4046 Fieldbus M->S3 div
23.3.13 4050 Fieldbus M->S4 ipa
23.3.14 4052 Fieldbus M->S4 sys
ADV200 • Parameters List
UM Type FB BIT Def Min
6
7
4
5
8
9
2
3
0
1
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
INT32
FLOAT
10
32
Par 32
0
1.0
0
1.0
FBM2SIPA 0 0
ENUM
0
20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
1
2
3
4
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
7
8
5
6
9
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
INT32
10 Par 32
32 0 0
FLOAT
FBM2SIPA 0
ENUM
0
1
4
5
2
3
8
9
6
7
INT32
10 Par 32
32 0
1.0 1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
0
FLOAT
FBM2SIPA 0
ENUM
0
3
4
1
2
7
8
5
6
9
1.0 1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
Max Acc Mod
0 ER FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
0 ER FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
0 ER FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
245
Menu PAR Description
23.3.15 4054 Fieldbus M->S4 mon
23.3.16 4056 Fieldbus M->S4 div
23.3.17 4060 Fieldbus M->S5 ipa
23.3.18 4062 Fieldbus M->S5 sys
23.3.19 4064 Fieldbus M->S5 mon
23.3.20 4066 Fieldbus M->S5 div
23.3.21 4070 Fieldbus M->S6 ipa
23.3.22 4072 Fieldbus M->S6 sys
23.3.23 4074 Fieldbus M->S6 mon
23.3.24 4076 Fieldbus M->S6 div
23.3.25 4080 Fieldbus M->S7 ipa
23.3.26 4082 Fieldbus M->S7 sys
23.3.27 4084 Fieldbus M->S7 mon
23.3.28 4086 Fieldbus M->S7 div
23.3.29 4090 Fieldbus M->S8 ipa
23.3.30 4092 Fieldbus M->S8 sys
246
UM Type FB BIT Def Min
INT32
FLOAT
FBM2SIPA 0
ENUM
0
1
4
5
2
3
8
9
6
7
INT32
10 Par 32
32 0
10 Par 32
32 0
0
1.0 1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
0
FLOAT
FBM2SIPA 0
ENUM
0
3
4
1
2
7
8
5
6
9
INT32
10 Par 32
32 0
1.0 1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
0
FLOAT
FBM2SIPA 0
ENUM
0
1
4
5
2
3
8
9
6
7
1.0 1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
INT32
FLOAT
FBM2SIPA 0
ENUM
0
3
4
1
2
10 Par 32
32 0 0
1.0 1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Max Acc Mod
0 ER FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
0 ER FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
0 ER FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
0 ER FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
ADV200 • Parameters List
Menu PAR Description
23.3.31 4094 Fieldbus M->S8 mon
23.3.32 4096 Fieldbus M->S8 div
23.3.33 4100 Fieldbus M->S9 ipa
23.3.34 4102 Fieldbus M->S9 sys
23.3.35 4104 Fieldbus M->S9 mon
23.3.36 4106 Fieldbus M->S9 div
23.3.37 4110 Fieldbus M->S10 ipa
23.3.38 4112 Fieldbus M->S10 sys
23.3.39 4114 Fieldbus M->S10 mon
23.3.40 4116 Fieldbus M->S10 div
23.3.41 4120 Fieldbus M->S11 ipa
23.3.42 4122 Fieldbus M->S11 sys
23.3.43 4124 Fieldbus M->S11 mon
23.3.44 4126 Fieldbus M->S11 div
23.3.45 4130 Fieldbus M->S12 ipa
23.3.46 4132 Fieldbus M->S12 sys
ADV200 • Parameters List
UM Type FB BIT Def Min
INT32
7
8
5
6
9
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
10 Par 32
32 0 0
FLOAT
FBM2SIPA 0
ENUM
0
1
4
5
2
3
8
9
6
7
INT32
10 Par 32
32 0
1.0 1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
0
FLOAT
FBM2SIPA
ENUM
0
3
4
1
2
7
8
5
6
9
INT32
10 Par 32
32 0
1.0 1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
0
FLOAT
FBM2SIPA 0
ENUM
0
1
4
5
2
3
8
9
6
7
1.0 1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
INT32
FLOAT
FBM2SIPA 0
ENUM
10 Par 32
32 0
1.0
0
1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Max Acc Mod
0 ER FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
0 ER FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
0 ER FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
0 ER FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
247
Menu PAR Description
23.3.47 4134 Fieldbus M->S12 mon
23.3.48 4136 Fieldbus M->S12 div
23.3.49 4140 Fieldbus M->S13 ipa
23.3.50 4142 Fieldbus M->S13 sys
23.3.51 4144 Fieldbus M->S13 mon
23.3.52 4146 Fieldbus M->S13 div
23.3.53 4150 Fieldbus M->S14 ipa
23.3.54 4152 Fieldbus M->S14 sys
23.3.55 4154 Fieldbus M->S14 mon
23.3.56 4156 Fieldbus M->S14 div
23.3.57 4160 Fieldbus M->S15 ipa
23.3.58 4162 Fieldbus M->S15 sys
248
UM Type FB BIT Def Min
INT32
6
7
4
5
8
9
2
3
0
1
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
10 Par 32
32 0 0
FLOAT
FBM2SIPA 0
ENUM
0
3
4
1
2
7
8
5
6
9
INT32
10 Par 32
32 0
1.0 1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
0
FLOAT
FBM2SIPA 0
ENUM
0
1
4
5
2
3
8
9
6
7
INT32
10 Par 32
32 0
1.0 1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
0
FLOAT
FBM2SIPA 0
ENUM
0
3
4
1
2
7
8
5
6
9
1.0 1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
Max Acc Mod
0 ER FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
0 ER FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
0 ER FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
ADV200 • Parameters List
Menu PAR Description
23.3.59 4164 Fieldbus M->S15 mon
23.3.60 4166 Fieldbus M->S15 div
23.3.61 4170 Fieldbus M->S16 ipa
23.3.62 4172 Fieldbus M->S16 sys
23.3.63 4174 Fieldbus M->S16 mon
23.3.64 4176 Fieldbus M->S16 div
UM Type FB BIT Def Min
INT32
FLOAT
FBM2SIPA 0
ENUM
0
1
4
5
2
3
8
9
6
7
10 Par 32
32 0 0
1.0 1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
INT32
FLOAT
10 Par 32
32 0
1.0
0
1.0
23.4 - COMMUNICATION/FIELDBUS S->M
23.4.1 4180 Fieldbus S->M1 ipa FBS2MIPA 0
23.4.2 4182 Fieldbus S->M1 sys ENUM
6
7
4
5
8
9
2
3
0
1
23.4.3 4184 Dig Fieldbus S->M1 INT32
0 20000
Not assignedo 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
10 Par 32
32 0 0
23.4.4 4186 Fieldbus S->M1 mul
23.4.5 4190 Fieldbus S->M2 ipa
23.4.6 4192 Fieldbus S->M2 sys
23.4.7 4194 Dig Fieldbus S->M2
23.4.8 4196 Fieldbus S->M2 mul
23.4.9 4200 Fieldbus S->M3 ipa
23.4.10 4202 Fieldbus S->M3 sys
FLOAT
FBS2MIPA 0
ENUM
0
3
4
1
2
7
8
5
6
9
1.0 1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
INT32
FLOAT
FBS2MIPA 0
ENUM
2
0
1
10 Par 32
32 0
1.0
0
1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
ADV200 • Parameters List
Max Acc Mod
0 ER FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
0 ER FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
0 ERW FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
0 ERW FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
249
Menu PAR Description
23.4.11 4204 Dig Fieldbus S->M3
23.4.12 4206 Fieldbus S->M3 mulo
23.4.13 4210 Fieldbus S->M4 ipa
23.4.14 4212 Fieldbus S->M4 sys
23.4.15 4214 Dig Fieldbus S->M4
23.4.16 4216 Fieldbus S->M4 mul
23.4.17 4220 Fieldbus S->M5 ipa
23.4.18 4222 Fieldbus S->M5 sys
23.4.19 4224 Dig Fieldbus S->M5
23.4.20 4226 Fieldbus S->M5 mul
23.4.21 4230 Fieldbus S->M6 ipa
23.4.22 4232 Fieldbus S->M6 sys
23.4.23 4234 Dig Fieldbus S->M6
23.4.24 4236 Fieldbus S->M6 mul
250
UM Type FB BIT Def Min
INT32
7
8
9
5
6
3
4
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
10 Par 32
32 0 0
FLOAT
FBS2MIPA 0
ENUM
0
1
4
5
2
3
8
9
6
7
INT32
10 Par 32
32 0
1.0 1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
0
FLOAT
FBS2MIPA 0
ENUM
0
3
4
1
2
7
8
5
6
9
INT32
10 Par 32
32 0
1.0 1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
0
FLOAT
FBS2MIPA 0
ENUM
0
1
4
5
2
3
8
9
6
7
INT32
FLOAT
10 Par 32
32 0
1.0
1.0 1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
0
1.0
Max
0 ERW FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
0 ERW FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
0 ERW FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
0
1000.0
Acc
ERW
ERW
Mod
FVS
FVS
ADV200 • Parameters List
Menu PAR Description
23.4.25 4240 Fieldbus S->M7 ipa
23.4.26 4242 Fieldbus S->M7 sys
23.4.27 4244 Dig Fieldbus S->M7
23.4.28 4246 Fieldbus S->M7 mul
23.4.29 4250 Fieldbus S->M8 ipa
23.4.30 4252 Fieldbus S->M8 sys
23.4.31 4254 Dig Fieldbus S->M8
23.4.32 4256 Fieldbus S->M8 mul
23.4.33 4260 Fieldbus S->M9 ipa
23.4.34 4262 Fieldbus S->M9 sys
23.4.35 4264 Dig Fieldbus S->M9
23.4.36 4266 Fieldbus S->M9 mul
23.4.37 4270 Fieldbus S->M10 ipa
23.4.38 4272 Fieldbus S->M10 sys
ADV200 • Parameters List
UM Type FB BIT Def Min
FBS2MIPA 0
ENUM
0
1
4
5
2
3
8
9
6
7
INT32
10 Par 32
32 0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
0
FLOAT
FBS2MIPA 0
ENUM
0
3
4
1
2
7
8
5
6
9
INT32
10 Par 32
32 0
1.0 1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
0
FLOAT
FBS2MIPA 0
ENUM
0
1
4
5
2
3
8
9
6
7
INT32
10 Par 32
32 0
1.0 1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
0
FLOAT
FBS2MIPA 0
ENUM
0
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
1.0 1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Max
RW
10
Acc
FVS
RW
Mod
FVS
0 ERW FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
0 ERW FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
0 ERW FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
251
Menu PAR Description
23.4.39 4274 Dig Fieldbus S->M10
23.4.40 4276 Fieldbus S->M10 mul
23.4.41 4280 Fieldbus S->M11 ipa
23.4.42 4282 Fieldbus S->M11 sys
23.4.43 4284 Dig Fieldbus S->M11
23.4.44 4286 Fieldbus S->M11 mul
23.4.45 4290 Fieldbus S->M12 ipa
23.4.46 4292 Fieldbus S->M12 sys
23.4.47 4294 Dig Fieldbus S->M12
23.4.48 4296 Fieldbus S->M12 mul
23.4.49 4300 Fieldbus S->M13 ipa
23.4.50 4302 Fieldbus S->M13 sys
23.4.51 4304 Dig Fieldbus S->M13
23.4.52 4306 Fieldbus S->M13 mul
23.4.53 4310 Fieldbus S->M14 ipa
23.4.54 4312 Fieldbus S->M14 sys
252
UM Type FB BIT Def Min
INT32
8
9
Eu float
Par 16
10 Par 32
32 0 0
FLOAT
FBS2MIPA 0
ENUM
0
3
4
1
2
7
8
5
6
9
INT32
10 Par 32
32 0
1.0 1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
0
FLOAT 1.0 1.0
FBS2MIPA 0 0
ENUM Not assigned
20000
0
0
1
Not assigned
Count 16
2
3
4
5
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
8
9
6
7
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
INT32
10 Par 32
32 0 0
FLOAT
FBS2MIPA 0
ENUM
0
3
4
1
2
7
8
5
6
9
1.0 1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
INT32
10 Par 32
32 0 0
FLOAT 1.0 1.0
FBS2MIPA 0 0
ENUM Not assigned
20000
0
0
1
2
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Max Acc Mod
0 ERW FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
0 ERW FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
0 ERW FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
0 ERW FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
ADV200 • Parameters List
Menu PAR Description
23.4.55 4314 Dig Fieldbus S->M14
23.4.56 4316 Fieldbus S->M14 mul
23.4.57 4320 Fieldbus S->M15 ipa
23.4.58 4322 Fieldbus S->M15 sys
23.4.59 4324 Dig Fieldbus S->M15
23.4.60 4326 Fieldbus S->M15 mul
23.4.61 4330 Fieldbus S->M16 ipa
23.4.62 4332 Fieldbus S->M16 syso
23.4.63 4334 Dig Fieldbus S->M16
23.4.64 4336 Fieldbus S->M16 mul
23.5 - COMMUNICATION/WORD COMP
23.5.1 4400 Word bit0 src
23.5.2 4402 Word bit1 src
LINK 16 6000
L_DIGSEL1
LINK 16 6000
23.5.3 4404 Word bit2 src
23.5.4 4406 Word bit3 src
23.5.5 4408 Word bit4 src
23.5.6 4410 Word bit5 src
23.5.7 4412 Word bit6 src
L_DIGSEL1
LINK 16 6000
L_DIGSEL1
LINK 16 6000
L_DIGSEL1
LINK 16 6000
L_DIGSEL1
LINK 16 6000
L_DIGSEL1
LINK 16 6000
UM Type FB BIT Def Min
INT32
7
8
9
5
6
3
4
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
10 Par 32
32 0 0
FLOAT
FBS2MIPA 0
ENUM
0
1
4
5
2
3
8
9
6
7
INT32
10 Par 32
32 0
1.0 1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
0
FLOAT
FBS2MIPA 0
ENUM
0
3
4
1
2
7
8
5
6
9
INT32
FLOAT
10 Par 32
32 0
1.0
1.0 1.0
0 20000
Not assigned 0
Not assigned
Count 16
Count 32
Fill 16
Fill 32
Mdplc 16
Mdplc 32
EU
Eu float
Par 16
0
1.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ADV200 • Parameters List
Max Acc Mod
0 ERW FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
0 ERW FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
RW
10
FVS
RW FVS
0 ERW FVS
1000.0 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
253
Menu PAR Description
23.5.8 4414 Word bit7 src
23.5.9 4416 Word bit8 src
23.5.10 4418 Word bit9 src
23.5.11 4420 Word bit10 src
23.5.12 4422 Word bit11 src
23.5.13 4424 Word bit12 src
23.5.14 4426 Word bit13 src
23.5.15 4428 Word bit14 src
23.5.16 4430 Word bit15 src
23.5.17 4432 Word comp mon
UM Type FB BIT Def
L_DIGSEL1
LINK 16 6000
L_DIGSEL1
LINK 16 6000
L_DIGSEL1
LINK 16 6000
L_DIGSEL1
LINK 16 6000
L_DIGSEL1
LINK 16 6000
L_DIGSEL1
LINK 16 6000
L_DIGSEL1
LINK 16 6000
L_DIGSEL1
LINK 16 6000
L_DIGSEL1
LINK 16 6000
L_DIGSEL1
UINT32 16 0
23.6 - COMMUNICATION/WORD DECOMP
23.6.1 4450 Dig word decomp UINT32 16BIT 0
23.6.2 4452 Word decomp src
23.6.3 4454 Bit0 decomp mon
23.6.4 4456 Bit1 decomp mon
23.6.5 4458 Bit2 decomp mon
23.6.6 4460 Bit3 decomp mon
23.6.7 4462 Bit4 decomp mon
23.6.8 4464 Bit5 decomp mon
23.6.9 4466 Bit6 decomp mon
23.6.10 4468 Bit7 decomp mon
23.6.11 4470 Bit8 decomp mon
23.6.12 4472 Bit9 decomp mon
23.6.13 4474 Bit10 decomp mon
23.6.14 4476 Bit11 decomp mon
23.6.15 4478 Bit12 decomp mon
23.6.16 4480 Bit13 decomp mon
23.6.17 4482 Bit14 decomp mon
23.6.18 4484 Bit15 decomp mon
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
LINK 16BIT 4450
L_WDECOMP
BIT
BIT
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
23.7 - COMMUNICATION/EXTERNAL IO
23.7.1 5480 External IO enable
23.7.2 5482 External IO info
23.7.3 5484 External IO state
23.7.4 5486 External IO failcode
ENUM
UINT32
1
0
BIT
UINT32
16BIT 0
0
Disable
Disable
Enable
0
23.8 - COMMUNICATION/FAST LINK
23.8.1 5702 FL address
23.8.2 5818 FL bidirectional
UINT16
ENUM
254
0
Enable
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
Max Acc Mod
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
0 ER FVS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
1
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
1 ERW FVS
4294967295 ER
1 ER
4294967295 ER
FVS
FVS
FVS
16
1
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
ADV200 • Parameters List
Menu PAR Description
23.8.3 5820 FL N of slave
23.8.4 5710 FL sync slave type
23.8.5 5712 FL N Fwd slave chg
23.8.6 5714 FL fault enable src
23.8.7 5730 FL Fwd 1 src
23.8.8 5732 FL Fwd 2 src
23.8.9 5734 FL Fwd 3 src
23.8.10 5736 FL Fwd 4 src
23.8.11 5830 FL Rev 1 src
23.8.12 5832 FL Rev 2 src
23.8.13 5750 FL Fwd 1 mon
23.8.14 5752 FL Fwd 2 mon
23.8.15 5754 FL Fwd 3 mon
23.8.16 5756 FL Fwd 4 mon
23.8.17 5758 FL Fwd 5 mon
23.8.18 5760 FL Fwd 6 mon
23.8.19 5762 FL Fwd 7 mon
23.8.20 5764 FL Fwd 8 mon
23.8.21 5850 Mon rev 1 FL
23.8.22 5852 Mon rev 2 FL
23.8.23 5854 Mon rev 3 FL
23.8.24 5856 Mon rev 4 FL
23.8.25 5822 Sel slave 1 rev FL
23.8.26 5824 Sel slave 2 rev FL
23.8.27 5826 Sel slave 3 rev FL
23.8.28 5828 Sel slave 4 rev FL
23.8.29 5720 Sync slave mon
23.8.30 5722 FL fault code
24 - ALARM CONFIG
24.1 4500 Fault reset src
24.2 4502 ExtFlt src
24.3 4504 ExtFlt activity
24.4 4506 ExtFlt restart
ADV200 • Parameters List
UM Type FB BIT Def Min
UINT16
0
1
ENUM
UINT16
2
0
1
LINK
L_DIGSEL1
16BIT 6002
LINK
L_FLWORD
16/32BIT 6000
LINK
L_FLWORD
16/32BIT 6000
LINK
L_FLWORD
16/32BIT 6000
LINK
L_FLWORD
LINK
L_FLWORD
LINK
16/32BIT
16/32BIT 6000
16/32BIT
6000
6000
0
Disable
Enable
0
Pwm&Ctrl 0
Off
Pwm
Pwm&Ctrl
0 0
0
L_FLWORD
INT32 32BIT 0
INT32
INT32
INT32
INT32
INT32
INT32
32BIT 0
32BIT 0
32BIT 0
32BIT 0
32BIT 0
32BIT 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
INT32
INT32
INT32
INT32
INT32
32BIT 0
32BIT 0
32BIT 0
32BIT 0
32BIT 0
UINT16
UINT16
UINT16
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
UINT16
BIT
UINT32
0
16BIT 0
0
0
0
0
0
Max Acc Mod
32767 ERWZ FVS
4
2 ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
16384 ERW FVS
0
0
31
31
0
0
0
0
1
0
31
31
0
0
0
0
0
0
16384 ERW FVS
ER
ER
FVS
FVS
ER
ER
ER
ER
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
ER
ER
FVS
FVS
LINK
L_DIGSEL2
16BIT 1120
LINK
L_DIGSEL2
16BIT 6000
1
2
ENUM
0
3
Ignore
Disable
Warning
Disable
Stop
4
ENUM
Fast stop
Disable
0
0
0
0 1
4
16384 RW
16384 RW
RW
RW
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
255
Menu PAR Description
24.5 4508 ExtFlt restart time
24.6 4510 ExtFlt holdoff
24.7 4516 MotorOT pre activity
24.8 4518 MotorOT pre thr
24.9 4520 MotorOT src
24.10 4522 MotorOT activity
24.11 4524 MotorOT restart
24.12 4526 MotorOT restart time
24.13 4528 MotorOT holdoff
24.14 4530 MotorOT probe
24.15 4532 MotorOT thr
24.16 4536 MotorOT mon
24.17 4540 Overspeed threshold
24.18 4542 Overspeed activity
24.19 4544 Overspeed holdoff
24.20 4550 SpdRefLoss threshold
24.21 4552 SpdRefLoss activity
24.22 4554 SpdRefLoss holdoff
24.23 4560 SpdFbkLoss activity
256
Type FB BIT Def Min
0
1
Disable
Enable
UINT16 1000
2
3
0
1
UINT16
ENUM
Ignore
Warning
0
Ignore
Disable
Stop
4
UINT16
Fast stop
60
LINK
L_DIGSEL2
16BIT 6000
2
3
ENUM
0
1
Warning 0
Ignore
Warning
Disable
Stop
0
0
4
ENUM
0
Fast stop
Disable
Disable
1
UINT16
Enable
1000
0
120
UINT16
5
6
3
4
7
1
2
ENUM
0
1000
SRC
SRC
Sens An1X
Sens An2X
KTY84 AnX
PTC AnX
KTY84 An1
KTY84 An2
PTC An1
8
UINT16
PTC An2
0
INT16
INT32
1
2
ENUM
0
3
Ignore
0
CALCI
Disable
Warning
Disable
Stop
120
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
UINT16
Fast stop
0
INT16
1
2
ENUM
0
3
Ignore
Ignore
Warning
Disable
Stop
100
4
UINT16
Fast stop
1000
ENUM
0 Ignore
Disable
0
0
0
0
0
UM ms perc ms ms cnt cnt rpm ms ms ms rpm
Max Acc Mod
30000 RW FVS
10000 RW
4 ERW
FVS
FVS
1
4
100
16384
ERW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
RW FVS
30000 RW
30000 RW
8
FVS
FVS
ERW FVS
32767 ERW FVS
4
32767 ER
CALCI RW
RW
FVS
FVS
FVS
5000
CALCI
4
RW
RW
RW
4
10000 RW
RW
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FV_
ADV200 • Parameters List
Menu PAR Description
24.24 4562 SpdFbkLoss holdoff
24.25 4564 SpdFbkLoss threshold
24.26 4570 Drive ovld activity
24.27 4572 Motor ovld activity
24.28 4574 Bres ovld activity
24.29 4582 HTsens restart
24.30 4584 HTsens restart time
24.31 4600 InAir activity
24.32 4602 InAir restart
24.33 4604 InAir restart time
24.34 4606 InAir holdoff
24.35 4610 Desat restart
24.36 4612 Desat restart time
24.37 4620 IOverC restart
24.38 4622 IOverC restart time
24.39 4630 OverV restart
24.40 4632 OverV restart time
24.41 4640 UnderV restart
ADV200 • Parameters List
Type FB BIT Def Min
1
2
3
Warning
Disable
Stop
4
UINT16
Fast stop
200
2
3
0
1
INT16
ENUM
4
2
3
ENUM
0
1
4
2
3
ENUM
0
1
4
ENUM
0
Ignore
Warning
Disable
Stop
Ignore
Disable
Stop
Disable
100
Ignore
Fast stop
Warning 0
Ignore
Warning
Disable
Stop
Fast stop
Disable
Warning
Fast stop
Disable
5
0
0
0
0
1
UINT16
Enable
20000
1
2
ENUM
0
3
Ignore
Stop
Warning
Disable
Stop
4
ENUM
0
Fast stop
Disable
Disable
1
UINT16
Enable
1000
UINT16
ENUM
0
10000
Disable
Disable
1
UINT16
Enable
2000
ENUM
0 Disable
Disable
1
UINT16
Enable
2000
ENUM
0 Disable
Disable
1
UINT16
Enable
2000
ENUM
0
1
Disable
Enable
Enable
0
1000
0
1000
0
120
0
120
0
0
0
1000
UM ms ms ms ms ms ms rpm ms
Max Acc Mod
1
4
4
CALCI
4
10000 RW
RW
ERW
FV_
FV_
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
1
4
60000 ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
30000 ERW FVS
1
30000 ERW FVS
ERW FVS
1
10000 ERW FVS
ERW FVS
1
10000 ERW FVS
ERW FVS
1
10000 ERW FVS
ERW FVS
257
Menu PAR Description
24.42 4642 UnderV restart time
24.43 4650 UVRep attempts
24.44 4652 UVRep delay
24.45 4660 PhLoss activity
24.46 4662 PhLoss restart
24.47 4664 PhLoss restart time
24.48 4670 Optionbus activity
24.49 4680 GroundFault thr
24.50 4684 Brake fault activity
24.51 4690 ExtIO activity
24.52 4940 FL fault activity
24.53 4654 Mot PhLoss activity
24.54 4656 Mot PhLoss holdoff
24.55 4658 Mot PhLoss threshold
24.56 4700 Alarm dig sel 1
258
Type FB BIT Def Min
2
3
ENUM
0
1
4
2
3
ENUM
0
1
4
4
FLOAT
2
3
ENUM
0
1
4
UINT16
UINT16
1000
5
UINT16
1
2
ENUM
0
3
240
Ignore
Disable
Warning
Disable
Stop
4
ENUM
0
Fast stop
Disable
Disable
1
UINT16
Enable
1000
2
3
ENUM
0
1
Disable
Ignore
Warning
Disable
Stop
Fast stop
10.0
Disable
Ignore
Warning
Disable
Stop
Fast stop
Disable
Ignore
Warning
Disable
Stop
Fast stop
Disable
Ignore
Warning
Disable
Stop
Fast stop
FLOAT
4
5
2
3
6
7
ENUM
0
1
2
3
ENUM
0
1
Ignore
Ignore
Warning
Disable
Stop
4
UINT16
Fast stop
800
CALCF 0
No alarm 0
No alarm
Overvoltage
Undervoltage
Ground fault
Overcurrent
Desaturation
MultiUndervolt
MultiOvercurr
0
800
0
0
0
120
0
0
120
0
0
0
0.0
UM perc ms
A s ms ms
Max Acc Mod
1
300
4
10000 ERW FVS
1000 ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
4
10000 ERW FVS
ERW FVS
150.0 ERWS FVS
ERW FVS 4
4 ERW FVS
4 ERW FVS
4 ERW FVS
10000 ERW FVS
CALCF ERW FVS
60 ERW FVS
ADV200 • Parameters List
Menu PAR Description
24.57 4702 Alarm dig sel 2
ADV200 • Parameters List
FB BIT Def Min
Plc8 fault
Watchdog
Trap error
System error
User error
Param error
Load def par
Plc cfg error
Load def plc
Key failed
Encoder error
Opt cfg change
Not Used3
Plc9 fault
Plc10 fault
Plc11 fault
Plc12 fault
Plc13 fault
Plc14 fault
Plc15 fault
MultiDesat
Heatsink OT
HeatsinkS OTUT
Intakeair OT
Motor OT
Drive overload
Motor overload
Bres overload
Phaseloss
Opt Bus fault
Opt 1 IO fault
Opt 2 IO fault
Opt Enc fault
External fault
Speed fbk loss
Overspeed
Speed ref loss
Emg stop alarm
Power down
ExtIO fault
FastLink fault
Brake fault
Motor pre OT
Mot phase loss
Not Used2
Plc1 fault
Plc2 fault
Plc3 fault
Plc4 fault
Plc5 fault
Plc6 fault
Plc7 fault
Plc16 fault
No alarm 0
No alarm
Overvoltage
Type
36
37
38
39
32
33
34
35
28
29
30
31
24
25
26
27
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
52
53
54
55
48
49
50
51
56
57
58
59
44
45
46
47
40
41
42
43
60
ENUM
0
1
UM Acc Mod
ERW FVS
259
Max
60
Menu PAR Description
260
Type
46
47
48
49
42
43
44
45
38
39
40
41
34
35
36
37
54
55
56
57
50
51
52
53
30
31
32
33
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
UM FB BIT Def
Plc2 fault
Plc3 fault
Plc4 fault
Plc5 fault
Plc6 fault
Plc7 fault
Plc8 fault
Watchdog
Trap error
System error
User error
Param error
Load def par
Plc cfg error
Load def plc
Key failed
Encoder error
Opt cfg change
Not Used3
Plc9 fault
Plc10 fault
Plc11 fault
Plc12 fault
Plc13 fault
Undervoltage
Ground fault
Overcurrent
Desaturation
MultiUndervolt
MultiOvercurr
MultiDesat
Heatsink OT
HeatsinkS OTUT
Intakeair OT
Motor OT
Drive overload
Motor overload
Bres overload
Phaseloss
Opt Bus fault
Opt 1 IO fault
Opt 2 IO fault
Opt Enc fault
External fault
Speed fbk loss
Overspeed
Speed ref loss
Emg stop alarm
Power down
ExtIO fault
FastLink fault
Brake fault
Motor pre OT
Mot phase loss
Not Used2
Plc1 fault
Min Acc Mod Max
ADV200 • Parameters List
Menu PAR Description
24.58 4704 Alarm dig sel 3
ADV200 • Parameters List
FB BIT Def Min
Plc14 fault
Plc15 fault
Plc16 fault
Motor pre OT
Mot phase loss
Not Used2
Plc1 fault
Plc2 fault
Plc3 fault
Plc4 fault
Plc5 fault
Plc6 fault
Plc7 fault
Plc8 fault
Watchdog
Trap error
System error
User error
Param error
Load def par
Plc cfg error
Load def plc
Key failed
Encoder error
Opt cfg change
No alarm 0
No alarm
Overvoltage
Undervoltage
Ground fault
Overcurrent
Desaturation
MultiUndervolt
MultiOvercurr
MultiDesat
Heatsink OT
HeatsinkS OTUT
Intakeair OT
Motor OT
Drive overload
Motor overload
Bres overload
Phaseloss
Opt Bus fault
Opt 1 IO fault
Opt 2 IO fault
Opt Enc fault
External fault
Speed fbk loss
Overspeed
Speed ref loss
Emg stop alarm
Power down
ExtIO fault
FastLink fault
Brake fault
Type
58
59
60
42
43
44
45
38
39
40
41
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
46
47
48
49
50
51
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
ENUM
0
1
UM Acc Mod
ERW FVS
261
Max
60
Menu PAR Description
24.59 4706 Alarm dig sel 4
262
FB BIT Def Min
Not Used3
Plc9 fault
Plc10 fault
Plc11 fault
Plc12 fault
Plc13 fault
Plc14 fault
Plc15 fault
Plc16 fault
No alarm 0
No alarm
Overvoltage
Undervoltage
Ground fault
Overcurrent
Desaturation
MultiUndervolt
MultiOvercurr
MultiDesat
Heatsink OT
HeatsinkS OTUT
Intakeair OT
Motor OT
Drive overload
Motor overload
Bres overload
Phaseloss
Opt Bus fault
Opt 1 IO fault
Opt 2 IO fault
Opt Enc fault
External fault
Speed fbk loss
Overspeed
Speed ref loss
Emg stop alarm
Power down
ExtIO fault
FastLink fault
Brake fault
Motor pre OT
Mot phase loss
Not Used2
Plc1 fault
Plc2 fault
Plc3 fault
Plc4 fault
Plc5 fault
Plc6 fault
Plc7 fault
Plc8 fault
Watchdog
Trap error
System error
User error
Param error
Type
56
57
58
59
52
53
54
55
60
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
ENUM
0
1
42
43
44
45
38
39
40
41
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
UM Acc Mod
ERW FVS
ADV200 • Parameters List
Max
60
24.60 4720 Alm autoreset time
24.61 4722 Alm autoreset number s
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
60
FLOAT
UINT16
Load def par
Plc cfg error
Load def plc
Key failed
Encoder error
Opt cfg change
Not Used3
Plc9 fault
Plc10 fault
Plc11 fault
Plc12 fault
Plc13 fault
Plc14 fault
Plc15 fault
Plc16 fault
0.0
20
0.0
0
25 - ALARM LOG
26 - APPLICATION
27 - SERVICE
27.1 - SERVICE/TEST GENERATOR
27.1.1 5000 Test gen dest
27.1.2 5002 Test gen level high
27.1.3 5004 Test gen level low
27.1.4 5006 Test gen period
27.1.5 5008 Test gen out perc perc s perc
ENUM
INT16
INT16
FLOAT
INT16
27.2 - SERVICE/PARAM ADAPT
27.2.1 180 Adapt Rr P gain perc
27.2.2 182 Adapt Rr I time
27.2.3 184 Adapt RrIq threshold
27.2.4 170 Adapt Rs P gain
27.2.5 172 Adapt Rs I time
27.2.6 174 Adapt RsIq threshold s
A perc s
A
27.3 - ASSISTENZA/POSITION
27.3.1 2152 E1 Virtual pulses
27.3.2 2154 E1 Virtual position
27.3.3 2156 E1 Revolutions
27.3.4 2168 E1 Abs pulses
27.3.5 2164 E1 Abs position cnt cnt
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
4
0
1
2
3
Off
Off
Ramp ref 1
Speed ref 1
Torque ref 1
Current ref
0
16/32 0
0
1.0
0
-200
-200
0.01
0
1.0
1.0
CALCF
2.0
0.5
CALCF
UINT32 CALCI
UINT32 32BIT 0
INT32
UINT32
32BIT 0
CALCI
UINT32 32BIT 0
0
0
0
0
0
0.01
0.1
0.0
0.01
0.1
0.0
ADV200 • Functions description and parameters list
0
0
0
0
0
60.0
100
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
4 ERWZ FVS
200
200
10.0
0
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ER FVS
10.0
10.0
0.0
10.0
10.0
0.0
ERWS F__
ERWS F__
ERWZS F__
ERWS __S
ERWS __S
ERWZS __S
ERW FVS
ER FVS
ER
ER
ER
FVS
FVS
FVS
263
Menu PAR Description
27.3.6 2166 E1 Abs revolutions
27.3.7 5152 E2 Virtual pulses
27.3.8 5154 E2 Virtual position
27.3.9 5156 E2 Revolutions
27.3.10 5168 E2 Abs pulses
27.3.11 5252 E3 Virtual pulses
27.3.12 5254 E3 Virtual position
27.3.13 5256 E3 Revolutions
27.3.14 2136 Resolver MIS maxThr
27.3.15 2138 Resolver MIS minThr
27.3.16 2140 Resolver LOT thr
27.3.17 2142 Resolver LOT hys
27.3.18 2144 Resolver get reg
27.3.19 2146 Resolver reg mon
27.4 - SERVICE/FIELDBUS SERV
27.4.1 4016 Fieldbus float order
27.4.2 4018 Profibus byte order
27.4.3 5604 InputSize
27.4.4 5606 OutputSize
27.4.5 5614 PN diagnostic
UM
V
V deg deg cnt cnt
27.7 - SERVICE/SENSORLESS
27.7.1 3356 Magn curr speed zero %
27.8 - SERVICE/MULTIWINDING
Type FB BIT Def
UINT32 32BIT 0
UINT32 CALCI
UINT32 32BIT 0
INT32 32BIT 0
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32 32BIT 0
INT32 32BIT 0
CALCI
CALCI
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
UINT16
UINT16
2.280
3.990
4
0.5
0
0
BIT
BIT
UINT16
UINT16
UINT32
27.5 - SERVICE/EXT IO SERV
27.5.1 5488 External IO period
27.5.2 5490 External IO address
27.5.3 5492 External IO baudrate
UINT16
INT16
ENUM
8
1
5
6
3
4
1
2
0
7
8
93750
187,5k
9 1,5M
10 3M
11 6M
500k
Auto
125k
250k
500k
1M
9600
19200
12 12M
27.6 - SERVICE/SERIAL NUMBERS
27.6.1 520 Product S/N
27.6.2 522 Regulation S/N
27.6.3 524 Power S/N
27.6.4 536 Slot1 card S/N
27.6.5 538 Slot2 card S/N
27.6.6 540 Slot3 card S/N
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
UINT32
0
0
0
0
0
0
UINT32
0
0
0
0
0
150
264
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
0
0
0
0
0.000
0.000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
50
64
255
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
Max
0
0
9
9
4.820
4.820
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Acc Mod
ER FVS
ERW FVS
ER
ER
FVS
FVS
ER FVS
ERW FVS
ER
ER
FVS
FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERWZ FVS
ERZ FVS
1
1
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
65535 ER
65535 ER
FVS
FVS
4294967295 ERW FVS
200
R
R
R
R
R
R
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW FVS
ERW S
ADV200 • Parameters List
Menu PAR Description
27.8.1 222 Theta src
27.8.2 226 Flux ref src
27.8 - SERVICE/CURRENTS
27.8.1 80 Phase current U
27.8.2 82 Phase current V
27.8.3 84 Phase current W
27.8.4 90 Phase current RMS U
27.8.5 92 Phase current RMS V
27.8.6 94 Phase current RMS W
A
A
A
A
A
A
UM Type FB BIT Def
LINK 16/32BIT
L_THETASEL
LINK 16/32BIT
L_FLUXREFSEL
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Min
220
224
Max
0
0
Acc Mod
16384 ERW
16384 ERW
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
FVS
ADV200 • Parameters List
265
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Menu PAR Description UM
Parameters not present on menu
- 220 Theta ref mon
224 Flux ref mon
262 Motor speed nofilter
362 Drive overload trip
366 Drive overload 80%
626 Ramp ref out mon
760 Ramp out mon
764 Ramp acc state
766 Ramp dec state
934 Ref is 0
936 Ref is 0 delay
944 Speed is 0
946 Speed is 0 delay
956 Speed thr 1_2 mon
966 Set speed
976 Speed thr 3 mon
986 Current thr mon
1030 Local/remote mon
1060 Sequencer status
1062 Drive OK
1064 Drive ready
1110 Digital input E mon
1112 Digital input 1 mon
1114 Digital input 2 mon
1116 Digital input 3 mon
1118 Digital input 4 mon
1120 Digital input 5 mon
1210 Digital input 1X mon
1212 Digital input 2X mon
1214 Digital input 3X mon
1216 Digital input 4X mon
1218 Digital input 5X mon
1220 Digital input 6X mon
1222 Digital input 7X mon
1224 Digital input 8X mon
1530 Analog inp1
1580 Analog inp2
2388 Torque ref nofilter
2396 Torque nofilter
3006 Speed ratio out mon
3180 Brake control mon
3192 Brake open thr mon
3214 Motor overload trip
3262 Bres overload trip
3374 Vf catch out
3442 Powerloss rampdown
3446 Powerloss nextratio
3448 Powerloss nextactive
3480 Vdc ctrl ramp freeze
3512 Drv thr overtemp mon
3514 Mot thr overtemp mon
FF
FF
FF perc perc perc rpm
266
Type FB BIT Def
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
INT32
INT32
INT16
BIT
BIT
INT16
INT16
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
16 0
16 0
UINT16 16 0
BIT 16 0
16
16
16
16
0
0
0
0
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
16 0
16 0
0.0
0.0
16 0
16 0
16 0
16 0
16 0
16 0
16 0
16 0
16 0
16 0
16 0
16 0
BIT
FLOAT
BIT
BIT
INT32
BIT
INT32
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
FLOAT
FLOAT
INT16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
0
0
0
0
0
0.0
0.0
0
0
0
16 0
16 0
16 0
16 0
32 0
16 0
BIT
UINT32
16 0
0
UINT32 0
Acc
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ERS
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
Mod
ADV200 • Parameters List
Max
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0.0
0.0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0.0
0.0
0
1
1
1
1
Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.0
0.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.0
0
0.0
0.0
0
0
0
0
0
Menu PAR Description
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
4372 DS402 status word
4394 PFdrv status word 1
4396 PFdrv status word 2
4538 KTY84/PTC current
4708 Alm dig out mon 1
4710 Alm dig out mon 2
4712 Alm dig out mon 3
4714 Alm dig out mon 4
4770 First alarm
4780 Alarm PLC
4840 Alarm lo state
4842 Alarm hi state
5510 Digital input 9X mon
5512 Digital input10X mon
5514 Digital input11X mon
5516 Digital input12X mon
5518 Digital input13X mon
5520 Digital input14X mon
5522 Digital input15X mon
5524 Digital input16X mon
5800 FL Fwd 1 inv mon
5802 FL Fwd 2 inv mon
5804 FL Fwd 3 inv mon
5806 FL Fwd 4 inv mon
5808 FL Fwd 5 inv mon
5810 FL Fwd 6 inv mon
5812 FL Fwd 7 inv mon
5814 FL Fwd 8 inv mon
6000 Null
6002 One
6004 Speed limit state
6006 Current limit state
Type FB BIT Def
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
UINT16 16 0
UINT16 16 0
UINT16 16 0
UINT32 2
16
16
16
16
0
0
0
0
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
UINT32 16 0
UINT16 0
UINT32 32 0
UINT32 32 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
INT32
INT32
INT32
INT32
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
16BIT 0
32BIT 0
32BIT 0
32BIT 0
32BIT 0
INT32
INT32
INT32
INT32
32BIT 0
32BIT 0
32BIT 0
32BIT 0
UINT32 32 0
UINT32 32 1
BIT
BIT
16
16
0
0
UM mA
Min
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Max Acc Mod
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
65535 ER
65535 ER
65535 ER
10 ERWS
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ERW
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ADV200 • Parameters List
267
G – SELECTION LISTS
PAR Description
L_ANOUT
6000 Null
626 Ramp ref out mon
628 Ramp setpoint
760 Ramp out mon
664 Speed setpoint
260 Motor speed
262 Motor speed nofilter
2150 Encoder 1 speed
5150 Encoder 2 speed
250 Output current
252 Output voltage
254 Output frequency
256 Output power
280 Torque current ref
282 Magnet current ref
284 Torque current
286 Magnet current
2360 Torque lim Pos Inuse
2362 Torque lim Neg Inuse
2386 Torque ref %
2388 Torque ref nofilter
2394 Torque %
2396 Torque nofilter
270 DC link voltage
3006 Speed ratio out mon
3070 Droop out mon
852 Multi ref out mon
870 Mpot setpoint
894 Mpot output mon
920 Jog output mon
3104 Inertia comp mon
1500 Analog input 1 mon
1550 Analog input 2 mon
1600 Analog input 1X mon
1650 Analog input 2X mon
368 Drive overload accum
3212 Motor overload accum
3260 Bres overload accum
2232 Spd reg P gain Inuse
2234 Spd reg I gain Inuse
2246 Speed reg P factor
2248 Speed reg I factor
3446 Powerloss nextratio
4024 Fieldbus M->S1 mon
4034 Fieldbus M->S2 mon
4044 Fieldbus M->S3 mon
4054 Fieldbus M->S4 mon
4064 Fieldbus M->S5 mon
4074 Fieldbus M->S6 mon
4084 Fieldbus M->S7 mon
4094 Fieldbus M->S8 mon
4104 Fieldbus M->S9 mon
4114 Fieldbus M->S10 mon
4124 Fieldbus M->S11 mon
4134 Fieldbus M->S12 mon
4144 Fieldbus M->S13 mon
4154 Fieldbus M->S14 mon
4164 Fieldbus M->S15 mon
4174 Fieldbus M->S16 mon
3700 Pad 1
3702 Pad 2
268
Menu PAR Description
3704 Pad 3
3706 Pad 4
3708 Pad 5
3710 Pad 6
3712 Pad 7
3714 Pad 8
3716 Pad 9
3718 Pad 10
3720 Pad 11
3722 Pad 12
3724 Pad 13
3726 Pad 14
3728 Pad 15
3730 Pad 16
5008 Test gen out
5750 FL Fwd 1 mon
5752 FL Fwd 2 mon
5754 FL Fwd 3 mon
5756 FL Fwd 4 mon
5758 FL Fwd 5 mon
5760 FL Fwd 6 mon
5762 FL Fwd 7 mon
5764 FL Fwd 8 mon
5800 FL Fwd 1 inv mon
5802 FL Fwd 2 inv mon
5804 FL Fwd 3 inv mon
5806 FL Fwd 4 inv mon
5808 FL Fwd 5 inv mon
5810 FL Fwd 6 inv mon
5812 FL Fwd 7 inv mon
5814 FL Fwd 8 inv mon
4538 KTY84/PTC current
L_CMP
XXXX (1)
626 Ramp ref out mon
628 Ramp setpoint
760 Ramp out mon
664 Speed setpoint
260 Motor speed
262 Motor speed nofilter
2150 Encoder 1 speed
5150 Encoder 2 speed
250 Output current
252 Output voltage
254 Output frequency
256 Output power
280 Torque current ref
282 Magnet current ref
284 Torque current
286 Magnet current
2386 Torque ref %
2388 Torque ref nofilter
2394 Torque %
2396 Torque nofilter
270 DC link voltage
3006 Speed ratio out mon
3070 Droop out mon
852 Multi ref out mon
870 Mpot setpoint
894 Mpot output mon
920 Jog output mon
23.3.23
23.3.27
23.3.31
23.3.35
23.3.39
23.3.43
23.3.47
23.3.51
23.3.55
23.3.59
23.3.63
22.11.1
22.11.2
14.17
14.33
14.44
1.18
1.17
1.19
18.11
18.12
18.16
18.17
(*)
23.3.3
23.3.7
23.3.11
23.3.15
23.3.19
(*)
22.2.5
7.24
8.1
8.13
9.6
22.3.3
14.1
1.16
20.9
20.10
20.17
(*)
20.19
(*)
1.8
17.30
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.13
1.14
1.15
(*)
(*)
1.5
(*)
1.6
1.7
(*)
17.20
20.17
(*)
20.19
(*)
1.8
(*)
22.2.5
7.24
8.1
8.13
9.6
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
(*)
1.5
(*)
1.6
1.7
(*)
17.20
17.30
Menu
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
23.8.14
23.8.15
23.8.16
23.8.17
23.8.18
23.8.19
23.8.20
(*)
22.11.3
22.11.4
22.11.5
22.11.6
22.11.7
22.11.8
22.11.9
22.11.10
22.11.11
22.11.12
22.11.13
22.11.14
22.11.15
22.11.16
27.1.5
23.8.13
PAR Description Menu
22.11.10
22.11.11
22.11.12
22.11.13
22.11.14
22.11.15
22.11.16
23.8.13
23.8.14
23.8.15
23.8.16
23.8.17
23.8.18
23.8.19
23.8.20
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(1) the XXXX parameter changes according to the src parameter used:
23.3.39
23.3.43
23.3.47
23.3.51
23.3.55
23.3.59
23.3.63
22.11.1
22.11.2
22.11.3
22.11.4
22.11.5
22.11.6
22.11.7
22.11.8
22.11.9
14.1
14.17
14.33
14.44
1.18
1.17
1.19
23.3.3
23.3.7
23.3.11
23.3.15
23.3.19
23.3.23
23.3.27
23.3.31
23.3.35
1500 Analog input 1 mon
1550 Analog input 2 mon
1600 Analog input 1X mon
1650 Analog input 2X mon
368 Drive overload accum
3212 Motor overload accum
3260 Bres overload accum
4024 Fieldbus M->S1 mon
4034 Fieldbus M->S2 mon
4044 Fieldbus M->S3 mon
4054 Fieldbus M->S4 mon
4064 Fieldbus M->S5 mon
4074 Fieldbus M->S6 mon
4084 Fieldbus M->S7 mon
4094 Fieldbus M->S8 mon
4104 Fieldbus M->S9 mon
4114 Fieldbus M->S10 mon
4124 Fieldbus M->S11 mon
4134 Fieldbus M->S12 mon
4144 Fieldbus M->S13 mon
4154 Fieldbus M->S14 mon
4164 Fieldbus M->S15 mon
4174 Fieldbus M->S16 mon
3700 Pad 1
3702 Pad 2
3704 Pad 3
3706 Pad 4
3708 Pad 5
3710 Pad 6
3712 Pad 7
3714 Pad 8
3716 Pad 9
3718 Pad 10
3720 Pad 11
3722 Pad 12
3724 Pad 13
3726 Pad 14
3728 Pad 15
3730 Pad 16
5750 FL Fwd 1 mon
5752 FL Fwd 2 mon
5754 FL Fwd 3 mon
5756 FL Fwd 4 mon
5758 FL Fwd 5 mon
5760 FL Fwd 6 mon
5762 FL Fwd 7 mon
5764 FL Fwd 8 mon
5800 FL Fwd 1 inv mon
5802 FL Fwd 2 inv mon
5804 FL Fwd 3 inv mon
5806 FL Fwd 4 inv mon
5808 FL Fwd 5 inv mon
5810 FL Fwd 6 inv mon
5812 FL Fwd 7 inv mon
5814 FL Fwd 8 inv mon
960 Set speed ref src
(1) = 968 Dig set speed ref
3660 Compare input 1 src
10.11
ADV200 • Selection lists
PAR Description Menu PAR Description
(1) = 3650 Dig compare input 1 22.10.1
3662 Compare input 2 src
(1) = 3652 Dig compare input 2 22.10.2
L_CTRLMODE
XXXX (2)
4024 Fieldbus M->S1 mon
4034 Fieldbus M->S2 mon
4044 Fieldbus M->S3 mon
4054 Fieldbus M->S4 mon
4064 Fieldbus M->S5 mon
4074 Fieldbus M->S6 mon
4084 Fieldbus M->S7 mon
4094 Fieldbus M->S8 mon
4104 Fieldbus M->S9 mon
4114 Fieldbus M->S10 mon
4124 Fieldbus M->S11 mon
4134 Fieldbus M->S12 mon
4144 Fieldbus M->S13 mon
4154 Fieldbus M->S14 mon
4164 Fieldbus M->S15 mon
4174 Fieldbus M->S16 mon
3700 Pad 1
3702 Pad 2
3704 Pad 3
3706 Pad 4
3708 Pad 5
3710 Pad 6
3712 Pad 7
3714 Pad 8
3716 Pad 9
3718 Pad 10
3720 Pad 11
3722 Pad 12
3724 Pad 13
3726 Pad 14
3728 Pad 15
3730 Pad 16
L_DIGSEL1
23.3.3
23.3.7
23.3.11
23.3.15
23.3.19
23.3.23
23.3.27
23.3.31
23.3.35
23.3.39
23.3.43
23.3.47
23.3.51
23.3.55
23.3.59
23.3.63
22.11.1
22.11.2
22.11.3
22.11.4
22.11.5
22.11.6
22.11.7
22.11.8
22.11.9
22.11.10
22.11.11
22.11.12
22.11.13
22.11.14
22.11.15
22.11.16
(2) the XXXX parameter changes according to the src parameter used:
6200 Ctrl mode src
(2) = 556 Control mode select
6000 Null
6002 One
1110 Digital input E mon
1112 Digital input 1 mon
1114 Digital input 2 mon
1116 Digital input 3 mon
1118 Digital input 4 mon
1120 Digital input 5 mon
1210 Digital input 1X mon
1212 Digital input 2X mon
1214 Digital input 3X mon
1216 Digital input 4X mon
22.15.1
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
1218 Digital input 5X mon
1220 Digital input 6X mon
1222 Digital input 7X mon
1224 Digital input 8X mon
5510 Digital input 9X mon
5512 Digital input10X mon
5514 Digital input11X mon
5516 Digital input12X mon
5518 Digital input13X mon
5520 Digital input14X mon
5522 Digital input15X mon
5524 Digital input16X mon
1062 Drive OK
1064 Drive ready
934 Ref is 0
936 Ref is 0 delay
944 Speed is 0
946 Speed is 0 delay
956 Speed thr 1_2 mon
966 Set speed
976 Speed thr 3 mon
986 Current thr mon
1066 Enable state mon
1068 Start state mon
1070 FastStop state mon
1024 Enable cmd mon
1026 Start cmd mon
1028 FastStop cmd mon
1034 Drv interlock mon
4708 Alm dig out mon 1
4710 Alm dig out mon 2
4712 Alm dig out mon 3
4714 Alm dig out mon 4
1530 Analog inp1<thr
1580 Analog inp2<thr
362 Drive overload trip
3214 Motor overload trip
3262 Bres overload trip
366 Drive overload 80%
1048 FR start mon
1050 FR reverse mon
4454 Bit0 decomp mon
4456 Bit1 decomp mon
4458 Bit2 decomp mon
4460 Bit3 decomp mon
4462 Bit4 decomp mon
4464 Bit5 decomp mon
4466 Bit6 decomp mon
4468 Bit7 decomp mon
4470 Bit8 decomp mon
4472 Bit9 decomp mon
4474 Bit10 decomp mon
4476 Bit11 decomp mon
4478 Bit12 decomp mon
4480 Bit13 decomp mon
4482 Bit14 decomp mon
4484 Bit15 decomp mon
3700 Pad 1
3702 Pad 2
3704 Pad 3
3706 Pad 4
3708 Pad 5
3710 Pad 6
ADV200 • Selection lists
PAR Description
3712 Pad 7
3714 Pad 8
3716 Pad 9
3718 Pad 10
3720 Pad 11
3722 Pad 12
3724 Pad 13
3726 Pad 14
3728 Pad 15
3730 Pad 16
6004 Speed limit state
6006 Current limit state
764 Ramp acc state
766 Ramp dec state
1030 Local/remote mon
4780 Alarm PLC
3676 Compare output
3442 Powerloss rampdown
3448 Powerloss nextactive
3180 Brake control mon
3304 Par set select mon
5720 Sync slave mon
3512 Drv thr overtemp mon
3514 Mot thr overtemp mon
L_DIGSEL2
6000 Null
6002 One
1110 Digital input E mon
1112 Digital input 1 mon
1114 Digital input 2 mon
1116 Digital input 3 mon
1118 Digital input 4 mon
1120 Digital input 5 mon
1210 Digital input 1X mon
1212 Digital input 2X mon
1214 Digital input 3X mon
1216 Digital input 4X mon
1218 Digital input 5X mon
1220 Digital input 6X mon
1222 Digital input 7X mon
1224 Digital input 8X mon
5510 Digital input 9X mon
5512 Digital input10X mon
5514 Digital input11X mon
5516 Digital input12X mon
5518 Digital input13X mon
5520 Digital input14X mon
5522 Digital input15X mon
5524 Digital input16X mon
4454 Bit0 decomp mon
4456 Bit1 decomp mon
4458 Bit2 decomp mon
4460 Bit3 decomp mon
4462 Bit4 decomp mon
4464 Bit5 decomp mon
4466 Bit6 decomp mon
4468 Bit7 decomp mon
4470 Bit8 decomp mon
4472 Bit9 decomp mon
4474 Bit10 decomp mon
4476 Bit11 decomp mon
Menu
23.6.10
23.6.11
23.6.12
23.6.13
23.6.14
23.6.15
23.6.16
23.6.17
23.6.18
22.11.1
22.11.2
22.11.3
22.11.4
22.11.5
22.11.6
11.21
23.6.3
23.6.4
23.6.5
23.6.6
23.6.7
23.6.8
23.6.9
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
11.20
1.22
11.13
11.14
11.15
11.24
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
1.20
1.21
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
Menu
22.11.7
22.11.8
22.11.9
22.11.10
22.11.11
22.11.12
22.11.13
22.11.14
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
22.11.15
22.11.16
(*)
(*)
22.10.8
(*)
(*)
(*)
22.7.3
23.8.29
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
23.6.3
23.6.4
23.6.5
23.6.6
23.6.7
23.6.8
23.6.9
23.6.10
23.6.11
23.6.12
23.6.13
23.6.14
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
269
PAR Description
4478 Bit12 decomp mon
4480 Bit13 decomp mon
4482 Bit14 decomp mon
4484 Bit15 decomp mon
3700 Pad 1
3702 Pad 2
3704 Pad 3
3706 Pad 4
3708 Pad 5
3710 Pad 6
3712 Pad 7
3714 Pad 8
3716 Pad 9
3718 Pad 10
3720 Pad 11
3722 Pad 12
3724 Pad 13
3726 Pad 14
3728 Pad 15
3730 Pad 16
1530 Analog inp1<thr
1580 Analog inp2<thr
1048 FR start mon
1050 FR reverse mon
3676 Compare output
3480 Vdc ctrl ramp freeze
L_DIGSEL3
XXXX (3)
6000 Null
6002 One
1110 Digital input E mon
1112 Digital input 1 mon
1114 Digital input 2 mon
1116 Digital input 3 mon
1118 Digital input 4 mon
1120 Digital input 5 mon
1210 Digital input 1X mon
1212 Digital input 2X mon
1214 Digital input 3X mon
1216 Digital input 4X mon
1218 Digital input 5X mon
1220 Digital input 6X mon
1222 Digital input 7X mon
1224 Digital input 8X mon
5510 Digital input 9X mon
5512 Digital input10X mon
5514 Digital input11X mon
5516 Digital input12X mon
5518 Digital input13X mon
5520 Digital input14X mon
5522 Digital input15X mon
5524 Digital input16X mon
1062 Drive OK
1064 Drive ready
934 Ref is 0
936 Ref is 0 delay
944 Speed is 0
946 Speed is 0 delay
956 Speed thr 1_2 mon
966 Set speed
270
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
Menu
23.6.15
23.6.16
23.6.17
23.6.18
22.11.1
22.11.2
22.11.3
22.11.4
22.11.5
22.11.6
22.11.7
22.11.8
22.11.9
22.11.10
22.11.11
22.11.12
22.11.13
22.11.14
22.11.15
22.11.16
(*)
(*)
11.20
11.21
22.10.8
(*)
PAR Description Menu PAR Description
976 Speed thr 3 mon
986 Current thr mon
1066 Enable state mon
1068 Start state mon
1070 FastStop state mon
1024 Enable cmd mon
1026 Start cmd mon
1028 FastStop cmd mon
1034 Drv interlock mon
4708 Alm dig out mon 1
4710 Alm dig out mon 2
4712 Alm dig out mon 3
4714 Alm dig out mon 4
1530 Analog inp1<thr
1580 Analog inp2<thr
362 Drive overload trip
3214 Motor overload trip
3262 Bres overload trip
366 Drive overload 80%
1048 FR start mon
1050 FR reverse mon
4454 Bit0 decomp mon
4456 Bit1 decomp mon
4458 Bit2 decomp mon
4460 Bit3 decomp mon
4462 Bit4 decomp mon
4464 Bit5 decomp mon
4466 Bit6 decomp mon
4468 Bit7 decomp mon
4470 Bit8 decomp mon
4472 Bit9 decomp mon
4474 Bit10 decomp mon
4476 Bit11 decomp mon
4478 Bit12 decomp mon
4480 Bit13 decomp mon
4482 Bit14 decomp mon
4484 Bit15 decomp mon
3700 Pad 1
3702 Pad 2
3704 Pad 3
3706 Pad 4
3708 Pad 5
3710 Pad 6
3712 Pad 7
3714 Pad 8
3716 Pad 9
3718 Pad 10
3720 Pad 11
3722 Pad 12
3724 Pad 13
3726 Pad 14
3728 Pad 15
3730 Pad 16
6004 Speed limit state
6006 Current limit state
764 Ramp acc state
22.11.12
22.11.13
22.11.14
22.11.15
22.11.16
(*)
(*)
(*)
766 Ramp dec state
4780 Alarm PLC
3676 Compare output
5720 Sync slave mon
(*)
(*)
22.10.8
23.8.29
(3) the XXXX parameter changes according to the src parameter used:
23.6.14
23.6.15
23.6.16
23.6.17
23.6.18
22.11.1
22.11.2
22.11.3
22.11.4
22.11.5
22.11.6
22.11.7
22.11.8
22.11.9
22.11.10
22.11.11
(*)
(*)
(*)
11.20
11.21
23.6.3
23.6.4
23.6.5
23.6.6
23.6.7
23.6.8
23.6.9
23.6.10
23.6.11
23.6.12
23.6.13
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
11.24
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
1.20
1.21
1.22
11.13
11.14
11.15
1014 Local/remote src
(3) = 1012 Dig local/remote
L_FBS2M
XXXX (4)
6000 Null
6002 One
626 Ramp ref out mon
628 Ramp setpoint
760 Ramp out mon
664 Speed setpoint
260 Motor speed
262 Motor speed nofilter
2150 Encoder 1 speed
5150 Encoder 2 speed
250 Output current
252 Output voltage
254 Output frequency
280 Torque current ref
282 Magnet current ref
284 Torque current
286 Magnet current
2360 Torque lim Pos Inuse
2362 Torque lim Neg Inuse
2386 Torque ref %
2388 Torque ref nofilter
2394 Torque %
2396 Torque nofilter
270 DC link voltage
2162 Encoder 1 position
2154 E1 Virtual position
2156 E1 Revolutions
3006 Speed ratio out mon
3070 Droop out mon
852 Multi ref out mon
870 Mpot setpoint
894 Mpot output mon
920 Jog output mon
3104 Inertia comp mon
1500 Analog input 1 mon
1550 Analog input 2 mon
1600 Analog input 1X mon
1650 Analog input 2X mon
368 Drive overload accum
3212 Motor overload accum
3260 Bres overload accum
272 Heatsink temperature
1060 Sequencer status
4432 Word comp mon
3446 Powerloss nextratio
4372 DS402 status word
4394 PFdrv status word 1
4396 PFdrv status word 2
2246 Speed reg P factor
2248 Speed reg I factor
4024 Fieldbus M->S1 mon
4034 Fieldbus M->S2 mon
4044 Fieldbus M->S3 mon
4054 Fieldbus M->S4 mon
4064 Fieldbus M->S5 mon
4074 Fieldbus M->S6 mon
Menu
11.7
9.6
22.3.3
14.1
14.17
14.33
14.44
1.18
1.17
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
1.19
1.9
(*)
23.5.17
18.16
18.17
23.3.3
23.3.7
23.3.11
23.3.15
23.3.19
23.3.23
17.21
27.3.2
27.3.3
(*)
22.2.5
7.24
8.1
8.13
1.16
20.9
20.10
20.17
(*)
20.19
(*)
1.8
17.20
17.30
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.13
1.14
1.15
(*)
1.6
1.7
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
1.5
ADV200 • Selection lists
PAR Description Menu PAR Description Menu
4084 Fieldbus M->S7 mon
4094 Fieldbus M->S8 mon
4104 Fieldbus M->S9 mon
4114 Fieldbus M->S10 mon
4124 Fieldbus M->S11 mon
4134 Fieldbus M->S12 mon
4144 Fieldbus M->S13 mon
4154 Fieldbus M->S14 mon
4164 Fieldbus M->S15 mon
4174 Fieldbus M->S16 mon
3700 Pad 1
3702 Pad 2
3704 Pad 3
3706 Pad 4
3708 Pad 5
3710 Pad 6
3712 Pad 7
3714 Pad 8
3716 Pad 9
3718 Pad 10
3720 Pad 11
3722 Pad 12
3724 Pad 13
3726 Pad 14
3728 Pad 15
3730 Pad 16
4770 First alarm
4840 Alarm lo state
4842 Alarm hi state
1100 Digital input mon
1200 Digital input X mon
5008 Test gen out
5750 FL Fwd 1 mon
5752 FL Fwd 2 mon
5754 FL Fwd 3 mon
5756 FL Fwd 4 mon
5758 FL Fwd 5 mon
5760 FL Fwd 6 mon
5762 FL Fwd 7 mon
5764 FL Fwd 8 mon
5800 FL Fwd 1 inv mon
5802 FL Fwd 2 inv mon
5804 FL Fwd 3 inv mon
5806 FL Fwd 4 inv mon
5808 FL Fwd 5 inv mon
5810 FL Fwd 6 inv mon
5812 FL Fwd 7 inv mon
5814 FL Fwd 8 inv mon
5850 FL Rev 1 mon
5852 FL Rev 2 mon
5854 FL Rev 3 mon
5856 FL Rev 4 mon
22.11.7
22.11.8
22.11.9
22.11.10
22.11.11
22.11.12
22.11.13
22.11.14
22.11.15
22.11.16
(*)
(*)
(*)
1.23
1.25
27.1.5
23.3.27
23.3.31
23.3.35
23.3.39
23.3.43
23.3.47
23.3.51
23.3.55
23.3.59
23.3.63
22.11.1
22.11.2
22.11.3
22.11.4
22.11.5
22.11.6
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
23.8.13
23.8.14
23.8.15
23.8.16
23.8.17
23.8.18
23.8.19
23.8.20
23.8.21
23.8.22
23.8.23
23.8.24
(4) = 4034 Fieldbus M->S2 mon 23.3.7
L_FLUXREFSEL
5750 FL Fwd 1 mon
5752 FL Fwd 2 mon
5754 FL Fwd 3 mon
5756 FL Fwd 4 mon
L_FLWORD
(4) the XXXX parameter changes according to the src parameter used:
4340 DS402 cw src
(4) = 4024 Fieldbus M->S1 mon 23.3.3
4346 PFdrv cw 1 src
(4) = 4024 Fieldbus M->S1 mon 23.3.3
4348 PFdrv cw 2 src
6000 Null
6002 One
626 Ramp ref out mon
628 Ramp setpoint
760 Ramp out mon
664 Speed setpoint
260 Motor speed
262 Motor speed nofilter
2150 Encoder 1 speed
5150 Encoder 2 speed
250 Output current
252 Output voltage
254 Output frequency
280 Torque current ref
282 Magnet current ref
284 Torque current
286 Magnet current
2360 Torque lim Pos Inuse
2362 Torque lim Neg Inuse
2386 Torque ref %
2388 Torque ref nofilter
2394 Torque %
2396 Torque nofilter
270 DC link voltage
2162 Encoder 1 position
2154 E1 Virtual position
2156 E1 Revolutions
3006 Speed ratio out mon
3070 Droop out mon
852 Multi ref out mon
870 Mpot setpoint
894 Mpot output mon
920 Jog output mon
3104 Inertia comp mon
1500 Analog input 1 mon
1550 Analog input 2 mon
1600 Analog input 1X mon
1650 Analog input 2X mon
368 Drive overload accum
3212 Motor overload accum
3260 Bres overload accum
272 Heatsink temperature
1060 Sequencer status
4432 Word comp mon
3446 Powerloss nextratio
4372 DS402 status word
4394 PFdrv status word 1
4396 PFdrv status word 2
2246 Speed reg P factor
2248 Speed reg I factor
4024 Fieldbus M->S1 mon
23.8.13
23.8.14
23.8.15
23.8.16
17.21
27.3.2
27.3.3
(*)
22.2.5
7.24
8.1
8.13
1.16
20.9
20.10
20.17
(*)
20.19
(*)
1.8
17.20
17.30
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.13
1.14
1.15
(*)
1.6
1.7
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
1.5
9.6
22.3.3
14.1
14.17
14.33
14.44
1.18
1.17
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
1.19
1.9
(*)
23.5.17
18.16
18.17
23.3.3
PAR Description
4034 Fieldbus M->S2 mon
4044 Fieldbus M->S3 mon
4054 Fieldbus M->S4 mon
4064 Fieldbus M->S5 mon
4074 Fieldbus M->S6 mon
4084 Fieldbus M->S7 mon
4094 Fieldbus M->S8 mon
4104 Fieldbus M->S9 mon
4114 Fieldbus M->S10 mon
4124 Fieldbus M->S11 mon
4134 Fieldbus M->S12 mon
4144 Fieldbus M->S13 mon
4154 Fieldbus M->S14 mon
4164 Fieldbus M->S15 mon
4174 Fieldbus M->S16 mon
3700 Pad 1
3702 Pad 2
3704 Pad 3
3706 Pad 4
3708 Pad 5
3710 Pad 6
3712 Pad 7
3714 Pad 8
3716 Pad 9
3718 Pad 10
3720 Pad 11
3722 Pad 12
3724 Pad 13
3726 Pad 14
3728 Pad 15
3730 Pad 16
4770 First alarm
4840 Alarm lo state
4842 Alarm hi state
1100 Digital input mon
1200 Digital input X mon
5008 Test gen out
5750 FL Fwd 1 mon
5752 FL Fwd 2 mon
5754 FL Fwd 3 mon
5756 FL Fwd 4 mon
5758 FL Fwd 5 mon
5760 FL Fwd 6 mon
5762 FL Fwd 7 mon
5764 FL Fwd 8 mon
5800 FL Fwd 1 inv mon
5802 FL Fwd 2 inv mon
5804 FL Fwd 3 inv mon
5806 FL Fwd 4 inv mon
5808 FL Fwd 5 inv mon
5810 FL Fwd 6 inv mon
5812 FL Fwd 7 inv mon
5814 FL Fwd 8 inv mon
5850 FL Rev 1 mon
5852 FL Rev 2 mon
5854 FL Rev 3 mon
5856 FL Rev 4 mon
220 Theta ref mon
224 Flux ref mon
L_LIM
ADV200 • Selection lists
Menu
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
23.8.21
23.8.22
23.8.23
23.8.24
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
1.23
1.25
27.1.5
23.8.13
23.8.14
23.8.15
23.8.16
23.8.17
23.8.18
23.8.19
23.8.20
(*)
(*)
(*)
22.11.2
22.11.3
22.11.4
22.11.5
22.11.6
22.11.7
22.11.8
22.11.9
22.11.10
22.11.11
22.11.12
22.11.13
22.11.14
22.11.15
22.11.16
(*)
23.3.7
23.3.11
23.3.15
23.3.19
23.3.23
23.3.27
23.3.31
23.3.35
23.3.39
23.3.43
23.3.47
23.3.51
23.3.55
23.3.59
23.3.63
22.11.1
271
PAR Description
6000 Null
1500 Analog input 1 mon
1550 Analog input 2 mon
2380 Dig torque ref 1
1600 Analog input 1X mon
1650 Analog input 2X mon
4024 Fieldbus M->S1 mon
4034 Fieldbus M->S2 mon
4044 Fieldbus M->S3 mon
4054 Fieldbus M->S4 mon
4064 Fieldbus M->S5 mon
4074 Fieldbus M->S6 mon
4084 Fieldbus M->S7 mon
4094 Fieldbus M->S8 mon
4104 Fieldbus M->S9 mon
4114 Fieldbus M->S10 mon
4124 Fieldbus M->S11 mon
4134 Fieldbus M->S12 mon
4144 Fieldbus M->S13 mon
4154 Fieldbus M->S14 mon
4164 Fieldbus M->S15 mon
4174 Fieldbus M->S16 mon
3700 Pad 1
3702 Pad 2
3704 Pad 3
3706 Pad 4
3708 Pad 5
3710 Pad 6
3712 Pad 7
3714 Pad 8
3716 Pad 9
3718 Pad 10
3720 Pad 11
3722 Pad 12
3724 Pad 13
3726 Pad 14
3728 Pad 15
3730 Pad 16
5008 Test gen out
5750 FL Fwd 1 mon
5752 FL Fwd 2 mon
5754 FL Fwd 3 mon
5756 FL Fwd 4 mon
5758 FL Fwd 5 mon
5760 FL Fwd 6 mon
5762 FL Fwd 7 mon
5764 FL Fwd 8 mon
5800 FL Fwd 1 inv mon
5802 FL Fwd 2 inv mon
5804 FL Fwd 3 inv mon
5806 FL Fwd 4 inv mon
5808 FL Fwd 5 inv mon
5810 FL Fwd 6 inv mon
5812 FL Fwd 7 inv mon
5814 FL Fwd 8 inv mon
L_MLTREF
XXXX (5)
1500 Analog input 1 mon
1550 Analog input 2 mon
852 Multi ref out mon
Menu
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
22.11.11
22.11.12
22.11.13
22.11.14
22.11.15
22.11.16
27.1.5
23.8.13
23.8.14
23.8.15
23.8.16
23.8.17
23.8.18
23.8.19
23.8.20
(*)
23.3.43
23.3.47
23.3.51
23.3.55
23.3.59
23.3.63
22.11.1
22.11.2
22.11.3
22.11.4
22.11.5
22.11.6
22.11.7
22.11.8
22.11.9
22.11.10
(*)
14.1
14.17
20.12
14.33
14.44
23.3.3
23.3.7
23.3.11
23.3.15
23.3.19
23.3.23
23.3.27
23.3.31
23.3.35
23.3.39
14.1
14.17
7.24
PAR Description Menu PAR Description
894 Mpot output mon
2150 Encoder 1 speed
5150 Encoder 2 speed
1600 Analog input 1X mon
1650 Analog input 2X mon
3070 Droop out mon
4024 Fieldbus M->S1 mon
4034 Fieldbus M->S2 mon
4044 Fieldbus M->S3 mon
4054 Fieldbus M->S4 mon
4064 Fieldbus M->S5 mon
4074 Fieldbus M->S6 mon
4084 Fieldbus M->S7 mon
4094 Fieldbus M->S8 mon
4104 Fieldbus M->S9 mon
4114 Fieldbus M->S10 mon
4124 Fieldbus M->S11 mon
4134 Fieldbus M->S12 mon
4144 Fieldbus M->S13 mon
4154 Fieldbus M->S14 mon
4164 Fieldbus M->S15 mon
4174 Fieldbus M->S16 mon
3700 Pad 1
3702 Pad 2
3704 Pad 3
3706 Pad 4
3708 Pad 5
3710 Pad 6
3712 Pad 7
3714 Pad 8
3716 Pad 9
3718 Pad 10
3720 Pad 11
3722 Pad 12
3724 Pad 13
3726 Pad 14
3728 Pad 15
3730 Pad 16
5008 Test gen out
5750 FL Fwd 1 mon
5752 FL Fwd 2 mon
5754 FL Fwd 3 mon
5756 FL Fwd 4 mon
5758 FL Fwd 5 mon
5760 FL Fwd 6 mon
5762 FL Fwd 7 mon
5764 FL Fwd 8 mon
5800 FL Fwd 1 inv mon
5802 FL Fwd 2 inv mon
5804 FL Fwd 3 inv mon
5806 FL Fwd 4 inv mon
5808 FL Fwd 5 inv mon
5810 FL Fwd 6 inv mon
5812 FL Fwd 7 inv mon
5814 FL Fwd 8 inv mon
22.11.11
22.11.12
22.11.13
22.11.14
22.11.15
22.11.16
27.1.5
23.8.13
23.8.14
23.8.15
23.8.16
23.8.17
23.8.18
23.8.19
23.8.20
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
23.3.43
23.3.47
23.3.51
23.3.55
23.3.59
23.3.63
22.11.1
22.11.2
22.11.3
22.11.4
22.11.5
22.11.6
22.11.7
22.11.8
22.11.9
22.11.10
8.13
17.20
17.30
14.33
14.44
22.2.5
23.3.3
23.3.7
23.3.11
23.3.15
23.3.19
23.3.23
23.3.27
23.3.31
23.3.35
23.3.39
(5) = 224 Flux ref mon
610 Ramp ref 1 src
(5) = 600 Dig ramp ref 1
612 Ramp ref 2 src
(5) = 602 Dig ramp ref 2
614 Ramp ref 3 src
(5) = 604 Dig ramp ref 3
650 Speed ref 1 src
(5) = 640 Dig speed ref 1
652 Speed ref 2 src
(5) = 642 Dig speed ref 2
832 Multi ref 0 src
(5) = 800 Multi reference 0
834 Multi ref 1 src
(5) = 802 Multi reference 1
L_NLIM
(4) the XXXX parameter changes according to the src parameter used:
222 Theta ref src
(5) = 220 Theta ref mon
226 Flux ref src
(*)
6000 Null
1500 Analog input 1 mon
1550 Analog input 2 mon
2380 Dig torque ref 1
2374 Torque limit neg
1600 Analog input 1X mon
1650 Analog input 2X mon
4024 Fieldbus M->S1 mon
4034 Fieldbus M->S2 mon
4044 Fieldbus M->S3 mon
4054 Fieldbus M->S4 mon
4064 Fieldbus M->S5 mon
4074 Fieldbus M->S6 mon
4084 Fieldbus M->S7 mon
4094 Fieldbus M->S8 mon
4104 Fieldbus M->S9 mon
4114 Fieldbus M->S10 mon
4124 Fieldbus M->S11 mon
4134 Fieldbus M->S12 mon
4144 Fieldbus M->S13 mon
4154 Fieldbus M->S14 mon
4164 Fieldbus M->S15 mon
4174 Fieldbus M->S16 mon
3700 Pad 1
3702 Pad 2
3704 Pad 3
3706 Pad 4
3708 Pad 5
3710 Pad 6
3712 Pad 7
3714 Pad 8
3716 Pad 9
3718 Pad 10
3720 Pad 11
3722 Pad 12
3724 Pad 13
3726 Pad 14
272
Menu
(*)
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.15
5.16
7.1
7.2
23.3.39
23.3.43
23.3.47
23.3.51
23.3.55
23.3.59
23.3.63
22.11.1
22.11.2
22.11.3
22.11.4
22.11.5
22.11.6
22.11.7
22.11.8
22.11.9
22.11.10
22.11.11
22.11.12
22.11.13
22.11.14
(*)
14.1
14.17
20.12
20.7
14.33
14.44
23.3.3
23.3.7
23.3.11
23.3.15
23.3.19
23.3.23
23.3.27
23.3.31
23.3.35
ADV200 • Selection lists
PAR Description
3728 Pad 15
3730 Pad 16
5008 Test gen out
5750 FL Fwd 1 mon
5752 FL Fwd 2 mon
5754 FL Fwd 3 mon
5756 FL Fwd 4 mon
5758 FL Fwd 5 mon
5760 FL Fwd 6 mon
5762 FL Fwd 7 mon
5764 FL Fwd 8 mon
5800 FL Fwd 1 inv mon
5802 FL Fwd 2 inv mon
5804 FL Fwd 3 inv mon
5806 FL Fwd 4 inv mon
5808 FL Fwd 5 inv mon
5810 FL Fwd 6 inv mon
5812 FL Fwd 7 inv mon
5814 FL Fwd 8 inv mon
L_PLIM
6000 Null
1500 Analog input 1 mon
1550 Analog input 2 mon
2380 Dig torque ref 1
2372 Torque limit pos
1600 Analog input 1X mon
1650 Analog input 2X mon
4024 Fieldbus M->S1 mon
4034 Fieldbus M->S2 mon
4044 Fieldbus M->S3 mon
4054 Fieldbus M->S4 mon
4064 Fieldbus M->S5 mon
4074 Fieldbus M->S6 mon
4084 Fieldbus M->S7 mon
4094 Fieldbus M->S8 mon
4104 Fieldbus M->S9 mon
4114 Fieldbus M->S10 mon
4124 Fieldbus M->S11 mon
4134 Fieldbus M->S12 mon
4144 Fieldbus M->S13 mon
4154 Fieldbus M->S14 mon
4164 Fieldbus M->S15 mon
4174 Fieldbus M->S16 mon
3700 Pad 1
3702 Pad 2
3704 Pad 3
3706 Pad 4
3708 Pad 5
3710 Pad 6
3712 Pad 7
3714 Pad 8
3716 Pad 9
3718 Pad 10
3720 Pad 11
3722 Pad 12
3724 Pad 13
3726 Pad 14
3728 Pad 15
3730 Pad 16
5008 Test gen out
23.3.39
23.3.43
23.3.47
23.3.51
23.3.55
23.3.59
23.3.63
22.11.1
22.11.2
22.11.3
22.11.4
22.11.5
22.11.6
22.11.7
22.11.8
22.11.9
(*)
14.1
14.17
20.12
20.6
14.33
14.44
23.3.3
23.3.7
23.3.11
23.3.15
23.3.19
23.3.23
23.3.27
23.3.31
23.3.35
22.11.10
22.11.11
22.11.12
22.11.13
22.11.14
22.11.15
22.11.16
27.1.5
Menu
(*)
(*)
(*)
22.11.15
22.11.16
27.1.5
23.8.13
23.8.14
23.8.15
23.8.16
23.8.17
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
23.8.18
23.8.19
23.8.20
(*)
PAR Description
5750 FL Fwd 1 mon
5752 FL Fwd 2 mon
5754 FL Fwd 3 mon
5756 FL Fwd 4 mon
5758 FL Fwd 5 mon
5760 FL Fwd 6 mon
5762 FL Fwd 7 mon
5764 FL Fwd 8 mon
5800 FL Fwd 1 inv mon
5802 FL Fwd 2 inv mon
5804 FL Fwd 3 inv mon
5806 FL Fwd 4 inv mon
5808 FL Fwd 5 inv mon
5810 FL Fwd 6 inv mon
5812 FL Fwd 7 inv mon
5814 FL Fwd 8 inv mon
L_REF
1500 Analog input 1 mon
1550 Analog input 2 mon
626 Ramp ref out mon
664 Speed setpoint
262 Motor speed nofilter
2150 Encoder 1 speed
5150 Encoder 2 speed
1600 Analog input 1X mon
1650 Analog input 2X mon
4024 Fieldbus M->S1 mon
4034 Fieldbus M->S2 mon
4044 Fieldbus M->S3 mon
4054 Fieldbus M->S4 mon
4064 Fieldbus M->S5 mon
4074 Fieldbus M->S6 mon
4084 Fieldbus M->S7 mon
4094 Fieldbus M->S8 mon
4104 Fieldbus M->S9 mon
4114 Fieldbus M->S10 mon
4124 Fieldbus M->S11 mon
4134 Fieldbus M->S12 mon
4144 Fieldbus M->S13 mon
4154 Fieldbus M->S14 mon
4164 Fieldbus M->S15 mon
4174 Fieldbus M->S16 mon
3700 Pad 1
3702 Pad 2
3704 Pad 3
3706 Pad 4
3708 Pad 5
3710 Pad 6
3712 Pad 7
3714 Pad 8
3716 Pad 9
3718 Pad 10
3720 Pad 11
3722 Pad 12
3724 Pad 13
3726 Pad 14
3728 Pad 15
3730 Pad 16
5008 Test gen out
5750 FL Fwd 1 mon
ADV200 • Selection lists
Menu
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
23.8.13
23.8.14
23.8.15
23.8.16
23.8.17
23.8.18
23.8.19
23.8.20
PAR Description
5752 FL Fwd 2 mon
5754 FL Fwd 3 mon
5756 FL Fwd 4 mon
5758 FL Fwd 5 mon
5760 FL Fwd 6 mon
5762 FL Fwd 7 mon
5764 FL Fwd 8 mon
5800 FL Fwd 1 inv mon
5802 FL Fwd 2 inv mon
5804 FL Fwd 3 inv mon
5806 FL Fwd 4 inv mon
5808 FL Fwd 5 inv mon
5810 FL Fwd 6 inv mon
5812 FL Fwd 7 inv mon
5814 FL Fwd 8 inv mon
L_SCOPE
6000 Null
23.3.31
23.3.35
23.3.39
23.3.43
23.3.47
23.3.51
23.3.55
23.3.59
23.3.63
22.11.1
22.11.2
22.11.3
22.11.4
22.11.5
22.11.6
22.11.7
14.1
14.17
(*)
1.6
(*)
17.20
17.30
14.33
14.44
23.3.3
23.3.7
23.3.11
23.3.15
23.3.19
23.3.23
23.3.27
22.11.8
22.11.9
22.11.10
22.11.11
22.11.12
22.11.13
22.11.14
22.11.15
22.11.16
27.1.5
23.8.13
L_TCREF
XXXX (6)
1500 Analog input 1 mon
1550 Analog input 2 mon
1600 Analog input 1X mon
1650 Analog input 2X mon
4024 Fieldbus M->S1 mon
4034 Fieldbus M->S2 mon
4044 Fieldbus M->S3 mon
4054 Fieldbus M->S4 mon
4064 Fieldbus M->S5 mon
4074 Fieldbus M->S6 mon
4084 Fieldbus M->S7 mon
4094 Fieldbus M->S8 mon
4104 Fieldbus M->S9 mon
4114 Fieldbus M->S10 mon
4124 Fieldbus M->S11 mon
4134 Fieldbus M->S12 mon
4144 Fieldbus M->S13 mon
4154 Fieldbus M->S14 mon
4164 Fieldbus M->S15 mon
4174 Fieldbus M->S16 mon
3700 Pad 1
3702 Pad 2
3704 Pad 3
3706 Pad 4
3708 Pad 5
3710 Pad 6
3712 Pad 7
3714 Pad 8
3716 Pad 9
3718 Pad 10
3720 Pad 11
3722 Pad 12
3724 Pad 13
3726 Pad 14
3728 Pad 15
3730 Pad 16
6000 Null
5008 Test gen out
5750 FL Fwd 1 mon
Menu
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
23.8.14
23.8.15
23.8.16
23.8.17
23.8.18
23.8.19
23.8.20
(*)
(*)
23.3.51
23.3.55
23.3.59
23.3.63
22.11.1
22.11.2
22.11.3
22.11.4
22.11.5
22.11.6
22.11.7
22.11.8
22.11.9
22.11.10
22.11.11
22.11.12
14.1
14.17
14.33
14.44
23.3.3
23.3.7
23.3.11
23.3.15
23.3.19
23.3.23
23.3.27
23.3.31
23.3.35
23.3.39
23.3.43
23.3.47
22.11.13
22.11.14
22.11.15
22.11.16
(*)
27.1.5
23.8.13
273
PAR Description Menu PAR Description Menu PAR Description Menu
5752 FL Fwd 2 mon
5754 FL Fwd 3 mon
5756 FL Fwd 4 mon
5758 FL Fwd 5 mon
5760 FL Fwd 6 mon
5762 FL Fwd 7 mon
5764 FL Fwd 8 mon
5800 FL Fwd 1 inv mon
5802 FL Fwd 2 inv mon
5804 FL Fwd 3 inv mon
5806 FL Fwd 4 inv mon
5808 FL Fwd 5 inv mon
5810 FL Fwd 6 inv mon
5812 FL Fwd 7 inv mon
5814 FL Fwd 8 inv mon
L_THETASEL
L_VREF
23.8.14
23.8.15
23.8.16
23.8.17
23.8.18
23.8.19
23.8.20
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(6) the XXXX parameter changes according to the src parameter used:
3186 Brake open thr src
(6) = 3184 Brake open thr
L_TEMPCTRL
6000 Null
272 Heatsink temperature
290 Motor temperature
1610 An inp 1X temp mon
1660 An inp 2X temp mon
3700 Pad 1
3702 Pad 2
3704 Pad 3
3706 Pad 4
3708 Pad 5
3710 Pad 6
3712 Pad 7
3714 Pad 8
3716 Pad 9
3718 Pad 10
3720 Pad 11
3722 Pad 12
3724 Pad 13
3726 Pad 14
3728 Pad 15
3730 Pad 16
5750 FL Fwd 1 mon
5752 FL Fwd 2 mon
5754 FL Fwd 3 mon
5756 FL Fwd 4 mon
22.13.8
(*)
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
22.11.1
22.11.2
22.11.3
22.11.4
22.11.5
22.11.6
22.11.7
22.11.8
22.11.9
22.11.10
22.11.11
22.11.12
22.11.13
22.11.14
22.11.15
22.11.16
23.8.13
23.8.14
23.8.15
23.8.16
23.3.63
22.11.1
22.11.2
22.11.3
22.11.4
22.11.5
22.11.6
22.11.7
22.11.8
22.11.9
22.11.10
22.11.11
22.11.12
22.11.13
22.11.14
22.11.15
14.44
23.3.3
23.3.7
23.3.11
23.3.15
23.3.19
23.3.23
23.3.27
23.3.31
23.3.35
23.3.39
23.3.43
23.3.47
23.3.51
23.3.55
23.3.59
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
22.11.16
(*)
27.1.5
23.8.13
23.8.14
23.8.15
23.8.16
23.8.17
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
23.8.18
23.8.19
23.8.20
(*)
1650 Analog input 2X mon
4024 Fieldbus M->S1 mon
4034 Fieldbus M->S2 mon
4044 Fieldbus M->S3 mon
4054 Fieldbus M->S4 mon
4064 Fieldbus M->S5 mon
4074 Fieldbus M->S6 mon
4084 Fieldbus M->S7 mon
4094 Fieldbus M->S8 mon
4104 Fieldbus M->S9 mon
4114 Fieldbus M->S10 mon
4124 Fieldbus M->S11 mon
4134 Fieldbus M->S12 mon
4144 Fieldbus M->S13 mon
4154 Fieldbus M->S14 mon
4164 Fieldbus M->S15 mon
4174 Fieldbus M->S16 mon
3700 Pad 1
3702 Pad 2
3704 Pad 3
3706 Pad 4
3708 Pad 5
3710 Pad 6
3712 Pad 7
3714 Pad 8
3716 Pad 9
3718 Pad 10
3720 Pad 11
3722 Pad 12
3724 Pad 13
3726 Pad 14
3728 Pad 15
3730 Pad 16
6000 Null
5008 Test gen out
5750 FL Fwd 1 mon
5752 FL Fwd 2 mon
5754 FL Fwd 3 mon
5756 FL Fwd 4 mon
5758 FL Fwd 5 mon
5760 FL Fwd 6 mon
5762 FL Fwd 7 mon
5764 FL Fwd 8 mon
5800 FL Fwd 1 inv mon
5802 FL Fwd 2 inv mon
5804 FL Fwd 3 inv mon
5806 FL Fwd 4 inv mon
5808 FL Fwd 5 inv mon
5810 FL Fwd 6 inv mon
5812 FL Fwd 7 inv mon
5814 FL Fwd 8 inv mon
3192 Brake open thr mon
(7) the XXXX parameter changes according to the src parameter used:
2382 Torque ref 1 src
(7) = 2380 Dig torque ref 1 20.12
XXXX (6)
3104 Inertia comp mon
3374 Vf catch out
1500 Analog input 1 mon
1550 Analog input 2 mon
1600 Analog input 1X mon
22.3.3
(*)
14.1
14.17
14.33
2492 Vf scale src
(7) = 2490 Dig Vf scale
3002 Speed ratio src
21.22
(7) = 3000 Dig speed ratio
4452 Word decomp src
(8) = 4450 Dig word decomp
22.1.1
(8) the XXXX parameter changes according to the src parameter used:
23.6.1
23.3.55
23.3.59
23.3.63
22.11.1
22.11.2
22.11.3
22.11.4
22.11.5
22.11.6
22.11.7
22.11.8
22.11.9
22.11.10
22.11.11
22.11.12
22.11.13
(*)
(*)
23.5.17
23.3.3
23.3.7
23.3.11
23.3.15
23.3.19
23.3.23
23.3.27
23.3.31
23.3.35
23.3.39
23.3.43
23.3.47
23.3.51
(*)
(*)
(*)
22.11.14
22.11.15
22.11.16
23.8.13
23.8.14
23.8.15
23.8.16
23.8.17
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
23.8.18
23.8.19
23.8.20
(*)
L_WDECOMP
XXXX (8)
6000 Null
6002 One
4432 Word comp mon
4024 Fieldbus M->S1 mon
4034 Fieldbus M->S2 mon
4044 Fieldbus M->S3 mon
4054 Fieldbus M->S4 mon
4064 Fieldbus M->S5 mon
4074 Fieldbus M->S6 mon
4084 Fieldbus M->S7 mon
4094 Fieldbus M->S8 mon
4104 Fieldbus M->S9 mon
4114 Fieldbus M->S10 mon
4124 Fieldbus M->S11 mon
4134 Fieldbus M->S12 mon
4144 Fieldbus M->S13 mon
4154 Fieldbus M->S14 mon
4164 Fieldbus M->S15 mon
4174 Fieldbus M->S16 mon
3700 Pad 1
3702 Pad 2
3704 Pad 3
3706 Pad 4
3708 Pad 5
3710 Pad 6
3712 Pad 7
3714 Pad 8
3716 Pad 9
3718 Pad 10
3720 Pad 11
3722 Pad 12
3724 Pad 13
3726 Pad 14
3728 Pad 15
3730 Pad 16
5750 FL Fwd 1 mon
5752 FL Fwd 2 mon
5754 FL Fwd 3 mon
5756 FL Fwd 4 mon
5758 FL Fwd 5 mon
5760 FL Fwd 6 mon
5762 FL Fwd 7 mon
5764 FL Fwd 8 mon
5800 FL Fwd 1 inv mon
5802 FL Fwd 2 inv mon
5804 FL Fwd 3 inv mon
5806 FL Fwd 4 inv mon
5808 FL Fwd 5 inv mon
5810 FL Fwd 6 inv mon
5812 FL Fwd 7 inv mon
5814 FL Fwd 8 inv mon
274
ADV200 • Selection lists
PAR Description Menu
(*) Parameter not shown on the keypad.
For information see the “PARAMETERS
INCLUDED IN SELECTION LISTS BUT
NOT SHOWN ON THE KEYPAD” section.
PAR Description Menu PAR Description Menu
ADV200 • Selection lists
275
APPENDIX 1.
APP. 1.1 - Use of analog and digital I/Os from the MDPLC programming environment
• The following table shows the internal and variable system parameters for External digital input exp.
DIGITAL INPUT EXP
Name Type sysEDIBitWord DWORD sysEDIBitWordBit0 sysEDIBitWordBit1 sysEDIBitWordBit2 sysEDIBitWordBit3 sysEDIBitWordBit4 sysEDIBitWordBit5 sysEDIBitWordBit6 sysEDIBitWordBit7
SysEDIBitWordBit8
SysEDIBitWordBit9
SysEDIBitWordBit10
SysEDIBitWordBit11
SysEDIBitWordBit12
SysEDIBitWordBit13
SysEDIBitWordBit14
SysEDIBitWordBit15
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL sysExtIODigIn0 DWORD sysExtIODigIn1 DWORD
Description
Exp Digital input word
Scheme: “Digital Inputs”
Exp Digital input 0 (0..1)
Scheme: “Digital Inputs”
Exp Digital input 1 (0..1)
Scheme: “Digital Inputs”
Exp Digital input 2 (0..1)
Scheme: “Digital Inputs”
Exp Digital input 3 (0..1)
Scheme: “Digital Inputs”
Exp Digital input 4 (0..1)
Scheme: “Digital Inputs”
Exp Digital input 5 (0..1)
Scheme: “Digital Inputs”
Exp Digital input 6 (0..1)
Scheme: “Digital Inputs”
Exp Digital input 7 (0..1)
Scheme: “Digital Inputs”
Exp Digital input 8 (0..1)
Scheme: “Digital Inputs”
Exp Digital input 9 (0..1)
Scheme: “Digital Inputs”
Exp Digital input 10 (0..1)
Scheme: “Digital Inputs”
Exp Digital input 11 (0..1)
Scheme: “Digital Inputs”
Exp Digital input 12 (0..1)
Scheme: “Digital Inputs”
Exp Digital input 13 (0..1)
Scheme: “Digital Inputs”
Exp Digital input 14 (0..1)
Scheme: “Digital Inputs”
Exp Digital input 15 (0..1)
Scheme: “Digital Inputs”
External expansion digital input 0
This parameter displays the state of external inputs from 0 to 31
External expansion digital input 1
This parameter displays the state of external inputs from 32 to 63
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Unit
Null
Null
Null
Null 5402 R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R
R
R
5516
5518
5520
5522
1224
5510
5512
5514
5524
5400
1216
1218
1220
1222
1200
1210
1212
1214
• The following table shows the internal and variable system parameters for External analog input exp.
Analog input modules can have a resolution of 12 to 16 bits and scaling may vary from manufacturer to manufacturer.
E.g.:
12-bit module
Signal connected
Module configuration
-10V..+10V
0V..+10V
4..20mA
Variant 1
-2048..+2047
0..+4095
0..+32767
Variant 2
-32768..+32767
0..+2047
+6553..+32767
Variant 3
-16384..+16383
0..+32767
+3276..+16383
Variant 4
0..+65535
276
ADV200 • Appendix
16-bit module
Signal connected
Module configuration
-10V..+10V
0V..+10V
4..20mA
Variant 1
-32768..+32767
0..+65535
Variant 2
0..+32767
Variant 3
• There is no single Unit suitable for all models of analog input module.
Check the scaling provided by the model being used and use the system variables accordingly.
ANALOG INPUT EXP
Name sysEAI0
Type
DINT
Unit
4000H * 2^16 = 10V 1600 sysEAI1 sysExtIOAnaIn0 sysExtIOAnaIn1 sysExtIOAnaIn2 sysExtIOAnaIn3 sysExtIOAnaIn4 sysExtIOAnaIn5 sysExtIOAnaIn6 sysExtIOAnaIn7
DINT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
Description
Exp Analog input 0
Scheme: “Analog Inputs Expansion
Card”
Exp Analog input 1
Scheme: “Analog Inputs Expansion
Card”
External expansion analog input 0.
External expansion analog input 1
External expansion analog input 2
External expansion analog input 3
External expansion analog input 4
External expansion analog input 5
External expansion analog input 6
External expansion analog input 7
4000H * 2^16 = 10V
Defined by module builder
Defined by module builder
Defined by module builder
Defined by module builder
Defined by module builder
Defined by module builder
Defined by module builder
Defined by module builder
1650
5410
5412
5414
5416
5418
5420
5422
5424
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
• The following table shows the internal and variable system parameters for External digital output exp.
DIGITAL OUTPUT EXP
Name Type Description sysEDOBitWord DWORD Read only exp digital output word
Scheme: “Digital Outputs” sysExtIODigOut0 DWORD External expansion digital output 0
This parameter displays the state of the external outputs from 0 to 31.
The state of digital outputs 0...7 from the MDPLC is not actually available, as it is overwritten by the drive according to the setting of the analog output.
sysExtIODigOut1 DWORD External expansion digital output 1
This parameter displays the state of the external outputs from 32 to 63.
Unit
Null
Null
Null
1400
5454
5456 RW
R/W
R
RW
• The following table shows the internal and variable system parameters for External analog output exp.
Analog output modules can have a resolution of 12 to 16 bits and scaling may vary from manufacturer to manufacturer.
ADV200 • Appendix
277
278
E.g.:
12-bit module
Signal connected
Module configuration
-10V..+10V
0V..+10V
4..20mA
Variant 1
-2048..+2047
0..+4095
0..+32767
Variant 2
-32768..+32767
0..+2047
+6553..+32767
Variant 3
-16384..+16383
0..+16383
+3276..+16383
Variant 4
0..+32767
16-bit module
Signal connected
Module configuration
Variant 1 Variant 2 Variant 3
-10V..+10V
0V..+10V
-32768..+32767
0..+65535 0..+32767
4..20mA
• There is no single unit that is suitable for all models of analog output module.
Check the scaling provided by the model being used and use the system variables accordingly.
ANALOG OUTPUT EXP
Name sysEAO0Value
Type
DINT sysEAO1Value DINT sysExtIOAnaOut0 INT sysExtIOAnaOut1 sysExtIOAnaOut2 sysExtIOAnaOut3 sysExtIOAnaOut4 sysExtIOAnaOut5 sysExtIOAnaOut6 sysExtIOAnaOut7
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
Description
Exp Analog Output 0 Value
Scheme: “Analog Outputs”
Exp Analog Output 1 Value
Scheme: “Analog Outputs”
External expansion analog output 0.
This variable is not actually available from the MDPLC.
The value written by the MDPLC is overwritten by the drive according to the setting of the analog output.
External expansion analog output 1
This variable is not actually available from the MDPLC.
The value written by the MDPLC is overwritten by the drive according to the setting of the analog output.
External expansion analog output 2
External expansion analog output 3
External expansion analog output 4
External expansion analog output 5
External expansion analog output 6
External expansion analog output 7
Unit
4000H * 2^16 = 10V
4000H * 2^16 = 10V
Defined by module builder
Defined by module builder
Defined by module builder
Defined by module builder
Defined by module builder
Defined by module builder
Defined by module builder
Defined by module builder
1866
1868
5460
5462
5464
5466
5468
5470
5472
5474
R/W
R
R
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
• The state of the communication with the external module can be read directly by the application using the following variable:
DIGITAL OUTPUT EXP
Name sysExtIOstate
Type
BOOL
Description
External expansion state
Unit
Null 5484
R/W
R
The value is identical to that of parameter 5484 ExtIO State , however, the variable is updated immediately in the task.
TRUE when the communication with the module is active. This indicates that the state is Operational and all slave TPDO data have been received correctly at least once.
ADV200 • Appendix
If not all TPDO data are received in a communication cycle the variable moves to FALSE and alarm “ Opt ExtIO ” [27] is generated.
ADV200 • Appendix
279
280
APP. 1.2 - CANopen protocol support
The drive controls an external I/O module via CANopen, with some master functions, limited to the possibility of managing a single device.
The single slave that is connected must be equipped with CANopen DS301 according to “DS401 Device profile for generic I/O modules Version 3.0.0 3 June 2008” and must be set separately from the drive to operate with a baudrate of 500 kbps, with address 1.
The drive has access to the following objects in the Object Directory of the salve:
. Index
0x1000
0x100c
0x100d
0x1016
0x1017
0x1018
0x1400/1/2/3
0x1600/1/2/3
0x1800/1/2/3
0x1A00/1/2/3
1-n
0
1
2
3
0
0
1
2
0
0
0
1
2
0
0
0
1
Sub. Name
0 Device type
Guard time (as an alternative to 0x1016 and 0x1017)
Lifetime factor
Consumer HB Object
Cons.HB n+T
Producer HB time
Identity Object
Vendor Id
Product Code
RPDOs Communication Parameters
COB-ID
Transmission type = 1
RPDOs Mapping
Object mapped
RPDOs Communication Parameters
COB-ID
Transmission type = 1
Inhibit time
TPDOs Mapping
1-n Object mapped
The slave must preferably support the Heartbeat protocol, or at least NodeGuarding.
If objects 1016 and 1017 are writeable, HeartBeat is used and the 100C and 100D objects are reset, otherwise they are set to 200 and 3, respectively, and the NodeGuarding protocol is active.
The drive interprets the Emergency command as a possible error and so generates an alarm, which is managed in all 3 phases.
The slave must support the NMT protocol for transition to Pre-Operational and Operational.
ADV200 • Appendix
APP. 1.3 - SDO Configuration Table
The objects requested via SDO in the Config phase are listed in the table below. An error or lack of response generates an alarm with the subcode shown.
9
10
11
7
8
12
13
14
15
SubCode
1
2
3
4
5
6
16
17
18
19
20
0x1402
0x1403
0x1800
0x1801
0x1802
0x1803
0x1600
0x1601
0x1602
Index
0x1000
0x1018
0x1018
0x1018
0x1400
0x1401
0x1603
0x1A00
0x1A01
0x1A02
0x1A03
SubIndex
0
0
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0..8 Mapping
0..8 Mapping
0..8 Mapping
0..8 Mapping
0..8 Mapping
0..8 Mapping
0..8 Mapping
0..8 Mapping
Notes
Device Type . Must be 401
Vendor ID
Product Code
RPDO1
RPDO2
RPDO3
RPDO4
TPDO1
TPDO2
TPDO3
TPDO4
RPDO1 mapping info
RPDO2 mapping info
RPDO3 mapping info
RPDO4 mapping info
TPDO1mapping info
TPDO1mapping info
TPDO1mapping info
TPDO1mapping info
These objects are written via SDO in the Config phase
0x1402
0x1403
0x1403
0x1800
0x1800
0x1800
0x1801
0x1801
0x1801
0x1802
0x1802
0x1802
0x1803
0x1803
Index
0x1016
0x1017
0x100C
0x100D
0x1400
0x1401
0x1402
0x1403
0x1800
0x1801
0x1802
0x1803
0x1400
0x1400
0x1401
0x1401
0x1402
46
47
48
49
50
51
42
43
44
45
38
39
40
41
SubCode
21
22
23
24
29
30
31
32
25
26
27
28
33
34
35
36
37
1
2
3
1
2
3
3
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
SubIndex
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
Notes
HeartBeat consumer rate and Id
HeartBeat producer rate
GuardTime (100 ms or 0 if HeartBeat is supported)
LifeTime period (3 or 0 if HeartBeat is supported)
RPDO1 default
RPDO2 default
RPDO3 default
RPDO4default
TPDO1 default
TPDO3 default
TPDO3 default
TPDO4 default
RPDO1 transmission type
RPDO1 enable
RPDO3 transmission type
RPDO2 enable
RPDO3 transmission type
RPDO3 enable
RPDO3 transmission type
RPDO4 enable
TPDO1 transmission type
TPDO1 inhibit time
TPDO1 enable
TPDO2 transmission type
TPDO2 inhibit time
TPDO2 enable
TPDO3 transmission type
TPDO3 inhibit time
TPDO3 enable
TPDO4 transmission type
TPDO4 inhibit time
ADV200 • Appendix
281
SubCode
52
Index
0x1803
SubIndex
1
Notes
TPDO4 enable
During the control phase, the system sends a HeartBeat message to the slave every 100 ms and checks the
Op state via HeartBeat producer message sent by the device, which must arrive within the time set in object
1017. If an error occurs it returns to Init .
If HeartBeat is not available and NodeGuarding is active instead, the timeout values set in objects 100C and
100D are used.
Among the objects requested during the configuration phase are those which contain the mapping, the meaning of the data in the PDOs. The objects the slave may have mapped in the PDOs are a subset of those defined by the DS401 profile. In particular, the list indicates objects recognised by the drive:
• 6000h Read Input 8 bit
• 6100h ReadInput 16 bit
• 6120h ReadInput 32 bit
• 6200h Write Output 8 bit
• 6300h WriteOutput 16 bit
• 6320h WriteOutput 32 bit
• 6400h ReadAnalog 8 bit
• 6401h ReadAnalog 16 bit
• 6411h WriteAnalog 16 bit
The configuration does not fail if other objects are detected, however the object in the PDO is not managed when received and is written as 0 for transmission.
The objects are associated with the analog and digital input and output parameters in the order they are detected.
For example, if the slave is configured as follows
1600
1
2
6200h
6200h
1601
1
2
6300h
6300h
The data sent via RPDO will be associated in this order
Byte 0
|
V
Byte 0
6200h
Byte1
|
V
Byte1
6200h
Byte2
Byte2
--
Byte3
Byte3
--
Digital out 0Ext mon
PDO1
282
Byte 0
|
|
V
Byte 0
6200h
Byte1
|
|
V
Byte1
6200h
Digital out 0Ext mon
Byte 0
|
V
Byte2
--
Byte1
|
V
Byte3
--
Digital out 1Ext mon
PDO1
Following the transition to Op, the drive software reads and writes the PDOs (RPDO) and moves the data to the I/O control blocks and periodically sends the Sync message.
Since there are only 2 devices in the network and data exchange is predefined, synchronous PDOs are always used to have repeatability in communication.
Data are exchanged in communciation cycles, the duration of which is predefined with parameter 5488 “External IO period” (available in the service menu and via the .sco configuration file). The default communication cycle value is 8 ms.
ADV200 • Appendix
Each communication cycle the block accesses the CAN peripheral device to check the PDOs sent by the slave
(TPDOs) and copy these, and then writes the RPDOs to be sent.
Sync Sync Sync
Read/Write Read/Write
RPDO TPDO RPDO TPDO
Read/Write
RPDO TPDO
1ms(Task1)
Each communication cycle sends a Sync message, to which the slave must immediately reply with its PDOs. If the slave does not send the PDOs this is interpreted as a loss of communication owing to the generation of an
“ExtIO fault” alarm and switching of parameter 5484 “External IO state” from Off to On. The loss of communication is detected after a maximum time equal to twice the communication cycle from the last time value data were received.
ADV200 • Appendix
283
284
APP. 1.4 - System variables for MDPLC
System variables in the MDPLC environment for FastLink.
FASTLINK
Name sysFL_Fw1_mon sysFL_Fw2_mon sysFL_Fw3_mon sysFL_Fw4_mon sysFL_Fw5_mon sysFL_Fw6_mon sysFL_Fw7_mon sysFL_Fw8_mon sysFL_Fw1_inv_mon sysFL_Fw2_ inv_mon sysFL_Fw3_ inv_mon sysFL_Fw4_ inv_mon sysFL_Fw5_ inv_mon sysFL_Fw6_ inv_mon sysFL_Fw7_ inv_mon sysFL_Fw8_ inv_mon sysFL_Fw5 sysFL_Fw6 sysFL_Fw7 sysFL_Fw8
Type Description
DWORD FastLink Forward 1 monitor
Scheme: “Control_FastLink_04”
DWORD FastLink Forward 2 monitor
Scheme: “Control_FastLink_04”
DWORD FastLink Forward 3 monitor
Scheme: “Control_FastLink_04”
DWORD FastLink Forward 4 monitor
Scheme: “Control_FastLink_04
DWORD FastLink Forward 5 monitor
Scheme: “Control_FastLink_04”
DWORD FastLink Forward 6 monitor
Scheme: “Control_FastLink_04”
DWORD FastLink Forward 7 monitor
Scheme: “Control_FastLink_04”
DWORD FastLink Forward 8 monitor
Scheme: “Control_FastLink_04”
DWORD FastLink Forward 1 monitor inverted
Scheme: “Control_FastLink_04”
DWORD FastLink Forward 2 monitor inverted
Scheme: “Control_FastLink_04”
DWORD FastLink Forward 3 monitor inverted
Scheme: “Control_FastLink_04”
DWORD FastLink Forward 4 monitor inverted
Scheme: “Control_FastLink_04”
DWORD FastLink Forward 5 monitor inverted
Scheme: “Control_FastLink_04”
DWORD FastLink Forward 6 monitor inverted
Scheme: “Control_FastLink_04”
DWORD FastLink Forward 7 monitor inverted
Scheme: “Control_FastLink_04”
DWORD FastLink Forward 8 monitor inverted
Scheme: “Control_FastLink_04”
FastLink Forward 5
Scheme: “Control_FastLink_04”
FastLink Forward 6
Scheme: “Control_FastLink_04”
FastLink Forward 7
Scheme: “Control_FastLink_04”
FastLink Forward 8
Scheme: “Control_FastLink_04”
SYSTEM
Name sysSyncSlaveStatus
Type Description
DWORD Stato della sincronizzazione dei Pwm
Scheme: “Control_FastLink_04
Null
Null
Null
Null
Unit
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Unit
Null 5720
R
R
R
R
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
RW
RW
RW
RW
R
R
R
R
R/W
R
5756
5758
5760
5762
PAR
5750
5752
5754
5764
5800
5802
5804
5806
5578
5580
5582
5584
5808
5810
5812
5814
ADV200 • Appendix
GEFRAN BENELUX N.V.
ENA 23 Zone 3, nr. 3910
Lammerdries-Zuid 14A
B-2250 OLEN
Ph. +32 (0) 14248181
Fax +32 (0) 14248180 [email protected]
GEFRAN DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Philipp-Reis-Straße 9a
D-63500 Seligenstadt
Ph. +49 (0) 61828090
Fax +49 (0) 6182809222 [email protected]
SIEI AREG - GERMANY
Gottlieb-Daimler Strasse 17/3
D-74385 - Pleidelsheim
Ph. +49 (0) 7144 897360
Fax +49 (0) 7144 8973697 [email protected]
GEFRAN SUISSE SA
Sandackerstrasse, 30
9245 Oberbüren
Ph. +41 71 9554020
Fax +41 71 9554024 [email protected]
SENSORMATE AG
Steigweg 8,
CH-8355 Aadorf, Switzerland
Ph. +41(0)52-2421818
Fax +41(0)52-3661884 http://www.sensormate.ch
GEFRAN FRANCE SA
4, rue Jean Desparmet - BP 8237
69355 LYON Cedex 08
Ph. +33 (0) 478770300
Fax +33 (0) 478770320 [email protected]
GEFRAN UK Ltd
Capital House, Hadley Park East
Telford
TF1 6QJ
Tel +44 (0) 8452 604555
Fax +44 (0) 8452 604556 [email protected]
GEFRAN ESPAÑA
Calle Vic, números 109-111
08160 - MONTMELÓ
(BARCELONA)
Ph. +34 934982643
Fax +34 935721571 [email protected]
GEFRAN MIDDLE EAST ELEKTRIK VE
ELEKTRONIK San. ve Tic. Ltd. Sti
Yesilkoy Mah. Ataturk
Cad. No: 12/1 B1 Blok K:12
D: 389 Bakirkoy /Istanbul TURKIYE
Ph. +90212 465 91 21
Fax +90212 465 91 22
GEFRAN SOUTH AFRICA Pty Ltd.
Unit 10 North Precinet
West Building
Topaz Boulevard Montague Park,
7411, Cape Town
Ph. +27 21 5525985
Fax +27 21 5525912
GEFRAN SIEI
Drives Technology Co., Ltd
No. 1285, Beihe Road, Jiading
District, Shanghai, China 201807
Ph. +86 21 69169898
Fax +86 21 69169333 [email protected]
GEFRAN SIEI
Electric Pte. Ltd.
No. 1285, Beihe Road, Jiading
District, Shanghai, China 201807
Ph. +86 21 69169898
Fax +86 21 69169333 [email protected]
GEFRAN SIEI - ASIA
Blk.30 Loyang Way
03-19 Loyang Industrial Estate
508769 Singapore
Ph. +65 6 8418300
Fax +65 6 7428300 [email protected]
GEFRAN INDIA
Survey No: 182/1 KH, Bhukum, Paud road,
Taluka – Mulshi,
Pune - 411 042. MH, INDIA
Phone No.:+91-20-39394400
Fax No.: +91-20-39394401 [email protected]
GEFRAN TAIWAN
No.141, Wenzhi Rd., Zhongli City,
Taoyuan County 32054,
Taiwan (R.O.C.)
Ph. +886-3-4273697 [email protected]
GEFRAN Inc.
8 Lowell Avenue
WINCHESTER - MA 01890
Toll Free 1-888-888-4474
Fax +1 (781) 7291468 [email protected]
GEFRAN BRASIL
ELETROELETRÔNICA
Avenida Dr. Altino Arantes,
377 Vila Clementino
04042-032 SÂO PAULO - SP
Ph. +55 (0) 1155851133
Fax +55 (0) 1132974012 [email protected]
GEFRAN S.p.A.
Via Sebina 74
25050 Provaglio d’Iseo (BS) ITALY
Ph. +39 030 98881
Fax +39 030 9839063 [email protected]
www.gefran.com
Drive & Motion Control Unit
Via Carducci 24
21040 Gerenzano [VA] ITALY
Ph. +39 02 967601
Fax +39 02 9682653 [email protected]
Technical Assistance : [email protected]
Customer Service : [email protected]
Ph. +39 02 96760500
Fax +39 02 96760278
Скачать
Общедоступная ссылка обновлена
Общедоступная ссылка на ваш чат была обновлена. Вы можете просматривать и управлять своими ссылками на чат после регистрации здесь.
Общедоступная ссылка на документ
Реклама